* d . . 2 a .
Pg Fe
« ) + @ee sh * Ps o« “«
ete a ae es) ie a
. r Ae ois Pyne "e x > - ~ az Pe es 7 ’ : '
%. at tt dk ar ee ES
; Be, , au ere a ee pe ‘ yo
4 : ¢ tT sat et Pe ee ee vs,
LIBRARY
OF THE .
ThHelogigale seminar ya
PRINCETON, N. J.
aio
t
“e : ‘Bh ate 4 i, Shee oat 7s
ye sg es ak Sie. etree
‘2 ’ we on a) » PSA
"ih
— ee ee
A
GRAMMAR
OF THE
HEBREW LANGUAGE,
COMPRISED IN A
‘e
SERIES OF LECTURES;
COMPILED FROM THE BEST AUTHORITIES,
AND
AUGMENTED WITH MUCH ORIGINAL MATTER,
DRAWN PRINCIPALLY
From Oriental Sources:
DESIGNED
FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS IN THE UNIVERSITIES.
DEDICATED, BY PERMISSION,
TO THE
RIGHT REV. THE LORD BISHOP OF LINCOLN,
REGIUS PROFESSOR OF DIVINITY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE,
BY THE REV. S. LEE, A.M.
D.D. OF THE UNIVERSITY OF HALLE, HONORARY MEMBER OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF PARIS,
HONORARY ASSOCIATE AND F.R.S. Le AND M.R.A.S. &C.
AND PROFESSOR OF ARABIC IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE,
\
LONDON: ‘ dl
PRINTED FOR JAMES DUNCAN, 37, PATERNOSTER ROW;
T. STEVENSON, CAMBRIDGE; J. PARKER, OXFORD; BELL & BRADFUTE,
EDINBURGH; AND M. OGLE, GLASGOW,
1827.
%
-
Macintosh, Printer,
20, Great New Street, London,
TO THE
RIGHT REV. JOHN, LORD BISHOP OF LINCOLN,
REGIUS PROFESSOR OF DIVINITY
IN THE
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE,
THIS ENDEAVOUR
TO INVESTIGATE THE PRINCIPLES
OF THE
HEBREW LANGUAGE,
IS MOST RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED,
BY HIS LORDSHIP’S
MOST OBEDIENT, OBLIGED,
HUMBLE SERVANT,
THE AUTHOR.
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2021 with funding from
Princeton Theological Seminary Library
https://archive.org/details/grammarofhebrewl0Olees
PREFACE.
IT will very naturally be expected, that, upon pre-
senting another Grammar of the Hebrew Language to
the Public, some reasons should be assigned for so doing;
especially when so many have already made their appear-
ance. This expectation I shall now endeavour to satisfy
by stating, in what respects this Work differs from
others: —which is perhaps the best reason that can be
offered for its publication.
In the first place, then, as the Hebrew Language is
seldom taught in schools, and is, perhaps, still less fre-
quently studied to any extent till the Learner is arrived
at the age of maturity, it has occurred to me, that those
Grammars which exhibit nothing more than a synthetical
detail of the rules common to this language, however well
executed, are not calculated either to interest or inform
that class of readers for which they are chiefly designed.
It has been my object, therefore, to join the analytical
with the synthetical method of treating this question:
endeavouring at once to lay down the rules necessary to
be taught, and to ascertain the principles upon which
they are founded. How far I have succeeded, it will be
for others to judge. ‘That I have been right in the prin-
ciple, I think all must allow who consider, how much
more readily rules are comprehended, and how much
vi PREFACE.
longer they are retained in the memory when rightly
understood. Many proofs of human infirmity will, no
doubt, appear in the manner in which this principle has
been applied; and, on this score, | must crave the
Reader’s indulgence. I think I may venture to affirm,
however, that I have, in some respects, advanced the sub-
jects here discussed ; and if so, like my predecessors, who
have probably done much more, J must be content in my
turn to give place to future adventurers in the same
career who shall be still more fortunate.
But, to be more particular as to what has been done in
the Work before us, it is necessary now to state, what the
views taken in these Lectures are, and upon what prin-
ciples they are grounded.
The Rabbinical system of vowels and accents, then, has
been adopted, as that which is the most likely to promote
a sound and accurate knowledge of the Hebrew Scrip-
tures: not, indeed, with a view of ascribing to it any
thing like a Divine origin or authority; but, because it
seems certain, that, among the various human systems
hitherto proposed for the purpose of assisting the
Learner, this is incomparably the best. Every one
knows, that since the times of Elias Levita, various
have been the efforts to abridge the labour of acquir-
ing the Hebrew Language. Some have reduced the
Grammar to one sheet or page, and the Lexicon to but
little more, persuading their readers, that, as the Hebrew
is the most ancient, so is it the most simple, of all lan-
guages ; and, that men cannot look with too much sus-
picion on those attempts to make it complex and difficult,
which were first set up by the Rabbins, and afterwards
adopted by their equally blind advocates the Gramma-
PREFACE. Vil
rians who have followed them. But, if we allow that
this Language is the most ancient and simple, still the
question will remain, as to what this abbreviating and
plausible system has hitherto done. Has it, it may be
asked, supplied us with principles on which we can
rely: or, by diffusing an overpowermg light over the
Sacred Text, been sufficient to bear down all opposition, or
even to satisfy one candid enquirer, that he is a jot wiser on
these subjects than his pious forefathers were? In most in-
stances, I think, it must be granted, that our light has gra-
dually become less—that the scope of the context has ap-
peared less obvious, while the liability to mistake has been
increased in an amazing degree. In others, the discovery
and exhibition of amusing and splendid theories, has per-
haps tended more to bring both religion and philosophy
into disrepute, than any thing else could possibly do.
Hence it probably is, that the study of the original
Scriptures has, for the last century or more, been daily on
the wane in this country; and, that our knowledge of
Divinity has not made that progress, which might other-
wise have been reasonably expected it would. Intelligent
and prudent men, perplexed and disgusted, perhaps, with
the unmeaning disputes of the partizans of the several
systems, have deemed it safer to adhere to that, upon
which they could reasonably and conscientiously rely,
than to embarrass themselves with theories, which pro-
mised every thing in words, while in matter of fact, ney
had really nothing to give. . Hid.
But, on the other hand, although the Rabbinical system
is infinitely superior to those proposed by Masclef, Hutch-
inson, and others; yet, it must be confessed, that this also
has its defects : not to insist upon the consideration, that
vill PREFACE.
it appears to be advanced but little farther than a state of
infancy. The Michlol of David Kimchi, which is by far
the most elaborate work hitherto produced by the Rab-
bins, is little more than a statement of what is found to
take place in the etymology of the Hebrew Language.
Of Principles nothing is said: and, on the Syntax, neither
rule nor principle is so much as mentioned. On the laws
which regulate the use of the tenses of the verb, nothing
is any where to be found, either in his, or other Rabbinical,
Grammars. If we turn to the Thesaurus Grammaticus of
the elder Buxtorf, we shall find a Syntax supplied, pre-
senting a very valuable collection of curious and interest-
ing facts: but, even in this, we must not ask for reasons.
The venerable Grammarian has laid down his rules with
the hand of a master ; but, when we find a great number
of instances put under the head of “ enallage,” and refer-
able to no rule, we cannot but suspect that there is a lack of
knowledge somewhere ; and may, perhaps, be led to sus-
pect, that our views have in no case been rightly directed.
In some respects, indeed, I think the Grammar of
Buxtorf is inferior to that of Kimchi. The Jewish
Grammarian has given us a good classification of the
different forms of the nouns; and has spoken more intel-
ligibly than Buxtorf has on the system of syllabication.
The consequence is, the Learner is left by Buxtorf to
make out for himself two of the most difficult questions
in the Hebrew Grammar, viz. the law which regulates
the changes of the vowels, and that to which the different
forms of nouns are subject. ;
Hence, the great desideratum appeared to be, the con-
struction of Grammars which should at once combine the
labours of the Rabbins, with a system of analysis deli-
PREFACE. 1X
neating the principles upon which the Language is
founded, in such a manner as to inform the judgment,
and to interest the understanding—to detail the rules,
indeed, but, at the same time, to ascertain the principles
upon which they are founded, so as to satisfy the scru-
ples, and to ensure the confidence, of the Learner.
Towards arriving at this point, Alting* seems to be the
first who did any thing considerable. After him Albert
Schultens,+ Schroeder,t and Storr,$ have perhaps been
the most successful writers. Dr. Gesenius, the present
Professor of Hebrew at Halle, certainly ranks next;
though it may be doubted, whether his elaborate work,
entitled, ‘“‘ Ausfurliches grammatisch-Kritisches Lehrge-
batide der Hebraischen Sprache,” &c.|| is not much more
valuable for the facts which it presents, than for a sci-
entific investigation of the principles of the Hebrew
Language; in other words, whether he has not bestowed.
less pains than some of his predecessors on the analytical
part of the Grammar; while, with the Rabbins, he has
laboured more intensely in amplifying and adorning the
synthetical one. ‘
Dr. Gesenius is closely followed by Professor Stewart,
of Andover in America, in the very excellent Hebrew
* In a work which has often appeared under the title “ Jacobi Altingi funda-
menta punctationis Lingue Sancte, &c.
+ Institutiones ad Fundamenta Lingue Hebree.
t Institutiones ad Fundamenta Lingue Hebree, which has often been
reprinted.
§ “ D. Gottlob Christiani Storr Observationes ad analogiam et Syntaxin
Hebraicam pertinentes.” Tubinge, 1805.
|| Leipsig, 1817. Upon all of these, and some cthers, I have drawn largely
in the work before us. 7
{ Printed at Andover, for the second time, in 1823.
x PREFACE.
Grammar which he has published, but which is much
shorter than that of the learned German Professor.
In the work before us, it has been my endeavour, rather
to investigate the principles, than to give rules relating
to the etymology and Syntax of this language. It has
forcibly struck me, that what is most wanted by the
Learner is, to be enabled to see upon what principles the
Language is generally constructed: how, for example,
the syllables are formed—words are derived, augmented,
or combined ; and how this affects the general force of
sentences, when formed for the several purposes of speech:
and further, by what notions, the people using this lan-
guage, have been governed in communicating their ideas
to each other. ‘The rules given, I have deemed sufficient
for the objects I had before me: believing, that very few
examples can occur not referable to one or other of
them. I may be excused, perhaps, for having paid so
little regard to the system of Grammar adopted by the
Greeks and Latins, the cases, &c. of which have been so
frequently appealed to by other Grammarians. My rea-
sons have been these: Those languages differ most widely
in their character and idioms from this; and _ hence
it has come to pass, that our Grammarians have occa-
sionally had recourse to rules, which, in cases innume-
rable, they have been compelled to abandon; and then
to have recourse to what has been termed the “ enal-
lage generis, temporis, personarum,” &c. My object has
chiefly been, to elicit from the obvious etymology of the
Language itself, and the modes of thinking adopted by
those Oriental nations which now speak dialects of the
same Language, the principles and practices found to
prevail in the Hebrew.
PREFACE, xl
But to be still more particular. With respect to the
composition of syllables found to prevail in the pointed sys-
tem, I have ventured to propose rules, which the Rabbins
recognize, and, with which every one becomes insensibly
acquainted before he is moderately skilled in the Hebrew
Language: although, I think, no Grammarian has hitherto
distinctly stated them. Dr. Gesenius, indeed, and Mr.
Stewart, have given us rules on the subject of pure and
ampure syllables: but, these rules, to be properly under-
stood, involve so much of the etymology of the Language,
that they can be but of little use to the Learner, while
they are extremely perplexing to the more advanced Stu-
dent. The system here proposed reduces the syllables
all to one standard, and to one apparent measure: and
which, it is remarkable enough, is never violated through-
out the whole process of the etymology ; a circumstance
which simplifies, in a very great degree, the laws by which
the variations of the vowels are regulated. What in-
fluence the accents formerly had in giving length to the
syllables in which they are found, it is impossible to
say: but, as far as I can see, they need not now be con-
sidered as exercising any such influence. It is true, they
interfere occasionally with the vowels, in a manner not
easy to be accounted for; but, generally, when considered
either in their Tonic, Euphonic, Distinctive, or Con-
nective characters, we can ascertain their force and use,
as far, perhaps, as the nature of their authority would
suggest as necessary.
My next endeavour has been, to investigate and lay
down those laws, whereby certain consonants are gene-
rally rejected in the process of the etymology, as well as
those, by which the vowels are likewise changed or con-
tracted during the same process. In this, I think, I
xD PREDACE.
have been successful in some degree, so that the Student
is now enabled to reduce all the defective and quiescent
verbs, as they have been termed, to the paradigm of the
simple triliteral one of the measure TP; and also to ac-
count for the defective forms of nouns, at which he could
formerly arrive only by conjecture. In the next place, I
deemed it a more natural and intelligible process, first to
consider the various forms of the nouns, and thence to de-
rive the leading words for the several species of the con-
jugation of the verb, than to begin with the verbs, and
thence to derive the nouns, as it has usually been done.
My reasons were these: it appeared to me to be taking
too much for granted, to talk of the conjugations of
verbs, without endeavouring to ascertain what these con-
jugations were. Besides, allowing this to be the true
method, still numerous forms of nouns remained unac-
counted for: a circumstance which has induced some of
the Grammarians to multiply the conjugations almost in-
definitely. But, after all, what is a verb in the state of
conjugation? According to the best Grammarians it is,
in Hebrew, evidently a compound—a word of some sort
combined with a pronoun, intended apparently to give it
the distinction of person, &c. without which it could not
be termed a verb. And, if this be the case, it must,
before such composition take place, be a noun of one kind
or other: and, the fact is, such nouns are, for the most
part, found in the Language. On this view of the ques-
tion, it occurred to me, that all the leading words taken
in the different species of the conjugation, could be
nothing more than nouns of one form or other; and, con-
sequently, that before we entered on the consideration of
the verbs, we ought to investigate the character of their
component parts. I accordingly commenced with the
nouns, beginning with the most simple, and ending with
PREFACE. xii
the highest compounded forms; shewing, as I went on,
and as far as it seemed necessary, what vowels should be
considered as mutable or immutable ; and hence, how the
several forms might vary by being put in the plural
number, the state of construction, or, when receiving the
affixed pronouns, &c. &c. offering at the same time some
conjectural etymologies, in order to account for the form
and variation of meaning, which such words are generally
allowed to bear. How I may please my etymological
readers in this last article, it is impossible for me to say;
nor am I very anxious on the subject. On a question so
delicate as this is, opinions will necessarily vary. I can
only say, my principal object has been, to impress these
forms, with their peculiar shades of meaning, on the mind
of the Learner: if any one can offer a better solution of
them than I have given, he will deserve the thanks of the
Public: and, he may rest assured, he shall have mine.
That the augmented nouns are compound forms, how-
ever, I shall be disposed to maintain, until it be shewn,
what indeed has often been erroneously taken for granted,
that this Language acknowledges no compound forms.
Another reason, why | have been disposed to take this
view of the question before us is, that it enables us at
once to account for the apparently indefinite number of
conjugations laid down by Schultens and Schroeder, by
supposing, that it has occasionally been found necessary to
take a compound noun in conjunction with a pronoun, in
order to enounce some action or event in the form of a
verb, which no other word would satisfactorily do. And
another, the fact, that there occurs but a very few un-
usual forms of verbs, not to be found also existing in the
form of the noun thus taken for their leading word or
theme. Again, the variations of the vowels, in what are
x1V PREFACE.
termed verbs, are universally subject to the same laws
with those which take place in the nouns, and for the
same reasons. Hence, I have been induced to believe,
that words assume the functions of verbs only, when com-
bined with one or other of the pronouns; and, that this
distinction seems to have been made for the purpose of
pointing out the several persons necessary for the purposes
of speech. As to the Infinitives and Participles, as they
have been called (and I have not thought it absolutely
necessary to abandon these terms), they are, according to
my view, nothing more than abstract or concrete nouns,
respectively, involving neither tense nor person, but to be
qualified, in these respects, by the context in which they
are found.
In connection with this subject, perhaps, I may notice
what is offered in this Work, on the use of the tenses of
the verb. It occurred to me, that, if the form usually
taken for the leading word of the preterite tense of verbs,
is really a concrete noun, while that which forms the pre-
sent, or, as it has hitherto been termed, the future, is an
abstract, some reason perhaps might be discovered, why
these forms have been selected: and if so, we may also
discover the laws, by which this usage was originally re-
gulated. The consequence has been, the results arrived
at and laid down in the Syntax on this subject; to
which, I must confess, I have the vanity to ascribe some
importance, especially, as I find the Arabian and. other
Oriental Grammarians, fully agreeing in the principle,
and reasoning precisely in the same manner on the prac-
tice found to prevail in the sister dialects. What influ-
ence this may have on the signification of some passages
in the Scriptures which have hitherto seemed obscure,
particularly im the declarations of prophecy, it is no difficult
PREFACE. XV
matter to imagine. And, here, I cannot help saying, that
since I first arrived at these results, I have not only been
most diligent in endeavouring to discover, whether any
passages could be found, not admitting of an easy and
natural solution by their application, which I have not
yet done; but also, that I have seen a consistency and
harmony in the whole to which I was before a stranger ;
and consequently, a clearness and vigour, particularly in
the poetical and prophetical Books, of which I had before
no conception.*
The work of Koolhaas on this subject, it has not been
in my power to procure; but, from what I have seen
recorded of it by Dathe,} as also from his Dissertationes
Philologico-exegetice, &c. Amsterdam, 1751, which I pos-
sess, I have reason to believe, that in some things he was
nearly right; in others, not so. The work of Mr. Gellf
I have read with care ; and must say, that, while it evinces
considerable acuteness and research, it does not appear to
me to have advanced the subject beyond the theorem of
Schroeder (Synt. R. 49.), on which it really proceeds ; and,
not only to have left a great number of cases unaccounted
for, but also to have accounted for others too metaphysically
to make it probable, that any such principles could ever
have regulated the language of real life. The Tracts
published at York in 1809 and 1810 on the same subject, I
have also examined: but these, according to my notions, ex-
hibit a greater degree of failure than the work of Mr. Gell.
* Of this, it is my intention, as soon as possible, to offer some proofs in a
new translation of the whole, or a considerable part of the Psalms, with
notes, &c.
+ Philologia Sacra Glassii, Ed. Dathe, p. 296, &c.
{ Observations on the idiom of the Hebrew Language, Lond. 1821.
xvl PREFACE.
In the Syntax, I have endeavoured to ascertain the
nature of the several cases, and, to confirm my views,
by the usage of the Arabian Grammarians. In the Latin
and Greek, and indeed in our own, Grammars, we have
been accustomed to consider almost every thing with re-
ference to the technical forms, genders, &c. of words,
without paying much attention to their signification or
logical character. The rhetoric, too, is generally reserved
for other treatises, and hence, its figures have been
seldom appealed to. The Oriental Grammarians, on the
contrary, have found it absolutely necessary to call in
these considerations to their aid: not, because it was
their wish merely to adorn their Grammars with a vast
display of erudition (with which they have been too
often accused), but, because they have found it impos-
sible to write satisfactorily on this subject without
them: and, because they knew and felt that their
common conversation is, in a great degree, regulated by
them. That this should be the case, can appear sur-
prising to none who will take the pains to consider, that
man must have been in primitive times (and, that he still
is In a great degree) the creature of nature, not of art :—
that he would speak as he felt, unrestrained by refine-
ments which are oftener the result of caprice than of
sound reason, and would call in the objects around him to
his assistance, personifying or otherwise modifying them,
as the nature of his subjects should require. Influenced
by these views, I have laid aside the distinctions of gram-
matical cases usually appealed to, and have treated words
as complementary, restrictive, or the like, of the significa-
tion of others with which they are to be construed : and,
as this method is equally applicable to every part of
speech, it has appeared to me to simplify the subject.
Taking this view of the subject, then, I think I can
PREFACE. XVII
affirm, that of all languages this is the most simple. The
whole etymology is regulated by the combination or
juxta-position of words or fragments of words, which
ean take place on not more than two principles: viz.
1. that of apposition; and, 2. that of definite construc-
tion. To this the whole of the Syntax 1s also reducible.
The detail, is perhaps long; but this arises purely from
the necessity of shewing the application of our principles
in every sort of case.
To the Syntax I have appended a few pages on the dis-
tinctive use of the accents. My reasons for doing this
I have there stated to be, a desire to lay before the Stu-
dent a few rules on a subject, which is not without its im-
portance and use. ‘That it is necessary to cultivate the
doctrine relating to the accents to much extent, I have no
idea; and, therefore, I have given only just as much as
will enable the Learner to comprehend the bearing of the.
accents, as generally spoken of m the Commentaries.
As I have occasionally cited the Arabic Grammarians,
the question might be asked, To what extent the cultiva-
tion of this Language and of its sister Dialects should be
carried, in order to enable the student to become well ac-
quainted with the Hebrew? I answer, As the Hebrew
Language has now ceased to be spoken in its purity up-
wards of two thousand years, and, as these dialects still
retain a very considerable portion of its words, and are
manifestly regulated by the same Grammatical laws, ge-
nerally speaking, he who is the best acquainted with these
dialects, is by far the most likely person to be a successful -
commentator on the Hebrew Scriptures. On the versions
of the Septuagint and Vulgate, entire reliance cannot be
b
xylll PREFACE.
placed; and the same may be said of all the Oriental ones.
‘To these versions, indeed, we are very greatly indebted
on several accounts; there are, nevertheless, so many
marks of human infirmity discoverable within them, that
it is certainly incumbent on every one who is anxious to
see the beauties and to feel the force of the Holy Scrip-
tures in all their bearings, to add to these helps, others
which Providence has placed within his power; and thus
to further the progress, and to advance the clearness, of
that light which alone can be said to shine to the per-
fect day.
In this point of view, therefore, we are greatly indebted
to the Rabbins, who were the first to go to the Language
of Ishmael for that assistance which circumstances had taken
out of their own hands, and thence to transmit it to us.
In the next place, the names of Pococke, Castell, De Dieu,
Schultens, Schroeder, and others, will ever be revered by
those who appreciate the Holy Scriptures. For, al-
though, there are a few instances of failure in the etymo-
logies, &c. of these great men; yet, they have left behind
them enough to convince every candid mind, that there
are in these dialects treasures innumerable, which have
escaped their observation.
One source they have almost entirely neglected ;
namely, the laws to which the Grammars of these several
dialects are subject: and this, it must be confessed, is one
of the first importance. ‘The notions of Grammar held
by Europeans, are far removed from those which prevail
in the East; and here, I think, has been our greatest de-
fect. In the work before us, I have endeavoured in some
degree to supply this: but, in the time I have had to do
PREFACE. - XIX
so, it is quite impossible that the subject can have been
exhausted. Here, then, as well as in the etymologies of
words, we have an ample field for future labour; and
one, perhaps, that cannot fail to produce an abundant
harvest. It could be wished, in the mean time, that Go-
vernment, or the East India Company, or both, would do
something towards obtaining accurate editions of the na-
tive Arabic Lexicons, Grammars, Commentaries on Gram-
mar, Scholia on the Poets, &c. with which our Libraries
abound. That solitary individuals can undertake such
works as these is quite impossible : and, till something of
this kind be done, we must not expect to see the Grammar
of the Hebrew Language carried far beyond a state of
infancy. ‘To expect fully to make out an Oriental book,
such as the Bible is, without the assistance of Oriental
learning, is, in my estimation, a perfect absurdity. Let
the candid Reader generally examine the laborious and
pious Commentaries now in use; and to which, it must
be confessed, we owe much that will stand the test of the
severest enquiry: yet, what must be his general conclusion?
I think it must be, that in many cases he can find no light:
in others, palpable darkness: and in many, nothing that
professes to go beyond the force and extent of ingenious
conjecture. It is true, no new doctrines are to be ex-
pected: those which are the most important, are to be
found in the very worst translation. But, then, their
clearness may have been obscured, and their force dimi-
nished. Difficulties, apparent discrepancies, and obscure
passages, may yet remain, which it could not but be ad-
vantageous to the cause of Christianity should be re-
moved. Besides, the general endeavour to translate the
Scriptures for the use of Missionaries, makes it doubly
binding, that we should endeavour to give nothing to the
world, which is not, as nearly as human industry can make
b2
XX PREFACE.
it, the unadulterated Word of God. And, for these ends,
I believe, we have sufficient helps within the compass of
our command.
It now only remains to say, in what way this Work
should be used with the greatest prospect of success to
the Learner. It has long appeared to me, that the short
Grammars with which our market abounds, have produced
the most lamentable effects among Learners. They have
professed to give in a few sheets, what those, whose fate
it has been to study them, have never been able to find
realised during their whole lives—a complete knowledge
of this venerable tongue. While, on the other hand, many
who might, in the end, have become good scholars, have
been alarmed at the sight of a large Grammar to such a
degree, as to give up every thing at once in despair.
It has been my endeavour to provide for both these
cases. And with this view, I have printed the Work
before us in two kinds of letter, a larger and a smailer.
That in the larger, has been intended to occupy the place
of a Primer, while the other in the smaller, may be
reserved until the Student shall feel the want, and
be able fully to enter into the merits, of it. For the
mere beginner, however, a still further abridgment may
be made, which I should advise to be this. Let him make
himself tolerably well acquainted with the letters and syl-
lables (passing over the accents), as taught in the two
first Lectures. Then let him proceed on to Art. 154. in
the sixth Lecture, examining the forms of nouns printed
* On this subject he may read the ‘ Disputatio” prefixed to my ‘ Sylloge
Librorum Orientalium, Cantab, 1821,
PREFACE. Xxi
in the larger letter, and copying them out, or making an
abridged list for his own use; improving at the same time
upon his teacher as far as he can; and, in short, doing any
thing to raise a question in his mind, whereby these forms,
&c. may be impressed upon his memory: but let him
learn nothing by rote. To engage his understanding in
the work, is by far the surest method; and, if he can
succeed in doing this, he may depend upon it, his progress
will be easy, delightful, and rapid. Let him come to the
subject as he would to the study of a science, and he will
find, that he will not only make a solid progress, but also
a gradual improvement in his own reasoning powers.
When he is got to the end of the nouns, concluding
with Art. 177., he had better proceed to the verbs, beginning
with the tenth Lecture. Here he may carefully read
over the preliminary observations, and then proceed to
make out tables for himself, like those in the Grammar ;
but arranged and discussed in amanner as much superior
as possible ; omitting here, as before, the parts printed in
the smaller letter. When he is got to the end of this sub-
ject, concluding with Art. 219. 10., he had better proceed
to the general paradigm at pp. 268—281, endeavouring
to account for the defects, &c. as they occur, referring
constantly to the regular triliteral verb, in the left-hand
column, as the standard. When some facility is acquired
in this, the next step is, to get a copy of “ Robertsoni
Clavis Pentateuchi, &c., and daily to read a portion of
the Hebrew Pentateuch with it, until he has acquired a
copia verborum, and can see his way a little before him.
When he has done this, he may daily read a small portion
of the Syntax, and occasionally those parts of the ety-
mology, which were at first past over, the necessity and
use of which he will now begin to see. During this pro-
XxXil PREFACE.
cess, he should be careful to trace every thing, as far as
he can, to first principles; which he’will be enabled to do,
by following the references given in the several articles
and paragraphs. In this way he should proceed, until he
is familiar with the whole of the Grammar, studying, at
the same time, some part of the Sacred text with a good
translation and commentary.* To learn the Grammar
by one continued effort, without an application to the
text of Scripture, will be tedious and unprofitable. ‘The
rules will appear difficult to retain, the reasons on which
they are founded obscure and uninteresting, and both
will, therefore, soon be forgotten. On the other hand, the
Text of Scripture, without recurring to the Grammar,
will appear equally perplexing, dark, and indefinite:
but, when both are wrought up together, the mind
will gradually rise to the subject, so that scarcely an
hour will pass, in which some new accession of know-
ledge will not be realised. In this stage, however, he
will stand in need of constant advice to sobriety — to
be jealous of the discoveries now made, and exceedingly
sparing in making public the new lights he may have
the good fortune to elicit. These, indeed, he may re-
gister for future inspection; and this would be an
excellent plan: but, let him be content to :wait for a
maturity, which, he may rest assured, however calm his
judgment or brilliant his talents may be, he will stand in
need of.
I do not know that any thing now remains to be said,
except to solicit the Reader’s indulgence, for the time
which has elapsed since this Work was announced. On
* For a list of books, see my “ Sylloge.”
PREFACE. XXIll
this head, I will only say, that when I undertook it, I
by no means truly estimated the quantity of labour which
it would cost me: and that, circumstanced as I have been,
it has never been in my power to give it my undivided
attention for any length of time. I trust, however, this
delay is in scme degree atoned for, in the quantity of
original matter with which it now appears; and which, I
cannot but hope, will tend to advance the science of
Hebrew Grammar among us, and with it, the knowledge
of the Hebrew Scriptures.
The Reader should be informed, that the Edition of
the Hebrew Bible, from which the examples in this work
have been taken, is that of London, 1822.* This is im-
portant to know, because there is occasionally a slight
variety in the text of the several editions, as also in the
divisions of chapters and verses.
* DDD OS25 IW. Biblia Hebraica secundum ultimam editionem,
&c.... ab Everardo van der Hooght, &c.—a Judah D’Allemand.
=
«
eis
LH freee
» thw: £204
Chet aptratar m
faye TAY ate MSD. isiowe, a
MEA SS, TOP AEE tb stgeni te ee vee
pp gr Ue a
Fok “et r Ba eon ot Nea
| ‘ c¥y lPbaey Py ey
a bel . Ve bed rn a
, rite adi esa kt
ody
he 4 be ; + aed & fi,
t ppt cid ee ie O90 A Pf te ohne) Bn fe 4 sesdaggd } pt fa
4 hee TRS “f ye &. ‘Ww be Pain
. -
fi “Yan! ¢ vy Boe iv P any ial, &
-
j wis : |
AY , , ‘ *
f é
-*
wiyT Sat
om
wie ad "
one ay eS | Henn meal ae
itd o: i} ath ue Simos ih et
is él ? 17", i. : “i, « tae Wit
pertiayee ¥ vf? re Shang ;
Wanted RLY tie b icps ad oe iy call
: | ee oes ie onl
i"
Bre ae
‘alga 8 . be NS fry fetes t)
- 7. oS. 2e| ' a. ‘
ee | sls 59 (Hai ¥ at
¢ Te Matin Were, 5 wy
CONTENTS.
LECTURE I.
MMAR ADEE. wre, osteo, ye, ee) 0,2, 4,0 aie teia,qecea een week .
On the Vowels........06. D oteta a: Warerete sie aS pte hie a
On the combination of the Vowels with the Consonants ....
a SAFIN, ANC ifs SUDSEILULES o:1. oc cree sce, ot oc one 916 ©, Saseie.onets ear,
On the points Dagésh and Mappik .......2+0. petiduiee me
On thesmark Haphé.. i... csc ee cee ncece ces evade a:
On the difference between Kaméts and Kaméts Khattiph ....
LECTURE II.
BOT MEMELCDLEW. A CCELICRs oie Coc ore hie sehor cue ickic ale’ o. iid Once aichele eles
/-Yakisiin Reading .. - 2). s+ << EP Pe Peet Se Rr ion ka as
LECTURE III.
On the general principles which prevail in regulating the Ety-
mology, with reference to the Consonants..........- .
On the contractions, &c. of the Vowels ......eeeeeeceees
On the changes of the Vowels ........ RASH Spe ERU biter arare
On the use of Shéva and its Substitutes.........66:. wees
Rules for the insertion of Dagésh .....+++0. Store Sone oe
LECTURE IV.
Fd ® * Vee.
On"the general use and situation of the Accents ....
Oni ther bontcuAccent vccsaae sss sce ccc se Ue a Perea RA gig
Certain Anomalies as to the situation of do. ....-s.seee0%
On the use and situation of the Euphonic do.......++.++.
eaeeea8 oe
2—11
11—17
17—19
19—22
22—23
23—24
24—25
26—31
31—35
36-—40
40—41
41—44,
4.4.— 47
47—50
ol
ib.— 538
53—59
o9
XXV1 CONTENTS.
Rules.for the insertion of dormir et Ve an ee 59—62
On the use and position of Makkaph... tees AahtAt i 62
Rules for its insertion, and: uses .°.'s 6. chet ere tetas e ere ss chee ib.—64
LECTURE V.
On the changes which take place in the terminations of words,
in forming the Feminine from the Masculine Gender... 65—69
On the changes in the inflections of Nouns ........+-+eee- 69
On forming the Dual Number..... meee nigel cate Weidieiedimn ee ib.—70
On forming the Plural Number Masculine..........-++ 70—73
On forming the Plural Number Feminine............. wee 138—T75
On taking the form Proper for the Definite state of construc-
THOM si 'o lo 4ets 0 '0%s "ote Yate Mote iene'etetale oo'ereteteterere ete tetetere.e es os 15—T77
LECTURE VI.
On the parts of speech in general, and on the Noun in par-
CCMATs silane S Minaeaciede weitunae teseucke ete sept rpen Btry oh Bie 78—80
CUTS EE TONOULG Ces eect ee oem see ee PA AAA A re ye fh) SOE
(ithe Personal G0. Separables «sere sistenetrs » sos see's eaters 81—82
ithe Personal 0, insepataulers sis. s+ ssa cates +s oe »-. 82—87
IATLOYNIALICS 85 oc ete ws .sis Be SS PI bY es coves 87—88
On the use, signification, ra forms of words generally..... 88—98
On the first species of Segolate Nouns..... A PPy: tect ereeee 98—100
On the second do. ......... Miata sete leis Wesrats y iets fates ate 100
OD ey SOLUTE CLO te sic tiossta's rie’ s ele aise hte ecko ate tale tote Nels Gene ib.— 101
CO AE SOULE Oss oy sie oe cies eke ele alee Ba, Shela Oes oes ee 101—102
PTELENG AREA LO havc te wat cis, oie! sss das oe bo eit elie aae ees Tere eterna Te 102—104
On the forms of those Primitive Nouns which are not
Memolate. 51.0% sees ay ctoe Sn Wee Seog 104—108
LECTURE VII.
On the augmented Tlebréw Notns -.’ ss. sa ae eee 109—111
On themedupliéated "dd. 2% 3. ites Caanw st re Wee ie ea eee hie
On the reduplicated do. by implication .............00. 115—116
On the augmented Nouns termed Héemanti..........00. 116—117
On do. when the Héemanti letters are prefixed ......... 117
On do. when taken as leading words in the conjugations ... 118—124
On do. when used ‘as Participles: ...........eeceeueves 124
On do. when used as leading words in the Niphhdl species
OF Conjugation *. sivas ees Oey ca eee, «+ 125—126
CONTENTS.
Examples of these several forms and classes.
XXVIL
Of the first... +++ Wie rss ceeeeeeeeeeereees gen 2.
COT tHE BeCOnidirsies eee eles bis oecaweke SiheRN bistiial. 4 128
RELL C ALIN (li cte sec susiey apa ehes stacbetch eck rexsioh ad cheke ebsiete MRM LOO.
OG the fourth sicnks eke Molec sttate iek sielsieles sin toOsd 32
CEE TATED TGR bie Beh he ERGMAN LE Bee AEA Bp iC}
(Sethe: sixthic. cores eek. 0 PEs Michele eekals elole'e 0 IWe— 134
Of the seventh........ Seleiele's ci < cca died viele LOH2—1 85.
LECTURE VIII.
On the Héemanii letters postfixed to words........ coves 186
On the eighth class of such Nouns ending in >........... ib. —139
On the ninth class of do. ending in 5..,........... veeee 139—140
On the tenth class of do. ending AI. Hs ove iOS Ot4 LO Reieie
Of otherwise reduplicated. Nouns ......escececescsces ~ 142—147
On the forms and composition of Nouns adopted as proper
MIAMECS ardcb ews Ses aeh NLA A Ce hee LP EGS I COREE 5 147—155
LECTURE IX.
On the separable particles.......... arate araitietens: cia en aerate 130-166
Per ENALAING COL. alt ols side els 4.0) ciel oie! cola 's eee LOL LOS
On the particles termed Paragogic.....+.+++ss0- Weg 164—165
On 8 Paragogic..... i Yn ARAN A AS I AAS AOC RI RR 165
SEEING Faye Wa RIED ake a ig A eT RG NN ib. — 168
"CUES Pa Varah 2h PUA G he RAS BNE BGM oak i tir ok ata ti dad 168—169
Cdr a wes cele SPs cries sieveleh of cleats these teeter oie oie ea ateharer te 169—170
AR, TERR ho ON Te te Pe cfr Beall ted oli A ERE Uh aaa Bi Behe ated nd ily ff ly i
Corte. LJeMOUstrative PTOHOUDS sh. e's s.c cs cb sic ee ees os 173
Oye CG 1S SETI TENG Ui petal pete ethell Ack alin at tpgeame talent liad oi hl ol p ey ee hag Or es
On theeInterrogative dO... eee cscs cs cesses. 175—176
On the Interrogative inseparable particle ............. 176—178
Oieehe titerrOvalve: WaltiCle |e... steve cles c's o oce set. 178—179
ROT Ce LICINTILE A TUICIG. Pha cit cc ce Shy cles le siete eiaie oe hchevs 179—183
On the numerals Cardinal and Ordinal............ See ee Leoearos
LECTURE X.
Onithe Verte ss Peete Bate tans wate alates ehone 0's siuveles ele 189—197
Paradigm of the Preterite Tense of the first species Aal,
ATSt OTM “ss “owe 's ote > Sp in oe ee el Sig, Ht
198
XXV1i1 CONTENTS.
Secondiand third do... 6. .2eek.. Sa MR ARs 199—201
Notes on the persons of do....... ors ‘eto MMS! oP she Sia ne Sead 201—205
Paradigm of the. Present Tense of the first species Kal,
Hirst fOTM 2.540 151s oa Yo 1a <0 ko ehcp te %6 ms fo fu ta toto % futate toto CUE . 205—206
Of the second and Tk a ssn’ su to +b to otodets tars tote tolety Wet alee . 207
PR ees CEL ce dasd- teas Gok tartan] oes bok: tees ete s éetatefanatetatateh abd Whines . 208—210
Of the forms of the Infinitive of Kal ......e. cee ee eeee 210—212
MDF the Imperative of. dO... soe oo oete oe ote stot stele algae se B1R——218
Dnithe Participless). ch. iv. dhol adorning eRe Se ifs aaa 214
LECTURE XI.
Paradigm of the conjugation of the second species Niphhal. 215—216
Motes on’ the Tenses, 0... cca es eee eee [OR Ut eee 216—219
Paradigm of the conjugation of the third species Pzhél.... 219—220
Paradigm of the Passive Voice......... a fave fo lelelbeatece\ ss See Oa ee a
Notes on the different Persons, &c. .......ccecececece 22142228
Paradigm of the conjugation of the fifth and sixth species,
Hiphhil and Hophhal ....... tye wie Siw 3 bc seis oaks wins th oe
Notes On doth oso eS eee nie btchees teiels cise Vohe (oie 225—228
Paradigm of the seventh species Hithpahél .......... se aD
NOES O00, ten dhe sts os elses ini Dies ts eb e cre ib, —231
On the less usual species of the conjugation of Hebrew Verbs 231—233
LECTURE XII.
OMe SDELECLIVeRV CLUS) «cle ct + site's cree she's, SOR oO. sere ee
On those commencing with J .........-.0.0. ary Seah ib. — 236
On those commencing with 8 or > ........c.se sees 236—239
On the Kal, Pihél, Puhal, and Hithpahél species of Verbs
COmmencinio’ Wwithtels.c.s721 os ae eh eee See ee 239—242
On the conjugation of Verbs having ) or ” for their medial
Tanical letters oss cate + bene tei et aes / 24.2—245
On the conjugation of such Verbs as have ‘7 for ter third
radical letter ....... Ponts Sie ees ee ooh op t0) oeOLeeae
On those which have §& for their third radical PPA it's |
LECTURE XIII.
On those Verbs which have their second and third radical
letters the same ..
CONTENTS. XX1X
On the test class of such Vetbs 'Setty evs te c's os e's ves oes 256—258
On the second and third classes of do. ......... esncit gie 258—260
On the Inseparable Pronouns when attached to Verbs .... 260—261
Mies Or dO. sce. < RAI 4 oad enna Bienee Hapa ses bs 261—262
Bem Dte at OPC Osttrs s stai ere c's sant e ef ste een «a7 seceeseece 202—263
BPerace (OW COs Peds ce cree terete aie! Rp Aa ati » 264—265
On the changes of the Vowels on account of do. ........ 265—267
On the changes of the Vowels in the Defective Verbs .... 267
General paradigm of the different kinds of Verbs conjugated
Hieal le thie: USUal apeClesiie. cre duietel eect sic se Bie ho. cus +ia's 268—281
LECTURE XIV.
On the Syntax, the character of Propositions, &c......... 282—284
Om eee Pevlicate: Of EP TONOSItIONS!) sca 's eee cae c= ciate ae 284—286
Of the concordance of the Subject with the Predicate .... 286-290
Of the concordance of the Nominative with its Verb...... 290—296
LECTURE XV.
On the general dependence of words one upon another....
Remarks on do.
Of words in immediate apposition with one another ......
OnithesNouns of time,and, place... fs cvereveyus'e fo ave ¢ get: ob
On the use of the Article.
On the repetition of words for the purpose of distribution, &c.
On the repetition of words for the sake of emphasis......
On Nouns put in the definite state of construction........
On do. examples when immediate
On do. examples when mediate
On the distinctive state of construction
Notes on certain idiomatical expressions....
On the construction of the Numerals......
On the concordance of do. with the thing numbered......
On the other modes of construction ......
oeeevoee@eseeeeeveerevreeses ee & @ @
oe ec ees eeeseeee 6
eeeevees ee 6 @ @
297—299
299—501
301—304
504—306
306—3810
310—3513
3138—314
814—315
3815—316
316—319
319—320
320—821
321—822
322
ib. —323
3238—329
XXX CONTENTS.
LECTURE XVI.
+r
On the complements. of words generally, and of verbs in
particular ..... lgta'te alate sei abel le ieee op heteentn Se ~ 826—328
Examples of Verbs and Verbal Nouns in immediate con-
TECHN oy is 1s wien is lp Wie ss teto e Mee ch ciete ici cis sppoce ue gai oan
Examples of mediate do..... nape suite eiece cevecccsescees SAG
Examples of do. both immediate and mediate .....+.+++++ ib.
Examples of do. when mediate and various ...+.e+¢+22+- ib, —330
Observations on do.......... wie .6's a is\e Seley svatele aie preter 330—335
On apparently elliptical constructions, said to be “ construc-
POLIONES PUECENATILCS: a p's co's sie oo vie cst ois cal 6 sis oldie ioe eee
On do. of the Relative Pronoun WS.........-.06- secs GOL
On do. wherein some consequence is intimated by the con-
BSILUCLIO PLHOONANS 4. aaiectaeae s vies oles Made eet olen 338—340
LECTURE XVII.
On the Modes and Tenses of the Verbs....... is ho ae We 3841—348
Wirtne aosonite, Use iOf the Tenses A sue as visto aoe iol oie 345—846
Lo the welative Use OLedOil » ap a>, aisres bos Price “io. s!'y 6 ww Sra Peliene 346—848
On the relative use of do. in citations........eeeeseeees 3848—351
On the Modes Subjunctive, Conditional, Imperative, &c. .. 351—352
On the Preterite when used as a Future Tense .......... 352—355
On do. when used as an Imperative........cscceeeccees S5I—356
On do. when used as a: Pluperfect: ............000. cove 356—357
On the Preterite in enouncing general opinions, hypothetical
SENtences; GSC. V4.6 V0.4 0.4 vcs ee robe tlyle eked cls wet - 557—360
Meniarks on Mods'..he les SUSUR ee CR 360—363
LECTURE XVIII.
On the nature and construction of the Particles.......... 364
Do. ‘otame Adverbs). 1. cn pa ow ea a NR A 136 ae ib. —369
W200. 01 CIE TEDOSILIGHS 1s oy 6 + cists sis ¢ ASCE ee Hy 569—373
LECTURE XIX.
On the nature and use of the Conjunctions...... :
Do. of WS &c. used a Conjunction
CONTENTS. XXX1
Hasan Pile uae ON WAY .COtin sri clelt oa, cs,s o/s o/s eles aes e's S71 9——B 80
Examples of Conditional do. ...... sNereNer lore steers sr ORO
Examples of Causal and Conclusive do..............ee8 ib.
Grater lnterjectionss i. yecek ieee ves s Ae RE RO Pea OID a 882
LECTURE XX.
On the composition of sentences as pointed out by the
EN CCEIICS trele sitenalsiefete.S s/o itis ter als esi sie atti a & of st sts |e) else ete) OSG
On the distinctive powers of the ‘Tonic Accents.......... ib. —386
Table pointing out their order of Consecution, &c. ...... 387—393
On.the Accentuation of the Metrical Books ............ 394-397
ERRATA.
Page line read Page line read Page line read
9 21 gutturals | 102 13 wi 247 18 nbs
hanes Pew iialen 2 MT /o55 418 TTB
38 «4 V8 1160 36 180
a ap
Stan “BNITDADI | 161 23 ie a
o : uN
— ib. Névikadnetstsar|171 17 TWAS ytd Mes w
ee SN IS) 1849" 6 Tables sero eae ie
— ib. Névukadretstsar|i1g5 1 dele Masc. 5 i he
41 28 94 . a
53 27 These...take &c. 186 4 DWAIN} 201 15 oie]
cay bys | 189 27 Don Ah ns
5 » €
Bac mrbyirny | 19° 3 We 304 26 wryly
— 33 inseparable 200? : on sae
68 17 raclrtel a pia hg crn Peak
7105 to is occasionally | ~ awh a8 we
aad mr | 206 21 rabbit oie" tt ow,
— 35 following noun—|209 9 MAIS 38400) eer
Dome two Cr M0Te—— 1s yy (362 18 him )
ot lane 24 SPiaiey te q
96 23 m2 fiat use STdae3 is regulated
" rst 1392 2 DrPoe
a 273 hore 14 mp3 IVa?
anon Sree Basho nnn
100 28 Ny t‘- 226 38 TST : 394 92 power
101 21 TH}P | 235 28 verbs commencing} 395 30 various, just
The Reader is requested to make these corrections; a few broken letters may also
occur in some of the sheets, against which it was not possible to guard.
\, v Hebhen S, Saaip sib 2 b sddioaety hes Mi ?
As ry $
13 m . fy Oe aan a ee 7 . Seth he . cee ie entyibiey’> rey Vinge '
, WNC NS OLE RRR ete Te oe
"4 = *
7 ei BUDE gman = mn cg '
ee : Ste: my i ty wa) A { ah vii, 7, re Verena? Or, :
: 7) { ~ ‘ pens: rh
a pe: Pe hat EK: ATMEL prea
Reaulen is ™) ih “df ae Be: hee a we signobhede Tas lai ite _e “~ L
ie VER ‘ feta oF : Lats
Bua gh” TREES CERE Cee te TREE Orr ae
ve: Baht 3 ts siete ss eeRIMOS OR. BIT Oe, ‘aia ios ah tity)
t al . 7 re ‘AE: Taf 3 ' ‘en 4 n 4) As ifs
he pa hspercr 2? mao Tm la Tht aah ie aa
* os were 3 if ee
1 NA IRMA eas os ay seh tnab aM wed Sh wheat
pa i ae ve we
‘es rik a ee : F ; i
Fo : Pa | . Ps r ee ee ; v; J p." 1 % { vy oe
; er ame. Py oe) ‘ .
- etek t é } ‘ ; ¥ a
% 44 4 P i ~ - ee a Pid on Mie - oe =.
ea e : >
¥ ha * 2 * fi s tr y -
Thre Giet ns ae “ ; ;
5, 4 7 acl " p ra " j : y
' a By oe ray ge ne’, hel tas
: ; at ~ j tt i 7
enh : | a oa Th iar c a cw By, = By We As
ee ae } an Ae ? ry sy lSe he wit
oot Sie ata 4 . s ya 1 PNM y Ra ae | k SOM ns
oe 6 y Oe ~ arn 6 . P s * Ee
hy : ; fen” hie, Fe’ Ba 4 nl
GER Ce eis wh Be ore . ico Peep ee oy *
ara tes : , y eth
Sh SA ere Toe ene ha a i PY se Gy Ney x eh ey aD 7 fells <9
if hy Pa A A east ‘ 4 e és Saat - 1 eh Lp
-. cid woe. OT | mn “4 ; Hh, Ney ‘ “
f + : f Ls aif a ony _ ate \ : ' rey ie vi *| Read: a
: d + aie ny - aire ; S Meus - ; 4 | . s TF , i H ane yp
Ay MT ea ah has ee er eo Lone ce
‘ KR) me “5 bs rh i a say eo Ans a didi t caky Faye by Tattirell, ie
a os : a ee rm: te! ,
tN Ase aaa SES alsa te
ae
*
A
¢g
q
ps,
pe
*
ms . - rd t. d Bare nm ae Oy F
Le i ahs i pi Ae ' tia ess et
ei: Par tks = 8, sgte * i i bake iA ptt iy: ay
~~ » is
7) . ARES St i 3
ee cca oh ae hie iain Meta e, Bat sae
q . Shy Bee re Wh Wo Gam Lae - ao by gy. Kut 4 by
. ag (hid .% e | Meee ik | a ‘ esd a ce. pre
m fo. bv tity NP ge Mat oe 5
a fy Rabdppens eh Loki Asaf BE
Are ees - ae > ee a aes
7.
¥ "a :
in ny 4 y
. ; Co myth. $3 OF ae
”
A i ‘ wae ia ah Pk
LECTURES
ON THE
HEBREW LANGUAGE.
LECTURE I.
ON THE ORTHOGRAPHY, SYLLABICATION, &C., OF THE
HEBREW LANGUAGE. |
1. AS it is proposed to offer, in the present course of
Lectures, a comprehensive and practical view of the
structure of the Hebrew Language, all discussions re-
lating to General Grammar, Philology, and Antiquities,
will be avoided as much as possible; referring as we pro-
ceed to Authors who have treated on those subjects.
It will also be taken for granted, that the Student is
acquainted with Grammar, as generally taught; and,
that he is penman sufficiently good to write down such
forms of letters, &c. as shall be laid before him.
2. But, although it is desirable that the Learner
should know something of the principles of Grammar as
generally taught ; yet, he must not hence be tempted to
infer, that a system, almost entirely at variance with that
to which he has been accustomed, is unphilosophical or
wrong: or, because he cannot at first sight comprehend
all its bearings, that it is, therefore, uncouth, embar-
rassed, or ambiguous. For, it may be true, that the
Language of the Patriarchs and Prophets is as con-
sistent in its structure, as the subjects on which it treats
B
2 LECTURE I. CART. 3.
are interesting and momentous: and, that it is as explicit
and regular as other languages, which have been cul-
tivated with greater ardour, while they had less to offer
in return. He must, therefore, allow the Language, on
which we are now entering, to stand or fall on its own
merits ; and, our delineation of it to be judged by the
just rules of criticism. We mention this, in the outset,
not to depreciate the labours of others who may have
taken a different view of this subject; but, to warn the
student, that the idioms of the Hebrew and other Dia-
lects connected with it, are neither to be judged nor
explained by those of European languages; and hence, '
to caution him against that trouble and confusion, mto
which some have had the misfortune to fall.
On the Alphabet.
3. The system of Orthography, found in our Hebrew
Bibles, and that which has ever been taught with the
greatest success,* presents a succession of consonants
written in a direction proceeding from the right hand of
the page towards the left. T’wo or more of these are
found in every word: while the words themselves are
separated from each other by a moderate space. To this
system of consonants another is added consisting of
vowels, which are placed above, in the middle, or below,
the line of consonants, as their several natures may
require. ‘To this, again, is superadded anather, con-
sisting of Accents, which are also placed either above, in
the middle, or below, the consonants, in the same line or
rank with ‘the vowels. Before the student can possibly
read the Hebrew text, therefore, he must be made
familiar with these several parts of Hebrew orthography.
%. We shall proceed, in the first place, to delineate
and explain the characters of the consonants: the number,
forms, names, powers, and numerical values, of which
are as follows. »
* We say, the greatest success: for, after all that has been said by the advo-
cates of the unpointed text, it will be extremely difficult to point out one
author of that school who has really advanced the knowledge of Hebrew
Learning.
ART. 4. ]
Number|
and
Order.
Biblical.
i|8
2 D2 | or oa]
3 | jo J
St Need eae
ed
6 | )
chai
s | FF
91%
10. ate
il va) or s+) and
as a final let-
ter "] or ]
2 | 5
13 a and asa
final
14 and as a
final i
16 | &
16 LV
17 &) or 8) and
as a final °)
18 Ss and as
a final (i
19 | pp
20 3 |
21 | oP
uw S$
22H G or Js)
ON THE ALPHABET.
FORMS.
ip ee
Samari-
tan.
Ie
Bad Sr N kA
XE IN
aj
A
Vv
2 areca
Rabbinical.
D
9
> and as a
final 7
5
yY) and as a
final D
5 and as a
final |
0
Dv
ct
‘y)
B
NAMES.
A)? & Alef
IVS} Bétn
ae Gimél
nos Daleth
gr He
ah Vaw, Vav;
or Waw
a) Zayin
ny Khéth
IV vTeth
“Yoda
2 C4éph
7495 Lémed
C3) Mém
Nin
na
VOD S4mech
iV Ayin
rye) Pe
“ty Tsadé
IP Képh
i) Résh
pw Shin
| yy Sin
POWERS.
Hsunaspirated, as in
humble, hour,
&c.
V or B respectively,
as in van or ban.
G hard, as in gird,
gain.
D, as in do, dare.
H aspirated, as in
hard.
V, by some, as in
vow, by others,
W, as in work.
Z, as in geal, or S in
those.
Kh strongly aspirat-
ed, as ch in the
German, nicht.
T, as in turn.
Y, as in yes, yonder.
C, as in carry, cash.
L, as in love, &c.
M, asin man, &c.
N, as in no, &c.
S, as in Sirs; never
as S in those.
The true sound of this
letter being un-
known, it is usu-
ally passed over
in silence, as H
in humble: we
shall designate it
thus, H. -
PH, when without
the point, as in
Philip; P, when
pointed, as in
pint.
TS, as in mats, &c.
K, as in look, &c.
RB, as in roast, &c.
SH, as in shine.
S, as in son, never
as S in those.
4 n Tea or | TH or T respectively,
4
as in thin or tin.
3
Numerica}
Values.
LXX.
LXXX.
XC.
CCCC.
bn
LECTURE I. (ART. 5.
In this and all future examples where the Roman vowels will be put
to represent the Hebrew ones, a, or a, will have the sound of the
Italian a, or a in far, and a, as a in man; é, or @, as a in wane or at in
rain: e, the same sound shortened; 2, or 2, as ee in seen; 7, as i in in;
6, or 0, as oin rose: o, the same sound shortened; %, or wu, as 00 in
boot : u, as oo in good. The first vowel in each case will represent the
accented or emphatical syllable, e.g. @ in father, &c ; the second with
the mark (-) as @, é, &c. will shew, that, as such vowel must terminate
a syllable, it will be pronounced openly, but not with an accent.
5. The Samaritan and Rabbinical forms of the Hebrew
character have been introduced for the following reasons :
1. The Samaritan Pentateuch, being nothing more
than a different edition of that in use among the Jews,
the Student will want no other help for reading it, than
the forms of the Samaritan character: and,
2. As the Rabbinical commentaries are composed, for
the most part, in Biblical Hebrew, he will stand in need
of little more than a copy of their alphabet to enable
him to read them.*
6. The number and order of the consonants, as given in the table,
are found in the text of the Hebrew Bible. ‘The following are the
passages :—Psalms xxxiv. cxix. cxlv.; Proverbs xxxi., from verse 10
to the end; Lamentations i. ii. iii. iv. In Psalm xxxiv., however, the
verse beginning with 1 Vaw has either been lost, or both 7 He and
1 Vaw are found in the 6th verse; and in the exlvth, that which should
commence with 4 is also wanting. In the ii. iii. and ivth chapters of
the Lamentations, ¥ Ayin and © Pé are found transposed, which
perhaps may be attributed to the copyists.
_7. As to the forms of the consonants, it is highly probable, that.
they were originally hieroglyphical :} but, whether the Hebrew or
* Should the learner wish to make considerable progress in Rabbinical
learning, he will find some of the best books pointed out in Sect. xi. of my
Sylloge Librorum Orientalium. Cantab. 1821.
+ Champollion Précis. du Syst. Hier. pp. 31%, 316. Plates A. to K.—
P. Lacour. Essai sur lés Hier. Bourdeaux. 1821. pp. 45—48, 131, 166, &c.
Though I can see no reason why we are to go to Egypt for the Hebrew Letters,
unless we are to suppose that marks, representing certain substances, could not
be formed elsewhere.—See Geshichte der Hebraische Sprache, &c. von
Wil. Gesenius, §. 40—45.
ART. 8. | ON THE CONSONANTS. 3
Samaritan form is the most ancient, a difference of opinion seems to
have prevailed as early as the times of Jerome; and which, as Schul-
tens has justly remarked, has been contested in some instances with an
acrimony, which neither the nature of the case, nor the love of truth,
could justify :* some maintaining, that the Samaritan was the primi-
tive form, and that Ezra adopted the other on the return from Baby-
lon: others, that the Biblical character, as we now have it, is the same
with that in which Moses composed his Autograph.+ For my own
part, I am inclined to believe with Baver{ and some others, that which
of the characters soever we take as exhibiting the most ancient form,
the other is no greater a variation from it, than may be traced in our
own black letter as derived from the Roman; and, by no means so
great as that discernible between our own hand-writing, and the
printed letter, from which it has been derived. The only question,
then, that can arise must be, Which is the most ancient form? And
this, I think, no one can determine in the absence of express historical
information. Both might have existed together for ages, the one in
Judea, the other in Babylonia, just as the black letter has prevailed in
Germany, while the Roman has been preferred in this country. But,
as this question involves nothing of importance to the learner, its fur-
ther prosecution here will be unnecessary.§ The letters 817 visita}
when occurring at the end of a line, are sometimes lengthened out
thus, NTT'DO “NM, in order to fill up the space.
On the Powers of the Consonants.
8. 8 Alef, as already remarked, has the power of an unaspirated H :
that is, it is used for the purpose of enouncing the vowel following it,
without any audible aspiration. It appears probable also, that this was
its power in ancient times ; not only, because the same letter .has to this
day the same power in the Syriac, Arabic, and Ethiopic, which are
nothing more than dialects of the Hebrew ; but, because we find it occa-
sionally put for 1 Heé, or Y Ayin, in the Hebrew Bible itself ; and, in the
cognate dialects, the Syriac and Chaldee, for ’ Yéd.||_ By the ancient
* Fundam. Ling. Heb. p. 18.
+ See the controversy between Capell and Buxtorf.
t Crit. Sac. Baveri, Tract. i. §. 12. p. 125 (mihi).
§ Those who wish for further information on this subject may consult the
Critica Sacra of Baver, Tract i. §.10, where reference is made to the best
writers on this question.
|| See the Hebraisch-Deutsches Handworterbuch by Gesenius, under the
letter 8.
6 LECTURE I. [ART. 9.
Greeks and Latins it was expressed by one or other of the vowels un-
aspirated, and mostly by Alpha or A.* In writing Hebrew words in
Roman letters, we shall form the syllable in which this letter is found
by representing that vowel only which accompanies it.
9. 2 Béth is found either with or without a point inscribed, as 2 or
=>, In the first case it is pronounced as our B; in the second, as Nis
and hence, it is sometimes represented by ) Vaw, as 23, sometimes
written 13. In the cognate dialects it is occasionally changed for 5 Pé
or Mém, being a letter of the same organ with them. But of this
more will be said hereafter.
10. 2 Gimél is also found written with or without the point, thus 4
or 4. In the first case, all are agreed that it should be pronounced
like G in the words gird, give, and the like. How it should be pro-
nounced in the second, grammarians are not agreed. Some think it
should take the sound of G in ginger ; others, that it should be pro-
nounced as G in the German Gemacht, &c. The usual practice, how-
ever, is, to sound it like G, in gard, in every case.}
11. 7 Déleth is also found both with, and without, this point, as 7
and 7. In the first case it is pronounced like D in dare, do, &c. In
the second, some give it the sound of TH, in thine, this; others neg-
lect this distinction, and pronounce it like D in every case. It is pro-
bable, that it was originally pronounced with the tip of the tongue
placed against the roots of the fore-teeth, just as-its corresponding
letter is still pronounced by the Orientals; which will give it rather a
softer sound than that of our D. It is also probable, that it had two
sounds, as it is the case now with the Arabic, where we have 9 Dal
and Dsél or Dhdl, the former pronounced like D dental, the other
like th in thine. Hence we may account for "27 Ddavér meaning a
nord, and %27 Déver, meaning a pestilence: the root of the former
being po Dhabara, scripsit hibrum, &c., the other _~o Dédbara, ulce-~
ratum fut, &e. Hence we have po Dhabr from the first root signifying
Scriptura, and ple Dhébir, bene discens, et edoctus, sapientiam, as of
similar import with 727 Davdr, a word, relation, &c. And from the
—
* See the Bibliotheca Sacra by Masch, partis secund. vol. ii. pref. p. 35,
&e.: also, the Dissertatio R. P. Bernhardi de Montfaucon de veteri literarum
et vocalium Hebraicarum pronunciatione, tom. ii. of his Hexapla of Origen, or
in the Bibliotheca Hebraa of Wolfius, tom. ii. p. 648; or the Appendix to
Jahn’s Gramm. Ling. Heb. &e.
+ The manner in which the ancients represented this, and other letters of the
Alphabet, may be seen in Masch or Montfaucon, as cited above.
ART. 12. ON THE CONSONANTS. 7
second » Ddbr, mors, of similar import with 727 Déver, pestis, &c.
This method of accounting for the powers of several other letters of
the Alphabet, will satisfactorily explain the apparently conflicting sig-
nifications sometimes found to prevail in the same Hebrew root, of which
the modern Lexicographers have very properly availed themselves.*
12. It will be unnecessary to make any additional remarks on the
following letters till we come to M Khéth; and, on this it is only neces-
sary to say, that like 7 Ddleth, it probably had two sounds originally,
one more, the other less, aspirated, as may be seen in the Dictionaries.
13. © Téth should be pronounced with the tip of the tongue against
the roof of the mouth, and hence may be termed cerebral.
14, > Yéd is equivalent to our Y, as given in the table. The Ger-
mans represent this letter by J, which they pronounce like our Y:
and, as the first Hebrew Grammars studied in this country were im-
ported from Germany, we adopted the word Jehovah, Jehu, &c., which
they very properly pronounced Yehovah, Yehu, &c. When at the begin-
ning of a word, and having the vowel i, it loses its consonantal power,
and takes the sound of the vowel only, as /s-ra-el, not Yis-ra-el.
This is also found to take place in the Arabic, as [kiob, not Yektob, for
oyster
*¢,.—See De Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. i. p. 4, note.
. "15. The sound of >, without a point, probably partock more of the
sound of K than of ™ Khéth, which will account for its being repre-
sented by the Greeks by x» and x. With the point (*) it is uni-
versally sounded like our C in carry, as already given.
16. D0 Samek, and w Sin, have, for many centuries, been pronounced
alike, i.e. like S, in stn; and, although many Hebrew words are now
found written with either promiscuously, it is doubtful whether this be
not owing to the copyists ; or, possibly, to a departure from the pro-
nunciation of W Shin, which may have been peculiar to this form
(in ancient times. In Syriac, wa Semchat supplies the place of
both D Sdmek and & Sin, as does also (i Sin in the Arabic.
17. 9 Ayin probably had, like 7 Ddleth and M Khéth, two sounds
originally ; one approaching to that of g mixed with r; another to
that of 8 Alef, just as it is the case with the Arabs who have both
& Gain, and ¢ dim. The examples to be found in the modern Lexi-
&
* Bichhorn in his Edition of the Lexicon of Simonis, Schulz in his edition
of Cocceius, and Gesenivis in the Hebrew Dictionary already cited. See also
Storr’s Observationes ad Analogiam et Syntaxin Hebraicam, p. 48.
§ LECTURE I. [ART. 18.
*
cons under this letter, as well as the various orthography of proper
names found in the Septuagint, may be considered as sufficient proof
of this position.* At present, this letter is usually passed over, like
the Alef, in silence. The sound of ng in king, as given to it generally
by the Jews, may probably have prevailed even in ancient times.
I have observed in the pronunciation of the Arabs of Barbary, that
they give a nasal sound to their Ain, ¢ ; and that the Archbishop of
Jerusalem, who was some time ago in this country, pronounced the
Syriac § in this way, although the Maronites inform us, that it should
be pronounced with a sort of compression-.of the throat.+ We shall
designate it in the Roman characters by an H, with a pomt under it.
18. The sound of /) Képh is something harder than that of > Caph :
it is made by a sudden compression of the throat, and may be com-
pared to the noise made by water when discharging itself from a
bottle. The explanations given in the table will be sufficient for the
remaining letters.
19. We now come to the numerical values of the
letters. We have given in the Table (Art. 4) the letters
corresponding to the units, tens, and hundreds up to 400.
The remaining hundreds up to one thousand, are thus
expressed: J] Caph final is put for 500; [ Mém final
for 600; |} Nd final for 700; *| Pé final 800; and 4
Tsadé final 900. One thousand is mostly expressed by
the word FON Elef, a thousand; two thousand by cyDN
Alpayim; and any number of thousands by using the
word *)?8 éef, thousand, or [DIN Alifim, thousands,
with the proper numeral prefixed, as the rules of Syntax
shall require. Sometimes, as in the notes of the Ma-
sora, x stands for one thousand; but on this subject the
Hebrew tables of abbreviations should be consulted.
20. The numbers from ten to twenty are made by
* See the Lexicons of Gesenius, (and Simonis, ed. Eichhorn,) under this letter.
See also Storr as above, p. 48.
+ Amira’s Grammatica Syriaca, Rome, 1596, p. 6.
{ Joannis Buxtorfii de Abbreviaturis Hebraicis Liber, with the Supplement
of Wolfius. Biblioth. Heb. tom. ii. p. 575. For the abbreviations found in the
Masora, see the Tiberias, or Commentarius Masorethicus, of Buxtorf.
ART. 21.1] as THE CONSONANTS. 9
adding such unit to the numeral for ten, as will make the
number required. Thus 8 will represent eleven, 3°
twelve, and so on. The number 15, however, is made
by 14, i.e. 946, not 1, i.e. 10+5, because is one of
the names of God. In lke manner, 21 will be N35,
esta sls 32, 31 42, and so on. On this principle, the
number given at the end of Genesis for the verses found
in that book is, 4473 = 1534.
21. Whether this method of expressing numbers formerly prevailed
in the Hebrew manuscripts, has been a subject of some dispute, and
which it is now impossible to determine. That the numbers have been
expressed in words written at length for some centuries, there seems
to be no doubt, but whether this was the case in very ancient times or
not, it is difficult to say.*
22. As the Hebrew letters are sometimes changed for
one another, both in the radical words, and in the process
of derivation; and, as this change seldom takes place
except in letters of the same organ,7 the following classi-
fication of the letters according to the different organs of
speech has been given:
1 Guttérals, S 4lef, THe, TM Khéth, ¥ Ayin.
2 Palatals, 4Gimél, ° Yod, 2 Caph, P K6ph.
83 Linguals, ‘Dédleth,O Téth, 1 Tam.
4 Sibilants, % Zayin, © Samek, > Tsadé, © Shin, W Sin.
5 Labials, 2 Béth, 1Van, ™ Mém, » Pé.
The letters b , 3, 1, are termed liquids.
23. Whether any of the letters 22722 be with or without the
points, as given in the table of the Alphabet, or whether others assume
their own final forms, it makes no difference as to their classification,
they still belong to one or other of the above classes.
24. Four of the letters of the Alphabet occasionally
lose their consonantal powers, and are then said to be
quiescent or silent. The letters are & Alef, m He,
* See Baver’s Critica Sacra, Tract i. §. 23, page (mihi) 188.
+ As 12 for 24, and *)A the back; SW and S72 fat; and many others
to be found in the dictionaries.
10 LECTURE I. | LART. 25.
1 Vaw, and» Yéd, which form a sort of memoria tech-
nica in the word "TS Hhévt. The letters above-men-
tioned, which occasionally have a point inscribed, have,
for the same reason, been formed into the technical word
nes. Begadhképhath. The final letters which are
sometimes produced are exhibited in the words Van brs
Ohel Tamar, Tamar’s tent: and the finals which vary in
form, as mentioned in the table, are comprehended in the
word Yo123 Camménappéts, “ Like a disperser.”
25. The letters have been further divided into two
classes; one containing such letters as are occasionally
servile, that is, are employed in the process of gram-
matical derivation ; the other, those only which are never
so employed; the first have been termed servile, the
second, radical letters. The servile letters are, however,
occasionally radical, though the radical ones are never
servile.
26. The servile letters are all comprehended in the
following memoria technica, viz. 29D) \VR Mw, Moshé
Ethin Vécalév, i.e. Moses, Ethan, and Caleb. The
remaining letters are termed radical.
27. In almost all the printed copies of the Hebrew Bible, we find
some of the letters occasionally larger or smaller than others; some-
times inverted, at others suspended a little above the general line of
printing ; and in one instance, we have a final letter in the middle of a
word ; in others, a medial letter is used as a final: out of all which the
Jews, and indeed some Christian writers, have endeavoured to elicit
certain mysteries. But as they are most likely all owing to some acci-
dent in the transcription of the MSS. we may be excused in dismissing
them without further notice.*
28. The best method the learner can adopt for
making himself acquainted with the letters is, to write
them over carefully and frequently, till he is quite familiar
with all their forms. In doing this, he should strongly
* The places may all be seen in the Grammar of Guarin, tom, i. p. 12.
—
ART. 29. | ‘. ON THE VOWELS. 1i
mark the difference between those letters, which are in
some respects similar, such as 2 Béth, and 3 Caph, 3 Gimél,
and 3 Nun, and so on; in order to avoid the confusion
which beginners often experience, and which is by far the
most vexatious part of Hebrew studies; and to make that
pleasant which is to many extremely irksome. If he use
_a pen, the point should be cut a little oblique, in order to
make the horizontal strokes strong and regular; the
others, which should be perpendicular, should be made
fine and equal. An oriental reed, however, makes by far
the best pen for writing these letters, which should be
cut nearly like a pen, with a slit, and the point oblique,
as already mentioned.*
On the Vowels.
29. It has already been remarked, (Art. 3.) that the
Hebrew vowels present a system of marks or characters
arranged sometimes above, at others in the middle, and
at others beneath, the consonants: we now proceed to
delineate and explain it. a
Table of the Hebrew Vowels.
Figure. Name. Power. ~ Exemplifications,
Ae or VP Kaméts G@ as 2 ba, } g4, J da, &e.
| _ MN Tséré é— 2 be, ) ge, I dé, &e.
rer So vie PYYTI Khirtk Gadsl i — QM, Ber, WP di, &e.
jt Dyin Khalém GE SS bg, ead, i to, | Bc.
L 4, PII Sharék i — Yba, Yea, YN da, &c.
* These reeds may be purchased at Messrs. Kingsbury, Parbury, and Allen’s,
Booksellers in Leadenhall Street, London. The exact method of cutting and
holding them may be seen in the Developpemens des Principes de la Langue
Arabe Moderne, par Auguste F. I. Herbin.
+ In these cases, the consonant 4 is considered as the mere fulcrum of the
accompanying vowels.
12 LECTURE I. [ART. 30.
*
Figure. Name. Power. Exemplifications.
MND Pathakh a— “2 bad, mp) gad, “JF dad., |
5930 Segol eé— et bed, 73 ged, ib ded,
Imperfect / Vp pry Krarik Katin i— FQbid, FY egid, “T7 dia
owels, a On yop Kaméts Khatiph o — a bod, “ p god. TI dod,
“ Var Kibbiits Ger Tal bud, TA gud, TI dud.
Sheva, and its substitutes.
Nw) Sheva #— ya bert, YZ get, NYT deri.
MmnS 50m Khatéf Pathakh @ — 2 bari, 12 64%, pa dari.
OHI HOM Khare Segsl — € — NB sehe, RMD gehe, NTT dele.
| : Vor PLOT Khatef Kaméts o— Naa boha, NPT) goha, RT doha.
30. It will be seen from the Exemplifications, which of
the vowels-marks are placed above, which in the middle,
and which below, the line. From the note appended to
the table of consonants, will also be seen what sounds are
given to the Roman vowels, as here made to represent
the powers of the Hebrew ones ; and, consequently, what
powers the Hebrew vowels are to take.
31. The learner cannot now do better than make out
a syllabarium for himself, extending throughout the
whole of the alphabet, in the manner of the Exempli-
fications just given; bearing in mind, that whenever
either of the letters contained in the memoria technica,
npos1 Bégadkéephath, begins a syllable, the point should
be inscribed. ‘The exceptions will be given hereafter.
He should also bear in mind, that the consonant must
* The sound of ¢€ in these examples is remarkably short, better expressed by
our lrt, gri, dri, &c. without a vowel. So in the substitutes, which usually
accompany the guttural letters. The final vowel °-, &c. has been added,
in order to facilitate this rapidity of utterance in bar?, gdri,—béhé, boha, &c.
making one syllable only.
ART. 32. | » ON THE VOWELS. Is
always precede the vowel, as marked in the table: a few
exceptions to this rule will be noticed hereafter.
32. The usual classification of the vowels has been, 1. Long vowels,
2. Short vowels, and 3. Vowels still shorter than the preceding. We
have adopted a different one, for the following reason. ‘These dis-
tinctions cease to exist when the vowels are combined with the con-
sonants ; for then, the second class of vowels becomes long, either by
position ; that is, when a consonant follows; or, by being accompanied
with an accent. Both these classes of the vowels are, therefore, long
when reduced to practice ; and it is absurd to speak of them in any
other point of view.
It can never be necessary, we believe, to trouble the learner with
the jive different lengths of time ascribed to these vowels by Albert
Schultens and Schroeder; although the latter has declared, that it is a
law amplissmum usum habens, because we have been unable to discover
in what the use consists.*
33. By perfect vowels, as given in the first class, is
meant, Vowels, which being preceded by a consonant, will
constitute a complete syllable, as A ba, in which, both
the consonant and vowel are fully and properly enounced.
The same is the case, when either of the letters con-
tained in the memoria technica, “WIS Ehévi, which occa-
sionally lose their consonantal powers, (Art. 24,) follows
its homogeneous vowel, (of which more hereafter,) as,
Na ba.
34. By emperfect vowels is meant, those vowels which
are not generally found to constitute syllables without
either the addition of a following consonant, or of an
accent. Such syllable, therefore, must be either like Ta
bad, or 3 ba, 1. e. followed by a consonant, or accom-
panied by an accent. When a consonant, moreover, is
found to follow a perfect vowel, with an accent, as
Dip, &c., the same may be said to be the case.
* Institutiones ad Fund. Ling. Heb. Art. xxviii.; and Schreeder’s Grammar,
Rule xxx.
14 LECTURE I. [ ART. 35.
35. The last class of signs has been designated “ Sub-
stitutes for the mark (:) Skévé,” which, in truth, they are,
as we shall see hereafter.
36. Our object in adopting this new nomenclature is, to avoid the
inconsistency of detailing a system of long, short, and most short
vowels; and then, informing the learner, that after all, every short
vowel becomes long in practice; and, that the class of the shortest
vowels contains nothing more than substitutes for what, in fact, are no
vowels at all.
37. We now come to the figure or form of the vowels: and, in
order to give the best account we can of them, we must be allowed to
state what we believe to be their real history. ‘Those who wish to see
“what has been said by Capell, Buxtorf, and others, on the antiquity,
&c. of these vowel-points, had better have recourse ‘to their writings,*
or, if a mere outline will suffice, they will find one in the “ Institutiones
ad Fundamenta Lingue Hebreee,” by Albert Schultens, from page 50
to 65. Greater abilities and learning were, perhaps, never displayed
than in this controversy ; nor indeed a greater degree of rancour. It
was with great difficulty, that Capell got his book printed at all; and
when it appeared, it was hailed by the Roman Catholics as a document
of the greatest value, because, forsooth, it seemed to unsettle every
thing connected with the study of the Holy Scriptures. The name of
Capell, in consequence, became associated with all that seemed likely
to undo the great work of the Reformation, and to bring into jeopardy
many of the states of Europe. Among the Lutherans of Germany,
the opinions of this elegant, but unfortunate writer, were considered as
highly heterodox : so much so, that they gave rise to a new article, to
be subscribed by all who were candidates for holy orders, which, as I
have been informed, is still in force. Orthodoxy, or heterodoxy, in
short, seemed to ke comprised in the simple question, whether a man
adopted, or rejected, the opinions of Capell. The son of this
learned and great man, it should seem, took refuge at length in the
Roman Catholic Church, in order, as it is said, to avoid the rancour
of the Protestants, who were then but ill acquainted with the
principles of toleration. This, however, has only been mentioned
to show the great impropriety of such proceedings. Later times have
* Arcanum punctationis revelatum of Capellus, Lugd. Batav. 1624, and
Buxtorfii Anticritica seu vindicie adversus Capellum. Basil 1653.
ART. 38, | ON THE VOWELS. i Nee
proved, that Protestantism lost nothing by the labours of Capell:
but, on the contrary, can boast of one of the ablest scriptural critics,
that the Christian Church has ever produced. But to proceed with
our history of the vowel-points.
It is very well known, that the Syrians adopted the Hebrew Alphabet
as early as the latter end of the first, or the beginning of the second,
century ; and that the Arabs adopted that of the Syrians, some time
about the beginning of the seventh. The most ancient form of this
alphabet, as found among the Syrians, has been termed the Estrangelo,*
which corresponds in a remarkable degree with the oldest character in
use among the Arabians, termed the Cafic. Upon comparing the
Syriac Estrangelo with the Hebrew, a coincidence in form, name, and
power is immediately observed, sufficient to shew, that the one is an
immediate copy of the other. The same may be said of the similarity
observable between the Estrangelo Syriac and the Cific.
38. The Syrians appear to have borrowed, with the letter, a system
of vowels which they retain to the present day: the Arabs also appear
to have borrowed the same (though differing a little in form) from the
Syrians. And from the Arabs this system has been carried into
Persia, Turkey, India, Tartary, and the islands of the Malays.
39. In the ancient Estrangelo Syriac, then, a single round point,
placed above any consonant, took the sound of a or o: beneath any
consonant, the sound of e or7. With the letter Vau (Syriac 9) this
point seems to have had the sound of uw, which it still retains, whether
placed above, or below, that letter. It may, mdeed, originally, have
been placed in the middle of the line of consonants, in order to distin-
guish it from the other points used with Vaw as a consonant: and, of
this, some proof is to be found in the situation of Shurek among the
Hebrew vowels, and from the name which it still retains among the
Persians of UX Pésh, i.e. before.
When the Hebrew and Syriac tongues were vernacular, the vowels
would only be wanted in words which would otherwise be ambiguous ;
and we find in the old Syriac Estrangelo manuscripts, that these vowel
marks are mostly added, when this would be the case. Thus, a participle
present has almost invariably a poimt placed over the first radical
letter, directing the first consonant to be pronounced with an o: the
preterite, in like manner, has a single point under one of its radicals,
* See Michaelis’ Syriac Gram. pp. 25, 26, 27, 36, 37; G. Amira Gram. Syr.
p- 36,37, &c. De Dieu Gram. Harm. Ed. 1628. pp. 36, 37.
16 LECTURE I. [ ART. 40.
mostly the second, directing that consonant to be pronounced with an a.
The same is observed in other words, which have the same consonants
with each other, but which ought to be pronounced with different
vowels. ‘This is sufficient, even now, to guard against any ambiguity
which might arise in reading the Syriac text. In most of the Arabic
manuscripts, if we except the Koran, a few vowels only are added for
a similar purpose; which has also been done by some of the best editors
of Arabic books in modern times. In these cases, no one will object,
that every danger of ambiguity is sufficiently removed; and it may
hence be inferred, that a similar practice would be quite sufficient, so
long as the Hebrew language continued to be generally spoken. When,
however, it became a dead language, and the Jews, dispersed as they
were, into different nations of the earth, would naturally forget the true
pronunciation of the sacred text, no less than its meaning in many
important passages, it became almost necessary that every word should
be fully pointed, so as to leave no doubt on the mind of the reader, as
far, at least, as such a system of punctuation would go. For this pur-
pose, additional vowel-marks were added, and some new ones invented.
To which also a system of accents seems to have been added, which,
taken in the aggregate, composes the system of Hebrew orthography
as we now have it. At what exact period this began to take place, it
is impossible to say : there is, however, good reason for believing, that
it must have been after the times of Jerome, as he makes no mention
whatever of it. That it was completed later than the twelfth century
is scarcely possible, as the names of most of the vowels and accents
are found in the Rabbins of that period. The school of Tiberias, and
about the period A. D. 500, has generally been fixed upon as the place
and time of their invention; and it is not improbable that they were
there and then first partially introduced, and afterwards augmented to
the number which we now have.
40. Let us now see how the present system will accord with our
hypothesis. A single point placed above a consonant, originally repre-
sented either a or 0: the context would determine which of the two
should be taken. At present, Ahdlém (§) has the same situation, and
the power of o. A point placed under any consonant had the power
of e orz: which of these should be taken, the context would deter-
mine, hirtk (.) has still that situation, and the power of i. All the
other vowels marks which stand for @, e, or @, consist of the same point
in the same situation, either doubled, tripled, &e. Thus (--) is open é,
(+) the same sound preceding a consonant : of this again, (:) and (+:)
}
;
ART. 41. | ON THE VOWELS. 17
are other forms, which still occupy the same situation. Now, in order
to distinguish between o and a, it was necessary that some variation of
form should take place; and this could not be done better than by:
lengthening out the point a little, so as to become a straight line, thus
(—). The next question would be, where it should be placed. It
could not, with propriety, be placed above the line, because a similar
straight line had already been placed there, in order to determine the
pronunciation of certain consonants.* It was, therefore, placed below
the line of consonants, and pronounced a: and for the sound of the
open a, the point was added, thus (-), which in printed books is usu-
ally found thus (+), although the manuscripts mostly preserve the
original form. The Shurék, or «, probably still retains its ancient
power and situation, as already remarked: and when the 1 Vaw is
dropped, which is sometimes the case, the Kibbits (-) was probably in-
vented to supply its place. This appears to me sufficiently to account
for the forms of the vowels, as we now have them ; and also, to deter-
mine their authority. In many instances, indeed, the simpler vowel
points of the ancients may have come down to our times; the rest
have probably been supplied by the help of tradition: but, as it is im-
possible now to say in what words or syllables these ancient vowels are
to be found, we can allow to the whole no greater authority than that
of men equally liable with ourselves to error.
On the Combination of the Vowels with the Consonants.
41. Considering, as we do, all the letters of the alphabet
as consonants, no possible difficulty can arise from their
combination with the vowels, when the consonants pre-
cede, as is the case in our exemplifications, given with
the tables of the vowels (Art. 29.) ; but, when a consonant
_also follows, some questions may arise as to the conjoint
effect produced. This we now proceed to explain.
42. The only difficulty that can present itself to a
learner, will be in the concurrence of the letters “WS
termed Lhévi, with certain vowels preceding.
43. It has been remarked (Art. 24.), that these letters
will occasionally lose their consonantal powers. We now
* 7127 Raphé, which will be noticed hereafter.
C
18 LECTURE I. TART. 44.
say, this happens only when they are preceded by those
vowels which are, or may become, homogeneous with
them in sound, respectively. In this sense 8 may be qui-
escent in («) (-) (-) () (-) or (3), as may also. 4 will
be quiescent in Kholém or Shurék only: and > in Khirih,
Tséré, Ségol, and occasionally in (+); as, 8A, 3, 13, 3,
poy, &e. The reason of this seems to be, that as these
consonants are made up of sounds allied to those of
the vowels respectively, when the vowel precedes both
coalesce, and the consonantal power is lost in that of
the vowel. When these letters have no vowel, they will
of course be silent, as in SOM Khét ; S19 Hevi, where
they are said to be ofiose.
44. But when a vowel precedes which is not homo-
geneous with the consonant, which will happen only in
the cases of 1 and %, a diphthongal sound will be formed,
as ai in AN Adina, ot in 3 Got, ui in 993 Ga-lui.
Other diphthongs may be formed; but more do not
occur in Hebrew.—It must be remembered, however,
that if any of these letters has a vowel of its own, 1. e.
following it, it will not become quiescent.
There are, moreover, some instances in which two such
letters are found following a vowel, which is homogeneous
with neither of them, as YR, yy , and the like; in which,
according to analogy, °— should become the diphthong
ai, and the last letter 1 be considered either as a con-.
sonant, or combining with the foregoing in a kind of
triphthong, as H-laiv, or E-laiu, Ha-laiv, or Ha-laiu,
but, generally, the ° is considered as being quiescent,*
* It seems to be a general rule, that when (:) quiescent, either expressed or
understood, comes under» or 4, the diphthongal sound takes place: in other
cases these consonants become quiescent, as in WOR or 1°29, where it would
be contrary to usage to supply a Sheva (: ) under the Y, as rox and wy.
ART. 45. | ON SHEVA. 19
and the following 1 read as the consonant v, or w, as
E-lav, or E-law, and so on. Indeed, in the case of the
diphthong, it is of little consequence whether we con-
sider the concluding letter as a vowel or a consonant, 1. e.
whether we sound * as 2, or y, 1} as w, or v.
On SHEVA and its SUBSTITUTES.
45. Sheva (:) has two situations; one at the begin-
ning of a syllable, the other at its ending. At the begin-
ning of a syllable, (where it may be said to be inztzal,) it
is pronounced like a very short e, as mentioned in the
Table (Art. 29.). The only question, then, which can
arise here will be, How is it to be known when this mark
begins, or concludes, a syllable? The answer is this:
Whenever it is found at the beginning of a word, it must
necessarily be considered as commencing the syllable ; and
consequently, must be pronounced as a short vowel, other-
wise the consonant under which it is placed, cannot be
uttered at all: as in the word M24 Bevd-ith. The same
holds good whenever it follows a perfect vowel un-
accompanied by a tone-accent: because, as that vowel
must conclude the preceding syllable, the consonant,
under which this mark is found, must necessarily com-
mence the next. In this case, therefore, as before, it
must be enouneed as a very short vowel, as in the word
mm Ha-yetha ; in this case, also, it may be termed
enitial.
46. When, however, Skéva (:) commences a word,
(and must therefore be audible,) but is, by accident, pre-
ceded by some particle with an imperfect vowel, it will
become quiescent; e. g. 723 Gevil, a boundary ; prefixing
© for oD we shall have 2123? Lig-vil, not Ligé-vil:
47. In the next place, whenever the mark (:) Sheva
follows an imperfect vowel, having no tone-accent either
c2
20 LECTURE I. [ ART. 48.
expressed or implied, the consonant under which it is
found must be taken as the last of a syllable. In this
case, therefore, Shévd (:) will have no sound, and may be
said to be guescent or final: e. g. DED Kam-tém, not
Kame-tém.
48. To these rules, however, there are two exceptions
of very extensive application: and these arise from the
introduction of an accent. For, as it has already been
remarked (Art. 34.), the operation of an accent will
give to a perfect vowel the character of an imperfect
one, and vice versd. In these cases, therefore, Sheva (:)
may be quiescent after a perfect vowel, and znetzal after
an imperfect one: e. g. of the first case, MINA Ba-khar-
ta, 1 Kings ui. 8, mD20n Ta-gél-na, Ps. li. 10; and of
the second, WI" Va-yehi, &c. When, however, such
accent is purely euphonic, this does not always take place ;
as WIM Makh-bar-té, Exod. xxxix. 20, &c.*
49. Shévad is rarely written at the end of a word.
The reason probably is, that as no vowel can follow the
last letter of any word, it would be superfluous to express
Shéva in order to shew this: the mark is consequently
omitted. In one case, however, in which the preceding
consonant has also a Shévd quiescent, it seems to have
been added to shew, that no vowel has been omitted
through negligence; as in the word MDP Xc., to dis-
tinguish it from MDP &c. It is also found in the letter
«
* The instances occurring of this kind are numerous: as MM Ha-yétha,
Gen. i. 2; ib., ver. 7, YP Ha-ra-kiah ; MSI The-ra-é, ib., ver. 9. So
also Sw Tad-shé, ver.11. In all which cases, the accent does not interfere
with the syllabication. So likewise in many cases, wherein the accent marks
the tone syllable, and in which there is no euphonic one; as Gen. i. 2, ia
Vo-hi, TWIT Kho-shek, ib. ver. 3, WR) Vai-yo-mer, &c. The word 3A
Tho-hi, ib., ver. 2, seems to present two accentuations, viz. one with the em-
phasis on the penultima, the other on the ultima.
IL
ART. 50. ] ON SHEVA. 21
J, but this may be considered as being a part of the
letter.
A part of one of the substitutes of Sheva is occasionally
found under the last letter of a word; but this can
happen only when such letter is one of the gutturals Nn,
Y, or 1, with Mappik. 'The reason of this substitution
seems to be, that as these letters will not admit of the
rapidity of utterance which the other consonants will,
this vowel, or substitute, is added for the purpose of
affording due time for their enunciation; but, here the
(:) is dropped, as before, and the mark (-) only remains.
This mark, which is termed Furtive Pathakh, is, how-
ever, not to be pronounced after, but before, the letter
under which it is placed, as MW Ma-shiakh, not Ma-
shi-kha, Messiah, or Anointed. The same is the case
when the guttural is followed by another consonant
having a Dagésh with Sheva; as, NY Wd Pa-shaaht, Fait
Mig-gaaht ; not Pa-shahat, &c.
50. The marks, which have been termed “ the Sub-
stitutes of Sheva,” are, as it has already been intimated,
made to supply the place of Sheva, with one or other of
the guttural letters 8, 4, M, or y, for the reason just
given, with reference to the Purtive Pathakh. In many
cases, therefore, in which analogy would require the in-
sertion of Sheva (:), whether quiescent or not, upon the
occurrence of one or other of the gutturals, some one of
these substitutes will take its place. When, for instance,
the Shéva ought to be quiescent, the substitute will uni-
versally be that which 1s homogeneous with the preceding
imperfect vowel, i. e. if (-) precedes, (-:) will be the
substitute; if (+), (=); if (+) 0, then (=) will be the
substitute. When the Shévd ought to be initial, then
the substitute most congenial with such guttural, or with
the analogy of the word, will be preferred. In the first
22 LECTURE I. CART. St.
case, & mostly takes (-:), occasionally («); 7 (=),
rarely (-:); TM (-), never (+); » always (7); (=) 1s
never used, unless (+) Ahatiph, i. e. 0, precede, or
unless it stand in the place of a 1 Khdl/ém, which has
been rejected. In these last cases, however, usage alone
can be relied on.
On the Points DacresH and MaAprpix.
51. Some notice has already been taken of Dagésh
(Articles 9. 10. 11.); we now have to shew what are
its offices. Ist. It will double any letter, which from
its situation is capable of reduplication; and, 2dly, it
will deprive the letters MDD Ja of their aspiration. In
the first case, whenever any consonant has this point in-
scribed, and is, at the same time, both preceded and fol-
lowed by a vowel, such consonant is to be considered as
being double, e. g. 19 Limméd. But, if such consonant
is not preceded by a vowel, then it cannot be doubled;
and in that case, it is found only m the letters M5723,
inscribed merely for the purpose of taking away their
aspiration. Now, this mostly takes place when such
letter commences a syllable, as \3 Caph, jA Ben, &c.;
in some when it ends it, as MP kamét. It must be re-
membered, that whenever any one of these letters is in a
situation to be doubled, the aspiration will also be taken
away by the influence of this point, e. g. DD Kippér.
52. In the first of these cases, this mark has been
termed Dagésh forte, in the second, Dagésh lene ;
terms, it must be confessed, ill chosen to designate the
offices just described. I should prefer terming it Dagésh
in every case, its situation being always. sufficient to de-
termine its powers, according to our rule.
53. Mappik is a single point (like Dagésh) inscribed
in the letter M.only; asi. Its office is to shew, that this
ART. 54, ] ON THE MARK RA-PHE. 23
letter, when so marked, is to be considered as retaining its
consonantal power, and to be treated as such, both in the
pronunciation and etymology. The Jews consider it also
as extending to the letter >, as in PTW, Yehu-diy-ya.
On the Mark J" Ra-vue.
54. Formerly when Ddgésh was not found in any of the 22722
jetters, a mark called 27 Ra-phé, was placed above it, in order to
shew that the point had not been omitted by mistake. With the
ancient Syrians this was nothing more than a point made with red ink.
The Hebrews probably wrote it in the same way: but, as this point
might be mistaken for the vowel Khélém, when printed, or, for one of
the accents, the form of it was altered for a short line thus ( - ),
which is still found in the Hebrew manuscripts,” though very rarely in
the printed books.
55, Other points are sometimes found placed over certain words in
the Hebrew Bible, the use of which is now unknown. The accounts
given of these by the Rabbins may be seen in Buxtorf’s Thesaurus
Grammaticus, lib. 1. cap. v. art. 6, which need not be detailed here.
56. It will be seen by recurring to the table of vowels
(Art. 29.), that Aholém is given with a 1 Vaw for its
fulerum, thus }. The Vaw, however, is frequently left
out. But, as the letters & Sim and & Shin are also
written with a point on the left or right side,. respec-
tively, a question may arise, as to how the AKholém is to
be represented in the case of its following W, or pre-
ceding &% The answer will be: Supposing any conso-
nant to follow & Siz; and this letter to have no other
vowel-mark, then will its own diacritical point also stand
for Kholém ; as M3 Sd-né. In every other case, & will
be merely the consonant s, as given in the Table (Art. 4.).
57. In the next place, with respect to W% Shin. Sup-
* And in these it is sometimes put over a letter requiring Dagésh forte by
analogy, also over S and 7 when quiescent.
24. LECTURE I. CART. 58.
posing any consonant to precede & Shin, having neither
Vowel-mark nor Shkévd, then will the diacritical point of
vw Shin stand also for Ahdlém, thus, ¥2 Bésh. But, if the
preceding letter have a Vowel or Shévd, & Shin will be
used merely as directed in the table of consonants. This
expedient has been resorted to, in order to avoid the
inconvenience of marking these points twice over, which
must otherwise have taken place. It will also be seen in
the table of the vowels, that the letter» Yod has been
placed above the point (- ) called Khiritk Gadol, in
order to determine when it is a perfect vowel or not.
This > Yod, however, is frequently omitted; and, when
that is the case, an accent, as it will be seen hereafter,
is mostly added to make the distinction. But, as this
accent is also sometimes omitted, analogy will then be the
only criterion by which it can be known.
58. The learner will also perceive, that Kaméts, and
Kaméts Khatiph, have the same form, viz. (+). How
then, it may be asked, are they to be distinguished? I
answer, whenever any consonant follows the mark (+ )
having also a vowel of its own, it will be seen, that
(+) must make a perfect syllable, and must therefore
be the vowel Kaméts, as in the word 157 Ra-phé. For
here, as 5 begins the following syllable, the 4 with (7)
must necessarily make a perfect syllable: (+) therefore,
will be the perfect vowel Kaméts. In the next place,
(+) found under either of the letters abo, (Art. 26.)
at the beginning of a word, will be Kaméts ; because,
in this case, a contraction must have taken place;
as, ona Ba-kholt, for Onn (Art. 85.), the (+) here
being compensative for (-) (Art. 116.). So in JANA
Ba-o-hol-ka, for 177873. ;
The following are the exceptions: 1. Should (+: )
Khatéeph Kaméts follow (+), or a (+) whieh has
ART. 59. | ON THE MARK RA-PHE. 95
arisen out of («= ) by the operation of the Rule, Art.
116. 2. then will (+) be Kaméts Khatuph, and must be
read as 0, although an accent accompany it; as TV 2 Po-
hol-ka, 11 which case the (+) being sustained by an
accent, becomes equal to the perfect vowel (13). And,
2dly, when the consonant following (+) has no vowel,
and the syllable is without an accent,. (+) will be
Kaméts Khatiph ; as, 1122) Khok-ma, 137 Ron-nt, Yap?
Tk-botz, &c.
59. As to the names of the vowels, &c., they are generally Chaldee
or Syriac, whence some have argued that their invention is modern.*
But as this will involve questions of no importance to the learner,
nothing need be said on the subject here.
60. Whether the pronunciation here ascribed to the different con-
sonants and vowels was that in use in ancient times, it is impossible
now to say: nor is it of much importance either to the learner or the
critic. That the approximation is near, there cannot be much doubt ;
and that the system is generally the same is, perhaps, sufficiently eer-
tain. But as the Jews differ in their pronunciation in different coun-
tries, we have here taken that of the Portuguese Jews, as nearly as it
‘could be obtained, which is generally allowed to be the best.
* The heads of the arguments urged on this question may be seen in the
Institutiones Ling. Heb. by Schultens, p. 53, &c., or in the Arcanum punctationis
revelatum, by Capell, &c.
26 LECTURE II. CART. 61..
LECTURE II.
ON THE HEBREW ACCENTS, &c.
61. Havine given tables of the Hebrew consonants
and vowels, with some explanations and rules relating to
their powers and use, we now come to consider the
accents, and to give a table exhibiting their forms, situa-
tions, and names, to be followed, as before, with some
observations on their nature and application. ‘The fol-
lowing table given by Alting and adopted by Schultens
and Gesenius, has been chosen as sufficiently extensive
and explicit for our present purpose.
The word here taken for the purpose of exhibiting the
-accents, is cited from Isaiah lvii. 18, and signifies, with its
affixes, “ And I will heal him.” The distinctive powers
which these accents are believed to possess, we shall omit
for the present.
62. The Hebrew accents are found placed below,
above, and on a level with, the line of consonants. Those
which are found below, are twelve in number: their situ-
ations, forms, and names are as follows:—
No. Sit. and Form. Nante.
1 JARDIN pro or pry sillak.
< IANDIN} Mans Athnékh.
3. FANDIN} NTIDD Tiphkha.
4. INNS Do. aitovon
5. TINDIN} Pan Tevir.
6 TNDIN am Yethiv.
7. IINDIND mn Miantkh
8. ANDINA JM Mahpak.
* Used in the poetical books alone.
ART. 62. |
No. Sit. and Form. .
9. WINBIN
10. TANI
1. IASB)
2 SET
ON THE
ACCENTS. oF
Name.
nD
x19
Do. m3
Pa
Yerakh.
Merca.
Id. doubled,
Darga.
Those which are placed above the line of consonants,
Their names, forms, and situa-
are eighteen in number.
tions, are as follows :—
No.
13
Sit. and Form.
SEIN)
WIRD)
RDN
TN|INI
ANDI)
JARDIN
IND}
AND
JARDIN)
JANDA]
INDI)
ISD)
ANDIN
IND IN
IANDIN]
IANA
INK)
.
e
TRDWN)
Name.
wr)
Id. with yr3
yop Apr.
773 Apt
Sable
ROWS
nw
NPAT
7
wi,
nw
TD TP
PTY SUPA
Mabp Rehm
Re TP
area
rma
BID
Reévidh.
Géresh in the poetical books.
Sakef Katon.
cakef Gadol.
Ségolta.
Pashta.
Shalshéleth.
Sarka,
Pazer.
Géresh.
Id. doubled.
Karné Phara.
Télisha Gédola.
Teélisha Kétanna.
Kadma.
arka anterior.
Ménach saperior.
Mahpak superior.
The three last are found thus in the poetical books
alone.
The accents, found both above and below the line at
28 LECTURE II. CART. 63.
the same time, are four. Their names, forms, and situa-
tions, are as follows :—
No. Sit. and Form. Name.
. IIN|INI Mahpék with Merca.
ee NBN) Zarké with Mer ca.
3. INNBIN} Sarké with Mahpék.
" ITSDIN) Manakh with Do.
One only is found in the same line with the consonants.
NVAINDIAN 129 Legarmé, or PDS Péstk,
according to its order of consecution.
It should be observed, that, as several of these accents
have the same form, they are to be distinguished by their
positions only. The best way to get acquainted with
them is, to write them over a few times, first with, and
then without, the tables.
63. Several of these accents are occasionally called by other names
in the Rabbinical commentaries, with which the student should be ac-
quainted. Ziphkhé is sometimes called S717; and, when preceding
either Sillék or Athnékh, is termed N28 Meaild. Segolté is also
called N'7I2D, N'2AID, “NW, and QW, Ségold, Stguld, Sharé, or Shré.
Mercéa TPAD, or doubled, is also called PQOW PIN two rods, or
staves. Pashta is sometimes called Owe Pashét. Pazér is called
JO? WE Pazér Katén. Karné Para is also styled Oita WE Pazér
Gadél. Teélisha Gédolé is termed SOX Tarsd. Télisha Kétannd,
WOM Talshd, and NOW Tarsé. Géresh is termed D0 Téres, and
preceded by SOT72, NVIN Azld. Gérdshdyim is also styled MYONW
Tarsayim. Darga Dab3 “pw Shophar Galgal. Miunakh is termed
“wh IDIW Shophdr Yashar, and W2i 7Piwi Shophdr Holék. Yethiv
is styled DNA WDIW Shophar Mukddm, and BW DW Shophar
Mashpél. Mahpaék JP “BIW Shiphar Happik. Yérakh is also
called Da23 Galgél. Munakh, immediately preceding Athnakh, Za-
képh Katon, or Zarka, is termed s>y Hillut ; but when on the penul-
timate syllable of any word, and followed by either of these accents,
it is termed van Mécarbél. Kadmda, when occupying the place of
the Euphonic accent Métheg, is termed W312 Mazzé. Merca is
termed NOWE NPM Mercd Péshitd, and WAN2 Madrik. The last
ART. 64. | ON THE ACCENTS. 29
of these terms is applied to Métheg, whenever it is added for the pur-
pose of completing a syllable, i.e. of pronouncing an imperfect, like a
perfect vowel.
64. Some of these accents are confined to the first, some to the
last, and others to the tone, syllable of the word to which they are
attached.
65. Those on the first syllable are termed Prepositives; those on
the last, Postpositives. The rest are named as above.
66. The Prepositives are, 2 Télisha Gédola, = Yéthiv; and in the
poetical books, — Tiphkhaé anterior, © Géresh, with Réviah, and some-
times > Munakh and = Zarké.
67. The Postpositives are, — Pésik, in every case, = Ségoltd,
- Pashté, = Zarka, and 2 Télisha Kétannd.
68. When any of these Prepositives or Postpositives
are found in any word, the tone-syllable can be known
only by analogy.*
69. Various offices have been ascribed to these accents. By some
they are thought to have been attached to the sacred text, in order to
regulate the tone of voice, either in reading or chanting. Others
have supposed them to have been affixed for the purpose of dividing
it into its several members, as verses, the larger and smaller members
of sentences, &c. and to point out the different dependencies which
these parts have upon one another. Others, again, have assigned to
them emphasis, parenthesis, parallelism, &c. while others have given
them all these offices together. Some, again, have supposed them to
be of divine, others of human, origin. In the present work we shall
consider their application to the text, as the best grammarians usually
have done, viz. as intended to divide the context into its different
members, and to determine (for the most part) the tone-accent of the
words in which they are found. As to their authority, we cannot
allow it to be divine, until better proofs than any hitherto offered are
afforded on that point. As coming from men, who had perhaps made
the Hebrew Bible the study of their lives, they are valuable. They
may, nevertheless, be rejected, whenever a more convenient division
can be discovered.
70. These accents are again divided, with respect to
their offices, into Tonic, and Euphonic, accents.
* See the 122377 YW appended to Buxtorf’s Bible, last paragraph.
30 LECTURE II. ART. 71..]
71. The tonic accent, (which occurs, for the most part,
alone,) however situated, can affect only the ultimate or
penultimate syllable of any word, which it does by
directing the emphasis to be placed on that syllable.
When the Prepositive or Posipositive accents are used,
the syllable on which the emphasis is to be placed can be
known only by the analogy of the word. In other cases,
the accent will point it out.
72. When a word has more than one tonic accent, and
both happen. to be the same, the first will have the em-
phasis; as Tahal Thé-hi: but, when they are not the
same, the last will have it; e. g. owing U-lémé-adim.
73. Generally, all words either being, or terminating
in the form of, Segolates, will have the emphasis on the
penultimate syllable: all others on the ultimate.
74. The Euphonic accent supplies a sort of secondary
emphasis to the syllable on which it is found, which can
never be the ultimate of any word, nor the penultimate
of those having the Segolate form.
Of this sort, modern grammarians count two, Métheg
in, and Makkaph *pt2. The former of these has the
same form with Sillik (:), but, as it can never hold
the same situation, the distinction is easily m made.
The latter takes the form of our hyphen; as in 23° ns
Lith-kol, and generally deprives the preceding word of
its tone-accent. In neither case is their insertion al-
ways solitary ; for, several Méthegs are sometimes found
in the same word, and several words are occasionally
connected by the operation of Makkdph. Particular
rules for their insertion will be given hereafter.
75, One mark more it may suffice to notice here, and that is, a
small circle sometimes found over a word in the Hebrew context;
thus, nn. The word over which this mark is found is said to be
2D Kéthiv, or written; and the mark itself is intended to direct the
ART. 76._| ON THE ACCENTS. ol
attention of the reader to some note to be found either in the margin,
or at the foot of the page. For the most part, it directs the reader to
a various reading, on the right side of which we find the word “))?) Kér,
which means either reading or read.* The readings thus pointed out
in the Hebrew Bible amount to about 1000, and are generally preferred
to those found in the text. The far greater part of them have been
found by Kennicott and De Rossi in the MSS. which they collated.+
76. Having thus far explained the powers of the
several consonants, vowels, accents, &c., and given some
rules on the subject of their combination, we now proceed
to a portion or two of the Hebrew text, im exemplification
of what has been said. The passage we shall first take
is, Zephaniah ii. 8, in which we have all the letters of
the Alphabet, with most of the vowels, and other marks.
In reading this, we would advise the learner to read
each syllable distinctly, with a slight pause; and to
continue this practice, until he is perfectly familiar with
all the consonants, vowels, &c.
8 7 6 = - she : ,
avo mp o> ominvony oan 195
lzhad Ku-mi léyom Yého-vah{-néum li-khak-kit La-kén
15 14 13 12 1 10 9
Ae - ay, sv by at -) by y : ae
Jaw? nmiszod AP? OMA ADS? wWAWA
lish-pok mam-la-koth — lékov-tst go-im lé-ésoph — Mish-pa-tt — ki
* The form of this word is most probably that of “2 or 24ND, which
written at length would be S™))2 read, as a participle. But in this case, the
quiescent final letter is frequently dropped. For an explanation of the Maso-
retic marks the Tiberias of Buxtorfius should be consulted.
+ Kennicott’s Dissertatio generalis. §. 39. De Rossi Proleg. §. xxxix.
{ This word is pronounced STS Adé-néi by the Jews, whenever it is found
as pointed above: but, when it precedes the word SITS in the text, it then
takes the points of the word = nie) 3! Elohim, thus mm, and is then pro-
nounced Elohim. This is a mere Jewish superstition, derived from a con-
siderable antiquity ; it having been their opinion, that this name ought to be
pronounced by none except the High Priest, and by him only once in the year.
32 LECTURE Il. [ART. 76.
23 22 21 20 19 17 16
18
‘NIP WRD OD BR NI 72 ML OD
kin-a-thi bé-ésh ki ap-pt khadron kol zah-mi hi le-hem
26 25 24
SYINT72 IDNA
ha-a-rets-kol tc-a-kél
The learner will recollect, that he is to read, beginning
at the right, and proceeding towards the left, hand
(Art. 3.); and that the consonants must precede the
vowels (Art. 31.). The numbers are added to shew the
order of the words. Let us now proceed to analyse the
syllables, &c.
In No. 1, we have Ldmed with Kamétz, making the open syllable
La. After this we have Caph with Tséré, followed by Nn, making
the syllable kén. Here, according to our system of syllabication, we
should have had some imperfect vowel under the Caph, (Art. 34.),
which would have been sufficient to make this syllable perfect ; but
the accent Mahpdk being added, the anomaly is corrected (Art. 34.).
No. 2. Khéth with Pathakh, followed by Caph having the point
Dagésh inscribed: and, as a vowel foilows this letter, it must be
doubled, the point is, therefore, Dagésh forte (Art. 51.). The first
syllable, consequently, is khak ; the second is ku, which is composed of
the second Caph, and the vowel Shurék. We then have the mark
called Makkaph, which is used to connect numbers 2 and 8 together,
like our hyphen (Art. 74.).
No. 3. Lamed with Khirik, followed by Yéd, making the open
syllable 2; to this is added the tonic accent Pashta, which may be re-
presented by Ji.
No. 4, we have Nén with Shévd. In this case Shévd is very slightly
pronounced (Art. 45.); but it is not reckoned as a syllable. In the
next place we have Alef with Kibbits followed by Mem. This syllable,
therefore, must be pronounced wm, in which wu has the sound of oo in
good. ‘The whole word will then be néwém, in which the @ will be
passed over as rapidly as possible. We then have the mark Makkaph,
as before.
No. 5. is the word Jehovah, pronounced Yéhd-vd. Here Shéva is
passed over rapidly as before. The point over the left limb of Hé is
the vowel Kholém; and, as the Vaw following has a vowel of its own, it
is not quiescent in the preceding vowel Kholém, which it otherwise
ART. 76. | ON THE READING. 33
would be (Art. 42—44.). The first syllable, therefore, including the
Shévd, will be Yého, the next Vah, in which the terminating He will
be quiescent in the preceding Kamétz. Over the Vam commencing
this last syllable, we have the accent Zaképh Katon. In no respect,
therefore, can the mark (+) under this Vaw be a Kamétz Khatéph.
(Art. 58.).
There now occurs nothing worth remark till we come to No. 11.
In the word ABN Le-ésoph, then, the first syllable consists of Laméd
with Ség6l, accompanied by an Euphonic accent (Art. 74.) called
Métheg, making a perfect syllable (Art. 34.). This syllable, therefore,
is open Lé. The Alef following, with Khatéph Ségol, which is a sub-
stitute of Shévd (Art. 50.) does not constitute a syllable ; and, there-
fore, it is passed over as rapidly as convenient in connection with the
following syllable S6ph; and this has the tonic accent Pashia
(Art..62.).
No. 12. The first syllable consists of Gimél with Kholém, followed
by Pan, quiescent, i.e. Vaw following an homogeneous vowel, and
having no vowel of its own, and, therefore, silent (Art. 42—3.). The
next syllable is commenced by Yod, with Khirik following ; and which,
by analogy, should be followed by another Ydd, as 5 Yim, or im
(Art. 14.): but this Yéd is frequently omitted, as it will be seen
hereafter. Khirik thus situated is nevertheless a perfect vowel: and,
as the syllable also ends with a consonant, the accent Géresh is added
to compensate for the anomaly (Art. 34.).
No. 13. 337%. Here the first letter has an Initial Shévd, which
will be passed over rapidly. In the next place we have }) Koph fol-
lowed by (+) either Kamétz or Kamétz Khatiph. It cannot be
Kamétz, because it precedes a consonant which has no vowel of its
ewn, and is accompanied by no accent, (Art. 58.) The first syllable,
therefore, will be Lékov, and the last, tst, which need not be explained.
On No. 14. it will be only necessary to remark, that the point
placed over the middle of the letter 9 is the accent Révidh, and not the
vowel Kholém, which indeed follows that letter. A recurrence to the
tables will always be sufficient to shew, that Révidh is placed over the
middle of a consonant, Kholém always on the one side.
No. 19. is one syllable only; the Khatéph Pathakh (-: ) found under
the M Kheth, being one of the substitutes of Shevd, is not counted in
the syllabication.
The names of the different accents will be found by
turning to the table, (Art. 62,) with which the Learner
D
34 LECTURE I. (ART. 76.
will do well in making himself familiar : otherwise, he
will occasionally confound them with the vowels, and, in
many instances, be unable to determine whether Sheva
begins, or ends a syllable, or, whether the mark (= ) be
Kaméts, or Kaméts Khatuph : and for this purpose, we
shall subjoin’ a passage, in which the greater part of
them is found. We shall add the syllables in Roman
letters, as in the last, in order to facilitate the reading.
2 Kines I. 6.
Inox rok odetpy novus pox aN
é-lé-nti = uar-yo-mer — lik-ra-thé-nti —ha-lad_— sh é-law Vai-yo-mért
oprat) dans mov-nws pends iw 9197
BER ee. tem, eth-kém es lékth—dsher ham-mé- lek—el shi-vi léki
nas bstina oodacpy band ooim cox np ros
at-ta béis-ra-él élo- peer unite belé Y¢ho- va a-mar ko é-law
1350) apy. abs, wana. vas ward mew
se te
la-ken hek-ron élo- hé zéviw béva- hal lid-rosh sho-ledkh
nig~a mag TUN? Dy Moy AED
moth—ki mim-mén-nad thé-réed—lo sham ha-li-tha—dsher —ham-mat-ta
:mign
ta-mith
It will not be necessary to point out the names of the
different vowels and accents found in this extract, as the
Learner will easily find them by recurring to the tables.
It may be necessary, however, to remark, that the accent
found between the third and fourth words is termed
Legarmé, not Pestk. The distinction consists in this :
that when the accent Miandkh precedes the mark (1 )
it is then termed Léegarmé. When it is termed Pesth,
some other accent always precedes.
The Learner cannot now do better than take a Hebrew
Bible and transcribe a chapter or more at a time, in
ART. 76. ON THE READING. 35
Roman letters, divided into syllables as given above ; and,
this he should continue until he is familiar with the syl-
labication. After this he may read, which he had better
do, aloud, until he finds no difficulty m enouncing every
word fully and correctly. A little perseverance will
accomplish this: and when he has succeeded, he will find
his progress both easy, and delightful. =“
D2
36 LECTURE Ill. [ ART. 77.
LECTURE III.
ON THE GENERAL PRINCIPLES WHICH PREVAIL IN REGULATING
THE ETYMOLOGY OF THE HEBREW LANGUAGE.
77. Irv is well known that changes take place in the
consonants and vowels of all languages, which can be
accounted for on no other principle than that of
euphony. Certain vowels and consonants would, in some
situations, introduce sounds so difficult of utterance and
so grating to the ear, that conversation would become
painful both to the speaker and hearer. In order to
avoid this, changes are found to take place in the
constitution of words, which, at first sight, appear to
be anomalous, and give great trouble to the learner
until the laws by which they are regulated are understood.
In no language is this more apparent than in the Hebrew
and some of its dialects, particularly the Arabic. In the
Sanscrit it prevails, perhaps, to a still greater degree ;
and is found in its descendant the Greek to give more
trouble to the learner than any thing else brought under
his observation. It is our intention to commence our
investigation of the principles of the Hebrew language
by detailing the rules by which these apparent anomalies
are regulated, for the purpose of enabling the learner to
account for the different forms of words as they occur.
Because, until he has some knowledge of this subject, he
will meet with scarcely any thing but difficulty ; and
may, indeed, after a study of some years, be induced to
confess that he is still a beginner.
78. It has been remarked, (Art. 42, &c.) that the letters contained
in the technical word ‘V8, will occasionally lose their consonantal
power, or, become quiescent in the sound of the preceding vowel, so
that the pronunciation of the word will continue the same whether
ART. 79. | ON ELISION. 37
these letters be written or not: and the consequence is, they are often
omitted; as, 22 for WP, O27 for OAT, OAS for MINS, oy
for NW, WWM for MIWA they (fem.) approach, p2>a for bain)
what (is it) to you? HY for ‘MYT I have known, &c. And, vice
versa, these letters will occasionally be inserted when the analogy does
not require them: as TIP for WB, ON. for Dp. ,* &e.
79. Hence, when Shévd (: ), or one of its Substitutes, happens to be
initial, and to precede one of the Jetters ‘IS, a contraction generally
takes place, by which both (:) and the “YJ8 letter is rejected, and
the following vowel drawn back to the place of the rejected
Shévad; e.g. TW for FSW, WAN for TASS, O22 for NAT,
TDD? for TPT, T22? for WET, POT for PTI, 2 for YP, 7 for
177, 192 for 7723, BY for DRY, (pl. of BY day,) OY for BNY,
(cities, pl. of Y,) DWNT for DWN, (pl. of WN head, where, how-
ever, the §& is retained.)
50. When any of the letters \)(]8 terminate a word, and have no
vowel either preceding or following them, they are often rejected: as,
SQW for TM2W a captive, “A for S12 a valley, \\2 for 2 a line, V3 for
MS a precept, TY for }TY or TT (passing) yet, ever, eternal.
When these letters remain, they are said to be otiose (Art. 43.),
~which may happen either in the middle, or at the end of a word: as
DSA thou broughtest, SA a valley.
Hence it is, that 7 standing as the third letter of a root, and losing
its vowel, is rejected : as, ney for TTD, originally m2 he reveals,
ou for mows, &c. This case is termed Apocope. The reason of
it, as will be seen hereafter, is the removal of the accent.
81. Any one of the letters 1, 1, or °, when preceded and followed
by a vowel, will occasionally be dropped: as, BVAT22 for SFPD I
visited them; CIID for OFAILH they visited them; Oj? for Oj? he
stood; }2 for 112 he understood; TW for TY a lamb, &c.
82. Either of the letters > or 2 when initial,+ and 3 generally when
* Hence it is that the letters 118, for 7? rarely occurs in such situation,
have been termed “ Matres lectionis,” and supposed to have been used as
vowels at some former period.
+ Mr. Stewart, after Gesenius, has given T) for T1) Jud. xix. 11; TUAA) for
MUNI 2 Sam. xxii. 41, &c.; hw for =Aw> Jer.xlii. 10, as instances that » or
2 having a vowel, is dropt by the apheresis. For my part, I doubt whether
these are not rather infinitives than preterites: and if they are so, the elision
comes under the above rule.
38 LECTURE Ili. [ART. 83,
terminating a syllable, and having a Shévd (: ), will be dropt: as, fae)
for ny bearing a child; FAY for NYT knonledge ; WA for Wz
approach ; W2 for W322 he draws near; TB. for W722, for TBM;
ANS for ADS anger; UPS. for NPN truth. In the last case, as the 4
is withdrawn, the following letter will, when possible, be doubled by
Dagésh, which may therefore be considered as being compensative.
likewise in the verb M2, when it ought to take (:) Shévd by
analogy, is dropt: as, 2 for mp? take.
The reason of these elisions seems to be, that as the * would be
enounced with some difficulty with an initial Shévd, and the 4 in either
case, on account of its. being a nasal, both have been neglected in
Writing.
8.3. When the last two. letters of any root, and occasionally in deri-
vatives, happen to be the same, one of them is usually dropt: as,
2D for 22D he surrounded ; ab for 390 surrounding ; |Y for HRY
a people; ES for E28 a mother; which, however, will return (by
Dagésh) when any asyllabic augment is made: as, 72D they have sur-
rounded ; "'2Y my people, &c. In this case, the rejection has probably
taken place, in order to avoid an ambiguity which might arise from the
operation of a rule hereafter to be considered, by which the Learner
or Reader may possibly misunderstand this for a reduplication, intro-
duced for the purpose of emphasis, or the like.
84. Letters of the same organ are, on account of a similarity of
sound prevailing among them, sometimes changed for one ano~
ther iby g-
1. Labials: 12, 23, or FA the back; SMD or NZ fat ; nbn or
ale} he escaped.
2. Palatals: "2D or 2D he shut up; 8 or on he travelled ;
YP or Y25)P a handle.
3. Linguals : *)8) or FIT he robbed.
4, Sibilants: ep) or boy or V2 he exulted; PRT or PVE he cried
out ; PIW or PIE he laughed.
5. Gutturals: 78D or ID he mas weak; OS or OY he was
mournful.
85. In a few instances, letters of different organs are changed one
for another: as,
1. Sibilants for Linguals: FPF or FYI he quenched; 82 or 2 he
watched ; WIND or NP a fir tree; WAM or IM he engraved.
2, Liquids for one another : YO? or Yn he oppressed ; PnP in ae
“WISI he caused to shine; TRY or ORY he opposed ; OVA or OAD tot~
ART. 86.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 39
tering ; 12¥ or \2¥ a proper name. So WBSI1223 Néevikadnétsar,
or MBNT1IDA2 Nevikadrétsar. te ¢:
86. The “ITS letters, considered either as consonants or quiescents,
will occasionally be changed for one another: particularly, when
the pronunciation of the word is not materially affected by the
change: e. g. DSi2 or = bie rags; XT or WIT Doée, a proper
name ; Jon or T2> he went; S772 or ATM baldness ; S172 or MN
a collection; W87 or wi the head; DEN7 or 22 an animal so called;
THON or PW the first ; 3 he revealed, for yD, &e.
87. In like manner 2 is occasionally found in the place of one or
other of the JZS8 letters: as, 222 for 22) he set up; TMS2 for MS he
nas beautiful. So in the Syriac, ipl alep for Daan he kills.
88. The letters of a syllable are sometimes transposed ; as, MDD for
920 he nas foolish ; a2 for WAD a lamb; AW for WH2 he breathed;
EB for VIB he broke out; PIS for PS2 he sighed; APSA for NDA
vallies: and, in some cases, a letter is transposed to another syllable:
as, my for m9 wickedness ; maby for mony a garment.
These changes and transpositions (i.e. from Art. 84. to this place)
do not affect the grammar of the language. Their principal use is, to
enable the student to ascertain what roots, &c. are said to be cognate ;
that is, are related to one another in their radical letters; and, having
the same, or very nearly the same signification, are often used one for
another. The preceding, as well as the following, affect the gramma-
tical forms of words.
89. When the 4 of the Mithpahél species of conjugation would, by
analogy, precede any of the Sibilant letters (Art. 22.), a transposition,
and occasionally a change, of that letter will take place: e.g. In the
first case: PROM for YRDNT he loaded himself; “AAW for
“WITT he caused to keep. In the second: PTO for PTET he
justified. In this case only, is the 1 changed to ©.
2. But, when a letter of the same organ with 1) (see Art. 22.) fol-
lows, both will coalesce by Dagésh being placed in the radical letter :
e. g. WAIT for WIT, root W2T he spoke; WMO for WONT, root
“TI he was clean; OPA for DALIT, root SBA he was complete.
This coalescence, which has been termed Assimilation, is found very
generally to prevail: but not without some exceptions, which will
be noticed hereafter.
3. In a few instances this principle of assimilation is also found to
extend itself to other letters: e. g. WIT for WNW, root zt he was
pure; TIB2M for MP2NT, root MP2 he covered ; N22 for NBINT,
ITT
40 LECTURE III. CART. 90.
root N22 he declared; OBITS for DAMN, root BY exalting ; Dawn
for DAWN, root DAW he desolated, &c.
90. Letters are sometimes added, either for the purpose of facili-
tating the pronunciation, or, for modifying the signification of words:
e.g. in the first case : Deans for 2A yesterday ; VIS for YF the
arm.* In the second: “328 most cruel, from 732 crucl, &c. Of this
kind, are the paragogic letters, as well as those used in forming the
different species of nouns, conjugations, &c., of which an account will
be given hereafter. The first of these cases is termed Prosthesis;
the second Lpenthesis, Paragoge, Héémanthi, &c. according to their
different offices and uses.
91. Letters are occasionally dropped (Art. 79. 82.), so also 5, (and
7 in the Syriac, Chaldaic, and Arabic,) terminating words in the plural
number, when those words happen to be in the state of definite con-
struction, of which more hereafter. 4 likewise, in a very few instances
at the end of proper names: as, pela) for 777279, for the reason given
in Art. 82.
On the Contractions which take place in the Vowels.
92. As it may occasionally happen in combining the vowels with the
consonants, that certain sounds may be produced either disagreeable to
the ear, difficult of utterance, or, from some reason or other, generally
unknown to the people speaking a given language; it is of importance
to know in what cases these difficulties are found to take place in the lan-
guage before us, and by what means their occurrence is obviated.
93. Whenever any vowel! not homogeneous with one of the letters
‘or ) (Art. 43.) happens to precede such letter, a vowel will arise,
from the combination, partaking of the sound of both.
1. (-) Péthakh preceding } will become Khalém: e.g. 1 for ND
death; T25 for THY (for T2M, Art. 79.) he begets ; 2WV for >W>
(for WIT id. ) he causes to reside.
* Of this sort are the words stablish and establish, special, and especial, in
English.
+ So in the Sanscrit regularly, a and uw become 0; a and 2, e. See the
Grammars. From this, and similar cases which will occur, it appears extremely
probable, that 1, when a consonant, was originally pronounced like onr w, as
man Malkewth, which is regularly written nyo Malkiith: and so of
ethers.
ART. 93, 2.7] CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 44
2. Van | preceded by (+) Khatiph, (-) Kibbits. (+) Ségél, or
(~) Tséré, will become 3: e. g. 729 for TY), or Tol (from TT
or mirhinb Art. 79.) he is begotten ; DA) for DI? standing ; naan for
m2? (probably for my, Art. 79. of B ira) king, and DW or
abla being, root TT was, ) regning, kingdom. So TIA? for
Uatal ep , root PWIW for WW he was low ; aA for wh emptiness ; Wa
for WI2 inanity, &c.
3. In like manner, ? preceded by (-) Péthakh, will become qui-
escent in (~), the (-) disappearing: as, WB for M2 a house; PY
for TY an eye; ™A, or by Art. 80, 2 for 812 a valley; AON for
2O°R (for 2OVIN or DONA, Art. 79,) it does well.
4. When the vowels () or () precede °, the contraction will take
place in”. perfect: e.g. (12 for 2 (formed perhaps from 7112
cutting, and 401 or OWT from the root TT he was) a covenant;
PYWST for WNT beginning ; WS for WS aman. So "2 for 2
rebellion ; saw for ‘aw captivity ; ST) for "30 half.
5. In like manner, when Shévé precedes any perfect or im-
perfect vowel, or, a substitute of Shévd follows an imperfect one,
a contraction may take place, in which the Shéva or its substitute will
disappear: as, Ist. SW for MSY elevation; nsop? for Ds?
meeting; YaS° for TPN) he says, &c. 2. “tas? for “aN. saying ;
DEN for Ds? he separates; and, by Art. 78, 28) for 2Q%) he
prospers.
6. The vowel (-) or (+) preceding a guttural letter with (+)
Kaméts, is frequently changed into (+) for the sake of euphony: as,
TIS masc. WIS fem. one ; ONT for QT the mountains.
On the Changes of the Vowels.
93. Could we suppose Hebrew words to remain unaltered as to
their original forms, or unvaried in pronunciation with reference to the
syllable on which the accent is to be placed, we could also suppose that
no variation would ever take place in the vowels. But the fact
is, the forms of words vary in order to express the different shades
of meaning of which the root is capable: and, from this as well as
other causes, the accented syllable will not always remain the same:
and, consequently, as the pronunciation of the word thus varied
must alter, the vowels accompanying it must vary likewise.
95. Hence it will appear, that two circumstances are to be re-
garded with reference to the change of the Hebrew vowels. One is,
42 LECTURE Il. (ART. 96.
the etymology or form of the word; the other, the situation of the
accent.
96. With respect to the form of the word, this can only be known
from rules hereafter to be detailed. The principles, however, upon
which words are augmented, may here be considered; and that will be
sufficient at the present.
97. Any augment whatever prefixed to a word will not influence
our present considerations, as the changes of the vowels do not depend
upon that. We now have to do only with augments postfixed to
words; because it is upon these alone that such changes depend.
98. These augments, then, may be considered as being of two
sorts: one commencing with a vowel, and which may be termed
Asyllabic ; the other with a consonant, which may be termed Syé-
labic.*
99. We can readily perceive, that, upon any Asyllabic augment
being attached to a word, the terminating consonant of such word
must be taken in order to enounce it, otherwise it must remain silent,
it being contrary to the laws of syllabication for any vowel to begin a
syllable (Art. 31.). If then we attach the asyllabic augment 9,
which is the mark of the plural number masculine, to any word, such
as DY a people; or 12 pure, we must necessarily take the last letter of
either of. these words in order to enounce it: and, if by analogy the
word have but one terminating letter, then must the preceding syllable
necessarily be perfect ; but, if not, imperfect ; e.g. 12 pure, (root 172, the
iT being rejected by Art. 78.), adding © ., we have 2°72 Ba-rim, pure
ones, &c. But, taking OY a people, which is derived from the root
DY, (one of the radicals being rejected by Art. 83, we have 5Y,) and
adding ©. we shall have Day Ham-mim, peoples. It will entirely
depend, therefore, upon the analogy of the word whether the preceding
vowel is to be perfect or not, due regard being had to the laws of
syllabication.
100. In the next place, if our augment is Syllabic, as B2, (w it: is
one of the pronominal affixes signifying your, and carries ns accent
with it), and, as Hebrew words generally end in a consonant, the pre-
ceding vowel, in such case, must necessarily be imperfect ; because,
both the vowel will be without an accent, and it will be followed by a
* The reason of these terms is obvious: a vowel cannot commence a syl-
lable in Hebrew; hence augments thus commencing are termed Asyllabic :
those commencing with a consonant, are for a similar reason termed Syllabic.
ART. 101..] CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 43
consonant: e. g. 8272 Bar-kém, your pure one; or, B22Y Ham-kém,
your people.
101. Hence, it will be seen, that a perfect vowel may occasionally
become wnperfect ; and, vice versd, an imperfect one, perfect: i. e. in
other words, vowels will be changed for their homogeneous perfect or
imperfect ones, as the rules of syllabication shall require.
102. This correspondence in the vowels, which is termed homo-
geneous, is of two sorts, Direct, and Oblique.
1. The direct correspondence is that of the perfect with the imperfect
vowels, respectively, as (+) with (-), («) with (+), &c. as: given im
the Table (Art. 29.).
2. ‘The oblique correspondence is that of vowels in some respects
dissimilar ; as (7) or (~) with (~) or (+); (~) or (+) with (°.) or
(+); and (7) with (=). ,
103. Generally, therefore, when any change of the vowels must take
place, in order to comply with the laws of syllabication, those vowels,
which are either directly or obliquely homogeneous with their pri-
mitives, will be taken: the directly homogeneous ones for the most
part: the other cases may be considered as exceptions to be learned
from usage.
104. This change of vowels, moreover, will occasionally affect the
penultimate syllable of a word, as well as the ultimate. Let us now
see, by what laws the change will be regulated in this case.
105. Generally; when the penultimate syllable ends in a perfect
mutable vowel, that vowel will be rejected, and its place supplied
either by Shéva, or one of its substitutes, according to rules hereafter
to be given; but, if that vowel be zmmutable, it will remain unaltered,
e.g. affixing ©, to 72 a word, we shall have O°D2T Déva-rim,
words : but, attaching it to TB visiting, where the penultimate vowel
is immutable by analogy, we have 5°72 persons visiting.
106. In like manner, if the penultimate syllable end in a consonant,
and have no accent, it will remain immutable, whatever be the affix ;
as, WI" a sanctifier, DWP or BW IND.
107. In all cases, in which the penultimate is emmutable either by
analogy or position, the ultimate vowel, if not immutable by analogy,
will be rejected: but, when both are immutable, no change will take
place in the vowels, whatever be the affix. Examples of the first
case, TP2 a person visited, VPP, OAV! ; of the second, DYA2D,
D2yazA.
108. The changes to which the vowels are liable from the accidence
A4. LECTURE Ill. [ART. 109.
of the Grammar, can affect no vowel beyond the penultimate : because,
first, the prefixing of any augment whatever to a word does not affect
its vowels (Art. 97.); and, secondly, as all syllables beyond the penul-
timate cannot be affected by the tone-accent, nor consequently, by any
augment affixed to such word, the syllables thus situated will remain
undisturbed by grammatical accidence.
109. The reason for abridging words, either in the ultimate, or
penultimate syllable (for both seldom occur together) when any
augment is affixed, seems to be this: Were words thus to be aug-
mented in addition to their own vowels, their length would be incon-
venient for the purposes of conversation, which, in every language, is
shortened as much as perspicuity will allow. And, on the other hand,
as those vowels which have been termed immutable constitute the dis-
tinctive character of the words in which they are found, perspicuity
forbids that any change should take place in them. But, as it is
impossible for the learner to know, till he comes to consider the ety-
mology of words, which vowels are to be considered wnmutable, it
will be unnecessary to add any thing further on this subject now, espe-
ciaily as it is our intention to point out these vowels as we proceed.
On the Use of Shéva and its Substitutes.
110. Having laid down the general Jaws relating to the changes of
the vowels, we now proceed to notice a few affecting the use of Shéva
and its Substitutes. To enter into all the minutiz about these points,
would, we believe, be neither necessary nor agreeable to the student:
because, the length and subtilty of the enquiry would not only
be embarrassing, but, when brought to a close, would probably leave
him in possession of less practical knowledge on the subject, than the
use of tables and his lexicon would supply. We shall therefore be
brief, contenting ourselves with generals, and noticing a few anomalies
as we proceed.
111. Shévd, with its Substitutes, may be either initial or final (Artt.
45, 50.). They may be initial at the commencement of any syllable,
whether that be at the beginning or in the middle of a word. They
must be at the end of a syllable when final.
112. By grammatical accidence, however, two of these may concur
as mitials: but, as no one of them stands for a vowel, and cannot,
therefore, constitute a syllable when in conjunction with any consonant,
some change must necessarily take place. And in this case, the first
ART. 112.] SHEVA AND ITS SUBSTITUTES. 4.5
Shévd, or Substitute for Shévd, will be changed into some imperfect
vowel.
Shévad so situated, which always happens at the beginning of a word,
mostly takes Khirik (-), sometimes Pdthakh (-) or Ségél (+): as,
1, WP) for TD he visits, TP2 for TPZ in visiting : 2, 22 for 5229
wings, and WPS for “PRS I visit. The use of Péthakh (-), how-
ever, is rare, and can be known only from usage: Ségél can occur only
with S* or 7.
2. One or other of. the Substitutes of Shévd may concur with Shévd
or with one another, either in the beginning, or in the middle of a
word ; the change will then be into the imperfect vowel homogeneous
with the substitute; e.g. WIS for WIN men, FEMI for DOP he is
turned. So, in the middle, TVE for TOPE thy work, unten a for
TV2Y they stand. There are, however, ote exceptions : as mys
it is made, or done, masc., but fem. mw ya, which can be ea by
consulting the Concordance or from constant edie only.
3. But, as the substitutes of Shévd are various, it may be necessary
here to state in what cases either of them is preferred ; because, upon
this will depend the operation of the foregoing rule.
4, Generally, when either of the guttural letters commences a syl-
lable, whether in the beginning or in the middle of a word; and by
analogy should take (:) Shéva, Kh&téph Pathakh (-:) is mostly taken
in its place: e. g. 1. At the beginning of words: DFAS bait ;
DOI TIS your brother ; TW who, which; mwy hie tow 8 "Tn the
wide : Se his Dee VITIDA fear ye; TIDE she proceeded.
3D. There: is, however, a considerable number of exceptions to this
rule :+ and, 1st, Several monosyllables with their compounds com-
mencing with 8 will take (+: ) Khatéph Ségél in the place of Shévd ;
as, B ir=bel Eliméleh, a proper name. 2dly, Infinitives and Impera-
tives of the conjugation Kal when commencing with RS: as, DIDN
eating, or eat thou; mia)» saying, or say thou. Also, 3dly, The charac-
teristic 11 of the Hiphhil species, in verbs having the middle radical
letter quiescent and receiving some augment: as, jaw he restored
him or it; BAYT he put them to death. The first person singular
mostly follows the general rule, and takes (-:). 4thly, In a few words
(+: ) is found with ¥ at the beginning of a word: as, TY strength;
\
* This is regularly the case in the first person singular of the species Kal,
Niphal, and Pihél, when no guttural letter follows.
+ See also Art. 50.
46 LECTURE III. [ART. 113-
soy a pestil; NID. affliction; WN arrayed; 722 respond ye. Gthly,
Khatéph Ségél (+: ) is also found in the middle of a word: as, TON
towards the tent; TIS) they take hold of thee; VAT and they be-
come inflamed ; *2NBIT). she concewwed me. 7thly. In the following we
have (1: ) similarly situated: TOPWS T rest; YTTWM thou (fem.) didst
bribe. And, 8thly, Generally, whenever a mutable 7 is rejected, its
place may be supplied by (=) when commencing a word, and fre-
quently when in the middle, whatever be the accompanying consonant:
as, Dwi months, from WIT a month ; Dyorts from DON tent ;
OWI, plural of WIP holiness, &c. And, Ithly, Some cases occur
in which one or other of these Substitutes is found with a non-
guttural letter, and when analogy doés not seem to require it: e. g.
2 gold, Gen. ii. 12; MT2,2 she mwas taken, ib. ver. 23; and a
few others, which may perhaps be attributed to the mistakes of the
copyists.
113. When Shévaé ought, by analogy, to terminate a syllable, and
one or other of the gutturals happens to occupy the place of the ter-
minating consonant, either Shévéd will be used, or one of its sub-
stitutes.
Ist. Shévd will be used, Ist, in the second and first persons singular
and plural of the preterite, in verbs whose third radical letter is a guttural:
as, YAW thou hast heard, mase. ; FIVEW id. fem., where (-) is fur-
tive, and stands for Shévdé (Art. 49.); SYBW I have heard ; yaw
we have heard; DNYAW ye have heard, masc.; WAY id. fem. 2dly,
After a tonic accent: as, MIVIwN they (fem.) will hear. 3dly, Occa-
sionally after the vowels (-) (-) and (+) with a servile letter: as,
TINT he is, or ill be ; TIS [will strengthen ; TNS I am, or nill be.
And, 4thly, in some cases which seem to be regulated by usage only :
as, “293, not YI my anger.
2d. In every other case, any guttural letter terminating a syllable,
will take that substitute of Shévd which is homogeneous with the pre-
ceding vowel: as, TAYA) thou art caused to worship.
And, 3dly, vice versd, any guttural letter, originally commencing a
word, and having a substitute of Shéva in its own right, by Art. 112. 4.
upon being preceded by some particle having Shevd, but which by
Art. 112, must become an imperfect vowel, will require that such im-
perfect vowel be homogeneous with that in its own Substitute: e. g.
MWY. making, &c. prefixing 2, 4, 3, &c. which are the personal pree-
formatives of the present tense, we shall have mys he makes ; myyn
ART. 114. ] INSERTION OF DAGESH. 47
she makes ; my we make, &c. So with other particles: as
2,2, 7,235 as, TBPB of T2YD in making ; TPB, 4BYD, &e.
: etl tes
9
There are, however, certain exceptions, as in the first persons
singular of some of the species of conjugation, &c.; as, TDN
make, &c, which seems to be derived from MWY as before; all of
which will be found in the dictionaries.
114. There are a few other substitutions made for the mark Shévd,
which may be termed Euphonic. 'These take place, for the most part,
at the end of words where two Shévds concurring, by analogy, would
introduce some difficulty into the pronunciation.
The vowels introduced in these cases are (~), (-), or (-). Ség6l
is generally used when neither of the consonants concerned is guttural ;
(-) when one of them is so; and (- ) when the first of them is ? Yéd:
e.g. 722 for W2 a king; in which case, the primitive vowel, be
that what it may, is generally made to correspond, in sound at least,
with the substituted one, for the mere sake of euphony; “> for
TD a book; TY3 for VW32 a boy; MA for 22 a house; 4V)23 for
Ma a lady; nay for nay? (fem.) learning. So in verbs:
2) for ry (for Tr, Art.80.) he reveals ; On for On (for Tr,
ib.) he causes to reveal; T for “TT. (for WT) ib.), he becomes hot;
DUM for oun (for T2 YT) he raised, &c. Segolate nouns, having
1 for their middle radical letter, will take (+) Kaméts for their
first vowel: as, V2 death; WA middle, &c.
Rules for the insertion of DaGEsu.
115. The guttural letters, viz. 8, ™, ™, and Y, to which 1 may be
added, are, on account of the difficulty with which they are enounced,
incapable of being doubled ; the consequence is, they cannot receive
Dagésh forte: and, as they do not come under the rule relating to the
letters M2D722, they are also impervious to the operation of Da-
gésh when termed lene. Dagésh, therefore, cannot be regularly in-
scribed in any one of them.* But, when analogy requires its insertion,
either the preceding vowel is made perfect, by way of compensation,
as, %]2 Ba-rék, instead of 12 Bar-rék, in which case it is said to be
* In a few instances, however, itis found in and 8; as, DANI, 1 Sam.
x. 24; xvii. 25; Gen. xliii. 26; Ezek. xvi.4: Job xxxii. 21, &e.
48 LECTURE Il. CART. 116.
expressed; or, it is reckoned as Leing so, as, FEIT méra-khé-pheth,
instead of NOTTS for NPI ; here Dagésh is said to be wnplied.
116. Generally, Dagésh is to be inscribed in any one of the letters
122722, whenever such letter begins a syllable, provided the
preceding syllable do not end in a perfect vowel, or in one of the
letters "1778 in a quiescent state, or in one of the Substitutes of Shéva;
for then it will not be inscribed in any of these letters. The excep-
tions are as follows :—
Ist. Should the preceding vowel be perfect, or the syllable end in
one of the quiescent letters JZ78, still, if two of the MDPT2
letters concur in the commencement of the following word, the first
will receive Dagésh; e.g. ‘D2* WIR Emit-nd-ththa béphi, Psalm
Ixxxix. 2. See also Isa. x. 9, Gen. xxxix. 12, &c. Dagésh will
also be inscribed, should such perfect vowel or quiescent letter pre-
ceding have a distinctive accent; or, should the preceding word have
any accent on the penultimate. A few exceptions are found when
the preceding accent is conjunctive.}
2d. When the preceding word ends in * with Mappik (Art. 53.),
or one of the letters 1 or %, used as a diphthong, Dagésh will
be regularly inscribed in any MDDTAD letter: because, in this
case, such letter is considered as being a consonant terminating the
preceding syllable, as above: e.g. DWM MIZ2 Brtsid-déh ta-sim,
not thda-sim. Gen. vi. 16. See also Gen. xvii. 20, xxvii. 41; Ps.
li. 17. Hence it is, that after 7 or MIT Dagésh may be used,
because the former of these is read by the Jews °278 Adédndi, the latter
= ay! Elo-him, the vowels of which have been applied to the word
M7, There are, however, a few exceptions to this rule. See Isa.
xxxiv. 11: Ezek. xxiii. 42; Ps. lxviii. 18.
117. In the next place, when any one of the M2722 letters
occurs, not being at the beginning of a word, but following a final
Shévad (:), it will regularly receive the point Dagésh; as, 9
Pa-kad-ta, 122 Pa-kadt, excepting in the following cases.
Ist. When this (: ) stands in the place originally occupied by either
(+) or (*), in such word, Dagésh will not be inscribed in the N_PT22
* Some, however, read this passage without Dagésh.
+ Exod. xv. 11, 16, Isa. liv. 12. Jer. xx.9. Dan. iii. 3; v. 11. Ps. xxxv. 10.
Buxtorf.
ART LLT 125] INSERTION OF DAGESH. 49
letter following: e. g. 727? kid-va-ré-ka, not FID kid-ba-ré-ha :
the primitive form of which is (27 da-vadr. So 20, not *209, from
| 720 or 720. So also 2292 Bil-vév, from makahe Lé-véav.
2dly, After an initial Shévd (:) which must be pronounced,
but which will become quiescent, upon some particle being prefixed,
(Art. 46.) Dagésh will not be inscribed : as, DAa2 Gévil : and, prefixing
2 Dany Ing-vil, not Lig-bil. So wn a vesture, 22 weeping,
"A a he-goat, &c. as singulars, and O2I words, O)2F males,
i13}?, &c. as plurals. Hence also, Infinitives and Imperatives of the
form 72, with a suffix or any asyllabic augment, will be excepted °
as, 27) Rod-phé, his persecuting, T22w Shik-vd, lie thou donn, &c.
in verbs, the last radical letter of which is one of the 422722 letters.
3dly, After Shévé (:) quiescent, following an imperfect vowel which
has arisen out of some one of the substitutes of Shéva (Art. 112. 2.
&c.); e. g. MVDV2 Na-ham-da, not TT2YA, Isa. 1. 8.
But if such Shévdé itself has arisen out of one of these substitutes,
Dagésh will be inscribed ; as, Var? Yakh-péts, Deut. xxv. 7.
Athly, The affixed pronouns J, 07, 33, never receive Dagésh lene.
The letters D2T22 preceding MM; as, mason Mal-kith, OVTAY
Hav-dith, nay. Yal-dith. So also 132, and 722, when receiving any
asyllabic augment, the latter in 1722 Neg-da only, Ps. exvi. 14;* 1722
Big-do, 2 Kings ix. 13, &c., to which a few others might be added.
118. Dagésh, in its capacity of reduplicating certain letters, 1s some-
times found at the beginning of words; as, 3°12 pronounced
Maz-zé, “Os? MW Mo-shel Lé-mér, &c., in which case it is purely
euphonic. So also in WIPO Mik-kéddsh for WIP Mik-dash,
Exod. xv. 17; ‘1)28) Va-ek-kéré-ha for P81, &c.
119. And, on the contrary, there are a few instances, particularly in
verbs having one of the liquids either for the second, or the two last
radicals, in which every letter is written at length ; as, boy Tsil-lo,
Job xl.17 ; 2220) Khon-né-niz, Ps. ix.14; not 35% or %2af7: and others
wherein it is omitted, contrary to analogy ; as, rir for mimi she
sent ; ral for Ob praise ye; BQN for D2, Exod. v. 14, &e.
120. The following anomalies occur in the vowels occasionally, when
coming in contact with Dagésh EXPRESSED or IMPLIED, &c. The vowel
(- ) coming before a guttural letter, and containing an implied Dagésh
(Art. 115.) is for the sake of Euphony often changed into (~ ); as,
* Which, however, Ib. ver. 18, has Dagésh, 1122.
E
50 LECTURE III. [ ART. 120.
WAS (masce.) and AS (fem.) one ; BAT for OAM, or more com-
monly OAT mountains; MDM? flames ; Dera embers; MIEN
a leader; OQY cities; BMA? he repented himself ; oA ye
shall possess ; 17TON they purified themselves; %PIST) is it I? &c.
In some instances, (-) coming before Dagesh forte is changed into
(-) Khirik ; as, jn2 his daughter, from V2 (rather from 22; Arab.
lee ), Gen. xxix. 6; D929 thorns, from 2722, 2 Sam. xxiv. 22.
In the same manner, fA a wine-press ; IT consternation ; > measure ;
=D’) circuitous; DO} tribute; -\P door-post ; NB morsel; and TS the
side, change (-) into (:) upon receiving any asyllabic increment.
The same takes place with the verb 1.3 dying, similarly situated when
in the conjugation Hiphhil; as, OAT ye put to death, for OMIT,
Numb. xvii. 6, &c. The same is found to prevail in the following
verbs with syllabic increments ; viz. TAT? for TAT T-have be-
gotten thee, Ps. il. 7, &c. ; oAw) for paw ye shall possess, Deut.
xi. 8, &c.
_
ART. 121. | ON THE ACCENTS, 51
LECTURE IV.
ON THE GENERAL USE AND SITUATION OF THE ACCENTS.
121. Or the origin and use of these accents very little can now be
said with any degree of certainty. Much labour and_ learning,
indeed, have been bestowed on their investigation; but, after all, the
conclusions arrived at are beset with so much uncertainty, that some
of the best Grammarians both Jews and Christians have confessed,
that they know but little on the subject.* We must, therefore, be
content with the general rules respecting them} and here, with those
only which are found to interfere with the vowels of the text.
122. These accents (Art. 70.) are said to have two offices: one,
Tonic, that is, having the power to moderate the tone of voice in
which any portion of the Scripture is to be read; the other,
Euphonic, that is, when added, either for the purpose of giving a
kind of secondary accent to words, or for the purpose of implying joy,
grief, or some other affection of the mind. It seems likely, however,
that they are added in a great number of instances, for the mere
purpose of filling up the vowel-system, as to perfect or imperfect
syllables, and of obviating a great number of anomalies, which must
otherwise occur.
On the Tonic Accent.
123. With respect to the Tonic accent, it may be any one of those
found in the table (Art. 62.) excepting Métheg: and will always be
found either expressed, or implied,} on the penultimate or ultimate
syllable of any word. When on the penultimate, the word is said to
be yon Milhél: when on the ultimate, alr) Milrah. The
following rules for its insertion are taken from Alting’s Hebrew
Grammar.
* See my reply to Dr. Laurence, entitled, “‘ A Vindication of certain
Strictures,” &c. Cambridge, 1822, p.17, &c.
+ That is, if the accent be one of those termed Prepositwes or Postpositives,
it must be considered as giving emphasis to one or other of these syllables,
according to the analogy of the word.
Eo
aed
52 LECTURE Wilina, Rue. 123. 1.
ist, All words, the penultimate vowel of which is imperfect, and
not having a consonant immediately following it, will have the Tonic
accent on that syllable. Of this kind are all duals and segolate
nouns :—the feminine affix *J (thy), attached to dual or plural nouns;
as also all nouns having terminations peculiar to the segolate forms :
as, OD both hands, Gen. xxvii. 22; NE hunting; 702 silver;
PIY thy eyes (fem.), Cant. i. 15; SVD thy appearances, Ib. ii. 14;
N22 a rose; SVN" incensed, Ib. iii. 6, &c.
The reason is obvious, the penultimate syllable is, in all these cases
imperfect, the addition of the accent is, therefore, necessary for the
purposes of syllabication (Artt. 34. 47.).
Segolate nouns having the penultimate vowel perfect, will, on
account of their tdi character, also retain the accent on that
syllable: as, “2 concealment; 2 (for MND) death; 2 (fot
W712) emptiness (See Art. 48. note), Also proper names ending in
W7:as, WETS Zedekiah.
2dly, Certain nouns receiving a syllabic pronominal affix, having,
at the same time, a vowel of union (Art. 130.), or, also having
a paragogic } Ndn, will have the accent on the penultimate of the
word so formed. (The affixes usually termed grave, i. e. D2, JP,
Or, WJ, are excepted): as, “2ODW Judge me, Ps. xiii. 1; VWI
our soul; aD its leaf, Ps. i. 3; WIT thou shalt rejoice him,
Ps. xxi. 7; maw he imputed it, Gen. xv. 6; abe }=) his face,
Basan’ 5 spD22 thy mings, Ps. xvii. 8; 7TD>S8 I Sp rebuke thee,
Ps. }. 8; WIND? TL have called thee, Ps. cxix. 146 ; AT they shall
praise thee, Ps. Ixvii. 6; "ADT it (the wind) shall dispel it, Ps. i. 4.
This also holds good, nan these affixes are attached to the para-
gogic | of plural verbs: as , ‘ITEM? they shall seek me early, Prov.
i. 28: JANIW? they shall serve thee, Isa. lx. 7; iTD) they shall
take him, Prov. v. 22.
8dly, Verbs SVS Ans (i. e. in the process of conjugation) in the
afformative syllables (1, 0), 13, and 172; as, HZEM thou art milling,
Ps. xL 7: srw 2 I have jt IM; Praga ‘tidings), Ib. v. 10;
AIP ne have dealt falsely, Ps. xliv. 18; ADRIAN they (fem.) shall
come, Ps. xlv. 16.
4thly, Asyllabic afformatives are subject to the same rule, in the
conjugation Hiphhil: as, it hope thou (fem.), Ps. xiii. 5;
mywin it (fem.) brought salvation, Ps. xliv. 4.
ikiso in the surd and concave verbs : as, 12D surround ye, Ps.
xviii 13; YOR they move, Ps. xlvi. 7: likewise tat these affixes
ART. 123. 5.7] ON THE ACCENTS. 53
are joined to the third person singular of the preterite of verbs:
as, “UNDOW it (fem.) hath overwhelmed me, Ps. Ixix. 3; TEES she
hath loved thee, Ruth iv. 15.
5th, When the paragogic ‘7 is added to nouns, pronouns, or
particles, it exercises no influence on the accent, for the most part.
In such cases, therefore, the accent will be in the penultima: as,
MIDN Ephratah, Gen. xxxv. 16, &c.
124, The Tonic accent will have its place on the last syllable
of words, in the following cases, which are then termed yon
Milrah, viz.
Ist. All words ending with a consonant preceded by a perfect
vowel by analogy: as, ma great; 82 luminary; 22 sons;
M22 daughters. The same is the case when any of the “WETS letters
are so situated, being considered as consonants: as, mw a year;
M2272 a pillar: and even 57 preceded by (+), as, TED he is, &e.
2d, All words ending in one of the grave affixes: as, O27
your blood ; PFYAN their father ; OLY ye shall be, Gen. iii. 5.
3d, All verbs having no afformative syllable: as, mp2 he took ;
S72) he is called.
4th, All verbs taking the asyllabic afformatives 77,, 1, and. : as,
TOW it is quiet; IND they visited; “YO hide thyself (fem.);
and, finally, all words not comprehended in any of the preceding
rules (Art. 123.).
On certain Anomalies as to the situation of the Accent, and
on the changes effected by it on the vowels and consonants
of words.
125. This generally takes place, Ist, when the illative particle *
is prefixed to verbs, in which case, Ist, the Tonic accent, which is
proper for the penultimate vowel in the past tense (Art. 123. 3.), will
be removed to the ultimate: and, 2dly, vice versa, the accent proper-
for the ultimate in the present (Art. 124. 1.), will be removed to
the penultimate: as, Ist, “EWA so I will consecrate (for SAW),
Exod. xxix. 44; BORD) so thou shalt be gathered (for DON),
Numb. xxvii. 13; TTA 50 it shall divide; OSIM thus thou
*
:
* Usually Soried Vaw converstuum, but which seems to correspond with the
Arabic (é or 3 , therefore, &c. ay
o4 LECTURE IV. [ART. 125. 2+
shalt bring, Exod. xxvi. 33; 20) so she shall be multiplied, Isa.
vi. 123 FW therefore thou shalt place, Lev. xxiv. 6 ; Aw) so she
shall return, Lev. xxii. 13; YAY) thus they shall place, Numb. vi. 27 ;
DISA\ so thou shalt enter, Gen, vi. 18.
2d, This rule, however, is often disregarded: as, NIT?) so we
took, Gen. xxxiv. 17; 22977) and we will depart: particularly in
‘verbs having a quiescent letter for the third radical; as, M82)) and
thou shalt fear, Lev. xix. 32; m7) and I will reveal, 1 Sam.
xx, 12; myn and thou shalt go into captivity, Ezek. xii. 3. With
some having the medial radical letter quiescent: as, 71D3) and thou
shalt flee, 2 Kings ix. 3.
3d, In the next place, the accent will be removed from the ultimate te
the penultimate syllable of the present tense, when the illative particle
Vis prefixed, and in such cases as the form of the verb will allow of
the change: e. g. 1/22") (for TE) and he is visited. But in the third
person plural masc. it will keep its place: as, 17227) (from 47/222).
The same holds good also in the form 72): as, "W5™) and he
visits.
Corollary. Hence it will follow, that the accent being removed
from the last syllable, the ultimate vowel must necessarily be-
come imperfect (Art. 34.): as, 122°) and he was struck (for *23);
ANY (for AN) and he said; 2°) and he died (for > or IO?) ;
and so of others.
4th, In the conjugation called Hiphhil, as it will be seen hereafter,
the terminating vowel is either (*.) or (-). Whenever, therefore,
the aecent is drawn back, by this, or any other rule, the imperfeet
vowel will be (=) not (-): as, B21) and he raised (from 52% or
By). So 17) and he lodged (for 72 or >), Gen. xxviii. 11,
Josh. viii. 9; 712%) and he rested (for T3) or H3%), Exod. x. 14,
where (- ) is taken on account of the guttural letter following.
In one instance, however, we have YU (for YM, root Y29) and
she broke, Judg. ix. 53.
5th, When, however, the last letter of the root happens to be
one of the ‘JfTR letters in a state of quiescence, the perfect vowel
will occasionally remain: as, 823) and he brings, Gen. iv. 3.
6th, In many cases, also, this removal of the accent is altogether
neglected: as, AWS) and J sit, 1 Kings viii. 20, &c.
7th, It is in consequence of this removal of the accent, that the
terminating vowel of the present tense of verbs is changed (No. 3.
above) and, in many instances, entirely rejected with the consonant
ART. 125, 8..] ON THE ACCENTS. 55
following, when that is quiescent: e. g.. Py for m2 (Art. 80); and,
by 114, PPh he causes to reveal, which is termed Apocope.
The reason of this seems to be, that as the terminating vowel was
probably introduced originally for the mere sake of Euphony (See
Art. 114.), there is no reason why it may not be rejected, upon any
change taking place in the form of the word; and, upon the vowel’s
being rejected, the 1, becoming ofiose in consequence, may also be
omitted (See Art. 80.). This also takes place where the vowel ought
by analogy to remain: e. g. D2) for abel so he finishes; 2) for
7729) and he smote.*
But in these verbs also, the accent sometimes keeps its place when
1 is so prefixed: as, 12121 and we become, 2 Sam. xi. 23, &c.
Sth, Again, the accent is occasionally removed from the ultimate
to the penultimate syllable in the present tense and the imperatives of
verbs, apparently for the purpose of expressing prohibition, forbear-
ance, exhortation, wishing, or the like, with the greater emphasis: as,
awn oy turn not away, 1 Kings ii. 20 (for 2W), m2in-ON chastise
not, Prov. ix. & (for M21*); ADIA-ON add not, Prov. xxx. 6 (for
ADIN , where the vowel of the medial radical is also rejected, though not
followed by a quiescent 71+); 7S I will water thee (for FPRN,
the root being 17, usually 17, in which case the final radical
letter generally returns. In this case the * is doubled, because the
verb is in the species of Pzhél). So VOW observe (for AW) ;
MAM give, &c. Gen. xi. 3, 4 (for 2M Gen. xxix. 21); "AH give
thou (fem.), Ruth ii. 15, &c.
9th, So in verbs having the third radical letter a quiescent ‘7: as,
TI? let him rule (for TIA); TMD? let him be blotted out (for THM),
Ps. cix. 13; ID may he dilate (for 77192), Gen. ix. 27; FT) let it
be (for TFN), Gen. i. 3; wn ONS drink not (for THD), Lev. x. 93
NOON lei it not be seen (for TIND), Exod. xxxiv. 3; AAO
relax not (for 1B); where the verb takes the form of a segolate
noun, see Art. 114); alae! be not (for F131); and so of others.
But it may here be remarked, as before, that the regular form of the
verb, as well as the position of the accent, is often adopted: as,
* This, in addition to considerations hereafter to be mentioned, induces me
to believe, that the ground-form of the present tense, is really one of the
abstract nouns termed segolate.
+ Because, as before (No. 7.), it was perhaps merely Euphonic.
56 LECTURE IV. CART. 125. 10.
TISIN"ON Jest I should see, Gen. xxi. 16; TINDYOS Lest he should
see, Job iii. 9.
10th, Examples of imperatives subject to Apocope : iP reveal
thou (for rT3 in Pthél); WI smite thou (for 2), Amos ix. 1;
271 multiply thou (for T7277 in Hiphhil. Were the form assumed
is that of a segolate noun, the first vowel becoming (~ ), in order to
accommodate itself to the sound of the second, Art. 114.), Ps. li. 4.
So Dyn * cause thou to ascend (for T2977), Exod. xxxili. 12; Onn
Seign thyself (to be) sick (for Mera), 2 Sam. xiii. 5.
11th, It frequently happens in verbs ending with a radical 7
(for >), when receiving any asyllabic augment, that not only is the
accent drawn back, as in the cases above mentioned (No. 8.), but the
original radical letter also appears: as, FOOT it (fem.) hath trusted
ge ie
(for FIO, according to the general paradigma, from the root 2M
iN.
bring ye (for WNT, Art. 78.), Jer. xii. 9.
126, In a few instances this drawing back of the accent also takes
place in nouns and particles: as, BY N22 numerous art thou (in)
people (for ¥1D2). So B22 S21 great art thou among the nations ;
Miata YW a princess art thou among the provinces, Lam. i. 1.
In like manner we have T7732 , ma), or m2 why ? (for m2,
m2? »| OF m3 ), where, according to Schroederus,—‘ subest adfectus
exprobrantis, vel conquerentis, vel alius similis.” ‘To these he adds,
“28 J (for 38), Ezek. xvii. 16, 22.
127. Again, the accent will be withdrawn from the ultimate to the
penultimate syllable, in order to avoid the concurrence of two Tonic
accents ; which would be the case when the following word happens to
be a monosyllable having an accent, or a dissyllable with an accent on
the penultima. But in this case, tbe penultimate vowel of the former
of such two words, will be perfect: as, "3 TIN2 he opened the rock
(for TID), Ps. ev. 41; ve) 28 I mill betake me, Cant. iv. 6;
nes TINT has this come to pass? (for TI) Joel i. 2; ITS
NTT she (is) my sister, Gen. xx. 2; ae 12) and he mill give
thee, Dent. xix. 8; THI Py he nill exult exceedingly, Ps. xxi. 2.
* These Imperatives are probably nothing more than primitive abstraet
nouns, termed Segolates, enounced with some energy.
ART.. 127. 2..] ON THE ACCENTS. 57
2d, When verbs receiving any asyllabic augment have, on that
account, rejected any of their primitive vowels, they will upon the
removal of the accent, by the above mentioned rule, restore such
rejected vowel: as, \2 OA ye shall delude him (for YMA), Job
xill. 9; T2FT WA come hither (for W3), Josh. iii. 9; PY PRASH ye
mill love vanity (for PASH), Ps. iv. 3; 12 VOT they trusted in him
(for 70M regularly, but 190 according to the tables for these verbs).
3d, Should, however, this drawing back of the accent with the
consequent change of the ultimate vowel tend to destroy or obscure the
original form and signification of the word, no such change will take
place: as, ple. ninbyn the hidden things of the heart (not mabyn
with Kamétz Khatiph); 0. "ZY passing over the sea (not 12%).
4th, The accent will frequently fall on the penultimate, instead of
the ultimate, syllable in words which conclude a sentence, or a member
of a sentence.
These accents are, for the most part, Sillik, Athnakh ; and, in the
poetical books, Mercad with Mahpdék (Art. 62.).
In many of these cases, the removal of the accent will occasion no
change whatever in the vowels: as, QW? (for 2W53) inhabited,
Jer. vi. 8; TY (for TY) make bare, Ps. cxxxvii. 7; 93 (for 399)
they are consumed, Ps. xxxvii. 20, &c.
But, in those persons of the verb which are formed by some asylla-
bic augment, or have the paragogic 1, and where the seeond vowel of
the root has been rejected, the accent, taking that syllable, will restore
such vowel: as, M22)? (for T7272, from the root 2}2) she hath ap-
proached, Zeph. iii. 2 ; 7959 (for 39>) | root O55) they were able, 2 Kings
iii, 26; TWN (for IWIN, root, i.e. form for the Pres., WAW) ye
shall keep, Exod. xxxi. 13. So M228 (from 728) I mill walk, Gen.
xxx. 26; MAD (from P22) recount ye, Joel i. 3; ‘20 (for sole from 72)
go thou, fem., &c.
5th, When the original final vowel is (-) it generally becomes (+)
when thus accompanying the accent: as, moon she departed (from the
root 727), Is. xlvi.2.. 80 m223 (from T7222) it was taken, 1 Sam.
iv. 17; 1228) (from TDs) and I sleep, Ps. iii. 6; 7172 (from Y,72)
let us know, Is. v. 19; PPB (from PPE) cry thou (fem.), Jer. xxii. 20 ;
WAN (from Wah), Is. xxix. 9.
6th, But, when a paragogic } follows the asyllabic augments 4 or *~,
the accent usually retains its proper situation, while the second vowel
of the root is restored as in the last article: as, pap? (from Op?)
58 LECTURE IV. TART. 128.
they mill collect ; 7TTD? (from 2712) they will be confounded ;
PY (from YI) they nill expire, Ps. civ. 28, 29.
128. Segolate nouns of the form 1772, derived from roots having
for the third radical letter a quiescent 1, will, upon taking the pause
accent in the penultimate, restore the original vowel to the first radical :
as, ’31] (for *30], from the primitive form 37) the half, 1 Kings x. 7 ;
TR (for “2 from 27'P) rebellion, Ezek. ii. 8 ; YD) (for “AX, from ‘>)
beauty, Is. iii. 24.
129. Apocopated present tenses of verbs having
the third radical letter 7, take (+) for the vowel of the personal pra-
formative, when so circumstanced as to receive the accent proper for
the pause on that syllable: as, 12) (for 7), from 77>), Psalm
xxxili. 9; YD) and she was, Lam. iii. 87. So T]) he shall live (for
WIP): Iss xxx vii21.
130. When any word having the affixed pronoun J happens to be
the last word of a sentence, &c. so that the accent proper for the
pause fall upon its penultimate vowel, two methods have been invented
‘— in the place of
for the purpose of avoiding any disagreeable concurrence which may
happen in the vowels.
Ist, Instead of (:) which is proper for affixing this pronoun, as will
cs seen hereafter, () is introduced as the vowel of union: as, 727 (for
WT) thy word, Gen. xvii. 30 ; aiaviapl for nora thy inheritance,
oe ii. 8; Www (for HY) thy salvation, Ps. li. 14; Tw (for TW )
thy name, Ps. cxxxviil. 2, &c.
2d, The vowel proper for the pronoun is occasionally transposed :
as, Tawi (for TTIW) thy destruction, Deut. xxviii. 24; JSP (for
WISP) he hath adorned thee, Is. lv. 5; FS (for WE) i hath com-
manded thee, 1 Sam. xii. 13.
3d, The particles OS, OY, 2, and 2; having 7 affixed to them and
receiving a pause-accent, are always subject to this rule: ON thee,
Deut. xxviii. 48; JAR with thee, Gen. viii. 17; EY with thee, Gen.
xxix. 25; 2 in thee, Ps. ix. 3; Bie, to, for, or, of, thee, Exod. xxxii.
34, &e. for FOS, FAS, Wy, 72, 1, &e.
4th, Sometimes *J is subject to this rule, when not in the situation
for receiving a pause-accent: as, JY he answered thee, Jer. xxiii. 37 ;
for IY.
5th, When a pause-accent falls on an ultimate or penultimate (-)
Pathakh, or on a penultimate (+) Segol, in segolate nouns, that vowel,
for the most part, is changed into (+) Kamélz: as, WY for V2) he
ART. 130. 6._| ON THE ACCENTS. 59
hath stood ; pal for aw he hath sat,Psi ii dunes ; m9 for my
night, Gen. i. 5; 2M) for AVI a sword, Josh. viii. 25; TRY for
NAY standing, Eccl. i. 4.
6th, There are, however, certain exceptions: as, P13°1* he laughed,
Gen. xvi. 17; TY prey, Ib. xlix. 27; WS) they shall be set on fire,
Is. xxxlil. 12; FIBA thou hast spoken, Ib. xxxix. 8; MMOD security,
Prov. i. 33; MBS a nurse, Ruth. iv. 16.
7th, The pause-accent will sometimes change a terminating (-- ) into
a Ree 725 for 72 he shall go, Job xxvii. 21; IW return, restore,
for 2Wi, Is. xlii. 22; T2A- ON (for 725) tarry not all nght, Jud.
xix. 20.
131. Makkaph, following a terminating perfect and mutable vowel
which precedes a consonant, will change the vowel into its corres-
pondent imperfect one: as, N32} (for 2 Pt) remember non;
Da 2e%2 (for O22 YD) all kings; OVA-NN (for OVA ON) the
people, &e.
2d, But if such final vowel be immutable, no change will take place:
as, also to, or, for, another man, Jer. iii. 1; STRAWS the sign
of the covenant, Gen. ix. 12. The reason of this is; the addition of
Makkaph deprives the word to which it is attached of its tonic-accent,
which makes it necessary that the preceding vowel be imperfect,
when that is possible (Art. 34:.).
On the Use and Situation of the Luphonie Accent.
132. Ithas already been remarked, that the Euphonic accent, Métheg,
may be considered as supplying a secondary emphasis (Art. 74, &c.),
with reference to some tonic-accent preceding it. Monosyllables,
therefore, can never have an Euphonic accent, unless, indeed, they
precede Makkaph, but then they are considered as. making an integral
part of a compound word, and in that case they may receive the
Euphonic accent, according to rules presently to be laid down. Dis-
syllables may receive an Euphonic accent; but these syllables must
have a (:) Shevé intervening: as, WT) he shall be, &c.
Rules for the Insertion of the Euphonic Accent.
133. The third syllable of any word not ending with a consonant,
reckoning inclusively from any tonic-accent, will have the Euphonic
* In some editions PITS.
60 LECTURE IV. CART. 134.
accent Métheg: as, TTS) the one, Gen. ii. 11; B irda which pro-
ceedeth, Ib. v. 14; TI2WI8 J shall possess it, Ib. xv. 8; 728R from
our Father, Ib. xix. 32; ona according to their tongues, Ib. x. 20;
AAT2VD and from thy kindred, Ib. xii. 1.
124. But, if the third syllable end in a consonant, the Euphonic
accent will accompany the fourth: as, way and of their fat,
Gen. iv. 4; “SIS8) and I remain, 1 Kings xix. 10; (where }, being
doubled by Dagésh, will conclude the syllable; as, “17)89).
2d, Perfect vowels preceding Shévd, and having no tonic accent,
will, if occupying the third place from any tonic accent, (reckoning
the Shévd), receive an euphonic one: as, 01 it was, Gen. 1. 2;
ida) thou (fem.) shalt bring forth, Ub. iii. 16 ; 22 Nineveh, Ib.
= Ie nivvin generations, Ib. ii. 4; "TEND he shall bruise thee,
Ib. iii. 15.
3d, In many instances the Euphonic accent is omitted; nor is it
-necessary it should ever be added, if we except one case, viz. when
the figure of (+) Kamétz precedes Shévd; for then this vowel will be
either @ or 0, just as the accent is added or not: as, 227) she was
mise; or, MIT wisdom (Art. 58.). In every other case, no difficulty
can arise, whether the accent is added or not.
4th, In some cases, however, the Euphonic accent is said to mark
the substitution of an imperfect for a perfect vowel: as, 7723 (for
723 thy border, Exod. xxiii. 31; 877) (for ASP) ) and they shall
fear, Mic. vii. 17; where it is necessary for the completion of
the syllable (Art. 34.). It is, nevertheless, frequently omitted, and
must be supplied by the reader, particularly before an implied Dagésh
(Art. 115, &c.), an initial (: ), and in some other places.
5th, The letter 1 with Shurék, when prefixed to a word, and
similarly situated with respect to the tonic accent, will sometimes be
found with the Euphonic accent, and then followed by one of the
substitutes of Shévd: as, TW and lead thou captive, Jud. v. 12;
SWI and be thou sought, Ezek. xxvi, 21.
135. Words consisting of more than two syllables, the first of
which is terminated by Dagésh, will receive the Euphonic accent
on that syllable: as, aDaw) and they heard, Gen. iii. 8; WAR
on the morron, Ib. xix. 84 ; n2yen the knife, Ib. xxii. 6.*
* The Student must not be surprised, if he finds the different editions of
the Bible vary on these points.
ART. 135. 2.7] ON THE ACCENTS. 61
2d, This will also hold good when the Dagésh is omitted:
WWD and he felt him, Ub. xxvii. 22; TDI which covereth, Exod,
bey 13, &c. In allthese cases Shévd is aitet and, consequently, any
one of the letters 22722, which may happen to follow, will retain
their aspiration: as, D°AYNNDI the abhorrers, Mic. iii. 9. Hence
bon is to be colin uiiead Haleli, not Halli. Something of the
some kind is observable in the words T2723 and A8))) just cited
(Art. 135. 4.).
136. When any one of the substitutes of Shévd is preceded by a
vowel, that vowel will receive the Euphonic accent : as , mwya let us
make, Gen. i. 26; W282 faithful, Numb. xii. 7 ; Hoos, his tent, Gen.
xiii. 3; TIPINT the ground, Ib. i. 25; OPVS crying out (pl.), Ib.
iv. 10; WTS and I would have dismissed thee, Ib. xxxi. 27.
2d, ‘When the substitute of Shévd, moreover, is resolved into its
homogeneous imperfect vowel (Art. 112. 2.), the Euphonic accent will
still remain: as, T92 thy sandal, Isa. xx. 2; VT.) and they shall
fear, Hos. xi. 10.
137. When either (-) Pdthakh, (-) Imperfect Khirik, or (=),
precedes (:) Shévad, which is not accompanied by Dagésh forte,
it will, for the most part, have the Euphonic accent: as, 122i its
coupling, Exod. xxxix. 20; MAW they bowed themselves down, Jer.
Vili. 2 ; 375 they broke off, Exod. xxxii. 3; Dyin becoming
Jews, Esth. viii. 17. Hence we have TM), TEA, MIT, TID, &c.,
from the verbs 7 become, and iT live. Hence, also, we have
the double and triple accentuation of certain words, when one or more
Méthegs happen to be introduced by the operation of one or more of
the preceding rules: as, rar in the camp, Exod. xxxvi. 6, &c. as
in several of the instances already adduced. But, in most of these
cases, the accents do not interfere with the syllabication (See
Art. 48.).
2d, This Euphonic accent is sometimes found with an_ initial
Shévd: as, 98Y take up, Ps. Ixxxi. 3.
138. On some occasions, other accents are found to occupy the
situation of Métheg. These are, — Mandkh, ~ Kadma, = Merca:
as, Deyn) and the pieces of wood, Gen. XX. 7; bral and Aaron,
Exod. vii. 7; weaM and the priest, Levit. vil. 8; beaded of
Malchiel, Numb. xxvi. 45. In these cases we have Munakh or Kadmé
in the place of Métheg, followed by Zaképh Katén. In 129° and
they proceeded, Numb. xxu. 7, Kadmda is followed by Géresh; and,
62 LECTURE IV. [ART. 138. 2.
Ib. xxxii. 39, we have it again, coupled with Methég, in some editions:
as, sb) , which, with many similar examples, is perhaps to be
ascribed to the carelessness or hurry of the copyists.
2d, In the following examples we have Merced > in the place of
Methég : as, °2222 like the stars,* Exod. xxxii. 13; 713220") and he
hid him, Exod. ii. 12.+ In these cases Mercd is found with Tiphkha
for its tonic accent.
3d, Ina few instances Yérakh > or Yéthiv < is found in the place of
Métheg; as, OTPOIVA from their counsels, Ps. v. 11; TaoNw
whom it (fem.) loves, Cant. i. 7. In the last case, however, W is con-
sidered as standing for TW, and may therefore take any tonic accent.
This contains the substance of the rules given by Buxtorf in his
Thesaurus Grammaticus, which have appeared to me to be the best
hitherto given.—In numerous cases, as the student will find, many
of these rules are never applied; and, in many others, as already re-
marked, the printed copies of the Hebrew Bible differ, as do also the
MSS. In many instances, neither the syllabication nor the sense of
the passage, is affected by these accents, whence it should seem pro-
bable that they have been added merely for the purpose of regulating
the tone of voice in reading or chanting the text.
On the Use and Position of Maxxarnu.
139. Learned men are not agreed, whether this mark is to be ranked
among the accents or not. Some have argued that it ought, because it
is always found to supply the place of an accent. Others have con-
tended, that it ought not ; because it is universally found to deprive
the word, to which it is attached, of its tone-accent. That it has been
made equivalent to an accent, I think, both parties allow: and, if
I mistake not, its depriving the word, to which it has been attached,
of its tone-accent, seems to make for the hypothesis, that it ought to
be considered as performing the functions of such accent. It seems to
me, therefore, but a loss of time to argue against its being termed
an accent.
Rules for its Use and Insertion.
140, Words, immediately connected with each other, either in sig-
x
* In some editions p=) => regularly.
+ Which is also with Métheg in*some editions.
ART. 140. 2."| OF MAKKAPH. 63
nification, or by grammatical construction, are frequently connected by
_ Makkaph, the former being then deprived of its tone-accent: as,
mTyONs Jehovah's nord, Amos ii. 16; 22-7 pure of heart,
Prov. xxii. 11; COP"? and he pitched (his tent) there; VOR"}R
a little son, 2 Sam. ix. 12; TOS ]2 one son, 1 Sam. xxii. 20; magsp
every high thing, Job xli. 26 ; ink" ia2 it shall limit it, Josh. xviii.
20; FID NS 2" even to her husband, Gen. iii. 6 ; apyerDy TIAA
VP TW 2B lest thou speak with Jacob (any thing) from good to bad,
Gen, xxxi. 24; NAPS which he called, Gen. xxvi. 18. So,
WIZZ a garden in Eden, Gen. ii. 8 ; SDF) come hither, Ib.
xix. 9; “Na he came to sojourn, Ib.; AYO and the evening
was, Ib. i. 5, &c., to which many others might be added, in which two,
three, or even four words, are thus connected (see Art. 74.). In all
these cases, the last word only in the connection will have the tone-
accent.
2d, Since, then, the tone-accent,is in all these cases taken away,
words so connected, ending in a perfect mutable vowel, and _ fol-
lowed by a consonant, will generally take the correspondent imper-
fect one in that syllable: as, mMa3"oD every high thing, instead of
maa 42, TIS rw come hither, for meson Wa; NII remember,
pray, Isa. xxxviii. 3, for 82 757; OM VAW preserve integrity, Psalm
xxxvil. 37, for OF) “iw (Art. 131.).
3d, In the following and similar cases, the terminating vowel of the
preceding word is immutable: as, nib"niga the daughters of Lot,
Gen. xix. 36; PETA great (in) hunting, Gen. x. 9 ; Sok jan it
(the Jordan) shall limit it ; WT2? David's heart, 2 Sam. xxiv. 10,
where 22 is put for me ee MPD the giving of its (fem.) strength,
Gen. iv. 12, VM being put for 3M).
4th, We have, however, Prov. xxi. 15, “yrnb2 in the heart of a
child. Wealso have, Gen. xvi. 13, M7T"OW, and, Ib. 15, 139370,
which, with similar instances, may perhaps be referred to the care-
lessness of the copyists.*
141. Makképh is found to be inserted in the following cases :
Ist, Particles, which, from their characters, can never have a dis-
tinctive accent, are mostly connected with other words by the mark
Makkéaph: as, PUPS -DA even to her husband ; ‘22>7On2 in the
integrity of my heart, Gen. xx. 5, &c.
* The most complete list of these exceptions is given in the second volume
of the Heb. Gram. by Guarin, pp. 320—1, 2.
64 LECTURE IV. CART. 141. 2.
2d, When words are to be construed together, the tone-accents of
which would concur ; i. e. when the accent of the preceding word is ©
on the last syllable, and the following word is either a monosyllable, or
a dissyllable having the accent on the penultimate, then, in order to
avoid such concurrence (Art. 127.), such words are to be connected by
Makkaph ; as, Py its seed (is) nithin itself, Gen. i. 11, instead of
12 IPB. So Jo-pwy W-pan so he embraced him, and kissed
him, Ib. xxix. 18, instead of a PWII, &e. ; 727 2720
and evening was, and morning was, Ib. i. 5, instead of AY YIN, &e.
The remaining rules usually given by the grammarians may be
resolved into one or other of the preceding.
3d, In any of the above cases, the Euphonic accent may be
appended to the former of such words, according to the rules already
laid down, (Art. 134, &c.)
ART. 142. 1.] FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 65
LECTURE V.
ON THE CHANGES WHICH TAKE PLACE IN THE TERMINATIONS
OF WORDS, IN CONSEQUENCE OF THE FORMATION OF THE
FEMININE, FROM THE MASCULINE, GENDER; THE DUAL OR
PLURAL, FROM THE SINGULAR NUMBER; AND THE STATE OF
DEFINITE CONSTRUCTION,
Of the Formation of the Feminine, from the Masculine, Gender.
142. It should be premised, that in the Hebrew
Language there are but two genders, viz. the Masculine,
and the Feminine.
Ist, The Masculine is generally restricted to nouns
signifying the proper names and offices of men: as,
WI David; MY Uxsa; OQ or MOQ a governor;
n27p a preacher, &c. whatever be their termination.
2d,—To all words signifying People, Rivers, Mountains,
or Months: as, ONT Israel; VN) Jordan; 1D Sinat;
jD° Nisan, &c. without reference to their termination.
3d, All words ending in any radical letter (not in-
cluded in No. 5.), also those ending in a servile 7 pre-
ceded by («), and others terminating in 9, 0, or j,
servile, will be of the masculine gender: as, VA" a
word ; wind dominion; MI’ a plain, or field ; as “nD
VUSiONn ; ay a aes . OE redemption ; now a
table ; 1390p an offering.*
* The exceptions are: JAN a stone; JAS a bowl; IMDS a viper ; “AWN or
“AWN a step, pace; WR2 a well; re a corn-floor ; =n a sword ; TE a stake,
post; T2 a vessel so ed DID a full cup; AQP? a lene nano eden
pan; 773 light ; Spa a sandal ; nbd flour; AY a cloud; wry a star so
called ; way a bed; 1N2 a morsel; yy the north ; ey a quail ; Dan the
world ; ia an ass ; ony bread ; pal a shield; ADV, te evening, which are
all init:
F
66 LECTURE V. [ART. 142. 4
4th, Feminine nouns are, either the proper names
of women, or words designating their offices: likewise,
the names of regions, cities, or nouns signifying the
parts, and double members of the body, whatever be
their terminating letters; e. g. I Rakhél ; rahi
Mikal ;s phi, a consort; ANID Moab; DIN Edom:
yan Khebrén; OWI Yérashaldim ; WO the belly ;
iS the ear, &c. This distinction, therefore, arises from
the signification, not from the form, of the word: cities
and regions being considered perhaps as mothers, and so
of others.
5th, Nouns ending in %— or N servile are also of the
feminine gender: as, T7715 or NPD a female visitor ;
Maia a beast ; no or min a kingdom. So 8iv
for 1¥ sleep, &c.*
6th, Many nouns are found used in both genders,
which are, therefore, termed common. These generally
are, 1, The names of animals, flocks, birds: 2, Segolate
nouns not restricted to the names or offices of men:
and, 3, Others designating parts of the human body:
4, Participial nouns of the form 7/22: and, 5, The decimal
numerals from twenty to one hundred, inclusive: e. g.
1, ay a camel; 273 a bear; \X¥ and MY a flock of
sheep; VB¥ a bird: 2, WAS a road; M7 the spirit:
3, T the hand; \V the eye; PIN the arm; WP) the
* The exceptions are, 712 the mouth; “INJE the neck; FWY the back ;
2) or ae) the navel ; DYpYHY the eyelids ; AY the heel; FST likeness ;
mew a blasted field ; MT a meat-offering ; aah) a razor; mw
a cucumber bed; and mAs an army, which are all masculine. JI am inclined to
believe, that this termination is nothing more than a fragment of some ancient
form of the feminine pronoun of the third person singular, which we also find
as the inseparable feminine pronoun of the same person. See the table of
:nseparable pronouns, Art. 153.
ART. 143. 1.1] FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 67
soul: 4, "¥M an enclosure: 5, DWP twenty ; Dw ou
thirty, &c. 'To these several others of different forms may
be added: as, {i718 a chest, or ark; |i a garden; yan
a window ; YS? a couch; FAV a jubilee, &e. which will
be found in the dictionaries.
143. We now come to shew how the noun of the
feminine gender is formed from that of the masculine.
Ist, It will readily be perceived, that the names of
certain offices, &c. may apply to either men or women,
and that cases might occur in which it may be necessary
to designate the sex of the person to which such word
may be applied. ‘The masculine forms have already been
pointed out; it will be necessary here to shew how those
peculiar to the feminine are formed from them.
2d, Feminine nouns will be formed from masculine
ones merely by adding the termination -- or M.., and
changing the preceding vowels of the ultimate or penul-
timate syllable according to the analogy of the word
(hereafter to be considered) and the rules detailed (Artt.
98. 99. &c.); e. g. AIO a good man, &c.; TAD a good
woman, &c. ; 722 (original form 72) a king, MDD a
gueen; TPiD masc. TWIPID or IPD fem. a visitor, or
visiting.
3d, Let us now see in what instances these different
terminations are used. It will be extremely difficult to
lay down rules which will comprehend every possible
case. We shall content ourselves with the following,
given by Albert Schultens.
4th, Nouns ending in a perfect zmmutable vowel will
generally take the termination —: as, TIP2 vesited,
mase.; MP2 fem.; Ii” good, masc.; 7210 fem.; 7172
great, mase. ; m2i73 fem. ; PYI¥ gust, masc.; MPN fem.
5th, Patronymics, and nouns originally ending in °: also
ordinal numbers ending in ° and falling under this rule,
F2
68 LECTURE V. [ ART. 143. 6.
will double the (7) by Dagésh, upon receiving this femi-
nine termination: as, "A839 a Moabite; MAW (or
MARID) a Moabitess. So, YD18 a Syrian; fem. M328
(or MYOTIS); MND bearing fruit; MDA weeping ;
suru the third, mase. ; muha or mowrduy, fem.
6th, Participles of the Hiphhil conjugation are ex-
cepted: as, TPH) fem.; NTPDS, with some other nouns:
as, ou a Mes nobus ie Yaatawnaster); RAD
or n7a3 a mistress.
7th, Nouns receiving a quiescent Shévad (:) in the
penultimate syllable will take M— for their feminine
termination: as, DTN pele mase.; MIN (for MDT)
fem.; {YP ttle, masc.; MOP, fem. ; 3D} surrounded,
masc.; AD], fem. So, "33 revealed, fo 7792, from
m7), masc. 5 contraction ‘(Art. 78.).
Sth, Hence all segolate nee will form their femi-
nines in he as, 122, for 35 > a king, fem. ; Pyle) a
queen ; ID8 for b38 Sood, fem. moos; vale for bay
wickedness, fem. mow; ; or, by contraction (Art. 92.),
mip ; Bs hetor wy contracted by (Art. 92. 3.) TY
hunting, fom. apy.
9th, Some nouns are found to take both forms of the feminine:
as, mabe or M2209 a kingdom; TDW or NMEW a family,
f Pathakhs are here taken instead a erols on account of ‘the
guttural TM) 7TAWS or FIWS a natch or guard. So some par-
ticiples and never as, TPB or IPP visiting, fem. ; 7? or
ny bringing forth. 'To which may be Awaba the patronymics, &c.
above noticed, as well as many other nouns, which will be learned best
from practice.
144. Nouns not subject to these restrictions will, for the most part,
have their feminine forms ending in [> or in some equivalent termi-
nation: as, OY a crown; MOY, fem. (which also has WY).
2. The terminations equivalent to My are: 1, M-: 2, :
8, Mr: 4, PINS: SOS 60> ort = 7% aes eae
1, FINN sister, for MIS; but, on account of the enema MT, AUIS
win =s >
which, by Art. 93. will become MN or MMS : 2, nya for nya,
ART. 145. | ON THE DUAL NUMBER. 69
and by Art. 93. 2. nya exile: 3, WIAD a pattern, for NAM, and
by Art. 93. 4, (VIS: 4, OSS for OSS finding, by Art. 93. 5.
5, NBT for ONT sin (by the same Article); 6, OM for IM
a
a child, (primitive form N72, and, rejecting the medial 7 for the sake
of euphony, we have 2). For the same reason, we have MIN for
INTIS one, fem.; 2 a daughter, for IB or NID: NV a song,
has the regular Chaldaic or Syriac termination.
On the Inflection of Nouns.
145. There are three numbers recognised by Hebrew
Grammarians in the inflection of nouns: viz. the Sin-
gular, the Dual, and the Plural.
On the Formation of the Dual Number.
146. The dual number is formed from the smgular by
adding the termination D._: as, =)) a day ; baby £wWo
days ; 179 (for 37D) a king ; ayaa two kings ; ma00
a queen ; DIN? two queens. Instead of DY two,
we have, by contraction (Art. 93. 3.), D'Y, and fem.
for DAW, DM (for OI Art. 82.), by the same
rule.
2. Note. All feminine nouns ending in —, change
it to M upon receiving any increment whatsoever ; as
also when put in construction with any other noun, of
which more will be said hereafter: hence we have
pna70 as above.
3. The dual number is, for the most part, restricted
to things which are double by nature or art, as the
parts, or double members of the body, &c. It is never
found in the conjugation verbs.
4. There are a few instances in which a dual ter-
mination is added to a noun already in the plural
70 LECTURE V. (ART. 147. 1.
number: as, Dyno two walls, Isa. xxi. 11; monn?
two tables, Ezek. xxvii. 5.
The changes of the preceding vowels will be regulated
as before (Art. 99, &c.).
On the Formation of the Plural Number Masculine.
147. Nouns of the masculine gender are made plural
by attaching the asyilabic augment O*~ to the singular:
as, i good, masc., ODI plur.; 322 (for 772 or 7,22)
a king, plur. m0; 12 a nation, plur. DNA (for DWI
by omission, Art. 78.) nations ; “zi a stranger, plur.
D>) (for 5°32 by contraction and omission, Artt. 78.
and 93.). So DT Jews (for OY TTN).*
2d, In many instances, however, words of this kind are
written fully: as, Dy) Levites, sing. 5 ; DYwyD
Cushites (vulgarly Ethiopians); DYIND Chittim, Isa.
xxiii, 12; OFM Esth. iv. 7, viii. 7; OMIWSD Chaldeans,
2 Chron. xxxvi. 17, &¢; where the marginal reading is
generally of the contracted form.
In one instance § is inserted in the place of Dagésh:
as, DONA for OYA W, or contr. DOW Arabs,
2 Chron. xvii. 11.
* So DW pl. of Ww scarlet, Isa. i. 18; Dwar of SWEET Sree, Isa.
lviii. 6; HOYOS) of YAP inner, 1 Chron, xxviii. 11, for my DW , &e.
The © added to Hebrew masculine plurals, as well as the } of Syriae and
Chaldaic ones, seems to me to have been added for the mere purpose of filling
up the hiatus which would have otherwise happened. Such is the Tanween
(2, Z, z) of the Arabs; which, according to them, is always cut off when the
word is placed in the state of definite construction, as is also its vicegerent the
final uy of the dual and plural. opps of wsdl] dys? Lass
rel, PaCeeN) Ww» Ps Lelie are les Ke. Hidayat-oon-Nahwe,
p. ov. Calcutta, 1803. Moolla Jami considers it as an index of a complete
word, which, when lost in the state of construction, is supplied by the following
word, Comment. on the Kafia, p. 19%.
ART. 147. 3.,] ON THE PLURAL NUMBER. 71
3d, We sometimes have the Chaldaic termination
{) ras, por kings, Prov. xxxi 3; [8 (for PX)
islands, continents, Eizek. xxvi. 18, &c. In these cases
the plural is termed ddsolute.
4th, ‘The terminating letters 0, or (Chaldaic) {, are
always omitted, when the plural noun is in the state of
definite construction with any other word (Art. 91.), or
when any affixed pronoun is attached to it: as, (18 1370
kings of the land ; D272 their kings, of which more
will be said hereafter.
5th, In many cases also, when plural words are not in the state of
construction, these letters are omitted: as, 12 X01 for 12 BO'N those
who trust in him, Ps. un. 12, &c.
6th, We occasionally find the termination ‘> used instead of >
OB. Me fas, 22 locusts, Amos vii. 1, Nah. iii. 17; hia nindows,
Jer. xxii. 14; a2 princes, Judg. v. 15; 20) mountains, Zech. xiv. 5;
“IM net works, Isa. xix. 8; ‘WI (men, &c.) uncovered, Isa. xx. 43
and frequently, "IW the Almighty; ‘278 Lord, &c. But, as we find
that both in the Chaldaic and Syriac this dipthong ( }~ ) is always used
when such nouns are ‘in the state of definite construction, we may
‘> is nothing more than a
contraction for > by Art. 93.3; and, therefore, perfectly equivalent
to it in signification; but, not containing any thing superlative, as some
have thought. Some have also supposed this termination intended
to designate collective nouns ; but, as most plural nouns may be con-
sidered as collectives, there does not seem to be any necessity for this
"distinction.
7th, There are, moreover, several passages in which *> has been
thought to be a plural termination: as, wow WN head of the
captains, 2 Sam, xxii. 8, which in the parallel passage, 1 Chron.
xi. 11, is mep>en WAT, So EYZIT) MDT the captains and the
guards, 2 Kings xi. 4,19. Of this kind some suppose *?222/7 Gen.
xii. 6, xiii. 7; °EVPDI YD 2 Sam. viii. 18, xx. 7, 23, &c. to be,
while others believe the terminating ()) to indicate nothing more
perhaps conclude, that the termiation
than a patronymic or gentile noun.* To these some other passages
* I am very much disposed to believe, that the plural termination attached
= LECTURE V. (ART. 147. 7.
might be added: as, rai?) Job xxxi. 28, compared with Ib.
v.11: °877 1 Sam. xx. 38; "2 Gen. xl. 16; “SY 2 Sam. xxii. 44,
Ps. exliv. 2, Lam. iii. 14, &c.
In such cases as these, *> may, according to our hypothesis, be a
to Hebrew nouns and verbs, is nothing more than a fragment of some word
originally used to designate that number. In the Malay, Samnscrit, and some
other languages, the plural number is still formed by adding some word or
words signifying much, many, or the like; or, by repeating the same word: as,
in the Malay, Orang baniak, or Orang orang, many man; or man, man. So in
Sanscrit. See Yates’s Gram. p. 59.
In the Coptic and New Zealand also, the syllable m2 or na, which is prefixed
for the purpose of designating the plural number, seems manifestly to be
derived from the word wau or na, which in both these languages means greaé,
much, or the like. In Hebrew we find words derived from the root my
or FIT being, signifying substance, &c.: as, pn wealth ; min a great
misfortune, calamity ; or TTI «a great deep, a bath. In the Arabic Wg >
op eee:
inordinate affection ; ra) 3 lust, a great deep, abyss: and hence, perhaps, TM
“3
Jehovah, the great being, emphatically styled o wy, bee or NST, as well as FITTS
TTS “WES Exod. iii. 14. Now, if we can conceive a noun of the primitive
form 1B, i.e. TIT being, substance, much, or the like, thus to be used, we
shall have the forms mJ by Euphony, (Art. 114.), and MT] by contraction,
(Art. 92. 3.). Writing then 7177 27 in the form proper for construction but
in one word, and striking out the first 77 by Art. 79, and the last by Art. 80,
we shall have 1 for the contracted plural form, to which the Euphonic B
or } may be added, or not: and without the (+) Khirtk, 727, which is the
Syriac and Chaldaic form. Again, taking M177, which is the segolate form
proper for construction, and, striking out the two 17 He’s, as before, we shall
have “J, which is the termination proper for the state of construction
likewise, The termination 1, or by contraction 4, (Art. 93. 2.), may, for
the sake of distinction, have been taken for the verbs from the cognate root MTT
having the same signification: for, taking the segolate or primitive form TTVJ
or iF, we shall have MT by contraction; and, writing TPS for
ALapieee as before, we shall have the plural tea nations for some parts of
the verb, asalso for some nouns above noticed, which, I have no doubt, are real
ancient forms of nouns in the plural number; they therefore, stood in no need
of correction by the Masorets.
The plural termination of the feminine nouns may have arisen from the
same root: for if we take my of the form We, and changing the final 7
into 1, which occasionally takes place, we shall have by contraction FT
by Art. 93, and, for mn WP, FTN as before.
ART. 147, 8. ] ON THE PLURAL NUMBER. 13
plural termination, the Euphonic © being cut off: but, as it will
be hereafter seen, that (>. ) is also the termination of patronymic or
gentile nouns, the context alone must be our guide in ascertaining the
sense in such passages.
8th, Gesenius is of opinion, that the termination "> is, in some
cases, nothing more than an Arabism for the singular 'T7: as, Ty
for TTIW a field, Deut. xxxii. 13, Ps. viii. 8. So ST for TIM a seer,
2 Chron. xxxui. 19, &c., which may be true.
9th, Some have also supposed, that 1, and 1 without the Euphonic
1, is occasionally used as a plural termination: as, IAW Yéshurtin
for Israel. CYBW AMT to be read OYAW WAM (by Art. 93. 2.)
augurs, 1. e. dividers of the heavens. So Isa. xlvii. 13, Falnhio ip
(129) the multitude of my laws. So WT Ps. exix. 79; INRW
2 Sam. v. 8; 132, 1 Chron. vi. 11, &c. In most of these, and
similar passages, however, we have a various reading, which supplies
the regular plural termination, ‘>
On the Formation of the Plural Number Feminine.
148. The termination used to designate the femimine
plural 1s ni,* which, like the preceding D°-, &c. is asyl-
labic: as, 1171 @ generation, N77 (or, Art. 78. n35)
generations.
2d, When the feminine singular ends in 1—, F,, or
n—, &c., these terminations are rejected mm forming the
plural: as, MTPIS or NIPID visiting, fem.) NITPID,
plural.+ The same may be said of the Chaldaic ter-
mination M—; as, naan praise, NIM praises, Psalm
ix. 15, &c.—N. B. MIDS servani-maids, seems to be
from the singular T7728, not AOR: so, MID and NID
are not the plurals of 379, but of °J2 or 3: so, NINE
is from ¥P, not MSP. |
3d, Feminine nouns ending in M— and M— take the
* See the note to the preceding article.
+ In other words, the feminine plural is formed, rather from the masculine
singular than from the feminine singular.
74 LECTURE V. [ART. 148, 4.
same termination, with this difference, viz. that 1, in the
first case, is doubled by Dagésh: as, YAY a Hebrew
woman, plural NVIAY (the singular being NAY or
f72Y): and, in the second, by prefixing °, and preserving
the homogeneous imperfect vowel corresponding to 1:
as, nia70 a kingdom, ne270 lingdoms, as if the sin-
gular were a contraction of m5 2.
4th, Nouns ending in n— are sometimes found with
their plurals formed by the mere addition of the plural
terminations 0°— or 5: as, MIM a spear, pl. OF
and NIM; Ni fornication, pl. OMI, &e.
5th, So also fates ending in M7; as, nbs a door,
P minds; wp a bow, nie ninwp bows; May (for
maw) a lip, pl. ninay lips.
149. The plural Heonoaie to a considerable number of masculine
nouns is found with the feminine termination abe while, on the other
hand, many feminine nouns are also found with the masculine ter-
mination ©°> in the plural: as, Ist, 28 a eters pl. As ; 7258
a treasure, pl. AWS ; and, 2d, 128 a stone, fem. pl. DSN Thy
a fir-tree, Dv>N jir-trees: all of which the Lexicons will eupily as they
occur.
2d, Nouns of the common gender are sometimes found having two
plural forms: as, 3 MW «a year, pl. DW and Mw years: so DD
and SN. days, for DEY 0 or nyvay, cy of =) for DN a day ; Ret
a few others with the Vee: aided to the feminine form of the
plural: as, 722 a high place, pl. N22 and OND. Others again
are nar iat in the plural number: as, 5°23 the face ; OI life;
D°w2 women. Others are used in the dual only: as, SY a mill;
ms balances, &c.
150. Generic nouns signifying, as they do, « whole species, may, in
the singular number, be construed as being in the plural when the
context requires it: as, 71D fowl, or fonts ; 8 child, or children ;
Wz flock, or flocks.
2d, Hence, nouns signifying Metals, Liquids, Virtues, Vices, to
which may be added Proper names, are generally found in the singular
number only: as, FOP silver, ANE gold, V2 nine, WS) oil, M220
nisdom, 233 foolishness, TS Iw hatred, Tw Miner rae) vane
porah, Osi? Israel, &c.
ART. 150. 3.1] STATE OF CONSTRUCTION. 75
3d, We have, nevertheless, MIFAN understandings, 2317S loves,
DION graces, Dwys angers, VAI wisdoms, &e.; but, in these
cases, an intensitive signification is generally meant.
4th, Nouns implying age are mostly found in the plural number : as,
E23 childhood, DynADY youth, DIV old age, &c. We have,
nevertheless, navy for childhood, and nay for youth, to which
some others might be added.
5th, Words ending in 4) and 4}, generally denote the state
in which any person or thing is said to be. Hence aT?) will
signify the state of childhood ; these words therefore need not be put
in the plural number. In the other case, the word Daw is probably
understood ; we shall have therefore E°.AY2 for BYAYI Daw childish
years ; and so of others, which will account for the apparent anomaly.
The nouns generally found in the dual number have already been
pointed out (Art. 146. 3.).
On the Changes found to take place in Nouns, pué in the
Definite State ef Construction.
151. By the definite state of construction is meant, the
juxta position of two or more nouns, not meaning the
same thing, when the latter is added for the purpose of
defining, or otherwise qualifying, that which immediately
precedes it: as, I I) Jehovah's hand ; 7723 DAW a
rod of iron; DIIAN YAW VD the days of the years
of the life of Abraham.
2d, Now, as these additional words are added for the
mere purpose of presenting some one definite idea, the
whole combination seems to have been considered as pre-
senting one compound word only; and, hence, the tone-
accent has occasionally been carried on to the last so con-
strued, and the preceding vowels contracted or rejected,
as far as the analogy of the words would allow.
3d, Hence, nouns having perfect and mutable *
% What vowels are immutable will be seen when we come to treat of the
forms of nouns.
76 LECTURE V. CART. 151. 4.
vowels in their ultimate and penultimate syllables, will.
change that in the ultimate to its homogeneous imperfect
one, and reject that in the penultimate: as, 1}771) 727,
Jehovah's word (from 727); MIT NVA Jehovah's law
(from 75F)).
4th, All feminine nouns, however, ending in M— will
change the 7 to M, probably for the purpose of making
the character of such words more susceptible to the
hearer, than they would be with the 1 remaining (Art.
146. 2.).
5th, Exceptions :—All masculine nouns singular ending
in 7t~* will take 7 when preceding others in the state
of construction: as, DIAN TAP Abram’s stock. But
Segolate nouns are subject to no variation in the singular
number : as, TW 720 the king of Assyria.
6th, Segolate nouns, however, having} or ° for their
middle radical letter, will undergo a contraction when
preceding other nouns in the state of definite construction:
as, J27 JIN medst of the garden, (from 4) of FD),
by Art. 93. 1; apy Ma house of Jacob + Wa”) (for
IT) sufficient (pl.) for burning, Isa. xl. 16. (Art. 93. 3.)
7th, All masculine dual and plural nouns ending in
D’— and D*— respectively, will take the termination %—,
and reject the preceding vowel, whenever it is perfect and
mutable, or otherwise contract it: e. g. mala “A Jeho-
vah’s words (sing. 123); MN WY, (sng. LY or TY,
dual DY) Jehovah's eyes. In these cases, the ter-
minating 0 of the dual or plural may be considered as
* This terminating vowel seems to be taken in this case, in order to avoid
confounding these nouns with feminines ending in JT rm
+ Hence, perhaps, the termination — in plural masculine nouns, as "73"
is for IIIDT, see Art. 147. 7. note.
ART. 151. 8._] STATE OF CONSTRUCTION. 77
being purely euphonic, as the } also is in the Chaldaic,
Syriac, and Arabic (Art. 91.).
On the termination *~, occasionally found in this
situation, see Art. 147. 6.
8th, From the examples already given, it will be seen,
that this construction may be translated, generally, by
the genitive case in other languages: but, as one or
other of the particles is often introduced for this purpose,
as well as to form combinations equivalent in signification
to the different cases of the Greek and Latin grammars,
the Student is referred to the Syntax for further inform-
ation on this subject.
78 LECTURE VI. [ART. 152. 1.
LECTURE VI.
ON THE PARTS OF SPEECH IN GENERAL, AND ON THE NOUN
IN PARTICULAR.
152. Havine laid down and exemplified the general
principles of syllabiéation, &c. as found to prevail in this
Language, we now come to consider the different parts
of speech, and to shew how they stand in their primitive
state, or as derived from one another.
Ist, The Hebrew language is, like all others, found to
consist of nouns, verbs, and particles,* so arranged in
sentences, as to present to the mind such ideas as are
intended to be conveyed by the speaker or writer of any
discourse. Of these, the third person singular masculine
of the verb has generally been taken as the root, or
theme, from which the other parts of speech have been
derived. For my own part, however, I believe that the
noun ought to be considered as the root; not only,
because the learner may by this means be enabled more
clearly to see how the conjugations of the verbs are
carried on; but, also, because he may ascertain, with a
much greater degree of precision, the force of all those
nouns, which have hitherto been considered as branches
of the verb. There are, besides, other reasons which
induce me to believe that the noun ought to be con-
sidered as the root: they are these; Ist, There are
some classes of the verbs which do not exhibit the root
fully in the third person singular masculine of the pre-
terite: and these comprehend all those verbs which have
+ The Arabian and Jewish grammarians comprehend in these all the other
parts of speech generally given in the grammars of Europe.
ART. 152. 1.1] PARTS OF SPEECH. -.
\ or» for the middle radical, which are found complete in
the noun, but defective in the verb. In some others,
indeed, the noun appears in a defective form; but, in
these cases, it 1s never found complete in the verb.
Again, the variation found to prevail in the last vowel of
the preterite is more naturally accounted for in the noun
than in the verb; and it 1s a fact, that a noun having the
same vowel is almost universally found to exist. Besides,
the participial and other nouns, which have no tenses in
themselves, are better understood, by considering them as
derived from the primitive nouns, than from words con-
jugated as verbs. Add to this the circumstance, that a
verb in the state of conjugation either is, or must be,
considered as being, compounded with a pronoun, and,
therefore, in an unfit state to be considered as a primitive
word. [It is without these pronouns, as well as every
other adjunct, and when the noun is in its primitive form,
that we consider it as a root ;* and, this we contend, is
* The school of Basra hold the same opinion with reference to the Arabic.
See Ebn Farhat on this subject in M. De Sacy’s Gram. Arabe, vol. 1. p. 229,
note. M. De Sacy himself thinks it will come to the same thing whether we
consider the infinitive form as the root, or whether we take the third person sin-
gular masculine of the preterite, because the one may be termed the logical
root, the other the etymological one, ib. p.197. But why, it may be asked,
are we to have two roots for the same word? And why may not that, which is
termed the logical root, be also considered as the etymological one? If the one
presents a form more simple than the other, which is the fact, Why, T ask, may
not the less simple be considered as being derived from the other? 1 must
confess, whatever the school of Koufa may think of it, that of Basra appears
to me to have reason on their side in this question; and to their opinion I am
therefore, compelled to subscribe, which M. De Sacy has also done at p. 128,
note a of his second vol. See also the Mikhlol of Kimkhi, fol. 83)? verso,
where he expressly says, that such words as Reuben, Simeon, Sebulun, and the
like, are derived from verbs; but that in such as DFT, YWI, PTS, AQT, 120),
the verb is derived from the noun, Wi yO YYIDTI 732. The same
doctrine is taught by De Balmes, when speaking of the forms of nouns.
50 LECTURE VI. CART, 153.
the more natural way to proceed. Induced by these
considerations, then, to give the noun the first place in
treating of the etymology, we shall proceed to give
the forms of the personal pronouns, as_ used either
in connection, or not, with other nouns; not, because
these words have any prior claim to our consideration ;
but; because we shall thereby enable ourselves to shew,
when we come to detail the forms of the nouns, how
these pronouns are connected with them.
No one need be alarmed on this new, or rather old,
view of the subject before us, as to the interpretation of
the Hebrew Scriptures. The only difference that can
possibly arise will be, that in one case the translator will
see more clearly the mind of his author, and the force
of the passage he may have to translate, than he other-
wise could. Nor will our lexicons or commentaries
be thus rendered useless: the only difference will be,
that what a lexicographer may consider as a verb, we
should consider as being originally a noun; but which,
by the process of conjugation with some pronoun, has
assumed the functions of a verb: but, in every case, the
general sense given will be the same, provided both
parties agree in the radical signification of such word.—
Let us now proceed to the personal pronouns.
Of the Pronouns.
153. The pronouns are, in the Hebrew, as in other
languages, 1. Personal, 2. Demonstrative, 3. Relative,
See also Le Court de Gebelin, Monde Primitif. vol. iii. pp. 55, 56, 80, &c.;
Mr. Forster’s Essay on Sauscrit Gram. p. 540; Caroli Aurivillii Dissertationes
Goet. 1790, p. 376, &c. It is acurious fact, that in the Burman, verbs are
nothing more than participial nouns conjugated with the pronouns. See
Carey’s Grammar of the Burman, p. 79, &c. See also Humboldt on the
Chinese, Journal Asiatique, vol. iv. p. 115.
ART. 153. 1.1] ON THE PRONOUNS. 81
and, 4. Interrogative, with which, 5. the feflective,
pronouns and the Definite Article, are sometimes classed.
We shall, at present, consider the Personal Pronouns
only.
The Personal Pronouns.
Ist, ‘These are termed Separable, and Inseparable.
When Separable, they may be considered as representing
the person, to which they belong, in the nominative
case: when Jnseparable, they exhibit only a part of the
Separable pronoun attached to some other word.
When attached to verbs, they may be said to represent
either the objective, or some other oblique case;
but, when attached to nouns, they stand for the
correspondent possessive pronoun: there being no other
way of expressing the possessive pronominal sense in
Hebrew.
2d, The Separable personal pronouns are as follows:
f Sinc. Com. Gen.
| YIN» or YIN Bees title Sut Perncte ciels's are i
1 Person. i :
Pure.
| samy , rarely }}J}, and once JN We.
Cal ere Rie A el
‘ Sing. Mase.
PUTIN , rarely JAN -.cseeeeeeee voce Thou.
PLurR
EU PAN Carats rae tele nite atctsla'y sieretars sy You
2 Person. J ey
Sine. Fem.
| TIN, rarely WAR ceeeeereeeees Thou
PLur
i Fabs Mts nocecepapercts You
82 LECTURE VI. (ART. 153. 3.
Sinc. Masc.
NV a ails Sia eb Wurst tay aitnnsee Cok Bas a He
PLuR.
Dt, occasionally 7D 7.......- They.
3 Person ut Phe.
a Srnc. Fem.
| NYT, anciently NUVI ;
PLuR.
[ }d> occasionally rary:
3d, There are three instances in which 8 thou, is used in the
masculine gender: viz. Num. xi, 15, Deut. v. 24, and Ezek.
xxviii. 14. OAS is used as a feminine, Ezek. xiii. 20: 157 is also
used as a feminine, Cant. vi. 8, Ruth i. 22, Zech. v. 10: and 277 as
a masculine, 2 Sam. iv. 6, Jer.]. 5. 77 also occurs as a masculine,
Ruth i. 13. We also have 8°77 for S177, 1 Kings xvii. 15; and NW
for 8°F7 throughout the Pentateuch, if we except eleven instances. This
is usually ascribed to an archaism, grounded on the supposition, that
in ancient times the pronouns were all considered as being of the
common gender.
4th, ‘a8 is probably a foreign word: Egyptian, perhaps, where we
have &.NOK, there being no trace of it in any of the sister dialects
of the Hebrew. Gesenius finds it, however, in the Pheenician.*
5th, The Dagésh of THAIS, DS, SS, OFS, and JOS, is put as a
compensation for 2, which has been thrown out (Art. 82.), but which
is still retained in the dialects.
6th, The Inseparable pronouns are abbreviated forms
of the pronouns above given; they are invariably found
attached to some preceding word, whether that be a
noun, verb, or particle.} The following is a table of
their forms, as attached to nouns; we shall give those for
the verbs hereafter.
* Lehregebaude, page 200, note.
+ This may be considered as an illustration of the principle of thus
abridging and compounding words in Hebrew; and as confirming in a great
degree the remarks offered in the note, Art. 147. 7. above.
ART. 153. 6.1] ON THE PRONOUNS. 83
( Sine. Com. Gen. For Nouns Sino. For Nouns Puvr.
"IN, or VIN we have =.o. 0... ces eee \— my, Or mine.
For the Tas "OT " . ,
1 Pers. Prue.
pat , OF M3 Pry 3 Pee: or ‘eam Vee 3. our, or ours.
Sinc. Masc.
wale or AS ee 7] > Pe or 1 ca hae thy, or thine.
PLuR
E, | DAS Sra state ee sett D2 Seed Rak wr ee Sia your, or yours.
ers ; é ;
Sinc. Fem.
TN, OF IFN .+.e-eee Ee or Yomese eee ie Wrest or vara thy, or thine.
Prur.
L AS or mProtss aeltye 9 2 i) sates ones ot Maes 3.5 Ra your, oY yours.
Sinc. Masc. | h
NUTeeceeeeeeees VAT. VIF, or WA «my J poet. YT ee
Pur. ae
. : eur
oF taka PFs Ort ; D—, poet. Sane se or poet. 1 ha ; 5,
» get Sinc. Fem.
QUT, OF RIM ----- 6s Mitre rT eee hers, her.
PLur.
URE Or TIBET moe LT Aaa aoe oe he, theirs.
7th, It is to be observed, that in affixing these abbreviated pro-
nouns to singular nouns, it will be necessary, when such word does not
end in a vowel, to take that form of the pronoun which has one.
This is called the Vowel of union. In this case, an accent will always
accompany it as given above, except in those cases wherein the affix
itself takes the accent. But, when the preceding word ends in a
vowel, no such union vowel can be introduced: in that case, the
abbreviated pronoun is taken which has no such preceding vowel of
union.
8th, Nouns ending in %, will drop that letter upon receiving the
affixed pronoun of the first person singular : as, 2 a nation; 3 my
nation, for aE
9th, The wilde AR a father; OS a brother; and OF a father-in-
daw; and 3 the mouth, will take * when put in construction with a
foregoing noun, or when receiving any one of the above pronominal
G 2
84. LECTURE VI. [ ART. 153. 10.
affixes, which may be dropped by the rule (No. 8.): as, 28 for 228
(the root being 28) my father ; 728 thy father (masc.), TAR thy
(fem.) father; 28 his father, and so on. Some other words ending
in » for 7 may take the affixed pronouns in the same way: as, ~!2
frut; OFP ID their fruit ; or, they may take it with a vowel of union :
as, G2 or 1112 their (masce. and fem.) fruit.
10th, Here, however, the masculine form of the pronominal affix
is sometimes taken, when the sense seems to require the feminine, and
vice.versd, see Gen. xxxi. 9, Ruthi. 8. 9.11.13, Ezek. xi. 19. 20. 21,
Jers ix. 19s) So also.AM sfor, 1, TDD for mn Exod. xi. 6, twice.
In the same manner we have 123) for TZ Jud. xi. 34; D for 7,
as, yaw for Tow Cant. iv. 2, vi. 6. So Exod. ii. 17, 2 Sam. xx. 8,
twice, Pgal. cxix. 152. So OF) for 771] Exod. i. 21, Num, xxxvi. 6,
twice, Job xix. 15, Ezek. xxiii. 45. 47, Ezr. x. 3. 44, Zech. v. 9,
xi. 5; 1 as a feminine in 189 Lam. iv. 10. On these apparent dis-
crepancies, however, see the Syntax.
11th, On the contrary, } occurs for ©: as, TAYDIN? for OoAyDN?
to them four, Ezek. i. 10, twice; and again, ver. 16. 18. Also in 7222
Ib. ver. 9. 12. 17, in their going ; VJ also occurs as a masculine 7722)
their four (sides), Ib. ver. 17; and again, in ver. 18. 24. 25. Also with
a paragogic 1; as, MIPIM their bodies, Ib. ver. 11.
12th, In affixing these pronouns to nouns, it must be remembered
that they are not made to agree, either in number or person, with the
nouns to which they are attached, but with those to which they relate,
as to the sense.
13th, Such of these inseparable pronouns as commence with a
consonant, and make a syllable independently of any part of the
preceding word, are to be considered as Syllabic; these are, that of
the first person plural, 12; those of the second, 72, 7, 5), and
12; of the third, 77, 4, OF7, and #7. Such as do not constitute
a syllable in themselves but require the addition of a letter from
the preceding word, have been termed Asyllabic; see Art. 98, &c.
Of these are the remaining pronouns, viz. >., >, 7, 3, 1, 2, 7,
and 4.
14th, Of these inseparable pronouns DD, j3, OF, and
ji, are termed grave (Art. 123. 2.), because they always
have the accent. The others are, by way of contra-
distinction, termed light.
ART. 153. 15._] ON THE PRONOUNS. 85
It is of importance to make these distinctions, because
the changes of the vowels of the preceding word, will,
in a great measure, depend upon it: e. g. 127) a word.
If I affix ‘- my, mine, the \ of 72°] must be taken in
order to enounce this vowel: as, "77-27. But, by our
laws of syllabication the preceding 2 must have a perfect
vowel, (+) will, therefore, remain unchanged. And, as
the first (_) is not immutable, and, as the accent is with
the affix, it will become (:) and we shall have 37.
This holds good with all the asyllabic affixes. But if I
take a syllabic affix; let it be DD your; we shall then
have 0372" your word. In this case, the 1 of 27
concludes its last syllable; and, as the accent is removed,
the (+) preceding this letter originally, must, by our
laws of syllabication become (-) and we have accordingly
02372". Butif we take q which is also syllabic, we shall
not have 77271, but 7727; because, although the affix 7
is syllabic, the accent nevertheless accompanies the pre-
ceding syllable, which therefore remains perfect (Art. 34.)
and we have 7727. The same holds good in all other
cases.
15th, Any word preceding one or other of these
affixes may be considered as being in construction with
it; and, therefore, subject to all those changes in the
vowels, to which words so situated are (Art. 151. 3.).
The only difference being, that, instead of the latter
noun being written at length, it has been abbreviated,
by one or other of the rules detailed in Art. 78, &Xc.
16th, The following are examples of the application of
the Inseparable pronouns to nouns singular and plural,
masculine and feminine. No example of the dual is
given, because it always takes the affixes proper for the
§
plural: as, DW two eyes, ‘YY my eyes, &c.
86 LECTURE VI. TART. 153. 17.
Sing. Mase. OID « horse.
1 pers. sing. com. ‘DID my horse.
W ose ole ap masc. 010 or MDD thy horse.
Zeta cuet celle JOO thy horse.
Tae ete: masc. DID or MDID his horse.
B in siad a nkue fem. MIODID, rarely MDI her horse.
1 pers. plur. com. 1010 our horse.
@ aaccinees masc. DI01D your horse,
MOTI... fem. }2DID your horse.
PO. oer mase. DDD, poeticé JODHA their horse.
terete a: daa fem. }D1D or MIDID their horse.
Plur. Masc. DOD Aorses.
1 pers. sing. com. ‘DID my horses.
Bosses tas masc. PDD thy horses.
2 sanconss fem. POI thy horses.
3 dasenens masc. YDID or IID his horses.
BE a gee fem. DID her fibleh
i pers. plur. com. DID our horses.
ee er mase. DDID your horses.
2! seclecs. fem, INDIO your horses.
ba serie masc. EI DID, or poetic? JID their horses.
Deeks sain fem. ‘TDI their horses. |
17th, Example of a feminine noun in both numbers.
with the affixed pronouns.
Singular. MIM @ law.
1 pers. sing. com. sin my law.
* The final fT becomes JV by Art. 151. 4.
ART. 153. 18./] ON THE PRONOUNS. 87
2 pers. sing. masc. FNAIN thy law.
th ee fem. qo thy law.
BPI wsie 2 . masce. INVIIM or SIV IVT) Ais, its law.
> ES es a fem. Sn : fhe AAT her, ats law.
1 pers. plur. com. eehia our law. i
Be ae masc. pannin your law.
SURE es fem. jonnin your law.
Biel wilt masc. DOMAIN, poetice TANNIN their law.
a ee fem. nin ain their law.
Plural. NIA Jews.
1 pers. sing. com. wninin my laws.
LL eBasnd mase. pninin thy laws.
A) gs nk iy fem. E wal bio or 1 thy laws.
Bhat ice mase. PII or WAI) his, tts laws.
= Menai fem. pninin her, its laws.
i pers. plur. com. svehita our laws.
BO VU. masc, o> nisin your laws.
ames a acets fem. niin your laws.
Sas oir oe masc. OTnINA , or poetice a their laws.
Sis aaet fem. Monin their laws.
18th, Nouns ending in 77> take the affix Wz instead of J or MT in
the third person singular masculine, rejecting first their final letter 17:
s, M29 a leaf; aby his leaf; TY a field; WVIY his field. In
in same manner eae reject their final letter when they receive the
feminine affix of the same person, which is either “7 or 7: as,
TY a field; FVIW her field ; TI an accident ; TT her accident,
Ruth i ii. 3; FISV an appearance ; TSS tts appearance.
Anomalies.
19th, 27 his flock (of sheep), Deut. xxii. 1, from mW. The
affix “WT is occasionally found attached to other nouns : 5, BID
88 LECTURE IV. (ART. 153. 20.
his concubine, Judg. xix. 24; 10D his yoke, Nah. i. 13; 778 his
light, Job xxv. 8. And also with plurals: as, WWINDA his heroes,
Nah. ii. 4.
20th, The following examples are also anomalous. 2 Pers. masc.
MDI Ps. x.14; according to some. 2 Pers. fem. Tow yw thy
third part, with » inserted, Ezek. v. 12; 7203 giving thee, Ib. xxiii. 28;
NDD for ryD the whole of it.
Of the first person plural Ay TA our acquaintance, Ruth iii. 2;
1273")? our substance, Job xxii. 20. Of the second fem. M22NSI your
baseness, Ezek. xxui. 48.
Of the third masc. OD all of them, 2 Sam. xxiii. 6. Of the
third fem. TIT PD the whole of them. So Gen. xli. 21; 227) for
1277? the midst of them,
With Nouns Plural.
21st, 1 Pers. sing. YNITY for NITY my testimonies, Ps. cxxxii. 12.
The union vowels of the affix of the 3 fem. sing. are sometimes con-
tracted: as, JOVAS (Art. 93. 3.) for FUOIVIIS thy sisters, Ezek. xvi. 52,
&c., in which case the » Yod is dropped. This sometimes takes place
in the mase. pronoun: as, N22 thy strokes, for WMD Deut.
xxviii, 59. So M2872 thy messengers, Nah. ii. 14. It. 2d fem.
MIDNINoD your pillows. Of the 3d mase. TVA his benefits,
Ps. exvi. 12. Of the Chaldaic form: TON their posts. 3d fem.
NTTPMS its galleries; TAPIA their bodies, Ezek. i. 11, &e.
22d, The affix 52 of the 2d pers. plur. mase. is, in one instance,
preceded by (-);® as, DDNEIOM your dispersions, Jer. xxv. 34.
These may all perhaps be the resuJt of errors in transcription.
23d, The * which precedes the affixed pronouns in the plural
numbers of nouns is frequently dropped: as, 7271 for T2T1 thy
mays, &c. But, many of these anomalies will come under the rules
detailed in Arit. 78. 147. 7, &c. and will, therefore, be rather apparent
than real; the rest perhaps are the mere mistakes of the copyists.
N.B. The demonstrative and other pronouns will be given when we
come to treat on the particles.
On the Use, Signification, and Forms of Words generally.
154. Words are nothing more than sounds, simple or
* In some editions regularly °..
ART. 154. 2..] THE USE, &C. OF WORDS. 89
compound, which have been allowed by mutual consent
to represent the ideas conceived in the mind of one
person to that of another. Whether any of these were
first imparted to man by the Creator, or whether he had
only the powers given sufficient for appropriating such
sounds for the purposes of conversation, it is impossible
now to say: nor is it very important; for, in either
case, their adoption will be traced to the appointment
of the Deity, either mediately, or immediately. From
what is revealed in the Scriptures, I am inclined to
believe, that it was an immediate appointment, as far at
least as the necessities of man might first have required ;
leaving it to his ingenuity to extend and cultivate them
as the increasing wants or refinements of society might
suggest. If, then, this gift was immediate, nothing can
be more probable than that the use of words would be
grounded upon some analogy ; which, it is likely, would
also have been the case, had unassisted reason been left
to shift for itself. In any case, then, we might expect to
find that some analogy had been resorted to in the
structure of language, whether we originally possessed
the skeleton of it either as given by inspiration, or, as
made by man for his own use. Substances must have had
names, and these must have been such as would generally
be allowed, whether we can now see their suitableness or
not. The same must be true of events; and whether
we can now see the reason why certain words, or sorts of
words, have been employed for these purposes or not,
it must be next to certain, that there once was some
immediate cause for both their adoption and forms.
2d, If then this be the real state of the case, it may
be worth while to consider, in the next place, how the
primitive significations of words would in process of time
be varied, in order to meet the necessities which would
90 LECTURE VI. [ART. 154. 2.
daily arise. Let us, in the first place, take the word
y20 walking, going, proceeding. ‘This, we can suppose,
was the name given to that sort of action, whereby a
person removes himself from one place to another. If
then we add some other words, this may be made to
mean, proceeding fowards, either as a friend or an
enemy.—/rom, with, &c. with the additional ideas of
co-operation, resistance, joining, opposing, or the like.
In the next place, this action might be applied to the
mind, and then signify, its progress, improvement, general
conduct, conversation, &c. and, in such acceptations 1s
this word used. Hence, Enoch is said to have walked
with God, DT INTITNS FIN JM, Gen. v.22. Again,
it may be applied to the state of any thing, as being in
progress, and this may be understood as intimating
either increase or diminution: as, 5) qin 11, Gen.
xxvi. 13. So, he proceeded, proceeding and becoming
great, i.e. gradually. And, Ib. vill. 3, &c. DVD IW
OM Aw yon ..... and the waters returned.....
proceeding and returning, and they decreased, &c.
And hence this word 1s often used in the sense of pro-
ceeding gradually.* Again, let us take the word my
rising, mounting up, &c. This, then, with certain
adjuncts, may signify to become superior to, or to get
the upper hand over, another ; to conquer him, to humble
him; also to excel in state, dignity, power, &c.: the
being conversant wpon, or about, any thing: being near
a place or thing, before it, or, as we say in English,
over against it: also, over and above, implying ea-
cess: being imcumbent upon, as a duty, &c. all of which
* So also the Persian 4) 43) going, going, for gradually. So Virgil,
Vires acquirit eundo.
ART. 154. 3. THE USE, &c. OF WORDS. Gi
might arise out of the primitive word, by considering it,
either in its proximate or remote bearings: and such are
the acceptations in which this word, in one form or other,
is actually found.
3d, If then we can conceive that words would thus be
made to vary in their significations, in consequence of
their different bearings, as above noticed, we shall find
no difficulty in also seeing, how the cause, beginning,
continuation, completion, consequence, &c. of any action
may be intimated by such words, as also the ability,
duty, right, will, endeavour, custom, occasion, permis-
ston, notification, &c. which may also be implicated
in the more remote signification of such words: which
according to the Grammarians and Commentators,* has
actually taken place in many instances in the Hebrew;
as, indeed, it has, in a greater or less degree, in all
languages; and which is nothing more than the necessity
of the case absolutely requires.
4th, The daw or necessity by which this variety has
been brought about, has, for convenience sake, been
termed T'ropology, which, for the same reason, has been
divided into Metonymy, Irony, Metaphor, and Synec-
doche. Murtonymy respects cause and effect; subject
and adjunct: Irony, contrariety: Metaruor, com-
parison: SYNECDOCHE, distribution, as to the whole with
reference to its parts; the genus to its species, the
material to the thing composed out of it, &c. For a
full account of which the reader is referred to the second
volume of the Philologia Sacra of Glassius, or the work of
Storr, books which every student of the Hebrew Language
ought to have.
* See Glass. Philolog. Sacr. Ed. Dathe. p. 178—249. &. Storr. Observ.
De pOek,
92 LECTURE VI. CART. 154. 6.
5th, Let it be remembered, however, we are not to
recur to these figures, in order to reconcile any passage
we may meet with, to our own preconceived notions. It
must appear clearly from the context, considered in con-
junction with the character of the writer we may be
consulting, that such figure has really been used, other-
wise we shall make the sacred writers occasionally to
talk like madmen; and perhaps extract from the same
writer, nay the same passage, the most incongruous and
discordant notions.
6th, When, therefore, we have to give the meaning of
any particular word, which seems to present»some dif_i-
culty, we must consider carefully whether the primitive,
or some derived signification, is to be used. When the
usual acceptation of such word will answer our purpose,
the work is done, and we need proceed no further: but,
when this is not the case, we must try in what way our
principles will help us: e. g. We find in Job ti. 9, the
following passage, which has given no small trouble to
the ‘Translators and Commentators: Mi) DTN Fae,
which in our authorized version is, “ Curse God and die.”
The word from which the principal difficulty has here
arisen 1s J22. The best explanation I can give is this:
JA used as a verb, seems first to have been applied to
camels, when kneeling down to receive their burdens.*
Hence, perhaps, the idea of submission in kneeling for
the purpose of receiving something from a superior:
and hence also receiving a blessing; and, actively, giving
or bestowing one: also to ask or receive a blessing on
ee
* See the Sihah of Jauhari and the Kamoos under this word, which give
Srrrrs S427 Ee
Tally Sob: | increase, and 3d] happtness, &c. as its meaning, &c. See
also jaa xxvVil. 36, Jos. xv. 19, &c.
ART. 154. 7. ] THE USE, &c. OF WORDS. 93
departing, &c. To which mop lightness 18 opposed
as being a curse, Gen. xxvil. 12, &c. In the next place,
as imposing a burden seems to be connected with the
primitive meaning of this word, this signification also
may be taken in the sense of oppression, affliction ;* and,
actively, treating or considering another as the author
of it; which, I believe, is the meaning of the word in
this place. Storr (p. 37—8.) has taken it in the sense
of bidding farewell, and hence of forsaking and giving
wp. Parkhurst, with some of his school, has taken it
as an wony here, which is hardly necessary.x— What has
here been said is intended to refer to unaugmented words
generally. On the augmented ones we shall have some-
thing to offer hereafter.
7th, With reference to the forms of Hebrew words
the student will readily perceive, that if the root in its
simplest form, which is constant, will always represent
a certain class of words; then, upon any augmentation
being made either in its vowels or consonants, or both,
other forms will be produced, which may severally repre-
sent words of other classes, each having meanings or
shades of meaning peculiar to themselves: and, such is
actually the case.
8th, If then this be the case, we can adopt certain
words representing the various forms found to prevail;
and these we can use, like the formule in Algebra, to
2bte tse - a ad C4 I"7 2us
* The Author of the Kaémvos has qw9%, pal Udle, 3) Bless,
Liglasts, &c. which are all to this purpose. So ah) is taken to signify
baseness in a bad sense, and humility in a good one. See the Moallakah of
Antara by Menil and Wilmet, p. 135. The same is the case with many other
Arabic words. See also the Note Miscellanee appended to the Porta Mosis
by Pococke, cap. i.
04 LECTURE VI. CART. 154.8.
designate whole classes of others having the same forms.
Thus, TP), may be put for any word, having the vowel
Pathakh only, between its first and second radical letters.
In like manner T?5, 172, T?5, may represent any others
having a Khdlém, Txéré, or Khirtk, in the same place,
respectively, which are the forms of primitive nouns,
generally having an abstract signification. In the next
place, T1758, IPA, WIS, PS, Se. or, with one or other
of the letters SAIDNT, as, TIPE, TpbO, &c. may repre-
sent other words, having the same vowels or consonants
either preceding or following the same letters of the root
respectively, and may each be severally put down as a
formule designating any class of such words. And, as
the roots of words in Hebrew always consist of three
letters, the servile letters or vowels being always the
same, these formule can always be applied.
9th, In the Rabbinic grammars, dictionaries, and
commentaries, the word by, with its variations, 1s taken
as the common measure of all other words; but, as
great inconvenience arises from the use of this word,
on account of the medial ¥, we have, with Schroederus
and others, taken 7), not indeed that it is entirely
unexceptionable, there being one of the MITA letters,
both as its initial and final letter: but because it is
sufficiently applicable to our purpose.
155. It will appear from what has been said (Artt. 77.
78. 79. 80. 81. 82.) that primitive nouns, originally con-
sisting of three radical letters, may frequently be found
with ¢wo only; and there are cases to be noticed here-
after, im which we have but ove. Making these allow-
ances, therefore, the forms of all nouns will be either
Simple, Augmented, or Compound.
2d, The simple forms, as already noticed (Art. 154.
8.) will consist of the radical letters (supposing none
ART. 155. 3..] THE Use, &c. OF WORDs. 95
of them to have been dropped as mentioned above) ac-
companied by one or two vowels.
3d, The augmented forms of nouns will consist of one
or other of the simple forms augmented, either by the
reduplication of its middle radical letter by Dagésh, or
by the addition of one or more of the letters ION, or
by both taken together.
4th, Compound words are those which are formed by
the combination of one or more words, simple or aug-
mented, written together as one, contracted or abridged
it may be as the rules may require.
5th, The simple forms may be divided into two classes,
the first of which may, from their peculiarities, be termed
Segolates: the second, Primitive nouns, only.
6th, By Segolate nouns is meant, nouns, which in ad-
dition to their primitive vowel, generally introduce an
additional (-) for the sake of Kuphony (Art. 114.). In
the other class of primitive nouns this does not take
place.
7th, We shall first consider the different sorts of Sego-
late nouns, and then proceed to the others, whether
simple, augmented, or compounded; giving, at the same
time, the sears which they severally assume in forming
the plural number—in the state of construction, whether
singular or plural; and when having any of the pronouns
attached to them.
156. The forms of the primitive Segolate nouns are
the following : viz. I. 328, the alternate form of which
is, IPD or TPA: IL. TPA, alt. TPB: IIT. TPA, alt. 7pa:
IV. IPA, alt. TPB: V. "pd, alt. IPD; at are ge-
nerally Nostale in cea. and, in the leading form,
have the accent on the penultimate (Art. 123. 1.).
2d, Now, as the pronunciation of the leading forms of
these words would, in many cases, be exceedingly dif-
96 LECTURE VI. [ART. 156. 3.
ficult, an additional vowel, (+) Ségél, for the most part,
is introduced in order to obviate that difficulty
(Art. 114.) : e. g. instead of saying 7P, where it would
scarcely be possible to enounce the 7, by introducing
(=), we shall have 3?2; and, in order to avoid the con-
currence of two dissimilar vowels, the former will also
become («), and then we shall have 7? instead of
TPB. Hence, we have 727 for 972 a king ; 79D for
75D or 5D a book; and so of some of the other
forms.
In some cases, however, where no difficulty of pro-
nunciation would arise, the primitive form is retained :
as, Ni’ a valley; ROM sin; Tl nard; OY? justice ;
which also occurs with (=): as, OWP Ps. lx. 6, and
also in the alternate form OWP Dan. il. 47, iv. 34.
3d, In all cases, in which this class of words will,
by the accidence of Grammar, receive any asyllabic aug-
ment, there will no longer remain a necessity for this
Euphonic vowel, and then the primitive or alternate form
of the word will be used: as, i370 his king ; 290
kings (in construction) ; and D290 (from the alternate
form J?) kings, when not in the state of construction.
So also in the feminine form, ma? a@ queen, which in
the plural number will take the alternate form nin,
from 720, as before. The (-) becomes (+) Kaméts, by
Artt. 99.147. So also JADW his shoulder, from D2¥
shoulder ; WP his holiness, from Wp. The accent
being removed, causes the first vowel to become imper-
fect (Art. 34, &c.).
4th, As we have already laid down the rules relating
to the formation of the feminine gender of nouns
(Art. 142.), of the plural number (Artt. 146, 148, &c.),
to the state of construction (Art. 151.), and to the
inseparable pronouns as affecting the nouns (Art. 153.),
ART. 156. 4..| ON THE NOUNS. 97
it is now our intention to shew, in each form as far as
necessary, in what way the vowels are affected by these
circumstances. We have chosen this method of detailing
what has been termed the mutationes punctorum, because
this seems to be the only one likely to be of any ser-
vice to the Student. In the grammars of Buxtorf and
others of his school, it was customary to give a con-
siderable number of rules on this subject, with a few
examples; and then to leave the Student to make his
way as well as he could. But, as the analogy of words
is the only sure guide, little use could be made of
the rules, until the Learner had become familiar with
it; and, when this was done, those rules were almost
useless. In the more modern grammars of Germany,
the analogy is first taught, and then the nouns are
divided into a number of declensions. But this seems
to be labour thrown away; for, if the Student is
once made acquainted with the laws of syllabication,
and the forms of words, any further classification of these
forms, must rather tend to confuse him than the con-
trary. But, supposing this not to be the case, still the
labour is multiplied; and, as far as I can see, for no
useful purpose.
I was agreeably surprised to find, upon turning over
the Rabbinic grammars of D. Kimchi and those who
have followed him, that under the forms of the nouns,
the changes of the vowel-points are in all cases given;
which, indeed, had appeared to me the most rational
way of proceeding. In conformity with this principle
then, it is our intention to proceed to the classification
of the nouns, beginning with those termed Segolate,
giving at once all we believe to be necessary for the
information of the Student, and adding such notes on the
different forms as the circumstances of the case shall
H
98 LECTURE VI. CART. 156. 5.
seem to require. Having already given a classification
of the Segolate nouns, we shall now proceed to ex-
emplify them.
5th. On the Itrst Species of Segolate Nouns of the forms
The? TRE or IPD:
Forms. EXAMPLEs, STaTE OF CONSTRUCTION.
Primitive. Usual Do. Fem. Gen. Mase. Fem.
TPR TPR Tekin BDI amen I NID
or, Alt. ;
TPE TPS 24 a man (Chald. Syr.) —— Aa none.
or
TpPD TPS an2 a writing. ea | nD none.
6th, The Absolute masculine plurals (Art. 147.3.) of all Segolate nouns,
excepting those only which have (1) Kholém for one of their vowels,
take the form of O72; feminines take that of MTB. In the
first case, therefore, we shall have moon, and in the feminine
nin , from the alternate forms (Art. 156. 1.). And, so of all
others, whether of the masculine or feminine gender, with the above
exception. The plural form, as used in construction with another
noun, as also in conjunction with any of the inseparable pronouns, will
follow the primitive form of these words (Ib. 3.). In the words given
above we shall have "299, and noon, for the plural forms for
construction. But, 23 has \2D, and 722 does not occur in the
plural form for construction. It should be observed, however, that
the Chaldaic and Syriac forms 7/22 or 1))P are to be referred, some-
times to one class, and sometimes to another, of the Segolate nouns :
thus 2/1? is manifestly of the class 12, the plural in construction
being "2112; but 7122 belongs to 722, the plural of construction,
no less than the forms found with the pronouns being 4122: as, 1232
his silver; BIMBOD their pieces of silver.
7th, The regular forms, for the affixed pronouns, singular and plural
of the first form, are, as 327%, W279, 1279, ompa22, n2 279,
1220, mon, and, by analogy, though not occurring in the text,
10, 1229, &c. So that the plural of construction,—that used in
connection with the pronouns of the second and third persons mascu-
line and feminine plural, will be regulated by the primitive forms of
these nouns; and in all other cases they will follow the alternate
ART. 156. 8. | ON THE NOUNS. 99)
form, 122, or 172, due regard being had to the laws of syllabi-
cation.
8th,’ 723 time, takes Dagésh in the final } when the word receives any
asyllabic augment: as, Chat times, oat they times, &c. But
this word probably belongs to some of the augmented forms.
9th, It should be remembered, that in every case in which a guttural
letter is the second or third of such word, the accompanying or preced-
ing vowel may be (- ); as, Y23 an arm (Art. 114.). For a list of nouns
of this form, see the ‘‘ Arcanum Formarum” of Simonis, p. 307, &c.
10th, It should also be observed, that some Segolate nouns are, in
their original forms, of the femimine gender: and, that,’ generally,
words do not receive the termination ‘T= as distinctive of that gender,
except such as relate to sex.
11th, There is a considerable number of defective forms, which
may be referred to the Segolates, of which the following belong to this
class in particular: 13 death (prim. V2, Art. 114.), which in
uk or with the pronouns, will ae the form WO (Att.
151. 6.): s, TM ND the death of the child, Gen. xxi. 16. So’
iia, nin, DA, &c., and in thé plural number P19, &e:':
Dy iniquity, fem. my id and contr. moiy ; IT an’ age,
generation (prim. J)1, Arab. - “ Art. 93.)
12th, Examples with a medial : T3 (prim. TS, Arab. Rn ‘ 3) hunt-
ing, fem. TVS id. (Art. 93. 3.); (YB (prim. 2, Arab. toh in
constr. (V2, with pron. UND, UVB, &e. (Art. 151—6.). The plural
now in use, viz. P12, is sane deri td from another ge SON
Of Nouns doubling the last radical letter :—14 a garden (prim. 733,
Art. 83.) fem. 1723 id. (Ib.) And, with the pronouns, 23, 323, ae
plur. abs. 522 for 9222, and fem. mp3 for 9223, in order per-
haps to avoid the too Beane recurrence of the same sound. The
form of construction taken by the feminine is-f122, instead of #133,
probably for the sake of variety. So 72 pure (prim. 172° Arab. i
fem. 72, for 172 (Art. 115.) purity. In the plur. constr. mase. 3
for “2.
_With medial ) and final 8:—NYW, prim. form, and, by apocope w
(Art. 80.) vanity ; fem. mai splee) destruction. a with *, S’2 prim. form,
a cert In constr. 8A, “ahd! by apocope 73, also in ‘constr oh, ‘2’;
pl. n}s 4, and with the light affixes, aay thy vallies.
Hw 2
100 LECTURE VI. [ ART. 157,
—With final ) or °:—TY (prim. }TY or YY) eternity ; so WTR for WIS
(Art. 93. 2.) a bulrush ; amy smimming.
—With medial 3 :—AS8 ee FI (Art. 82.) the nose, anger ; with the
pronouns, J28, 758, YDS, pl. YES, ABS, &c.; and in constr. ‘BN.
The absolute forra of ihe plural Fei not occur: but, in the dual we
have 928, which would have the same form, in constr. and with the
pronouns, with those given above.
For further examples of this kind, the Student is referred to the
** Arcanum Formarum” of Simonis, sectio v. throughout.
157. Of the Second Species of Segolate Nouns.
Forms. EXAMPLES. In CONSTRUCTION.
Prim. Usual Do. Fem. Form. Masc. Fem.
“IPD PD won an age. maaan society. son nian
are SAS es {Tus oy Nog dr
TPA TPE DOW a shoulder, —— D ml any:
Nouns of this species occur but rarely: and it is doubtful whether
the last of these does not more properly belong to the primitive form
TPP, as we have it with the pronouns "82, Say, &c. But, as a
proper name (as some think) with the feel oe we have 122 towards
Shechem, Hos. vi. 9.
In the first example, we have STOTT, &c. with the pronouns,
158. Of the Third Species.
ForMs. EXAMPLES. In CONSTRUCTION.
Primitive. Usual Do. Fem, Mase. Fem.
TPR IPRE TPA Taree 3
qn a portion. mpon id. pon npon
TPB TPR S$M vanity Sasi kin. 53m aa
The absolute form of the plural is here, as before, O° 122 mase. and
nape fem.: as, Dyer, but nian does not occur. So mban
pains; 220) vanity, Dbsn vanities, and so of others. The pais
are affixed thus: poo he portion ; pon my portion ; a
their portion. So ue APT, ‘nnn, Saree} &e. San pl. i
constr. is an: of ban sbon, &e. i
SOIT sin, is with the pronouns WOT, DSO, &c,
abs. DNDN, constr. "SOIT:
DONO, &c. and so on.
In the plur.
with the pronouns, ‘SOM, TNT |
ART. 158, 2. ] ON THE NOUNS. 101
The nouns of this species are numerous. The following are a few
examples: YDIT mill, delight ; VY pleasure, also the proper name
of a place; AWM a girdle; aon fat. But maw a rod; TI the
Sorehead ; boty understanding, pote ts with some others, take
the pronouns, &c. after the form 7/72: ee oe his rod; W132 his
Sorehead ; ape) his understanding. So 2/2¥., which also occurs of
the form Spy, we have 3 2PY. thy bos Ai Jer, xiii. 22; and, in
construction in the feminine gender M2)Y: but these may, perhaps,
be derived from different primitives.
2d, The following are a few of the defective nouns, which seem
to belong to this species: JA a fleece; (prim. F3A Art. 83.), fem, 33
for maa, constr. 4132, masc., in constr. JA cuttings; TTA the Pid
(prim. 1A); 3M the walate (prim. 7307, Art. 82.), with the pronouns
‘PI, W2t, OPM, &c. For further examples, see the “ Arcanum
Formarum,” p. 326, &c.
3d, Chaldaic and Syriac words often occur of the form 722: as,
DD, Heb. form V2 silver ; 722 counsel. So, in Hebrew, MSY
instead of nsw elevation. See the “ Arcanum Formarum,” pp. 309,
310.
Of the Fourth Species of Segolate Nouns.
159. This, according to our arrangement, will com-
prehend all primitive nouns of the forms "73, and TPd,
but of the latter no examples occur.
Forms. EXAMPLES. In CONSTRUCTION.
Primitive. Usual. Fem. Masc, Fem.
TP) TPR ape. nyaa waa nap
“\IN) excellence. mm “% imp mim
2d, Here, as before, the plurals, &c. are regularly formed : as, pl.
abs. masc. DYWAD, fem. MwW2, the pl. masc. of construction does not
occur in this o.anigla: but, for rie fem. we have MW2D. The only
instance in which this word occurs with the pronoun is Job xxxi. 20,
W22. So 12. a vow; MTZ justice, righteousness ; M22 learning ;
TIO2 confidence; to which many more may be added. Of the
Defective nouns, ~Y (WY) a city, pl. OY for ONY, (Art. 79.);
%® the mouth (prim. M72, the latter being dropped, Art. 80, and
the first changed to °, Art. 86.). So, with the pronouns: ‘2 for
YE (Art. 81.) my Bi 2 thy mouth; V2 his mouth, &c.: and,
in the fem. plur. mien mouths, and masc. ©. The Learner should be
102 LECTURE VI. [ART, 160. 1-
informed, however, that it is often extremely difficult to say, to which
of the forms such words as these belong; and, as it is not of very
great importance to which they are attached, we shall on eyery
occasion offer but a very few.
Of the Fifth Species.
160. These have the primitive forms “pS, and “IPA,
and constitute a considerable class of Nouns in the
Hebrew language.
ForMs. EXAMPLES. In CONSTRUCTION.
Primitive. Usual Do. ‘ Fem. Mase. Fem.
Tea pd urTp holiness. MODs meat. wtp
Also IPS as Ouyp and Dw p truth. Id. —
Tph pa wwp Id. WD stinkk WRI —
2d, Of this last form, perhaps, no other word occurs, unless the
Infinitives of the form 12 are to be added: which, however, upon
receiving one or other of the pronouns, assume the same form with
the first, and which are never found in the plural number.
8d, The masculine plural of the first of these forms is regularly
D772 : as, DWI2,, the substitute for Shévd preserving the original
vowel of the word. In the plural of construction, we have WT);
and with the pronouns singular and plural, WIP , WP, &e.; pl.
TWAT, VW, BPW, OPW, &e. all copulate formed. In
the word in (for we), we have in the plural WS7 and (WN,
for ONT and WNT, by Art. 79, 8 being nrceeten to feat
aia With the pronouns WS (for BINT), on account of the
concurrence of & with the Dine eats vowel (Art. 93. 5.), DDS,
TWH , &c. The same form prevails in the plural with the pro-
nouns: as, PWN , DWNT, &e. In some instances wip is
thought to take the same plural form: as, DWI, WIP, &e. for
Owi7?., &c. But in these cases, the primitive may have been of a
different form: if not, this word is occasionally anomalous, or erro-
neously written. So, WW a root, DWIw , YWIW, &c.; but in
construction Ww ; mm a threshing far. me hgaee its abs. pl.
nin for nina, by a similar a raries and, in the pl. of con-
ART. 160. 4. ] ON THE NOUNS. 103
struction we have M73. From oR we also have Pm his
greatness: from YAP, ip his handful.
4th, When the middle letter happens to be a guttural (+) becomes
(-) (Art. 114.): as, ISA form ; pia a pustule, &c., while in some
instances (+) remains: as, Ons a tent; wa the thumb.
5th, In some instances also, Kholém remains in the abs. pl.: as,
DM as also in those which have not the grave suffixes: as,
spook, work ; but, in construction, and with the grave suffixes, the
first vowel is Kaméts Khatiph : as, SOT, Drs , &c., which are
regular. D. Kimchi takes it to be Kaméts.*
6th, WwW2 the thumb, fem. forms the plural MiIn3 ; but does not’
occur with any of the pronouns. In the same manner are formed
the plurals of 7133 splendour, and rm22 front, presence; as, nina and
nim) ; but these, according to D. Kimchi, belong to some other
form of the singular (perhaps TIA , V2, &e.): as, m33
Amos iii. 10.
7th, There are a few peculiarities in the word wWND all savour ;
which deserve notice. Its original form seems to be WN ; but, vith
the pronouns it is written WWND, OWND, &c. in which the o is drawn
back (Art. 93. 5.). In the time of Kimeni however, it was written
JWN2, COWND, with a quiescent 8, which inclined him to think,
that ne See form must have been “Bisa,
8th, In those cases in which the last letter is a guttural in this
form, the sound of 0 is lost: as, 27 a spear, pl. HYT27: but, with
a pronoun it returns : as, Omri ie spears ; nk a way, makes
NIMS pl. abs., but in construction MIMS.
9th, Of the defective nouns, we Have A for Wh emptiness
(Art. 93. 2.); WD for WD, vanity ; TVD for TID fem. bitterness ;
to which many others may be added.
10th, These nouns are, for the most part, abstracts as to sense
* Michlol, fol. ™, verso, which, according to him, is always the case
when a guttural jetine occupies the place of the second radical: as in
=i SOON the tents of Edom, Ps. lxxxiii. 7; TI2iT20 SOND the defilings of
the Wricathaod, Neh. xiii. 29; TAS OSH oor roes, Cand vii. 5; but
SDINN Ib. iv. 5, is, he thinks, derived from a different primitive. I believe,
however, that in the above cases, (r) is Kdméts Khatuph, and if so, there is
no irregularity.
104 LECTURE VI. (ART. 161.
(Art. 154, 8.): and, in many instances, where they appear not to be
so, some translated sense takes its place: as, 4.2! king, which
originally meant possession, dominion, or the like; but which, in
process of time seems to have lost its primitive application. Perhaps
it still retains that sense in Proverbs xiv. 28.
iF npr o8) pass) Age TTD BPs Te
*€ In the multitude of people is the glory of rule ;
But in the diminution of a nation is the stroke of poverty.”
In this case 727 is opposed to 7172, which seems to me to prove,
that rule or dominion is the sense in which it must be taken. Some,
indeed, have proposed to read 337 prince, at the end of the second hemi-
stich: but, this will be unnecessary, when we restore 727 to its primi-
Dyes DP
tive signification. In the same manner, the word i jlol» , which means
power, rule, or the like, has been applied to the Emperor of Con-
stantinople: and, in our own language, we use Justice, Magistrate,
Lordship, and many similar expressions, which were originally abstract
nouns.
On the Forms of those Primitive Nouns which are not
Segolate.
161. Having given the different forms and inflections
of the primitive nouns which have been termed Segolate,
we now come to those which are also primitive, but
which have not that peculiarity of punctuation which is
found to prevail in them; and which, moreover, have the
accent on the last syllable: and, as it will not be neces-
sary, in all cases, to give the forms of the plurals—of
the noun when in construction, or when in connection
with the pronouns, we shall only point out those in-
stances in which any difficulty may arise, either from a
vowel being immutable, or any other cause; which is all
the Learner can want. The following are the forms
peculiar to this species of nouns: viz. I. 7p, fem.
MIPS: II. TPS, fem. OPH: III. Ips, fem. APS:
LV Pe, fem. aves ¥. DPE, tem. wider. Vis TPB,
ART. 161. 2. ] ON THE NOUNS. 105
fem. TPPB: VIL TPS, fem. MPH: VIII. Wpa,
fem. N71PD: IX. 215, fem. W7PID and NPIS: X. Tipa,
fem. TTIPH: XI. Wph, fem. NPS, and once NTPs,
which is perhaps a compound form. <A few other
feminine forms occur, which will be given in their
places. ’
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Mase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
Ve “Pd MPs “TpP> value. rp) id.
Il. ¥ pa MIPS a= a word, pty righteousness.
or, nypa nny abundance.
2d, As the last example exhibits the form generally used in con-
struction, nothing further need be said about it. In the first two,
we have no vowel which can be said to be zmmutable. The plurals,
therefore, and pronouns, will take those forms which a regard to the
vowels and accents would suggest as proper: as, "27, in constr. 227:
with the pronouns 73%, ‘72%, &c., pl. abs. O27, in constr. IT
(for “37, Art. 112.): with pron, BFPIZT, OI IDA, &c.: with an
asyllabic pron. 127, TI2T, &c. throughout. The same will hold
good in all similar forms, in which the vowels are by analogy
mutable.
3d, In some instances the first (+) is emmutable, but then it is
Ss
believed to occupy the place of 8: as, ws a horseman; Arab. Uw a s\35
pl. DIB.
4th, Nouns of these forms are generally Concrete, and may designate
substances: as, OTS a man; 2 hail; W2 flesh: epithets ;
It T It T It T
a
as, D271 a wise man; YW a nicked man.* In some cases they seem
to be abstract: as, N22 weeping ; M33 crying out, &c.; but this may
ITT ITT:
* Whether the Hebrews ever considered words of this kind as adjectives,
as we do, I very much doubt. But, whateven may be said on this subject,
it is much more convenient, in considering the structure of this language,
to treat them as epithets, including a substantive with their attributive
properties, as in the English word fool, &c. See the Syntax.
106 LECTURE VI. [ART. 161. 5.
take place by the operation of a metonymy, just as the contrary effect
sometimes takes place in the Segolates (Art. 160. 10.).
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Masc- Fem. Masc. Fem.
BMAD LS ABR.
I pBAPB on NPR VIR Jone, ITB or NIB i
NT] stolen. mtd id.
IV. Sp} AIPA or NIpB 59) howling. MIDN darkness.
| NOVY idleness.
once myvyps my32 heaviness.
5th, In these forms, which are nearly related to each other, the
second vowel is generally immutable, the first not so: as, TV73 his
fence; WIA thy (fem.) fences; TTR her fences, pl. fem.; MTT
fences. This being known, the vowels proper for construction, &c.
are also known. In a few instances we havea ” inserted: as, YF
littleness ; wow tranquillity ; mp5 escape, which seems to account
for the attendant vowels being immutable: as also to suggest that some
affinity exists between this and the next form, which is perhaps the
case.
6th, The signification peculiar to these forms, is that of habit,
custom, passion, whence they have by some been termed participles.
Those of the third are found in words signifying feeling, perception,
or the like, and are often used as roots of verbs having this sense :
as, YOR willing ; maw rejoicing, and the like.
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fem. Mase. Fem.
Vv. PPR TPA NAy a prophet. Prery « kiss.
VI. Mile td. 7D a libation. monoy an action.
VI. Ip ATMP| abla, learned. milAy, id.
Vill. TPAD ad. TIT) boasting. M82) prediction.
or MIPS - Nis truth, def. for Nis:
7th, In all these cases the » and 7 inserted are immutable, the other
vowel is not: the plurals, &c. are, therefore, formed accordingly. In
ART. 161. 8. ] ON THE NOUNS. 107
some instances the 7 or > will be omitted, and their places supplied
by (+) or () respectively; in all which these vowels will re-
main immutable, for the purpose of preserving the original form of
the word: as, TWO mase, MQW fem. darkness. So MEY fem. for
MY) advice (Art. 82.); so of T1282 a visitation, being visited, &c.
8th, Forms V. and VI. are very nearly allied to the foregoing both
in form and signification: and from these, the forms VII. and VIII.
scarcely present a shade of difference.* Simonis, indeed, makes a
difference; but it is perhaps only imaginary. To the two last he
ascribes the sense of past time, as if the action, of which this form is
usually said to be the object, took place at some distant period: but,
innumerable instances may be pointed out, in which it has a present
or a future signification according to the context. The truth seems
to be, that each of them imply habit, custom, &c. of the action, &c.
which the root may signify: but, that in some roots, the one form is
found to prevail, in others, the other.
Forms. EXxaMPLss.
Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem.
IX. PID TTPO Ta? descending. minh id.
nap nya
X. pp Tipp Di TD area mi ia.
or TIPS aay luxurious. may id.
XI. TIPS MTNpS ab the arm. mwa good news.
once maps mn oy a sort of dish.
9th, In these forms 1 Khalém only is immutable. We shall have,
therefore, in the plural, &c. =a ira masc. nia fem., and =brae
masc. nyjpina fem. which will also be the forms proper for the state
of construction, and for the pronominal affixes.
* So TAOS and DPN bound, a captive; WAV and WFID chosen; W598
and WD ee a son; maw and mw pitied Messiah, And, in a
great Pi ber of cases, in Pick the textual reading has the one form, the
marginal reading will have the other.
108 LECTURE VI. [ART. 161. 10.
10th, Of these forms, like the preceding, nouns may be found both
abstract and concrete, signifying habit or custom, but they seldom have
a passive signification ; TW2}2 with its feminine is generally used as an
agent. Sometimes the feminine occurs: as, 11771} fructifera: this,
however, is rare.
ART. 162. 1..] AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 109
LECTURE VII.
OF THE AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS.
162. Havine considered the primitive nouns of both
kinds, we now proceed to the augmented ones, which
may be classed under four heads. I. Those which are
found to double any letter or syllable, and may be
termed reduplicated nouns. I. Those which are aug-
mented by one or more of the letters contained in the
technical word “IDK I have believed, reduplicating,
or not, at the same time, any of their letters or
syllables. III. Nouns compounded of two or more
others, each of which may be otherwise augmented, or
not: and, IV. Foreign words.
2d, It is a maxim laid down by the Arabian grammarians, that
whenever any addition is made to a word, some modification is made
in its sense. This is conformable enough to the nature of things ; for,
unless some change were intended to be made, to make any such
addition would be futile and unnecessary. So far, we are sure we
must be right. The great difficulty, however, is, in determining the
law by which this process of augmentation has been carried on; and
thence ascertaining, what is the precise force of every form thus
modified: and, it must be confessed, that although there is a con-
siderable number of instances occurring in most languages in which
we can clearly perceive a peculiar sense attendant on certain specific
forms; yet, there are others, in which no such sense is discoverable :
others again, in which one form is used for another, and even different
forms linked together in the same phrase, or corresponding to one
another in the parallel parts of the same context. To this may be
added the figures of speech, which exercise a very considerable
influence on the signification of words, and conspire very much to
disconcert both the Learner and the Learned in enquiries of this
nature. Still, we must not throw away all the helps we have, merely
because they will not conduct us to the knowledge of every thing:
besides, further enquiry may throw much new, and even sufficient, light
110 LECTURE VII. TART. 162. 3.
on this subject. We shall, therefore, follow the course just marked
out, in detailing the forms of augmented nouns.
3d, Writers on this subject seem to agree in the following principles,
viz. That, by augmentation will generally be designated either intensity,
Srequency, duration, defect, or the like, of that action, passion, habit, &c.
which is contained in the idea afforded by the primitive word :—that,
in some instances, a word which is intransitive, will, by adding a letter,
become transitive: as in the English words, rise and raise, which in
Hebrew will be 5)? (for ©3)2) and ©)? or Dp. A similar effect is
produced in Hebrew by prefixing a letter: as, =)))f7 which is also
parallel to raise, the root being ©)? signifying rise. In many cases,
however, as already remarked, the real force of the augment is not
perceptible; and in these, we must be content to abide by usage. As
we proceed, however, it is my intention to offer some conjectures on
the origin of the different augments; and, should I not succeed to as
great an extent as may be wished, I shall certainly gain my point in
another respect, namely; by impressing upon the Learner’s mind, the
different forms with which he will meet. Besides, by the attempt
to ascertain what these additional syllables really are, and what
they mean, some light may be thrown on the manner in which
language in general has been constructed. It is my belief, that
language has grown up, in a great measure, out of necessity; and that
words which now exceed their primitive length must have been
made so by the addition of others qualifymg or otherwise modifying
their sense, as circumstances should require. Jn process of time,
many of these additional words may have become attached to others,
and so abbreviated as greatly to obscure their original forms and
significations: e. g. The English word attempting, seems to be
compounded of at, (ad, whatever that word was originally) tempt,
and img. The last component part is probably the same with the Latin
Ens, or Greek &y, so that each part of the word originally stood
singly, but is now so’ compounded as to stand for one. In such
words as incomprehensibility, transubstantiation, &c., I suppose we
have not fewer than five or six primitive words confounded together
in one.
4th, The Greek and Latin prepositions, with which so many of their
words are compounded, were, perhaps, at first significant words: and,
it strikes me as most probable, that their terminations of case and
gender, no less than the variations found to prevail in the conjugations
of their verbs, were all, at some time, significant words, which have
ART. 162. 5.] | AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 111
been so attached to the root, as to supply the sense which these conju-
gations, &c. now bear. It may, indeed, be impossible now to ascertain
exactly what they were; still, I think, the attempt to do so, could not
but be attended with beneficial results.—But to proceed, the following
tables will exhibit the forms with some examples of the first class of
these nouns.
Of Reduplicated Words, Intensitive, §c. in their Signification.
Masc. “hears Mase. Measeues Fem.
8 pd TPS wipy very perverse. nx great folly.
or TPA or NTPs DIN quite dumb. WIP prompt obedience.
or TPA 719? teaching. na 2 baldness.
5th, To this form may be referred those nouns, which, on account
of having 7 or » for their middle radical letter, and therefore not
convenient for reduplication (Art. 81.), double the last: as, pal
greatly desiring, fem. ; mp pw td., root PAW . Div a sucking child,
root 21Y. The same form is also found in words derived from roots
having the second and third radical letter the same: as, DAW fem.
maw desolate, desolation, root BAW. The passive forms of these
will be BWW, Priv, OVID, &e.
6th, The first vowel, in all these cases, is necessarily immutable :
the last occasionally so. One vowel, therefore, is in the former,
mutable, as in wPY &c., pl. abs. DwpyY, constr. WY, The pro-
nouns, therefore, will. be fixed accordingly. Under this head may
be placed all those verbal nouns, which are generally arranged as the
infinitives, &c. of the Pzhél conjugation.
7th, As this form is taken for the root of one of the species of the
Conjugation, it is necessary that some account should be here given of
its force.
It has been laid down as arule, that verbs which are intransitive
in the first species, are sometimes made transitive in this: as, m2?
he learned ; Bele he taught, The same property prevails in the
“O-
Arabic : ps he knen ; re he taught. This they call the transitive
I7-D
property ; gx}. The other dialects also recognise this property.
112 LECTURE VII. [ART. 162. 8
8th, Another property is, the becoming either in reality or in
estimation only, that which the primitive word signifies: as, "22 he
became, or was adopted as, the first born, from the primitive niD3 first
born: but this word, when used of trees, as producing fruit, bill mean
prematurity.
Under this head may be placed those cases, in which is intimated
a Declaration, Announcement, Accusation, &c. of what the primitive
word signifies: as, SO pronouncing, or accusing another of being,
unclean; “412 pronouncing another clean. So perhaps, SQM pro-
nouncing, confessing, &c. sin. And hence by a metonymy, expiating
it.* These properties are termed by the Arabian Grammarians,
Ir CV
bes “3 7 Ee a G47 LO vane
5s" changing, and EAanadl] naming: as, 1, wel} Uy the place
9? Q@~o Ped
became a garden ; J 5!I Urs? the man became wowep, or bent like
a BOW. Rag the English word bowed is similarly formed from bow :
, 184; weniu!t I called Zaid nicked, i.e. pronounced him to be so;
cour au Ss a
- ys he called Zaid an infidel ; os calling one a coward, &c.
Of this kind are SWS they shall bless me, Gen. xxx. 18; i. e. ther y
shall declare that I am blessed ; MpI-ed he shall not make innocent,
i. e. declare to be so, Exod. xx. 7. The same may be said, in all those
passages, given in this form, in which God is said to have hardened
Pharaoh’s heart. See Exod. iv. 21, ix. 12, x. 20. 27, &c., compared
with Exod. vii. 13, 1 Sam. vi. 6, &c.
9th, Another property of this form is, to intimate, Intensity, Abund-
ance, or Frequenc y, of the action or passion signified by the primitive
word: “aw he broke; “aw he broke to pieces; 23 it shot up, gre ;
IMDS it wr up teeny and abundantly. Equivalent to this, is the
FOSS a Slo/
property termed &slse)] or BAS of the Grammarians of Arabia,
a ed
which is said to accompany this form: as, %de> he praised him very
* This property is termed by the Arabic Grammarians Ce deprivation :
"IICGF
as, Ga I skinned him, or deprived him of his skin. Lumsden’s Arab.
Gram. p. 178. See also his Pers. Gram. vol. i. p. 230.
ART. 162. 10.] AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 113
-G- Z4L00 Loe
much ; > he exercised his horse very much ; os! o° the truth
became very apparent, &c.
10th, In a few instances also, this form is thought to have a causa-
tive signification: as, Jon he walked ; Wen he caused another to
walk, &c.
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Mase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
{I. TPAD TPs Pian embracing. Mma first-born.
or TIPS or TPS WWW marching. mayan the cicatrix
! My i rT of a wound.
aw bereaved. maw id.
11th, The vowels will in every case here be immutable; the plurals,
&c. will therefore be regularly formed, O° FP, OYNPS, &e.
To this form are referred some words having *-- between the first
and second radical letters, which is thought to be a mere compensation
for the omission of Dagésh: as, YVT2 a spear ; “YTD invasion ;
PDS a fetter ; and, according to some, rioyw) Shiloh.
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fem. Masc.
LP DPD —— YDS firmly bound.
TV"3 extremely fugitive (Art, 115.).
eo
12th, Here, as before, the vowels are tmmutable. No feminine form
occurs.
Forms. EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fem. Masc, Fem.
IV.4P2 IPD, MPA, TDN farmer. TIDY « ruler.
or PS npp or njp2 Aad « thief. mp2 enquiry.
NIOM @ sinner, FUNLON ia.
NSB sterility.
114 LECTURE VII. CART. 162. 13.
13th, These nouns imply habit and the like, and are used to
designate trades, professions, &c.*
14th, Both vowels are, here, necessarily immutable, the first on
account of the syllabication, the second, because it seems to supply
the place of 8, by analogy: as, wan an artificer (Art. 161. 3.), pl.
wrt, and in construction SWIM artificers ; m2 a mariner, pl.
mT, with pron. om? their mariners. A few instances occur
in which (+ ) occupies the place of (-) or (-): as, mma and mp2
perturbation. ‘To the feminine forms Simonis adds W722, of which
two examples only occur, viz. nwbn coagulated milk, according to
him, Job vi. 6; and masbp terror, Ib. xxi. 6, &c.
probably compound forms.
But these are
Form. EXAMPLES,
Mase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
Ve TPR IPR TZ F rcostonea, TVDD sl (her.
Nps NAD a coat,
MPS rarely, mnp2 taken.
15th, Simonis places aa) Judg. xii. 8, under this form: but no-
thing can be more probable than that this is the third person of
the verb, construed with 77 in the sense of TWN, and to be under-
stood as a future tense; e. g. TT who should be born. And, perhaps,
this word does not occur, construed as a simple noun, in any case.
16th, Under this head may be classed all those nouns which are
generally arranged as infinitives of the Puhdl conjugation, and which
may, therefore, be considered as passives corresponding with the
active forms, 123, &c.
17th, In all these cases, the first vowel is necessarily immutable ;
GGe
* The same forms have the same force in Arabic: as, see a perfumer,
pe a baker ; from yee perfume, and p> bread. So in Syr. and Chaldaic
a Oat
1¢5°1 Chald. NWT a singer, Ke.
Sx
ART. 162. 18. | | AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 115
the last not so universally: but, as examples do not occur sufficiently
numerous to decide this question, we can say but little about it.
18th, These forms are thought to be intensitive of those given
under the preceding class (Art. 161.): but, whether such signi-
fication is always to be found in the places where they occur, is
doubtful.
Of those Nouns which are said to be reduplicated by
implication (Art. 115.).
163. These are nouns which are thought to have
an intensitive signification, without presenting any re-
duplication either in the vowels or consonants: but, as
they generally have a perfect vowel, occasionally im-
mutable, in the penultimate, it has been thought, that
this has been supplied as a compensation for the Dagesh
which has been omitted. The following are their forms :
Form. EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fem. Mase. Fem.
i. IPD TT p> 2 unknown. Andy a dish:
or i Pa) eee S55 a temple. eae &
“qn ww
2d, For further examples see the Arcan. Form. p. 202, &c.
Form. EXaMPLEs.
Mase: Fem. Masc. Fem.
il. 7piD MIP aay a musical instrument so called.
Ae np “1D fetter. PIAS a stable, stall, &c.
MAY ID vacillating.
Form. EXAMPLES.
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem:
m. pip T7piD ook a tent.
or FVIPID WIN a treasure.
DM a seal. DEV a seal.
‘ pl. niagiy Srontlets,
12
116 LECTURE VII. CART. 163. 3.
8d, With respect to the inflection of these words, it may be re-
marked, that the perfect vowel (.-) in the first form, sometimes remains
immutable, at others not so. No rule, therefore, can be given, upon
which reliance, as to the plurals, &c., can be placed. With respect to
the other forms, whenever the ) or ) remains, its vowel also remains
unchangeable ; but when it drops, the defect may be compensated by
inserting the point Ddgésh in the following consonant, as it is the case
in the feminine 7722, in which the perfect vowel is supplied by its
corresponding imperfect one; e. g. for 73275, we have MIPS. So
also, vice versa, letters doubled by the insertion of Dagesh, frequently
lose this point, and then the preceding imperfect vowel changes into its
correspondent perfect one. Hence it is, that these forms are supposed
to contain an implicit reduplication, or in other words, to be forms
equivalent to those which have the middle radical letter doubled by a
Dagésh forte.
But, as the nouns of this class are few, it is scarcely possible
to glean from the usage of the language, what vowels are mutable
and what are not so. For the same reason, it is impossible even to
say, whether we are right in our classification of them, or not.
On the Augmented Nouns, termed \f\}IDR™ He-emante.
164. In nouns of this description, one or more of
the letters contained in the technical word JOXT
will be found attached to one or other of the preceding
primitive or augmented forms, apparently for the purpose
of varying the signification. ‘That these are fragments
of words we have no doubt: but, what they originally
were, it may now be exceedingly difficult to say. We
may, perhaps, be excused, if we offer a few conjectures
on this subject, hoping, that although we may not
succeed to the extent that may be wished, we shall
nevertheless afford something, likely to fix these forms
more permanently in the mind of the Learner: and this
is our principal object.
2d, Of these letters (viz JON) 8, 7, %, 0, or N,
may be found at the beginning of words; while 7, %, 0,
ART. 165. ] AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 117
}, or , may be placed at the end. In some instances,
words are augmented by one or more of these letters,
both at the beginning and the end at the same time,
having also the middle radical letter doubled by the
operation of Dagésh forte, as in the Participial forms
of Hithpahél, DIPSND and NIIPaND, &e.
Of the Letters termed ION viz. 8,9, 71, 0, 1, T, and
it, when ented to words.
165. Simonis* considers nouns having § or ° prefixed, as having
some affinity in signification to those persons of the verbs which have
these letters as preformatives ; and the last, , as being nearly allied
to the Hithpahél conjugation. This may be very true: but, as it leaves
these conjugations, &c. unexplained, I have thought it would be better,
to consider the force of these adjuncts in the nouns: because, if we
can succeed in this, we shall have no difficulty whatever when we come
to the verbs.
I suppose, then, that the letters 7, %, 1, or 41, are nothing more
than abbreviated forms of primitive words, which might have
originally been written in fuil and placed before others, in order to
modify their sense. These, in process of time, might have lost some
of their letters, and then have been compounded with others in the
form we now have them. If, therefore, we can now find words which,
according to the rules of the Grammar, may be thus abbreviated when
joined with others, and giving the significations which such augmented
forms seem to have, we shall perhaps make this subject more intel-
ligible and interesting than it is usually found to be.
2d, With respect to the first, 8, with which we may join "7, we
perhaps have a fragment of the root {778 (Arabic ‘YT Q¢42)
desiring, impelling, casting down, and the like; to which, WT and
uss) as expressing certain affections of the mind, may perhaps be
added, as cognate roots. Upon this supposition M727, or TPES,
for the Chaldee or Syriac form, will stand for ‘IS, V7, or MT,
TPE (Form VI. Art. 161.) impelling, causing, desiring, &c. another,
* Arcanum Formarum, p. 522. nN
118 LECTURE VII. CART. 165. 3.
to visit, &c. So ABS a willing, or great, liar ; W28 willingly, or
greatly cruel.®
3d, We may now enter on the signification of words
thus augmented: aud, as some of them are taken as
roots for a certain species of the conjugation of verbs,
it will be as well now to determine their properties.
4th, If, then, the primitive word have an active sense,
as, VOW he heard, it will in this form have a causative
one; as, YYW causing to hear: but, if the primitive
be neuter, this form will be active in signification: as,
Tay he stood; “YOU he set up; TRY he was glad;
Mow he rejoiced another.+
5th, If, in the next place, the primitive be a noun
substantive or adjective, it will, in this form, signify the
being, making, becoming, doing, suffering, permitting, &c.
the sense of the root: RAM he made fat, root NIA fat
&
* It is remarkable, that the causative and other verbs in the Coptic are
formed in the same manner. ‘* Verba composita,” says Scholz. Gram.
Copt. §. 86. e duabus vocibus coalescunt. In compositione verbum €P esse,
vel facere, QJEM suscipere, YY ferre, Y,F projicere, REX invenire,
Gi accipere, T dare, sepissime occurrunt: e.g. EPOCUWNT lucere,
ex EP ct OCWINS lux .... GJEMRRKAS, pati, ex GEM et
SLKAD, dolor, GIPWwOCW curare, ex GI et PWOCA cura,
e,Icen fT fundare, ex 9,1 et CEMP fundamentum, KEMLKA GF
intelligere, ex RERR et KAT intellectus., Gicgints pudefieri, ex OT
et GPM pudor, Pwo glorificare, ex 40 et WO gloria.” In these
eases the words prefixed have precisely the same power with those above
proposed, and in one, viz. ,3 projicere, is very nearly allied both in sound and
force to our 8 or TT, particularly in the Hiphhil form DPD or PPR, &e.
FO2, SOS) ter
+ These properties are also common to the Arabic: as, 1. bs OY) Pes
G7 ae ee ed
Zaid dug a canal; He & yo] I caused him to dig a canal, 2.
Gor ALfU4 9 PUL
dy yo Zaid hud the faculty of sight ; & pas) I saw him.
ART. 165. 6._| AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 119
(Form V, Art. 161.); PPM he used the right hand, or
proceeded towards it ; noun, })) the right hand. So
Sxyown he used, or went towards, the left hand ; noun,
brow the left hand; Worm he caused rain; noun,
1D rain ; pan he Reale white, root 12? white ;
payin he permitted (to purchase) provision, root AW
provision ; I8Wil he permitted (to) remain, root Nw
remnant. *
6th, Another property is that of exhibiting, Hlocliiningr,
or esteeming, the person or thing designated by such
word, possessed of the sense afforded by the primitive:
as, PYI¥i1 he declared, or esteemed another, just, from
PIS just; PWT he declared, or Te another, wicked,
from Pw wicked. So, in Arabic %, A | L called him an
enfidel ; ee I accused him of sin. + To this property
may be referred all those passages, in which this form
is used, wherein God is said to have hardened the heart,
blinded the eyes, made the heart gross, deceived the
people, &c.—where nothing more than declaring this to
be the case can be meant.}
7th, Another property of this form is, eacess, or in-
tensity, of action, passion, &c. as given by the primitive
word: as, ONINT he was very red. So, in the eee
exall pel the morning was very bright ; hall So ‘esl the
palm tree bore much fruit.
* See Deut. ii. 28, 1 Sam. xxv. 22, Ps. cxix. 31, Is. lxiii, 17. The pro-
perties are all peculiar to the analogous forms in Arabic: see Lumsden’s
Arabic Gram. p. 173, &e.
+ Lumsden’s Arab. Gram. p. 175.
jt Exod. vii. 3; x.1, Deut. ii. 30, Is. vi. 10, comp. with Matth. xiii. 15.
This property Storr refers to the influence of a metonymy. Observ. pp. 24,
28, &c., which he thinks amounts to nothing more than permtssion. See also
pp. 194—5—6.
120 LECTURE VII. [ART. 165. 8,
8th, Many verbs, not used in the first species, have
either a neuter or transitive signification in this form: as,
Dawn he rose early; pow he threw. Sometimes
they are both neuter and transitive: as, V Ril he watched,
or he roused up another ; I he sang, or he stimu-
lated another to sing.
9th, Several of the properties belonging to this form
are also common to that of TPS, see Art. 162. 7.
10th, When the 77 is prefixed with (+) Khatuph, (- ), -
or (1), the sense will be passive of one or other of the
above-mentioned properties.*
11th, With respect to (°) prefixed to certain forms,
it may perhaps be a fragment of the root (TN), Syr.
hata or ies Arab. re decent, becoming, benign, beautiful,
excellent, inviting one to rest, &c., which, when com-
pounded with any other word, may afford the sense of
permanence, strength, excellency, or the like, which,
Grammarians are generally agreed, is the force of words
so combined. But, as no conjugation is grounded on
this form, it will not be necessary to dwell very par-
ticularly on it.
12th, We now come to the forms having 7, FS, or 4, prefixed.
And here, as before, we take this to be derived from some word,
which, when combined with any other, will give the modification of
* It will, perhaps, be difficult to assign a good reason for the adoption
of this vowel in giving a passive signification to words in the Shemitic |
dialects. Nothing can be more certain, however, than, that this is the fact.
And, hence, we not only have it in the passive conjugations of verbs both in the
Hebrew and Arabic, but, it imparts a sort of passive, or rather habitual,
signification to some verbs which are conjugated in the active form: as, 2?
Pott ia om tae “Ir
he was strong ; ays he was bountiful ; wr > he was beautiful ; o) he was
A ee
exalted. So in nouns, TPP visited, i.e. habitually ; Jyee patient, habitually,
Xe,
ART. 165. 13. AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 121
sense usually attributed to these forms. If then we take SOS Chald.
It T
or Heb. M8 coming, arriving at, as the primitive word, and suppose
AS, 7, or 4, to be a fragment of it, we shall have a particle, which,
when prefixed to any word, will give generally a passive, or reciprocal,
sense, which all are agreed is the import of this form: e. g. TB
or TPES; the Chaldee form, or 152, will mean, coming, or, as we say
in English, becoming visited, which will be either passive or reflective,
&c., as the sense of the context shall require. So in Latin, amatum iri,
in which the word 277 is manifestly derived from the verb Jre, to go.
Properties of the Conjugations grounded on this Form.
13th, First, to be, or become, that which the primi-
re afaik g?
tive word signifies (which in Arabic 1s termed kc.lh. sub-
mission) ; as, ONAN he became polluted ; Pinna he
became strong ; DINAA he became red; or, if the con-
text require it, he made himse Uf so, reflectively, or, was
“0 fe IICHE
made so, passively. So in Arabic, Wold ayo) DT corrected
him, and he became corrected, &c.* In the eighth
* Lumsden’s Arabic Grammar, p. 182—‘‘ Submission.” Or, as the Arabic
w s&
Grammarians define it, Us date] a] pled ws a) yl o>
clei oo oS cles EMS pK clap Gopal ya
us diel] saa!) 3 | sb us pel cas tls Uwa> i.e. The im-
pression made Hert any thing by ite action of a Gigee verb: as, I broke
the glass, and the glass becume broken. Now, the glass’s becoming broken,
expresses the impression made by the active verb breaking. — In the
ly pl WS we have: ee ghd a yam ee ke lla]
cs) Legllne pus qyyhas pakid LH) yas gad alyade dal
Jd, det Ji we Lyn gby Cgdatall Jail eli! Wily
lado eo? cs “ois Luana g\s!) ea Gsllan ale ive. Alnotdwaat, is the
receiving of an impression from the operation of an active verb upon its
122 LECTURE VII. [ART. 165. 13.
Arabic species, to which this is nearly allied, we have the
Grimor 9 PUG"
same property: as, ich aint I grieved him, and he
object: as, “‘ I broke the vessel, and it became broken.” Were, the becoming
broken, is the Motawaa; i. e. that which accords with the agent of the transitive
verb, which is here “ I broke.’ But, the verb to which reference is made is so
called ; i.e. gy\b-0 motawaa, by a metonymy.
I have been the more particular in pointing out this distinction, because we
shall have occasion to refer to it again: and because I think Mr. de Sacy has
entirely misunderstood it. In his Gram. Arab. vol.i. p. 104, we have the
following note. ‘‘ La verbe dont la signification est passive ou neutre, se
sg od
nomme encore gia, comme le dit Giggeius: et en effet, Beidawi, sur le
ap) LP a
v. 4. de la surate 42 ou on lit pay lyon os pt sen faut que les
Go-UmoE a
cieux ne se fendent, ou ne soient fendus, dit : wril 2 ly wast | \5
vee 0 7B eee Phe & 2 I 9EEI-NVE 93S L—O-
ye gsho~ Idd, ye gsbla~ rap) eal Js], «+ ‘© Les deux lecteurs de
if “le
Basra et Abou-Becr lisent wy adiy 3; mais la premiere legon est
va ed -G- sor u
plus €nergique, parce que ¢ 23 est le passif de Ls, et y33) Je passif’
? yee if J ? vies P uf
de ys.
eat I think, can be less accurate than to class the term Efe~ with
G - 8
those of S04 yet ely sé , and ay? , as Mr. de Sacy has here done.
- UG re
All that Beidawi means, seems to be, that yeas is more elegant than
“G&G “Ge “Ger
warty, because it is the pyllee (see the definitions above) of ys, not of
a
ys » as the other reading is.
The real difference between the verbs termed ss. Pa 5J, &c. is, that
they always imply habit, cnet properties, as, beauty, cami ‘'y, colour,
Grrr 9 3-7 S- 9
&c.; whereas ke sll or pl (qu gseo ?) signify the accidental in-
ART. 165. 14.| AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 123
SUMS IHG
was grieved ; ib Xo) he reproached him vehemently,
and he became reproached.
14th, Secondly, To fergn, or pretend to, exhibit, &c.
that which the primitive word signifies: as, Josh. ix. 4,
WON they feigned themselves to be messengers ; 2 Sam.
xiii. 5. 6, vlaraie he pretended to be sick; Prov. xiii. 7,
“WYND one boasting himself to be rich. So, wen
Jeigning himself to be poor; IDANKM thou shewest
thyself gracious; D~DmnN se aa thyself perfect,
Ps. xviii. 26. And, in Arabic, nee 3* he pretended satiety ;
IE Wrbmo “- Ba
x 3) ya] Lele 35 3 the woman assumed the manners of a man.
15th, Thirdly, Frequency, or intensity ak of the action
or passion meant by the primitive word : s, J20n0 he
walked about often, or continually ; ;nnn Ke solicited
a favour with great earnestness. In Arabic p= he
=~ Ge
persevered in shewing bravery ; as? he persevered in
-~ 7 aHWb&
acquiring mildness. And in the eighth, WW! he
Yr
persevered in acquiring ; and, in the sense of earnest
eh)
request, gel he demanded his hire.
16th, Fourthly, In many instances, the sense is the
same as it would be if the verb were used in the
primitive form termed Kal: as, WANWI he kept laws,
fluence of any transitive verb exerted upon some object; which is the difference
between the Hebrew forms TD and Tj?)2, as will be seen hereafter.
The real force, then, of this form will be best expressed by made, became,
or the like: as, or fj made to go ; T)2D2 became visited, &c. This will lay
the ground-work for the reciprocal sense, &c., the context always determining
who is the agent.
* The fifth species which has often a passive sense ; and constantly in the
Ethiopic.
124 | LECTURE. VIL. [ ART. 165. 16.
statutes, &c. This also, with many other properties
unknown to the Hebrew, is found in the Arabic.
For the transpositions and other changes which take
place in certain words, when augmented by the particles
na, or ON, see Art. 89.
17th, Nouns which receive at the beginning, gene-
rally designate the Instrument, Agent, Action, Passion,
State, or the like, by, or in, which the influence of any
verb is exerted, suffered, &c. respectively : as, IAD an
ax; (root WW) cutting); ‘TPR one vesiting; DIPD a
place (root D1P standing ).
2d, With respect to the reason for this variation of signification,
Grammarians are generally silent. Simonis has supposed it to be
equivalent to that, which the preposition 2 similarly situated would
supply.* I may perhaps be excused if I offer a different solution.
If we suppose, then, that the word originally prefixed was either "2
or 12 who, 2 or 2 which, or what, as the sense may require, we
shall have significations suitable to words of these forms, e. g. 1) 2
he who visits, or is visiting ; and, striking out the --, for the purpose
of abridging the word, we shall have 72 as above. The same
will be the case, if we take THE 12, for then the 7 will be lost by
Art. 82. These then may be forms for agents, when the verb is
transitive: and such are all the participial forms commencing
with 9,
In the next place, if we take 2 or 2 that which, &c., and
prefix it, contracted as before, we shall have MAD an ax, for Mya rT
that which (is a) cutting, &e. So M!Y2 a work, for TWY TM that
which (is a) domg ; and so of others.
18th, We now come to give some account of the prefix J, and of
the modification of sense which primitive words undergo, in conse-
quence of its influence. And here, as before, we may, perhaps, be
allowed to offer a conjecture, as to its origin. If, then, we take it as a
defective form of some primitive word, appearing sometimes as 77,
at other times as 2 only, we may suppose it to be derived from the root
-~S$
a) , which, had it been preserved in the Hebrew, might have been
* Arcanum Formarum, p. 447.
ART. 165. 19. | AUGMENTED HEBREW NOUNS. 125
written 71277, TIS, or S28. The senses attributed to it by Castell,
are, among others “Ad extremum perfectiouis terminum pervenit ....
assecutus fuit, seu percepit. IV. Retinuit, detinuit, coercuit.... V.
Lenitate, modestid et patientid usus fut, §c.” Supposing, then, this
word, or any defective form of it, to be construed with any other, the
sense of both taken together would, in general, give the force of the
forms thus compounded, which we now proceed to consider. And, as
this form of compound is often used as the leading word of one of
the species of the conjugation, it becomes the more important to as-
certain its properties.
19th, First Property. Primitive words receiving this
particle have a passive sense; or, are made subject to
the action implied by the primitive accidentally, but
not habitually: in which respect they differ from words
of the form TPB: as, pale! yY a tree which has been
planted: but, Mv y will mean, a tree planted, i. e.
now growing in that state, watered, &c., but with-
out reference to the act of planting, or the contrary.
So, 7)D& will mean, an hireling ; but, AW) a per-
son hired on any particular occasion. So I under-
stand Neh. vi. 12, 18, NIT WY yo7: 2’ 2A
Sanballat had hired him, hove he was an hireling ; ‘
and 1 Sam. ii. 5, W723 pn72 ovay those who are
(habitually) full, are (occasionally) hered for bread.
This property is also common to the Arabic, and is
G77 “3 AAO 7 URW IP 777
termed by the Grammarians é,lb.: as, Ktinsils cies he
AA“ aAOZ F POUCUS
sent him, and he was sent; ciels ale) L shut tt, and
wt was shut. (See No, 18, above.)
This property of the Hebrew form (as a verb) was pointed out
many years ago by Elias Levita, in a work of his entitled “W201;
but, as he supposed it also to involve a preterite tense, Glassius
and others very properly objected; and, the consequence has been,
two distinct forms, viz. 72, and D2, have been confounded
together ; and, what is still worse, a tense has been ascribed to each,
126 LECTURE VII. CART. 165. 20.
which perhaps is more than can be proved of either of them in
this language.
20th, Secondly. Words, receiving this augment sub-
jecting them to the action implied by any primitive word,
may, when the context requires it, be construed as
having a reciprocal sense, or implying possibility,
capability, exhibition, propriety, affection, or the like,
of the action, &c. meant by the primitive: as, WwW. he
guarded himself, 2 Sam. xx. 10, Mal. ii. 15. To this
property may be referred many passages, in which this
form seems to have a neuter signification; as, 20P) he
brings himself near, i. e. draws near, Exod. xxii. 7,
Josh. vii. 14 ;—and, in a few instances, an active one; as,
om73 he fought ; \YW) he leaned upon; YAW) he swore;
wauil he contended, disputed ; 228) it is, or may be,
eaten, Gen. vi. 21. So, }2 mivpy x9 it is not, may not,
cannot, or ought not, to be done thus; A>} he shewed
himself honourable ; VI81 he shewed himself glorious ;
MANA he sighed.
21st, These properties seem to be intimated in Arabic by the
IA UmOaK PIP Pur
terms cial, aay » necessity and remedy, which, Mr. Lumsden says,
indicate “ that verbs of this class must be INTENSITIVE by their own
nature, and significant of actions performed by the members of the
body :” but, the examples he adduces are not confined to this rule:
Cer
he broke, is as much an active verb as any other can be;
which, when thus augmented becomes passive, not neuter: nor has
“Ie Me MG
coe and os] the market was unfrequented, any thing to do with
&
the members of the body. JI am induced to believe, therefore, that
IA Uma“ IPI IPur
the terms cel aay! are to be understood as intimating the pro-
perties above-mentioned.
* Arab. Gram. p. 187.
ART. 166. ] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 127
166. EXAMPLES OF THE FORMS ABOVEMENTIONED.
First Class of Héeemanti Nouns, having an & prefixed.
I. TPAX and TPA, fem. MIPSR, MN home-born,
indigenous, WIN (changing (+) to («) on account of
the following 1, Art. 151. 5, note), 6 av, a name of God,
Exod. m1. 14, WWYS a bracelet, JIMS (for [MR Art.
93. 5.) strength, j208 reward, wages, YANR a finger.
II. THPAN, WANS the fist, DIIDN the young of any
bird, DiDMS sometime ago, yesterday, DWE grapes.
Il]. TPA, fem. MIPDN; as, DIMMS an amethyst,
“IIS very cruel, ADR very false, VID recollection,
DOS (for DION Art. 79.) a granary, IPS (for Pas or
JpaX& Art. 82. and 93.) an animal so called.
IV. TPaS ; as, OIAN a girdle, NAS the locust.
V. TIPPS, fem. NIPAR; as, MAWN a dunghill,
NIQWS guard, custody.
VI. TAPDS, fem. MMNPAN; as, JION (for PDON Art.
83.) a cruet, TWIDWR guard, custody.
VII. IPSN; as, PAIN or VAN (for 2218) a (never-
failing) raver.
VIII. Some nouns which lose one of their radical
letters by contraction assume the form of the Segolates ;
as, \D8 (for 9258) the palm of the hand.
2d, The nouns of this class are few; and of the last form, perhaps,
a second does not occur. It is curious enough to remark, how easily
nouns, deprived of any of their vowels, slide into the Segolate forms.
We shall see hereafter, that the same thing often takes place in the
conjugations of the verbs, in similar cases.—It will be seen that I have
not entirely followed the classification of Simonis. My reason for
doing so was this: he seems to me to have given some forms
without examples to bear him out: and in one case he has given a
form 128 for which he has only one example, and that example he
has also placed under another class. (See OVM@2IN, pp, 547 and
639. Arcan. Form.)
128 LECTURE VII. [ART. 167.
167. Second Class of Héemanti Nouns having » prefixed.
I. Form 775); as, WY o7l, pry) Lsaac.
I]. TPO); as, IY) the ostrich.
III. WPp! or TPAY, fem. TPS; as, MT (for 2M)
one who expects, TD) an herald (for TD‘), 72) (for
Tah) the thigh, 1. (for DI) a disputant, TD (for
Mp) a germ, stem, &c.
KBs hy ae pion an adamant, \W an owl.
V. TIPS); as, DOM a species of goat, Dap? a purse,
Dip) being (for D1)p. Art. 79.). |
A Bit ee 740 (for bay Art. 93. 2.) a constant
river. And, according to some, the Segolate 77) thigh
(for 727), the last radical being rejected, and the (~ )
added, as in other Segolates, for the sake of Euphony.
2d, In this class also is placed, as a special anomaly, the word
mim Jehovah,} with a caution, however, that these vowels do not
exhibit the ancient pronunciation of the word. The Jews, as it is
known to every one, never pronounce this word, but substitute either
ITE or ale) for it; and hence it is, that we sometimes find it
pointed ™7., i. e. with the vowels proper for the word DTN, which
is invariably the case when ‘278 and MM occur together. The
reason is, the word STS would in this case be pronounced twice,
which is not desirable ; the word airs is, therefore, pronounced instead
of it (page 31, note). That Jehovah is not the ancient pronunciation most
writers are agreed : but, what that was, it may be difficult to determine.
Some have proposed i1}]) Yahdvé, of the form 72), as Capellus,
Walton, Clericus, &c. Others have proposed 711), MT, or 72,
as Mercer, Montanus, Amama, Scaliger, &c. taking the Samaritan
pronunciation of it, as preserved by Theodoret, IaBe.t Others again
take the Latin Jove ; but which of these is nearest to the original pro-
nunciation, no one can say.
* Simonis places “NY under this form: but as there is some difficulty in
ascertaining the root from which it is derived, and as the word appears to be
of Egyptian origin, it may as well be omitted.
+ See Art. 147. 7, note.
{ Simonis’ Arcanum Formarum, p. 545.
ART. 168. | HEEMANTI NOUNS. 129
168. Third Class of Héemanti Nouns beginning with M.
These forms, according to Simonis and Reimarus as
quoted by him, were not much used before the time of
the Captivity. He takes the liberty, however, of ex-
cluding all the Infinitives of the Hiphhil conjugation,
which, I think, he ought not to do; because, I believe,
these infinitives are nothing more than such nouns, upon
which the conjugation is constructed ; and, if this be the
case, there will be no reason why they should not be
considered as forming a part of this class.
Examples.
I. Form: TPS or tP57; as, bya rule, dominion,
Siva intelligence, YOwiy proclaiming, causing to hear,
327 (for JADT) causing to return, PI Gor YD)
dispersing, SW (for NWI) seduction. Roots ending
in silent 7 often reject it in words of this kind, and take
nj as their terminating syllable: as, NAV and Niary
multitude, nin elevation, &c.*
IT. MapS7; as, O27 dor OMT) tranquillity, 917.
(for 377) agitation, MOXA (for 9837) liberation.
I. Mpa; as, WOT (for WVDI) termination,
cessation.
IV. MIIPDT; as, MYOQWIT relation,} &c.
V. TIPDT; as, JVI pouring out (pr. VAT Art. 82.).
* These, however, are probably compound nouns, formed of the original
root with JV, a contracted form of SVT being, for NM. See Artt. 78. 93.
+ Words having this termination are also compounds formed of the Hée-
manti noun, and the word iJ contracted to iV by Artt. 78. 93. 2, &e;
The signification of which words, ending in Mi and s1— is, that of the state of
action or passion denoted by the primitive word ; a mason a kingdom, or
state of reigning ; MNT first state, or beginning (Art. 93. 2. 4.).
K
130 LECTURE VII. [ART. 169
VI. IPSN (for IPI); as, ONT (for OMIM) making
war ; and so all the Infinitives of the Nepal species.
ie
2d, It will immediately be seen, that the forms to which the particle
‘T is here prefixed, are by no means peculiar to the Hiphhil con-
jugation, and, consequently, that no one can, without violating the
principles of analogy, derive them from that conjugation. The truth
appears to me to be, that the Hzphhil conjugation is nothing more than
the adjunction of one or other of the pronouns to words of the form
TPB, &c, to which also the particle 1, or S for the Chaldee form, is
prefixed, for the purpose of varying the sense, as already noticed.
169. Fourth Class of Héeemanti Nouns commencing with 1D.
I. TPR, fem. MPD, MADR, or NIPHP: mase:
pbtal a tower; fem. nonn war, MpYyrd oppres-
sion, NVDQWVID custody. :
II. "P52; for which Simonis gives only one example,
and that has suffered contraction: as, 1D for IDY).
Ill. TPAD; as, |2D poor; with final 1, TD a
fan, &e.
IV. TPAD , fem. MPD or NTPHA; as, Wty
a psalm, NIP a plummet. |
Vir cIpPaia; as, 90 a goad, Wit for INV, gain
(Art. 93.), 25 for IBID soft, &c. (Art. 82.).
VI. TRAD as, pat (Art. 113. 2.) strangling.
VII. TRAD or WPHD, fem. AIPDD; as, maw
a slaughter-house, N12 for MDVD (Art. 93.) a wonder,
MIND a vision, YD producing seed, D320 dividing,
MIT) sterquilinium, MAM (for MIDI) conster-
nation, MMA (for TNNDD) contusion.
VIII. TiRhD, fem. ATNPDD or NNPd2; as, VOM
want, awa hidden (treasure), n23779 trading, nosxo
food, and W713) for TWANID (Art. 79.) a candlestick.
ART. 169.7] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 131
IX. TPAD, fem. MDPHD; as, DINO a stall, Nan
for 99319 (Art. 82.) a deluge, fem. MDI) trampling,
(for MOVAD Art. 79.).
X. “IPD; as, MAD for O23 (Art. 82.) expectation,
MM vision (Art. 113. 2.). |
XI. TPH or WDD; as, WV station, with all the
participles usually ascribed to the Hophhdl conjugation.
XII. Tp, TPS), and NPS; as, TPS one who
takes account, with all the participial nouns usually
attached to the Pthkél species. ‘The remaining two
are only variations of the same form, and occur but
rarely.
AILTT. TPB2; as, 71291 learned, man discovered.
To which may be added all the participles usually
ascribed to the species of Puhdl.
XIV. TPEIVD; as, J25N0 an invader, &c. with all
the participles of the Hithpaheél species.
XV. Some defective nouns, which, for ease of pro-
nunciation, assume a Segolate form, are derived from roots
having a medial ‘ or °, or doubling the second radical, or
having 1 for the third. The forms will vary with those
of the Segolates, and for the same reasons. If, there-
fore, we reject the last radical, &c. and prefix 13, we shall
have /22%, for TPH, pointed PHP, PDD, PDR, PAD,
py, pdid, &c. as the nature of the word shall require ;
or rather, as the jus et norma loquendi has established :
as, DID number, sum; fem. IDDM (root DDD); rie or
wh elevation (root toy) ; tii, pl. ONTO measures
(root 172); T¥) or TWD a lurking place, (root N¥ or
w2); DIND or DVD soundness (root DN), &c.
2d, Simonis thinks (p. 450, Arcan. Form.), that the participles
should not be considered as nouns of the “JPNFT class. I believe
they ought to be so considered; because I hold, that, properly
speaking, there are no participles in the Hebrew Language. It is
K 2
Cel
132 LECTURE. VII. CART. 1702
true, the Grammarians have placed a number of these nouns in the
same page with the paradigma of the verbs; but, it will not hence
follow, that they are Participles. If, indeed, it could be shewn, that
they involve the tenses of the verb as the Greek participles do, the
opinion of Simonis, &c. would have some weight; but this has not
been done; and, as I think, cannot be done satisfactorily. I have
therefore thought it most conducive to the progress of the Student,
as well as more conformable to the analogy of the Language, to class
them all as nouns: it being from the context alone that any thing like
tense is to be discovered.
170. Fifth Class of Heemanti Nouns beginning with ) or 17.
I. TP), TPH, TWD, IPD, or Tp5I7; as, aH
(for 3¥)), perhaps for 2828 or 38210) fired, .
up ; wis for AW] (Art. 93.) inhabited ; ADI is
33D2) turned back, &c. So all the participles and
preterites of the Nephhal SoHE AO with this dif-
ference, that the participle ends in (+), the preterite in
(-); also, JIDT2 turned about ; pinn: sealed ; D927
making war (for omo377, Art. 82.); Dox eatable (for
box, Artt. 82. 115.). He
Il. TPE]; as, AP) (for J3D3), as AD] above. This
is mostly found in words doubling their last radical
letter; a form not found used in the Miphhdl con-
jugation.
171. Stath Class of Heemanti Nouns having fy prefixed.
The forms commencing with N, as given by Simonis,
are the following : |
I. TPan, fem. IPSN; as, MPM hope; MAIN
confuct ; WIT) (for MIM, Art. 93. 5.) self-ex-
altation.
II, PHN, fem. TWNPSM and NIPAN; as, WIT (for
WIT) new wine; M¥IDN (for ae dispersion ;
nwa clothing.
ART. 171. ] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 133
Il. 7pm, fem. TIPAM, or NIPAN; as, WIM (for
yn) and min generation, succession ; nonin
hope, expectation ; DIDMH an ostrich. ‘
IV. Tpan, fem. OIp|an, or NIP|HM; as, Abyan
trembling, giddiness; TMD\F\ (for Majin), and, on
account of the guttural, NIDIN (for NAD). repre-
hension ; man (for mo2an) entercession ; moan (for
myn) self consumption; 33K) (for MAAN, Art.
93. 4.) form, pattern; DVOIE) (for NIN, Tb.) decep-
dion; and MINT (for NWIN*) whoredom.
V. TPA, fem. ATPAD; as, TOI a disciple ;
PIAA a robe; MAX) self torment (for AWINM, Yod
in many instances standing for 1, and, being doubled
in this place, makes compensation for the 7 which is
rejected).
VI. TIPDA, fem. TPS and NVPSA; as, PON
self-purgation ; “\WIDI\_ self-embittering ; novo (for
MDI) continual walking ; AIDIN self-perversion ;
NONI a proper name, Jer. xl. 8, &. So ADWN
(for MANWA, Art. 79.) conversion; FADWH (for
MANY) and NDWN reciprocal striking of hands in
making a bargain, &c.
VII. 7pan, fem. TIPPS; as, SIN or NINN a
breast plate,. ANon (for MANN) weariness, nop (for
moyn) self-exaltation.
VIII. PSA, fem. MIP; as, MHI (for TIDIN)
deceit, MAIN (for MII Art. 92. 2.) grief, TSM (for
TINH, contr. for TAISA or WIND) occasion, oppor-
ie ante T It
tunity.
* See p. 129, note.
134 LECTURE VII. CART. 171.
IX. TPAN, fem. TDpAaAN, PAIN (for PP, from the
root 5° or 51) division, separation, TWIN (for AM win)
solidity, substance, wealth.
X. Here, as in the former class, the rejection of the
last or second radical will reduce the nouns to one or
other of the segolate forms: as ban confusion, (for
222A perhaps): the latter being rejected, in order to
avoid the repetition of similar sounds, we have an,
which, for reasons already assigned, (Art. 156. 2.) will
become ban. In the same manner we have DDN (for
DDIAN) melting, dissolution, &c. to which many others
may be added.
XI. ‘TAPSM; as oan suffusion (of the eye). To
which may be added a few others, reduplicating some of
the radical letters; as, DRIPM self-elevation, &e.
It must have appeared, I think, that the forms to which this letter
M1 is prefixed, are by no means peculiar to the Hithpahél conjugation,
but, that they exhibit a great variety of other forms. I cannot help
thinking, therefore, that this conjugation owes something to this letter,
or to its more perfect form 17 or 8, while the particle owes nothing
whatever to the conjugation.
172. Seventh Class of Héemanti Nouns, receiving VM as a
prefix.
I. “PBN; as, wrt (Art. 115.) genealogical
computation. So all the infinitives of the Hithpahél
conjugation, due regard being paid to the radical letters
composing such words. ‘HYMN AWT prostrating (2 Kings
v. 18), with a paragogic 5, seems to be an anomalous
word, deformed perhaps by the carelessness of the
copyists.
II. “IPB caused to be visited; but perhaps this
form never occurs used a8 a noun.
ART. 172. ] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 135
ITI. MIpant; as, NNIANNT confederation, &c.*
In a few instances we have had, in the above examples, terminations
in 7, 41, and ™, which may be said to be Héemantic. In these
cases, therefore, we have anticipated our next chapter, which is to
treat on the Héemanitie postfixed syllables: but, as we could not adduce
our examples without bringing in these forms, we shall perhaps be
excused.
———$——+
* But this is perhaps a compound form as before, p. 129. note.
136 LECTURE VIII. [ART. 173,
LECTURE VIII.
ON THE HEEMANTI LETTERS WHICH ARE POSTFIXED TO WORDS.
173. Ir has been stated, (Art. 164. 2.) that, the
Heéemanti letters 7, 9, 0, }, and NM, are severally found
attached to the ends of either primitive or derived
words. The cases in which, NM, MI, M. are found,
have already been noticed (Artt. 142. 5, 143. 2, 169.).
It will be unnecessary, therefore, to notice them further.
We shall now proceed to consider those which end in °,
O, and }, respectively.
Eighth Class of Héemanti Nouns ending in >—.
174. These nouns ending in *~ are used to express
either persons or things, which have some relation to the
signification of the primitive, from which they are
derived; and, hence, they have been termed Relative
Nouns by the Arabian Grammarians.* Of this kind
are the Patronymic or Gentile nouns of the Grammars
of Europe, all of which, must, from their nature,
necessarily be attributive, and, therefore, subject to
the variation necessary to distinguish the genders
(Art. 142.).
2d, In endeavouring to account for the form and signification of
this class of words, I must be allowed to suppose, as before, that the
additional letter (7) is the fragment of some word, originally having
the signification, which (>) now gives to words thus augmented. In
the Ethiopic we have the triliteral adjunct “8, used for the purpose
Ed PULUmOI LF =
Me
ART. 174. 3..] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 137
of forming nouns of this class:* and, occasionally, in the Arabic
Ss
pei US9s which is also further abbreviated into ”, us s+ which is the
»
augment universally found to prevail in the Hebrew.
-s
3d, That the meaning attached to the root us 5! in Arabic, is suitable
to the signification of these words, the following definition of it,
given by Golius, will perhaps be sufficient to shew:—“ Se recepit
commorand: vel quiescendi ergo, diversatus fuit interdiu vel noctu.
Applying this, then, to any proper name, we shall have both the form
and sense proper for these Patronymics: e. g. Ethiopic form
NONI Israclani: Hebrew and Arabic by contraction, SoeeTiy ,
Sul eine
cshiel pal a person related to the patriarch Israel, by connexion,
residence, birth, &c. So *FV7) (for TTT, Art. 81.) a descendant
of Judah ; and so of others.
4th, It may also be considered as a proof of the truth of this con-
jecture, that these Hebrew nouns, when receiving any asyllabic
augment, are generally found with the » doubled by Dagésh: as,
my Levites ; TRINTE below, &c. which seem to be their true forms.
See Art. 143. 5.5
5th, The following are a few examples, with their
primitives : 12¥33 a Canaanite, from \P32 Canaan ; 23
princely, from T2 a prince fen) pastoral (for WIV by
contraction), from MY a shepherd ; 1128 belonging to
the north, from \i2¥ the north. |
6th, When, however, the primitive word ends in *, the Patronymic
is formed by prefixing the article only :§ as, war Miushi, a son of
Merari; SWAT one of his descendants: ‘21 the name of one of
the sons of Gad; °2WT one of his descendants. So *F patron ;
‘2377, Gen. xlvi. 24. In one instance Mis prefixed instead of 77,
)
* See Ludolf’s Ethiop. Gram. fol. edit. pp. 95, 97.
+ See Mr. de Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. i. p. 239, &c.
t The teshdeed which is always found to accompany this Ws in Arabic,
may perhaps have been added originally for the purpose of supplying the defect
occasioned by the rejection of one or two letters from the primitive word.
§ Of this property of the definite article some account will be given
hereafter.
138 LECTURE VIII. [ ART. 174. 7.
which may have been done for the purpose of avoiding the concurrence
of two aspirates: as, ‘IO2FIN Takhkémoni, 2 Sam. xxiii. 8, from
‘iDoM 1 Chron. xi. 11. We have, however, "72 a Mede, Dan.
xi. 1, from *T2 Media.
7th, In forming Patronymics from compounds, two methods have
been adopted: one by adding ” as before, which is regular; the other,
by also prefixing the article to the last word in the compound. Exam-
ples: 1. "2? 12 a Benjamite; 2. imam M2 the Bethlehemite,
1 Sam. xvii. 58; WOW MB the native of Beth Shemesh, from
waw Ma, ONT M2 the native of Bethel; 2.21 12 the Ben-
jamite, 1 Kings i. 8.
8th, Nouns ending in} do not form the Patronymic by the addition
of ‘>, but by some periphrasis: as, impo oya the citizens of Jericho,
Josh. xxiv. 11. So TA) WIS men of Jericho, Neh. iii. 2; W223
children of Jericho, Ib. vii. 36; rio M22 daughters of Shiloh,
Judg. xxi. 21. In a few instances *2 is added: as, aN Hag-
giloni, from aire Gil6é, 2 Sam. xv. 12, Josh. xv. 51.*
9th, The same frequently takes place in compound words: as,
ONY AY) %23 the children of Kiryath Harim, Ezraii. 25 5 MYBTY 32
the children of Hazmaveth, Ib. ver. 24.
10th, Proper names ending in © are sometimes subject to the same
rule: as, D1) WIS men of Sodom.
11th, In Patronymics derived from compounds, the last only of the
compound is sometimes taken: as, *22) YON, for \3°2) 12 VIN the
land of the Benjamite, 1 Sam. ix. 4.7
12th, Some primitives ending in 7 drop that letter in forming the
patronymic: as, ‘P23 Hanndhami, Num. xxvi. 40, from 722
Nahaman.
13th, In forming Patronymics from dual or plural
words, one or other of ‘the following methods is adopted :
1, The word, from which such patronymic is to be formed,
is reduced to its primitive form, and then *— is to be
o
~ Ss >
ag ee oF we
* So in Arabic us! in sty) spiritual, Keune belonging to the
body, &e. ' sade ediil
+ These abbreviations are found to take place in most languages. See M. de
Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. i. p. 247. Lud. Gram. Eth. fol. edit. p. 22. Wilkins’s
Sanscrit Gram. Art. 1174. &c.
ART. 174. 14.] HEEMANTI NOUNS. 139
added as before: as, DIY Egypt, primitive WY), and
with -, ¥2 an Egyptian. 2, Hither 1¥1 inhabitant,
na daughter, or \'> out of, may precede such proper
name : as, pow AW} inhabitant of Jerusalem ; Isa.
v. 3, pow na daughter of Jerusalem; or ahr)
Downy Jecoliah of Jerusalem, 2 Chron. xxvi. 3. _
14th, In a few places the primitive is put for the patronymic, which
may be considered, either as presenting a metonymy, by which the pro-
genitor, &c. is put for the descendant, or by supposing an ellipsis to be
made of one of the words 2%, Na, 1, &c. as stated above: as,
PWT Damascus, for Damascene, Gen. xv. 2 ; on? M2 for pha bral Ma
2 Sam. xxiii. 15, So 222 for BP? 22, ONT? for Desai 22,
passim.
15th, Irregularities are occasionally met with in the forms of these
words: as, 4/7] a Hagarene, 1 Chron. v. 10, from 20] Hagar, as if
the primitive had been a Segolate of the form 7377; 22M Timnite,
Judg. xv. 6, for “22M, primitive 2M. So, wT Numb.
XXvi. 20, primitive TU and Sw, which occurs, 1 Chron. ix. 5;
“JDP the Ammonite, the primitive being Y2Y"ZB. See 1 Sam. xi. 1,
and Gen. xix. 38, from which, however, the collective form yay
Ammon has been formed, Ib, and thence the Patronymic.
16th, For the feminine forms of these nouns, see Art.
143. 5, and for the plurals, Art. 147. The forms taken
in construction, or when any of the pronouns are attached,
will be regulated according to the analogy of the word,
&ec. as already intimated.
17th, There is another class of nouns ending in 9,
preceded by (-) or (+) which have been thought to denote
excess. ‘'hese, however, are probably nothing more
than nouns in the plural number (Art. 147. 6.). The
following are examples: 1212 @ swarm of locusts ; 22V20
many windows ; "DD extremely greedy; “IW a plain;
Iw the Almighty, root As powerful ; °T8 supreme
Lord, from {i T8 . |
We now proceed to the IXth class of augmented
140 LECTURE VIII. [ART. 175.
nouns, which take the Héemanti letter OD at the
end.
175. In this class, the vowel immediately preceding
the final D is either (+) or (3), which induced Hiller to
suppose, that the adjunct was Dc, or DIN, respectively.
It is believed that these nouns are intensitive in signifi-
cation, If then we suppose DM to be a particle derived
from M25, which means tumult, as of a multitude, or
noise, as of the waves of the sea, we can easily conceive
how the addition of such a particle to any primitive
word would make it intensitive as to meaning.* This
will account, perhaps, for the termination B_. In the
next place, the root DIN does not occur in the Hebrew
Bible, but is to be found in the Arabic DIX, i signi-
fying, he became fat, or corpulent. If, then, we can
suppose an abbreviated form of this word to be attached
to any other, we shall have the termination 0), which
will also give an zntensitive signification to the com-
pound. The following are a few examples: the student
may arrange them under their respective measures, if he
shall think it necessary to do so.
D229 lice ; DRY the whole day; DN most truly ;
DDT quite silent; OV, or DW quite naked; DID
and ji full redemption ; Dp» the entire whole ;
DAD a body of men, Judg. xx. 48.
* Nothing, surely, can be be more ridiculous than the opinion of Simonis
and others, expressed in his ‘ Arcanum Formarum,” (p. 584. 5.), viz.: that
the figures of and 7 being extended, may account for the intensitive meaning,
which their addition to a primitive word gives to its sense; and, that D being
inclosed, also gives the idea of comprehensiveness, like a pregnant mother, in-
closing her offspring within the womb! For, it is very possible that these words
may have been in use before the letters were invented.
ART. 176. | HEEMANTI NOUNS. 141
Tenth Class of Héemanti Nouns, receiving a final 1:
176. The Grammarians are generally agreed, that
nouns, receiving this letter as a final, are intensitive in
signification. ,
What this letter may have originally been derived from, it may be
difficult now to say, as it is, what may have been the primitive, from
which we have such termination, as that in the English words Forma-
tion, Station, or the like. That these words are given in Latin, under
the forms Formatio, Statio, &c. there can be no doubt, and, that the n,
added in the English is derived from the Latin declension ending in
o-nis, ne, &c..1s equally certain; but, whence this termination has been
derived is not yet known: nor is it our intention here to offer any
conjecture on the subject. We may, perhaps, be excused, however, if
we offer something with reference to the Hebrew form, which, should
it fail of producing conviction on the mind of the Reader, may, never-
theless, have the beneficial result of enabling him to remember both
the forms and powers of the nouns of this class.
2d, This letter then is affixed to words, simple or augmented, with
the vowels (+) or 1; thus }= or 1}—; whence we may suppose, that 758,
or 7177, ‘signifying strength, power, riches, wealth (the primitive form
of which will be J)8, or 777, Art. 95.) is the root. And hence,
also, we may have the form 718, or 71], contracted by Art. 81. to 78
or 341, which may present the words, from which these terminations
have been taken; and which, added to any word, would naturally give
it an intensitive meaning. Some have also supposed the meaning to
be occasionally diminutive.* But this seems now to be generally
given up.
Examples.
1228, fem. wars a widow ; \AN8 a large gift; \A4
(for J729 Art. 79.) root 735 corn; also with the addi-
tional M—, MINA a great palace.
IDPS widowhood ; YiENN (for HNN Artt. 78. 79.) fre-
quent entry ; WON, or iN a palace; XV The Most
High. So also with augmented nouns : as, JINWA great
confidence ; \WI3 great contempt ; \iR1D¥ great drought,
* See the “ Arcanum Formarum,” p. 564.
142 LECTURE VIII. CART. 177.
&c. And, in some instances, as in JOP, pl. DID Little,
least, &c., this |= seems to have been added, but dropped
and restored by Art. 83.
3d, A few proper names receive {1: as, }T) 1 Chron.
xvi. 38 ; ya Gen. xxx. 20; JW? Jeshurun, &c.
4th, This intensitive letter } 1s frequently attached
to verbs, where it is usually termed Nun Paragogic, or
Epenthetic. It is found in Arabic in the same situation,
and is termed by the Arabian Grammarians, wyill
os SS The confirmatory Nun, the office of which is to
impart certainty or intensity to the verb, to which it
is attached. ‘The same powers have been ascribed to
the Hebrew } similarly situated,* though, it must be
confessed, such powers are not always apparent from
the context.
N.B. All words thus augmented, whether the aug-
ment is prefixed or postfixed, may be considered as com-
pound words.
On the Reduplicated and otherwise Compounded Words.
177. There will be no difficulty in perceiving, that,
if one word may be qualified or otherwise restricted
in its signification by the addition of another, a similar
consequence will also take place, when the same word
is repeated: and, that the effect will be the same,
whether both such words are written out at length, or,
whether they are combined in one. Accordingly we
* Nun Paragogicum, Verborum personis in Jod et Vau finitis additum
semper esse Emphaticum, notat Hottingerus de Officiis Literarum Servil.
Analysi Jobi subjectis, §. 9. Arcan. Form. p. 564. And Schroeder gives the
following passage as illustrative of this opinion: 1 Sam. xvii. 25, “Ws
Tn VW YP) ABD? qui percusserit illum, hunc ditabit rex: ubi,” says he,
“ sonus fortior est, quam si scriptnm esset 12) et WTIWY? &e.” R. 168.
ART. 177. 2..] ON REDUPLICATED WORDS. 143
find both these methods adopted in the Hebrew: for, ix
some cases entire words are found in this reduplicated
state, in others they are contracted into one word, by
rules presently to be considered. In the first case;
pinoy piny deep deep, i.e. most deep, Eccl. vii. 24;
JI2ID AAD turning turning, i. e. continually turning,
or changing, Ib. i. 6: 371 29 heart and heart, i. e.
double heart, Ps. xii. 3; ny NMRA wells wells,
1. e. many wells, Gen. xiv. 10; MYDD NOD rod rod,
i.e. rod by rod, Num. xvi. 17. In what sense such
reduplicated expressions are to be taken, the context will
always be sufficient to determine. ‘The same may be
said with respect to compound words. In some instances
it will be augmented, as in superlatives; in others
modified ; and in some, perhaps, diminished, as in the
diminutive nouns of other languages.
2d, Let us come, in the second place, to the rules
which have been given for the formation of reduplicated
words.* It has been shewn (Art. 78.) that any one of
the “TN letters, will, in certain instances, disappear.
This is the case in the first class of these reduplicated
words, where we have TXOSD for AND OND, which
when compounded would become ANDAND , and striking
out 7 by Art. 79, we have NDND, pen again, by
drawing back the (-) and rejecting the (2). by Are, az3,
we hives MINOND, and, if we place (-) Dagésh in the
second Samék, either for the sake of euphony, or to
compensate for the loss of 7, we shall have TROND for
the reduplicated word, meaning, measure by measure,
* We use the word reduplicated to signify words which have been formed by
the reduplication of some one primitive word ;—compound, to signify those
which have been formed by coalescence of two different words. In this sense
Simonis uses the words Geminata and Compostta.
144. LECTURE VIII. [ART. 177. 3.
as both the composition of the word and the context
require. In some cases, as it will presently be seen, the
final 77 of such words is also rejected. It must also be
borne in mind by the student, that considerable difference
of opinion is found to prevail among the grammarians,
as to the original roots from which these words have
been derived; and consequently, that great difference of
opinion is found to prevail as to their signification.
3d, The following are a few examples of the first
class of this kind of nouns, which are generally thought
to be formed by a reduplication of some word having 7
for its final radical letter: e. g. WWW quite naked, or
deserted, from the root MW naked: by some also
supposed to mean the juniper, by others the tamarisk,
tree; NwpWP the scales of a fish, from NWP peeling ;
DYwUW exquisite delights, from NYY looking on (with
delight) ; aval copiously flowing (hair), from 49M hang-
mg; DYAYI many and great errors, from WN erring.
4th, The second class of reduplicated nouns consists of
combinations derived from primitive nouns which have
their second and third radical letters the same: as, OA N3
most choice (beasts or birds), from 772 selecting ; PP ep
a wheel, sphere, or any thing subject to continual turning
about, as chaff, &c. from 02 rolling. And hence n7372
the skull; 1273 gargarism, gargle: also a grain or
berry, from V2 drawing, &c. to which many more may
be added. It has been shewn (Art. 83.) that when the
last two letters of any primitive word are the same, one
of them may be dropped for the sake of euphony. This
rule holds good when such words are combined, and for
the same reason.
oth, To this class may also be added reduplicated
words, which, in their primitive forms, usually reject a
medial 1 or: for here, as in the foregoing examples,
ART. 177.6..] | ON REDUPLICATED NOUNS. 145
we may consider the middle radical letter as being
rejected for the sake of euphony (Art. 81.). Of this
sort are the following examples: monn great pain,
from wn, or Pala grieving ; 9k 1 grievous ejection,
or captivity, from rai casting out; DYAVDY eyelids,
from *)WY moving quickly, flying; MDSDB¥ flowing
copiously, from *)\¥ flowing, Ezek. xvii. 5.
6th, The third class of reduplicated nouns includes
those which are formed by a repetition of the last syllable,
or, of the two last letters of the primitive noun: as,
DAA great gifts, from 3 giving, the 9 being re-
jected; OVDTS, fem. NDWIIN reddish, red here and
there, having red spots, from DIN being red; DAON
mixed collection, or multitude, from MON collecting ;
JID most perverse, from FDO turning over, &c.
Niprpon most smooth, i. e. deceiving words or things,
from pon polishing, smoothing, &c.
7th, The fourth class of reduplicated nouns are thosé
which are found to repeat the last radical letter of the
primitives, inserting, at the same time, some vowel
between the letters so doubled: as, DION, or DION
most languid, from 278 anxious ; 0°22) eminences,
great heaps, hilis, from \324 gibbous ; D821 great or
Jrequent adultery, from *\8] committing adultery ;
25973 a well watered pasture, from an leading to
the water, &c., to which many more might be added.
8th, In forming the plurals of these and similar compounds, regard
is to be had principally to the analogy of the last component part of
the word. In no case can the addition of any increment, whether
syllabic or asyllabic, affect a syllable beyond the penultimate of any
word. In words, therefore, consisting of a large number of syllables,
no change will take place in the vowels beyond the penulti-
mate, and, in many instances, not beyond the ultimate. The only
question, then, that can arise must be, as to the change of the ultimate
L
146 LECTURE VIII. [ ART. 177, 9.
or penultimate vowels. In primitive words, indeed, a greater number
of vowels does not exist: and, there, as we have seen, analogy alone
can be relied upon. ‘The same is true here. For, first: In all cases,
except those in which the second and third radical is the same, upon
any asyllabic augment being attached to a word, the preceding vowel
must be either perfect or rejected; otherwise the syllable will be in-
complete: as, P2720 great gifts, 22) stars of ——. Here, as the
asyllabic ©°> must necessarily take the last consonant of the word, in
order to give it utterance, the preceding vowel must become perfect, or
be rejected. But, if the root had its second and third radical letters the
same, and one had been thrown away for the sake of euphony, then,
upon any augment being introduced, this rejected letter would return,
expressed by Dagésh forte, placed in the terminating letter (Art. 83.):
as, DvDs 3 worthless supernumerary shoots, from phe , the root of which
is oUt vile, Isa. xviii. 5.
9th, The only question which can now arise is, How will these
vowels be affected, when the noun is in the state of construction ?
Generally speaking, unless there be some reason for retaining a perfect
vowel, i.e. when some letter has been retrenched for which compen-
sation ought to be made, and hence a perfect vowel retained, either
Sheva, or one of its substitutes, will appear in the penultimate: as,
pbs) io) the stars of ——, &c. not ‘a315 . But this can be determined
only from a knowledge of the analogy of the word.
10th, We shall now give a few examples of each
sort of compound words, omitting the classification of
Simonis as unnecessary : 257 thick darkness, from
37 it became dark, and DDN (Arab. Qs!) the sun set ;
WP P filthy vomiting, from 8‘)? vomiting, and Wp base ;
1W5 widely expanding, from W715 eapand, and 115
separating ; W501 invigorating, refreshing, from
31 moisture, and WD increasing, spreading ; TMOIN
a melon, from 28 Arab. he cast down, and M02
nearly the same ; NO7IN a bason, from 28 collecting,
and 50 blood, Arabic, or as others, 5% dew, water ;
DIDWIWNAN chief satraps, according to some, from
the Persie; WON (ssl price, pre-eminence, and
ART. 177. 10.] OF PROPER NAMES. 147
ww FIM a satrap; according to others, the chief
door keepers, from WON _.s\, as before, and (b 0
j82T1 door keeper; “ati treasurer, from Td yala
(Pers. 4S or es) and 1) or 72 (Pers. jis or yb) agent,
Wi32 treasury (perhaps the diminutive is or ais
of the above); MIND something, any thing, from
M2 IS 4 quid aut qud; Mnanyw flame of the
Lord, according to some from W&, a Chaldaic particle,
mig igh or nano flame, and *Pthe Lord; according to
others, from 21” inflaming, Syriac, and nan) a flame,
and /7° as before. Others again take the & as derived
from the Arabic ANTW Wl. flame, &c. as_ before.
In the list of various readings given by Ben Naphthali,
this word is read as two naw, which is probably
the ancient way in which it was written. Some of these,
as it will be seen, are foreign words: but, as the
number of such is few in the Hebrew Bible, and as
the Dictionary must be consulted for their signification
and etymology, we have thought it unnecessary to
investigate their forms and composition further.
On the Forms and Composition of Nouns adopted as Proper
Names.
178. By Proper Names, we understand those words
or phrases which have been adopted for the purpose of
conveying the ideas of certain specific persons or things.
By names of persons are to be understood, names of
God, Deities, Angels, Men, &c.; of things, those of
kingdoms, cities, towns, villages, mountains, rivers, &c.,
provided they be definite: as, first, MMT) Jehovah ;
mai bya Baal Zéviw; 28°22 Gavriél; PIN
j L2
148 LECTURE VIII. CART. 178. 2.
Jéhishiih, &c.. Second: WW Ashshir ; DOYS Egypt ;
Down Jerusalem, &c. And, in short, any word which
is used to designate any specific object, (although the
same may, in other instances, be used as an Appellative,)
is termed a Proper Name, and is to be construed as
such. Lion, for example, is an appellative; and yet it
is as often used as a proper name, and so of others.
2d, Whence it will be seen, that occasions might
occur, in which it will be extremely difficult to deter-
mine whether such word was originally intended to be
taken as an appellative, or as a proper name.*
3d, In the first place, then, Proper Names which
are purely Hebrew, (for some appear to be of foreign
extraction,) are, for the most part, found to follow the
analogy of the Appellatives; at others, to present forms
unknown to them. Those which are of the same forms
with the Appellatives, we need not now notice, as those
forms have already been discussed.
Ath, The simple forms of proper names which are here
found to differ from those of the appellatives, are, Ist,
those which take some form peculiar to the persons of the
verbs; and, 2d, those which add j to the end: as, Ist,
paw Ishbak, he excelled; AW. Yashiv, he returns,
or shall return; WS. Itskhar, he shines, &c.; and,
2d, as, Wik Ond; IW Yerekhd, Jericho. A few
foreign names are found of the form NTPS; as, MDa
Basmath. nigh
5th, Names compounded with one or other of the
divine names occur very frequently ; a circumstance which,
according to Simonis, happens only twice, with respect
* Glass. Phil. Sac. pp. 696, 705, 780, &c.
ART. 178. 6..] OF PROPER NAMES. 149
to the Appellatives; i. e. in PAN Ariél, and mAaND
Maaphelyd. Another remarkable circumstance is, that
in these compositions the order is sometimes inverted :
as, MYAWIT Yehoshavhath, for WIM Nyaw Shavhath
Yéhovdh: which Simonis terms Anastrophe.* This
never takes place in the Appellatives. With these
exceptions only, the forms of proper names, whether sim-
ple or compound, constantly follow those of the Appella-
tives ; the significations of both being ascertained precisely
in the same way. It would be superfluous to swell this
work with numerous examples ; particularly as they may
be found in the “ Onomastica” of Hiller and Simonis,
classed, arranged, and discussed, as far perhaps as the
most sanguine enquirer can wish.
6th, Having stated what the general rules relating to
the formation and composition of Proper Names are, we
may now notice a few irregularities which are occasionally
found to take place. These may be classed under the
heads of, I. Omissions, II. Additions, III. Transpositions,
of certain letters or syllables; and, IV. The changes of
certain letters of the same organs.
7th, Omissions: and, in the first case, of the initial letter of the
primitive word; e. g. 52 1 Chron. ii. 9, for DON Matt. i. 3. Apa,
in the name of a person, Job xxxii. 3; and, of a place, 2 Chron.
xxii. 5, DO8. In a compound 87 OP 1 Chron xi. 13, for DDR
i773
DYAT 1 Sam. xvii. 1. In this last case, ODN is taken by some as an
Appellative; T27 is thought by some to be the same with DVT
Edim, i.e. Edom. Others have taken this to be a mystical name,
from the signification of the word 517 to come to silence.
8th, In the following instances, a letter has been dropped from the
middle of the word: as, OD25 2 Sam. xvii. 25, for pan 1 Chron.
ii. 16. So T2798 2 Sam. xxiv. 16. and 7208 1 Chron. xxi. 25. So
ict
pirat, but 2 Chron. xxviii. 5, pint; = Gen xlvi. 13., for which
* Onomast. Vet. Test. p. 435.
150 LECTURE VIII. CART. 178. 9%
we have aw 1 Chron. vii. 1; maw 1 Sam. xvii. 13, is written yaw
1 Chron. iii. 5, and DVDW 2 Sam. v. 14.
3. In the following words a letter has been omitted at the end;
DIS Josh. iii. 16, which is TIN Chap. xix. 36 ; wage Is. xvi. 11,
and Ib. v. 7, NWI? ; NDS 1 Chron. ii. 19; TIES Ib. v. 24.
9th, Under the head omissions may properly be noticed those
defects which are found to take place in patronymics, &ec. derived
from compound proper names. Compounds, in any case, are trouble-
some words on account of their length; but in proper names this
would be less tolerable than in any other. ‘The consequence has been,
most nations have used contractions, by omitting some part or other of
the compound word (see Art. 174. 11. note). Hence °27D" for 2132
1 Sam. ix. 1, Jud. xix. 16, and Esth. ii, 5; 22) WS a man, a Benjamite.
So 1 Chron. xx. 5, rT 2, put as some believe for warner IVA Bethlehe-
mite, conf. 2 Sam. xxi. 19 ; ale VO Judg. xv. 17, Ib. ver. 9.14. 19,
is written simply 12.*
10th, To these may be added, “> Ps. cxxxi. 6; for
pay? MP 1 Sam. vu. 1, &c., where the English version
has “ the fields of the wood ;” DowAT passim, Is written
pow Ps. Ixxvi. 8; Bethlehem, om? 1 Chron. iv. 22;
Bethaven, Hos. x. 5, is ]18 ver. 8.
11th, Some additions which are peculiar to proper names have
already been given (No. 8.). We now come to the transposition of
letters or syllables : Dy ON 2 Sam. xi. 3, is Onvap 1 Chron. ii. 5,
* With respect to this last passage, Pilkington has remarked—‘ The word
WT? , as an Appellative, signifies, a jaw bone; but, as it was also the proper
name of the place, where the Philistines met Samson, and where he slew a
thousand of them with the jaw bone of an ass, the name also of Ramath-Lehi
was given to the place, where he cast away the jaw bone. To consider the word
then, as Appellative, in the next verse ; and to say that, ‘ When Samson was
thirsty, God clave an hollow place that was in the jaw, and there came water
thereout,’ must be through want of common attention; because, they imme-
diately subjoin, ‘ Wherefore he called the name thereof En hakkore (q.d. The
well of him that called) which is in Lehi, unto this day.’—Such mistakes as
these give wrong ideas to the ignorant; and furnish the scoffers with matter
of ridicule.”—‘‘ The error indeed, is corrected in the margin, which hath
Lehi, &c.”—Remarks upon several passages of Scripture, &c., by Matthew
Pilkington, Cambridge, 1759, p. 157.
~
ART. 178. 12..] OF PROPER NAMES. 151
in which the component parts of the compound change places, by
Anastrophe as above noticed (No. 5.); P22 2 Kings xxiv. 6. 8,
is 71932) 1 Chron. iti. 16; and, by omission, with the addition of 4,
WhID Jer. xxii. 24; MMO TIAN Josh. xxiv. 30, is OPW NION
Judg, u. 9; mWAIT 1 Chron. iv. 4, but Ib. 11, TW So M2
2 Sam. vill. 8, is written WIA 1 Chron. xviii. 8; to which some
others might be added. According to Hiller,* examples of this kind
are very numerous: but in these, as the significations adduced by him
are grounded on conjectural etymologies, little reliance can be placed
on them.
12th, We now proceed to give a few examples in which the letters
of the same organ have taken place of one another (Art 84.); 77872
2 Kings xx. 12, written JIN Is, xxxix. 1, and JI 2 Kings
xxv. 27, Jer. 1. 2. In the last instance, a quiescent § is also omitted
(Art. 78.); 122 Josh. vii. 18, written 92¥ 1 Chron. ii. 7, and to this last
IitT Iv T
an allusion is made in the text; V2WND 2 Sam. xi. 3, and pawn
1 Chron. iii, 5; WE8JT2°22 Dan. i. 1; TENDTPIA2 Jer. xxi. 2; 7
Is. xix. 13, and aia Hos. ix. 6, Memphis. Several changes of 7 and
may be observed in the words Khemddn, Gen. xxxvi. 26; Khemran,
1 Chron. i. 41; Dodanim, Gen. x. 4, is given Rodanim, 1 Chron. i. 7; :
Riphath, Gen. x. 3, is Diphdth, 1 Chron. i. 6; Déhuél, Num. i. 14,
is Réhuél, Ib. ii. 14; Hadad-Hézer, 2 Sam. viii. 3, is Hadar-Heézer,
1 Chron. xvii. 5. These letters, although not of the same organ, are
found in other languages frequently interchanged. Their change in
Hebrew has often been accounted for, from the probability of the
Seribes having mistaken the form of the one for that of the other,
which is likely enough to have been the case. I think also, that
confusion may have arisen from their similarity of sound; which we
find has sometimes taken place in other languages.
13th, It may not be amiss to offer a few remarks here
on those proper names, which are found to end in (°)
Yod, not only because their number is very considerable ;
but also, because, they afford some curious information
on the subject of ancient Hebrew theology.
14th, These, according to Hiller,+ may be classed under four heads.
* Onomasticon, V. Test. p. 365.
+ Ib. pp. 228, 229.
152 LECTURE VIII. (ART. 178. 15.
First, Those which may be termed Denominatives, on account of
some particular circumstance being alluded to, when they were first
given: as, 2 Levi, meaning Conjunctive, see Gen. xxix. 34. To
which may be added all Paronymics used as proper names.
15th, Secondly, Words found in a mutilated state, which were
originally composed of one or other of the Divine names: as oN
for mor or TOT, signifying, the Lord (is) a portion. So 22
for T17)¥2 stripped of God ; to which many others might be added.
The intervening » Yod, however, is in many cases allowed by all to be
nothing more than a sort of connecting letter, as in the case of ONTAD
for 28 TAY servant of God.
16th, This method of compounding the Divine name with other
words for the purpose of forming proper names, is certainly of
great antiquity among the Jews, and may safely be appealed to in
proof of the position, that they never did, as a nation, acknowledge
any other God, than that urged upon their notice by the last prophet.
Whether we can extract from it the fact, that they also understood the
doctrine of the Holy Trinity, of the Immutability, Invisibility, Incom-
prehensibility, and of the other attributes of the Deity, as known and
taught among ourselves now, does not seem to be quite so clear as
Hiller will have it,* although we cannot hence infer their ignorance of
these things. It is also worthy of notice, that the names given to
individuals among the Babylonians and other nations contiguous to the
Jews, were, for the most part, either the names of their idols, or
compounds including one or other of their titles. The same practice
is found to prevail among the pagans of the present day.
17th, Thirdly, Yod is said to be paragogic when
found attached to substantives used as proper names:
as, WY DI7 1 Chron. xxv. 4. 31; YIIS Numb.
xxi. 33: “Ta [WY Josh. xv. 62, &c.
18th, Fourthly, Yod is said to be the pronoun of the
Ist person singular in the followimg and similar ex-
amples : mi 1 Chron. xxv. 4 ; nya Ib. ver. 4. 29.
19th, Having said thus much on the analogy and
irregularities found to prevail in the forms of proper
names, and referred the Student to those writers who
* Onomast. Vet. Test. p. 261, &c.
ART. 178. 20. | OF PROPER NAMES. 153
have treated these subjects at great length, we shall now
offer a few remarks: 1. On the persons by whom they
have been given, and on the circumstances with which
they were connected: and, 2, On the various names,
sometimes found attached to persons or places, which has
by some been termed Polyonymia.
20th, With respect to the persons by whom proper names have
been imposed, they are various, as likewise have been the occasions on
which they have been given. In some instances, God himself gave
the name: in others, the Father, Mother, or some one or other of the
kindred.
Of the first, examples may be found in Gen. xvi. 11, xvii. 19,
1 Kings xiii. 2, 1 Chron. xxii. 9, Mait. i. 21, Luke 1.13, &c. Of
the second and third,* examples occur very frequently; and of the last,
Luke i. 59, may suffice.}
21st, The material causes, or circumstances, connected with the
imposition of proper names amount, according to Simonis, to fifteen.
These, however, may all be reduced to the original number assumed
by Glassius, which is two.§ “1. xar’ ow, vel ratione etymz et signifi-
cationis, ejusque fundamenti. 2. xar’ Zw, vel ratione extensionis ad
alia, et communionis.”
22d. In the first place, proper names both of men and places, were
first given with reference to some event, either past, present, or
future, with regard to such person or place.
23d, Of the first sort, are the following: Gen. xvii. 17, 19, POS.
Isaac, so called on account of Abraham’s smiling|| upon receiving
the promise of his birth; Exod. 11. 10, Moses (7W9 ) is so called
on account of his having been taken out of the water, as the text
shews, whether the word itself be Egyptian or Hebrew: for, on this
subject learned men differ.
* Simonis, p. 13. s
+ Gen. xxix. xxx., 1 Sam. i. 20, 1 Chron. iv. 9.
{ Onom. pp. 14, 15, &c.
§ Append. Gram. Tract. ili. p. 709, Ed. Dathe.
|| <¢ Risus Abrahe exsultatio est gratulantis, non irrisio diftidentis.”
Eucherius apud Glass. Append. Gram. Tract. ili. p. 711.
154 LECTURE VIII. [ART. 178. 24.
1 Sam. iv. 21, I-havéd (W228) where is the glory? on account
of the ark of the covenant having been taken.
24th, Secondly, Of names taken from present circumstances, the
following are examples: Gen. iv. 2, van vanity, on account, as it
has been thought, of the vanity and instability of all human things,
which had been occasioned by the fall; Gen. iv. 25, Seth (Ww)
because God had placed him in the situation of Abel, who had been
murdered by Cain; Gen. xxv. 25, Esau Cwy ), whether we deduce
it from | sc WY, as Dathe will have it, which signifies to cover, &c.,
or from lic WY to have long hair, after Simonis; Ib. ver. 26, Jacob,
APY? from 2PY. the heel, because he took hold of his brother’s heel
at the time of his birth. Another instance is, that which is said to
have taken place at the time of the birth of Gad, Gen. xxx. 11, to
which many others might be added.
25th, The following names appear to have been given with
reference to something which was to take place afterwards: Gen.
iii, 20, Eve (111), because she was to be the mother of all men
who should live; Gen. v. 29, Noah (752), because he was to be the
means of consoling the true believers. In this case, as we shall see
hereafter, the verb used to explain this proper name, is not the same
with that included in the name itself, which signifies quiet, rest, &c.
The only thing intended by the sacred Writer seems to be on this, as
on many other occasions, to give the general sense, and not the mere
etymology, of the word.
26th, The following are examples of names of places given with
reference to certain events.
Gen. iv. 16, Néd (153) is the place in which Cain is said to have
resided, after he had been driven out from the presence of God, the
meaning of which is, wandering or wanderer.
Gen. xi. 9, Babel (223) was so called, on account of the con-
fusion of languages which took place there, from 223, a redu-
plicated form of hey to mix, confound, &c. which, by contraction, will
become Ua.
Gen. xxviii. 19, Bethel (872) was so called by Jacob, because
he deemed it worthy of being called the house of God, on account of
the vision he had seen there. Similar examples are to be found, Gen.
XxxH. 3; with respect to Makhandim, Ib. xxxi. 47; Galeed, John v. 2,
ART. 178. 26._| OF PROPER NAMES. 155
where Bethesda is intended to point out the favour of God, exerted at
that place, as in a house of mercy. In Exod. xv. and Num. xxxiii.
we have several examples of names thus given to the different stations
in the wilderness, at which the Israelites halted.
It should be abserved, that in writing Hebrew names in Greek
letters, the aspirates are frequently omitted: as, "Eceap, not Xecewy.;
Naagowy, not Naxycov; and so of others.
156 LECTURE IX. [ART. 179.
LECTURE IX.
ON THE SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE PARTICLES.
179. These are nothing more than either words,
or fragments of words, attached to others, for the pur-
pose of qualifying or otherwise restricting them; and
they are written either separately, or both together
forming one compound word, according to usage.
In this point of view, therefore, they may be classed
under one or other of the forms of nouns already de-
tailed; but, as they occur very frequently, and exert a
very great influence on the force and bearing of the
context, they deserve a separate consideration.
2d, By Particles are meant words, used occasionally
as Pronouns, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, or
Interjections. We say occasionally, because some of
them will fill one or more of these offices, as the con-
text shall require, just as these words often do among
ourselves. |
3d, That the Senarable Prepositions are words of
this kind, I think, there cannot remain a shadow of
doubt, when we consider, that in many instances they
really present all the peculiarities of nouns put in the
state of construction : as, PI-T3 for vanity, or, in suffi-
cientiam vanitatis,* Jer. li. 58; so DDT PA between
the waters, Gen. 1. 7; or, distinctio aquarum: “1
* Nold. sub voce "72 in notis, “ “J Est absoluti ‘t constructum.”
+ Ib. sub. v. J°2 ‘* Constituit substantivam nomen masculinum, cujus
pluralis masc. est DX), &c.... atque inde nominalem significationem,
quam vix unquam exuit....dtscrimen differentiam rerum, qua a se invicem
distinguuntur.”
ART. 179. 4. ] ON THE PARTICLES. 157
(for 1) being the absolute form in the one case, and
a in the other, which in construction regularly become
J and 2 respectively (Art. 151.6.). And, vice versd,
words preceding these particles* are often found taking
the forms proper for the state of construction: as ‘QIN
ja Ps. ii. 12; PYTNN Wiv Delight of Rexin,
Is. vill. 6, &c., which seems to intimate that they are
nouns.
4th, In the Arabic and Ethiopic dialects, also, in each of which we
have a peculiarity of termination, by which nouns in construction are
distinguished, these particles are clearly marked as being in that state :
Or Cad 47 7
as, in the Arabic, dm | tel before the mosque, (i. e. pars.
anterior templi,) where the last word is put in the genitive case, as
being in construction with the preceding. Soin the Ethiopic, (DPyt °
riGULe = fo, or towards, heaven: where the first has this mark :
and generally, all words of this kind, whether prepositions or adverbs,
are always found with the termination proper for construction, unless
they happen to be the last in a sentence.
With respect to the adverbs, as they can be known to be such, only
from the situations in which they are found, and may consist of almost
any form suitable to the sense required, enough will be said on their
character and use in the Syntax.
5th, If, then, these particles were originally nouns, it is likely we
should find them exhibiting the simple and augmented forms peculiar
to nouns ; and such is actually the case, as the following examples will
evince. Segolates: O79 not yet ; OSS near, at; T22 before, in pre-
sence of ; onion here, hither ; (72 only ; Os Ay O2,+ by no means. Pri-
* These particles are 2, 5, S Dor IA, Ons, IS, by, m2, Glass.
Phil. Sacr. p. 80, &c. Storr. Observ. p. 105.
+ This word is probably an abridged form of TON execration, thence,
deprecation, prohibition, or the like ; or, from one or other of the Cognate roots,
bos ; DN, ON, which will afford similar significations. See these roots in
Castell and Simonis.
{ 22 proprie defectus, sed in particulam abit .. notans non. Simonis
Lex. sub voce m2 attritus futt.
158 LECTURE IX. [ ART. 179. 6.
mitive nouns, not Segolate: as, 41} more; 2°22 round about ; TMA
(fem.) quickly, soon; 272 (root 227) much ; nia besides, to which
many others might be added.
The following are augmented by one or other of the letters termed
SAONT] (Art. 165.); ONMB suddenly, immediately; ©2357 gratis,
freely (Art. 175.) ; YIN perhaps, (which is probably a compound of
ON, Arab. ) 5)); “IETS (for TENS) after, afterwards.
6th, Many of these particles are found in the plural number, (a
sufficient proof, if any were wanting, that they are nouns); as, }°2, fem.
12.2 distinction, between, pl. DB, and MPB. So masc. 22D,
fem. DAD, pl. NDAD surroundings, enclosures, adv. or prep. round
about; “TS, pl. STIS, and, in construction, Wen “TENS after the
king, q. d. subsequutionibus regis.
7th, In many instances these words present themselves in a com-
pound state : as, wn? (comp. of zh for 1, and 73", of © and 12¥
answer,) on account of, because of, &c.; 2B (of VA and 0°33)
because of ; TV9R, TYPA, or sTy?En besides, except : and, further,
with another particle, ‘yaa whether besides? In this last case,
the simplest form Tya is perhaps a compound of three primitives,
viz. of TY usque ad, &c. 2, and 2, which are used as prepositions.
In some of the others, also, we have the preposition 9, and the inter-
rogative particle 1, with the word also put in the plural number and
in the form proper for construction.
8th, In some instances, several of these words will be found con-
strued together, and qualifying one another: in all of which, those
that are capable of receiving any variation, from being put in the state
of construction, will invariably take that form. Of this sort are the
following: PR TY, Fale TY until... not; Tar TY, and contracted,
TTY and FBT Eccles. iv. 2,3; TD TY, 1D TY hitherto ; TNO TY
to excess; “SN2 TY How long? Usquequo? MAY TY until now, ews
rot viv; TPYID? TY to the summit; “WS TW, OS TY, ON WH TY,
°2 TY until; O8 “APD unless; 82 ON if not; 128? not so; 12 V2
even so; VO 72° and Tan besides, except, &e.
9th, These particles are also found in construction with the pro-
nouns, sometimes in the singular, and at others in the plural, number :
as, J2°2 between thee; 123.2, and fem. WUNDD between us. So DoEs
near them ; a Peab) on account of thee; BIS, and V8°S, they are not.
The following, when in the plural number only, take the affixed pro-
ART. 179. 10. ] ON THE PARTICLES. 159
nouns singular or plural, viz. WIS after; TOS after thee ; is to;
Y above, upon; TW to; Wa besides ; and, according to Schroederus,
“IW the blessings of ! m3 before ; 22" on account of.
10th, The pronominal affixes attached to some of these particles
differ, in some respects, from those usually attached to nouns: e. g.
‘2 under or beneath me, for SWI; 53277 for ‘3tT behold me ;
WIT for JT behold him; OFMDY for BOY with them; OTS, mase.
and 7708 fem. them, or as it respects them, for BUS, or WN.
lith, The particle 18, generally placed before any noun which is
the object of some verb in the sentence, and used apparently for the
purpose of pointing out this particular, appears in three different forms
when in construction with the pronouns; which, Schroederus thinks,
has arisen from the circumstance of the root being originally of three
distinct forms: viz. "W288, ODS, or MVS to proceed, come, &c.*
In the first place, we have B28 you; EOS them, masc. TIS
them, fem., from the root TS. Secondly, IS mith me; WTS with
thee, masc., JS id, fem. : TAS with him; FS with her ; WS mith
us; DEAS with you; BES with them, from the root 8. Thirdly,
“IN, iad) thee, or with thee; Balls thee, or nith thee ; wns him,
or with him. So FINS, 2208, DIOIN, IIS, ODS, ITN, or
7s, In all which cases, coming to, as it respects, or the like, will
generally give the sense of the particle.
* D. Kimchi has remarked in the Michlol, (fol. O39 verso) -pNAW WS
ITT DIST TWASINW5) WATT AT AT TPT A YT Nd PIVRW AW JAINA
nT NIT paw 9D pT Dyer by SEAS Ade man paw ms
ss nom soz sd Soyer) Syston asa» Ninw 7272 JD*»d
So, should you say, QWYOW AW YDINNA Reuben slew Simeon, it would not
be known who was the slayer, or who the slain. But when you say Reuben
slew SS Simeon, (i.e. Simeonem,) the particle US points out the objective
case, and it is known that Simeon is the person slain. In like manner, in a
matter in which the agent and patient are evident, the particle TS is un-
necessary.
Similar to this is the doctrine taught by the Persian Grammarians, on the
use of the particle \y, (originally, perhaps, 31) way,) for where, according to
Mr. Lumsden, there would be a difficulty in ascertaining from the context,
which is the objective case to the verb, this particle is added; and, when it is
not so, the particle is always to be omitted. Pers. Gram. vol. ii. p. 202. My
edition of Sir Wm. Jones’s Pers. Gram. p. 130—1. See the Syntax of the
present work.
160 LECTURE IX. [ART. 179. 12.
12th, Some have supposed, that this particle is derived from a word
signifying substance: and, that when it is prefixed to any word, it is
intended to intimate the very substance, matter, or the like, of which
such thing consists. Hence they have interpreted Genesis 1. 1,
Vos OS) Dyawo OS NI “ He created the substance of the
heavens, and the substance of the earth ;” than which nothing can be
more fanciful, which the comparison of a very few passages under
this particle in Noldius will be sufficient to shew. (Page 125, Edit.
1734: see also Note a, and the Vindicie, Art. 572.),
13th, Some of these particles take (+) as the vowel of union before
the affixed pronouns 92 and 7: as, WY mith us; AS id.: 8
us, or nith us; ES nith thee, fem. FON; and TIS id. So War
behold thee, fem.; TTY hitherto thou, fem.; W2Y with thee, fem. ;
DY with you, masc.; OFVDY with them, masc.
14th, The preposition }2 owt, out of, apparently from the Arabic root
122 cut, doubles the 1 by Dagésh, whenever any one of the pronouns
is affixed: as, 122 or ‘22 from me ; W122 or WD (for W132) from
him ; BiJ3 from them. But more frequently, according to Schre-
derus, the root assumes a reduplicated form, and drops its final
letter: as, V2’ for 72 (Art. 82.), and, with the affixed pronouns,
‘B15 (for 3222") from me; WA from thee; 172 from him ; 2B"
from her; 33 from us: and, by a further abbreviation by syncope,
WI from thee, masc.; and 22 from thee, fem.
15th, The other prepositions take the affixed pronouns regularly,
and, for the most part, in the plural number: as, ON to, tonards, pl. ;
SDN to me; oy upon, against ; plural, 2D upon, or against thee ;
TY to, usque ad, plural; VIY to him; “Iya besides ; Wy 22
besides thee. With the grave affix: DDN to you; ony?y upon
them.
16th, The remaining prepositions are ; “1292 on account of ; TY2
by, through; ela! nithout, foras, extra; sp) before, in front of;
Yar towards, over against ; "22. on this side, beyond (properly, pas-
sage); a2 before, in front of ; Dan id. Those which appear in a
mutilated state will be mentioned hereafter.
On the Inseparable Particles.
179. Having stated the nature, and given some ex-
amples of construction, of the Separable particles, we
now come to those which have been termed Jnseparable.
ART. 180. 2. ON THE PARTICLES. 161
The reason of their being so called seems to be this ;
many of them are no longer found extant in their
original and complete forms, but consisting of one single
letter only, which is always prefixed to some other word.
These particles are all comprehended in the technical
terms 273) MWD Moses and Caleb.
2d, The first (2) is regularly prefixed to nouns with the imperfect
vowel (-) Khirik and, consequently, inserting Dagésh forte in the
following letter: as, 7272 from, or out of, the way. This word
when written at length is 7, probably from 729, signifying, ac-
cording to Storr, cutting off, &c.* This Dagésh, therefore, may be
considered as a compensation for the loss of the letter 9 (Art. 82.).
8d, Dagésh, however, is frequently omitted when the following
word has (:): as, TMAMD from greatness; IFA from his right
hand (for 12"2"2 Art. 93. 5.). Under this rule Schrcederus places
the word maiwea thence, from the beginning, 1 Chron. xv. 13.
But here, the 2 prefixed may be a part of 12 which, what, or the
like, which I am inclined to believe is the case.
4th, But, when a letter follows incapable of receiving Dagésh
(Art. 115.), a compensation is made, either explicitly, or implicitly :
i. e. either, Ist, by putting the vowel (~) instead of Khirik; or,
2dly, by considering the following letter as being doubled: as, Ist.
as, WN (for WIND) from the man; YWIA (for VW) from a
nicked mye or, 2dly; OW (for DAMN) apr the thread.
5th, The particle Ww. which is an abbreviation of TS who, hay
&c. will be considered with the demonstrative pronouns; where the
use of the particle will also be shewn.
On the Particle \ and, but, moreover, §c.
181. This panicle is probably a Jeane of the word
Ms, Syriac uo}, or Arabic aah which means, fo
augment, connect, &c.; in its augmented form M8
desiring wealth, connection, or the like: and, in the
noun 1) a hook, nail, or any thing by which one thing
* See last Art. No. 14.
M
162 LECTURE IX. CART. 18L. 2.
is connected with another. Hence, it is used as a con-
junction is in other languages; and is capable of all
the variety of meaning to which such words are subject.
2d, This particle is generally prefixed to any word
with (:): as, ION) NIP he called and said; AND.
TAY) a servant maid and man.
3d, The Shévd, however, in this case, is liable to certain changes:
when, for instance, the word to which 7 is thus attached commences
also with Shévd, this 1 takes the vowel Shurék: as, 9279 go ye, not
12) (by Art. 112.): Tp" * and to, or for, the king, not 12077 ‘
Ath, The same change takes place, whenever any one of the labial
letters (F272) immediately follows: as, T23° and the garment, not
22). There are, however, some exceptions: as, 7722 and void;
We) and they blushed, &c.
5th, When the letter » having (: ) follows, a contraction will take
place (Art. 93. 5.): as, 1M) (for FT) or VY) and he shall live ;
B23") (for B2%22)) and their right hand. In a few cases we have (+ )
in this place: as, 757) and let him be.
6th, Any word beginning with one of the substitutes of Shévd,
will prefix 7 with the correspondent imperfect vowel (Art. 113. 3.):
as, (28) and I; MVD). and truth, &c.
7th, In some instances of this kind, however, we find Shirék: as,
378) and gold, Gen. ii. 12; 7¥2) and cry thou (fem.), Jer. xxii. 20.
8th, When such word commences with 8 a contraction is often found
to take place: as, °2T8) and my Lord (for *2T81); so OVTINY and God
(for Dy >s)), Art. 93, 5.
9th, Monosyllables, and dissyllables having the accent on the penul-
tima, generally prefix this particle with (+): as, O10) and a horse ;
"8] and a ram. To this, however, there are many exceptions: as,
“WW and an ox; 220) and a chariot.
10th, This particle has been supposed to have the power of changing
the tenses of the verb, making a preterite tense future, and a future pre-
terite; and hence has been termed Vaw Conversivum. From what will
be said on the doctrine of the tenses of the verbs in the Syntax, it will
* Kimchi is of opinion, that in these cases, the letter N is to be considered
as dropped, and that we should read ‘WN universally.
ART. 181. 11. ] ON THE PARTICLES. 168
appear, that this conversive power supposed to exist in this particle is
neither necessary nor true. When it takes the vowel Pathdkh it ought
perhaps to be considered as lative, corresponding to the Arabic \3,
which is regularly so: when it takes (:), as merely conjunctive (p. 53,
note. ).
11th, In some instances, the Dagésh of the following letter, no less
than the Euphonic accent, one or other of which is necessary to com-
plete the syllable, is dropped, probably by the negligence of the scribes :
as, WI) and he consecrated, Gen. ii. 3. for WA), or more regu-
larly W722.
12th, In the first person singular of the present tense this particle
takes (_): as, VOW and I hear.
182. The remaining particles 2, 3, and iS signifying,
wn, according to, to, for, or the like, respectively,
may be easily traced to their origin as nouns. ‘The first
is probably a fragment of the word Nj2 entering into,
&e., which is found in Arabic under the forms of US 9
zs
=
he descended to his house, lodging, &c.; sy or 4 and
in Ethiopic (YMA! meaning nearly the same thing.
2d, With respect to the second (2) signifying Like, as,
just as, &c., it is probably a fragment of some primitive
noun, from which we also have the words M3 thus; ‘2
for, so; \ID and j2 thus.
3d, These particles are regularly prefixed with (:);
as, JIA in the way; YD lke a tree; v8? to the
earth.
If the word, to which either of them is to be prefixed,
have (:), the particle will regularly take (-) Khérik
(Art. 112.): as, moja an the volume ; 3 like a
vessel ; 29 to his son.
Ath, But, when any one of the substitutes of Shév@ happens
to be the first vowel of such word, the prefix will take the corres-
hae Bipatos vowel (Art. 113. 3.): as, aE: in a dream;
5th, When 8 pnd to be the first letter, a contraction generally
M 2
164 LECTURE IX. ae 182. 5.
to God (Art. 93. 5.).
6th, But, when prefixed to monosyllables, or to dissyllables having
the accent in the penultimate, they generally take (+) as above
(Art. 180. 9.); e. g. TID in this; TPND like these ; mE22 for ever.
So with verbal nouns or Infinitives, when not in construction with other
nouns: as, DAP? for standing ; n22 for walking.
7th, The following affixed pronouns are often found attached to
these particles: viz. "2 in me; 22 inus; 2 in thee, masc.; F2 id.
fem. ; 522 in you, masc.; 122 id. fem. ; 12 in him, mase.; 2 in
her ; oS (or Art. 81.); ba in them, masc.; }¥J2 id. fem.
8th, The particle 5 receives the pronouns in the same manner ; but,
2 is so found in only two instances; viz. 222 like you, and Of12 like
them. When it is necessary to use the pronouns with 2, the paragogic
ae 32 is generally introduced thus: at like me; "222 like
; TWD Like thee ; nis hike you; Wi 2 like him; MD like her ;
Brine like them.
9th, When either of the particles 2, 5, or , is prefixed to a noun
with the definite article, the article is for the most part rejected
(Art. 79.) and the particle takes its vowel: as, 422 in the house
(for VBMD); WR like the man (for WINTTD) ; wah? for the month
(for wn); 7 MAINS in the dry (land, for TAWA Art. 93. 6.).
Exceptions: "2712 in the way, Neh. ix. 19; pyr io the people,
2 Chron. x. 7; MIZPOMD like the windows, Ezek. xl. 25; DOM? like
the mise man, Eccles. vii. 1.
10th, This contraction, moreover, frequently takes place in those
Infinitives which commence with a servile 77: as, Dpan (for DwiarD)
in being impelled, Prov. xxiv. 17 ; yaw (for yaw?) for causing
to hear, Ps. xxvi. 7; Na? (for N27) for bringing, Jer. xxxix. 7,
&c., though not regularly so.
On those Inseparable Particles which are termed Paragogic.
183. To the preceding class of inseparable particles
may be added another, which, however, are always found
attached to the end, not to the beginning, of a word;
and for the purpose, most probably, of adding something
ART. 183. 2. | ON THE PARTICLES. 165
to the sense of the passage in which they are found.
These were at first, perhaps, nouns in construction just
as the prepositions were ; but which, in after times, were
abbreviated for the sake of convenience.
2d, These letters or syllables, then, (for they are now
nothing more) have been termed paragogic, rather, I
suppose, for the purpose of giving them a name, than for
pointing out either their nature or their use, are, accord-
ing to Schreederus, PTS, and are found appended to
words, either for the purpose of giving emphasis to the
meaning, of promoting euphony, or by way of pleonasm.
On & when Paragogic.
3d, This letter is mostly pleonastic, and is found
attached to words having (+) or} for their terminating
vowel: as, NMMPMAN ets galleries (for PMS), Ezek.
ills ; y79700 they who went (for 12975), Josh. x. 24;
NIAN they were wiliing, Isai. xxviil. 12; NW) they
shall be carried, Jer. x. 5. So NW for 7 (for WN,
Art. 93. 2.) he shall be, Eccl. xi. 3; also S11, instead
of 17 he, Arab. 3 815 for 15 Arab. a would to God,
utinam, &c., and so of others.*
On the Paragogic 1.
_184. The use of 1 as a paragogic letter is very fre-
quent. In some cases it is thought to augment the
signification, in others to be merely pleonastic; but, as
* This prevails in the Arabic, whence Schultens comes to the conclusion,
that it is an ancient manner of writing: others, that it isa mere Arabism.
166 LECTURE IX. [ ART. 184. 2.
writers differ very much in their opinions, we shall
determine nothing on this subject.
2d, On some occasions, it is found appended to
words ending in a consonant, with (+): on others,
it is preceded by (~-) or (+): and in these it becomes
quiescent: as, M IBDN (from BOX) L will recount,
Ps. 0. 7; MY IN (from YS) the earth ; 37 (from
1) behold ; 728 (from 98) these.
3d, It is found attached to verbs. Ist, to the Infini-
tive or Verbal noun; 2d, to both the tenses; 3d, to the
second person singular masculine of the Imperative ;
and, 4th, to the participles: e.g. Ist. MMWS (for 02d)
spoiling ; NA (for 139) shaking, Isa. xxx. 11; Nw
(for IN’) asking, Isa. vil. 11, &c. 2d. M3 (for M3)
he has rested, Isa. vii. 2; 3132 (for 12) he lodged,
Zech. v. 4; MINDIWM (for |NDIWM) ye cast; MDW
(for 2) let us burn, Gen. xi. 8; AWD (for WT)
he will reduce to ashes, Ps. xx. 4, &c.
4th, Verbs ending in J, usually drop that letter upon receiving
the paragogic 7: as, PWR (for TAYWR Art. 81.) L will look on,
observe, Ps. cxix. 117. So MPNW2 (for TMIVANWI) we nill observe,
Isa. xli. 23. This last example Schroederus puts under the form of
apocope, which appears to me to be a distinction without a difference.
This letter is also frequently added when the feminine pronoun is
struck out: as, mayoay ( for T2729) he shall swallow her up.
5th, With Imperatives: as, 722 repose thou (for 22W), Gen.
xxxix. 7; TIBOR (for FID) collect, Num. xi. 16: TVA (for Ow) keep,
Ps. xxv. 20; ADwPT (for 2 WI) attend, Ps. v. 3; m2 (for 72);
and with #7 omitted 1? go, Num. xxiii. 138. So “RDN (for
MIA2N, from W228) J will be honoured, Hag. i. 8.
6th, With Participles: as, 792 (from 792) burning, Hos.
vil. 4; m9 49193 (from 10193) escaped, Jer. xlviii. 19.
7th, Nouns singular of both genders, as also nouns masculine of
the dual and plural numbers, will receive a paragogic ‘7, still pre-
serving the accent on the originally accentuated syllable: as, TD
(from 22) the night; muy (from NY) iniquity; TMP IS
Le
ART. 184, 8. ] THE PARAGOGIC LETTERS. 167
(from OYI3) Egypt; TWP) (from O'R?) days. Any noun, how-
ever, ending in an imperfect vowel on account of construction (Art.
151. 8.), will, when the paragogic ‘7 is added, take the accent on the
last syllable: as, 742 (from ME, in construction MI) the
rising of the sun, Deut. iv. 41, &c.
8th, Neither the paragogic J, nor its vowel, will undergo any
change on account of the state of construction: as, Ib, WAW FMI,
the tent of Sarah, Gen. xxiv. 67.
9th, This particle is also added to certain pronouns, whether
separate or affixed: as, Ist, TIS you, fem.; MAM they, masc.;
ZT they, fem. ; TDN these, com. 2d, m2 to you; MI2INBT your
(fem.) wickedness, &c.
10th, Schroederus thinks, that we have in 7JS8OS2NS Hos. iv. 6,
I will despise thee, an instance in which 57 paragogic has been changed
to 8 on account of its standing in the middle of a word. Whether
this be the case or not, it is certain that there is a various reading m
this place, which makes the passage of too doubtful a character to
allow of a rule being formed upon it.
11th, It will not be necessary to trouble the Reader with instances,
in which this particle is found attached to other particles: as, mw
for OW there, &c.: because, as these are manifestly nothing more
than nouns, it is reasonable enough to expect, that they may receive
i7 paragogic as well as other nouns.
12th, Schroederus, Schultens, and some others have thought, that
this particle has, at one time, the force of a demonstrative pronoun;
at another, that of confirmation or asseveration: at another, an
optative signification; that it is, at another, intensitive; and
equivalent, at another, to the Latin versus; and at another, to the
preposition 2 in (Sect. ix. Instit. Gram. Reg. 165, &c.). Whether
this be really the case or not, it is extremely difficult to say: cer-
tainly, it is not very evident from the passages adduced by them.
And, although we are disposed to believe, that in some instances
it is equivalent to the Chaldee or Syriac article 8 similarly situ-
ated; yet, it may be doubted, whether a case can be fairly made
out, in which the variety of shades of meaning just mentioned can be
established.
13th, The following are undoubted instances of pleonasm: i. e. in
which this letter adds nothing whatever to the sense: viz. 7S for
DS thou; TAO2 for HOI thou gavest; MPT. for WP thy hand;
168 LECTURE IX. [ ART. 185.
to which many more might be added. So in my for yoy they
ascended, 2 Kings xxiv. 10; 77) for WT) and they shall be, Josh.
xv. 4, &c. where the Shurék has been supplied by ( . ).
On the Paragogic Letter }.
185. The paragogic letter 1 is sometimes found with
Khélém; at others, without any vowel ; and, occasionally,
coming between two nouns in the state of construction.
It is thought by some to be nothing more than a ple-
onasm of the affixed pronoun (1): as, WA i232 his son
(viz.) of Beor, instead of WA ja Numb. xxiv. 3, 15;
yw m7 its living creature (viz.) the earth’s, instead
of YIN mM Gen. 1. 24; pain? into its fountain
(viz.) of water, for yw? Ps. exiv. 8. So IM) and
JIM his (being) alone, Gen. xiii. 6; Ps. iv.9, &c. See
also Ps. 1. 10, civ. 11, 20, Ixxix. 2; Isa. lvi. 9.
2d, Professor Gesenius objects to this etymology, because the vowel
points differ in some respects from those usually found with the
affixed pronoun, and because the affix is also found to disagree with
the noun to which it refers.® Ido not think, however, that much
stress can be laid on the consideration of the vowel points, because
anomalies of this kind frequently occur. Nor is the disagreement of
gender discoverable between the noun and the affix of much moment,
it being a rule with the Hebrews, to pay but little regard either to the
gender or number of the qualifying word, when added to complete a
sentence, as we shall see hereafter. In the Syriac and Ethiopic,
pleonasms of this kind are extremely frequent; but in general, a pre-
OP aaa ~ Tray
position is then added to the last word : as, lad; ALSnaso the
gift of him, of God. The preposition in Ethiopic is % in these cases.
See Ludolf. Gram. Eth. p. 138.
3d, There are some instances of verbs, in which Tseems to be a
paragogic letter: as, 19°) and he smote, 2 Sam. xiv. 6, root 712,
where ? is probably the true radical letter, for which 7 has been sub-
* Lehrgebaude, p. 549.
ART. 186. ] THE PARAGOGIC LETTERS. 169
stituted : and, as Kholém is most frequently the second vowel proper for
the present tense, nothing can be more likely, than that ) is here made to
quiesce in it. We also have 12W) in 1 Sam. xxi. 14; probably for
Pl he changed. We also have *, in like manner, not as a
paragogic letter, but, as the true radical letter, in 4154) blot out, Jer.
xviii. 23; "21 she committed fornication, Ib. iii. 6.
On the Paragogic Letter .
186. This letter, when-Paragogic, is like the pre-
ceding asyllabic, and is mostly found between two
nouns in the state of construction. Its vowel differs
in no respect from that of the pronoun of the first person
singular; whence Schultens and some of his followers
have supposed it to be nothing more than a pleonasm
of that pronoun. ‘To this, however, Storr and Gesenius
object, and apparently with good reason.* ‘The Persian
etymology, however, proposed by Gesenius, is, perhaps,
equally objectionable, as exemplified in the phrase, cs ‘
kine the scent of musk. Whether it be the same with
PUG wale Or8
the dui) esl, or oil of the Arabs, which is the
same eas the patronymic » of the Hebrews (Art. 174.) ;
or, whether it be that of the plural number, derived
from the verbal noun (pp: 71. 2. note), and thence
applied for the purpose of giving Emphasis, Intensity,
or the like, to any passage, it is impossible to say; but,
certain it is, that the significations thus derived will
suit its application sufficiently well, where any variation
of sense is discoverable in consequence of its insertion.+
* Storr. Observationes, pp. 441. 442. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 547.
+ In some cases, however, the » so affixed, seems to be nothing more than a
fragment of the feminine pronoun of the second person singular VN, as
170 LECTURE IX. [ART. 186. 2.
2d, This particle is found appended both to nouns and
particles: to nouns, as, JAN Ya.... ON binding the
fole of his ass, Gen. xlix. 11; O32 N21 great (fem.)
among the nations, Lam. 1. 13 *J3J0 1p the voice
of my supplication, Ps. cxvi. 1; OV 223 stolen (fem.)
by day, Gen. xxxi. 39; see also Deut. xxxi. 16, Ps.
cx. Acp exu..5, 647, 9:.vc. To vparticles,: as, Oa)
Srom the belly (for \2), Isa. xlvi. 3; DVT 72 except
to-day (for n7a ), Gen. xxi. 263; so m2 besides (for
nb), Deut. iv. 12, &c.
8d, Schroederus and Schultens have also applied this paragogic letter
to verbs; but, as it is never found, except in those which have ‘1 for
the last radical letter; and, as ° is, in these cases, generally substituted
for 1, there can be no doubt, that this is its office in all such instances,
as Storr has justly remarked.
On the Letter | when Paragogtc.
187. This is mostly found with verbs: it is also
found affixed to particles, preceded by (+ ) or (-); or,
when ‘— or } precede, it is affixed without any vowel: as,
j (for {FIF), on account of the accent, from N34) giving ;
MDW (for ADU) he shall turn her back, Jer. ii. 24;
WIN et shall hang over (thee), Hab. ii. 17;* 377235
he will honour me, Ps. |. 23, where we have (.) for
(-), on account of the accent perhaps: so, P?TN
(for nT) thou (fem.) shalé bring forth, Is. xlv. 10;
‘mans (Hos. x. 11.) thou hast loved, for “JUS TITS » as it constantly occurs
in the Syriac Participles, see the Grammars. So mays for FS mh thou
bringest forth, Gen. xvi. 11, See also Jer. xxii. 23; li. 13; Mic. vii. 8 &e.
* Institutiones, &c. Schultensii. p. 428. In every instance this } is probably
nothing more than that, by which the intensitive form in nouns is sometimes
designated. See Art, 176. 4.
ART. 187. 2."] THE PARAGOGIC LETTERS. 171
PPAW thou shalt adhere, Ruth i. 8. So, PSV ye
shall fear; JIS) ye shalt see ; yo) they shall walk,
&c.
2d, Occasionally with (-.) when put for 1: as, JADU
they shall lie down, 1 Sam. ii. 223 PIV they shall be
watered, Ps. xxxvi. 9; i which cases the accent is al-
ways with the last syllable.
3d, Verbs having 7 (without Mappik) for the third radical letter,
drop it by contraction (Att. 79.) when } paragogic is added: as, 1228
I nill smite him, 1 Sam. xxvi. 8 (for 7TDS) ; TIN TJ vill cufeae to
him (for 3257S), Ps, xlii. 6; WSIS (for JITTISIN ) I shall see him,
Numb. xxiv. 17, &c. But in these cases, there is also an affixed
pronoun, the rules for the addition of which we now proceed to
detail.
4th, When a ale tis followed by either of the affixed syllabic
ike 3, 7, WT, or TT, (Art. 153. 7.), no vowel of union is required :
, 2122) a will heat me ; FAIR I mill root thee out, (of IPAS,
foe pay, for PRIS, root nna); WII he shall bless itis (of
1292), from 23°, root T=). But, if the pronoun is asyllabic, there
must be a vowel of union: as, F2UIIWw they shall serve thee, Isa.
i
5th, The affixed pronouns "3, and 3, following the Bee 1, are
frequently expressed by inserting Dagésh forte in the 7: as, °227 he
judged me, (for 2327, from J27, root 117). So, B72. he ie me,
irr
Ps. exviii. 18 ; ‘273M it shall bless me, Gen. xxvil. 19: 1272) he
shall save us, (for 12998", from T2UZ2, from 72%, root V2); and, with
the particle 18 is not ; ay S my not being, (for 2228, from 72°8),
&c.
6th, The paragogic 7 is frequently inserted in the affix J, in the
same manner: as, "Ia22 he has blessed thee (for T2272 Art. 82.);
“T1022 chastising thee, Deut. viii. 5; BP) ansmering thee, (for
7IINY, and rejecting 7 by Art. 79. W2Y, rejecting 2 Art. 82.
J21Y, root 73Y). So, in the particles, 73277 behold thou, Ps. cxxxix. 8;
TID°8 where (art) thou? (ending also with paragogic 7 Art. 183.)
Gen. il. 9.
7th, The affixes 7 and 17 are often omitted, and a compensation
is made by doubling the paragogic 1 by Dagésh forte: as, "212M
thou shalt visit him, (for WIIP2N, See Art. 79.), Ps. vii. 5. So,
172 LECTURE IX. [ART. 187. 8.
122) he shall smite him, 1 Sam. xvii. 25 ; 720))2 take him, 1 Sam. xx. 21;
WN he is not, Gen. xxx. 33; MTD he yet..... Gen. xvi. 22;
and, with the feminine affixed pronoun my 22) he shall swallow her up
(for mp2 ), Isa. xxviii. 4; so TTI take it, Jer. xxxvi. 14;
MIM give tt, 1 Sam. xxi. 10; FIRS it is not, Lev. xii, 21. In
these cases, Schroederus is of opinion, that the 17 of the feminine pro-
noun has been struck out, and that the paragogic 77 has been added.
Storr, however, is of a different opinion; his words are: “ Similiter
He paragogicum, in voce TVW, Ps. cxix. 117, et similibus dubita-
tionem habet, quoniam preter Fticarh MYWS, ad quam He ad-
junctum videri possit, etiam alia datur, in yee: desinens,” &c.
p- 440, note.
8th, When the affix } (which has always the accent) follows the
paragogic 7, there is no vowel of union: as, 423 curse him, Numb.
xxiii, 13, (for 323}2, root 22/7), In like manner, we have 12W> his
being, (for Tw, root w>, 1 Sam. xiv. 39, &c.
9th, The force of this letter, when used with verbs, is thought to
be that of Asseveration, Confirmation, or the like; though there are
many instances, in which no such powers can be discovered. In the
Arabic, the introduction of this letter, in verbs, universally gives
energy, certainty, or the like, to the passages in which it is found 5
“wal 35 #C
and hence it is called by the Grammarians us Sst ws! the Nun
of confirmation. We have seen (Art. 176.) that this particle is also
added to nouns for a similar reason; whence we may perhaps infer,
that it is the same particle in every case.
10th, This 7 has by some been termed Epenthetic; but, as it
appears to have been originally the same, in every case, it seems to be
unnecessary to give it more names than one.
188. The syllables which have been termed Paragogic are, "7, 19,
and *2, when preceded by the particles 2, 2, 3} and : as, \I2 m;
"12 like: 22 according to; yr) to; VAD in; VAP like; $0 to,
&c. These are mostly confined to highly energetic compositions ;
whence we may infer, that they were intended to add something to the
signification.
2d, The first of these is thought to be the same with the word 7,
or “I, signifying sufficiency, &c. The second, Schultens and some
others, have derived from V2, or i0 water ; while Jahn thinks it is
ART. 188. 3._] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 173
the same with M2, or V2 what, which, &c. Inthe Arabic be , NID,
is frequently found attached to the same particles: as, lw, KS, US 4
i. e. in that which, according to that which, to, or for, that which, &c.
(4 a /
So in the Syriac, {Sea hémo ; {Ses bémé, &c. having the same sig-
nification.* | |
3d, The particle *) is nothing more than another form of 2 the
mouth, found in construction with other nouns. Its meaning, by a
metonymy, will be, any thing said, enforced, or commanded: as, a
precept, edict, &c. which will not always bear to be expressed in a
translation.
On the Demonstrative Pronouns.
189. The Demonstrative Pronouns are always found
written separately, and they are as follows :—
Mt masc., MN} fem.; rarely i} or MH; ere or i this,
sing. com. : mx, rarely ON these, pl. com.
2d, The forms m9 , mon, masc. this, have the
additional particle b to, or for, with the definite
article 7 the. The same may be said of 1927 this, fem.
which occurs but once, viz. Ezek. xxxvi. 35, as also of
ea , of the common gender, as above.
3d, INT these, is also found; it is nothing more than
the plural pronoun, as above, with the article pre-
fixed.
4th, 113, however, is also found construed as a plural, Gen.
EXVile COs Ls Vale XIN, d OD) XIX. 19,2 and Zech. i212, Vile na.
TPs is also found as a singular, 1 Chron. xi, 11, 2 Chron. iii. 3,
xvil. 14, and Ezrai. 9.
* Tt is very possible, however, that the © in these instances, the 2 in many
of those just preceding, as well as the same letters terminating the plural
numbers of nouns, may have been added for the mere purposes of euphony.
See p. 70. note.
174. LECTURE IX. [ART. 190.
On the Relatéve Pronoun.
190. The Hebrew language recognises but one Rela-
tive Pronoun: viz. WS he who, that which, what,
which is common to every gender and number,
2d, The gender and number, however, will be pointed out by that
of the preceding or following noun or pronoun: as, BYWAY AWS
who stand, i. e. they (masc.) who stand, 1 Kings xii. 8; INE? Ws
who his harvest, i. e. whose harvest, Job v. 5; M7 AWN Ws
which (mase.) the mind disperses it, i. e. which (masc.) the wind dis-
perses, Ps.i. 4; BETS2 .... WR in whose land, Joel iv. 19.
2d. In some instances, indeed, the demonstrative pronouns ‘13, 5¥,
and 1 take the place of WN: as Ps. iv. 8, ix. 16, and exxxii. 12,
&c. A similar substitution takes place in Arabic, which the Gram-
marians ascribe to a difference of dialect.*
4th, This pronoun is frequently found prefixed to
other words in an abbreviated form: as, ¥, W, &, or W,
the first and last letters being rejected. Examples :
133) Now, for 1337 5 WR who has not given us
(up), Ps. exxiv. 6; PY for 4p WS which we
waited (for), Lam. ii. 16; “KDpw for Mp Ws tll I
arose, Jud. v. 7; TARY for OAS IW which thou,
* In the Arabic commentary on the Kdfia of Ibn Olhdjib, published at
Calcutta, (p. "19 ) we have the following remark: co! - Kull} 495
g
sil us) + erty gdp bm 9d Copy - Ee gold! JU ast,
Lag hs Lede, &e. That is, MF of the tribe of Tay: i.e. which is referred
to that tribe, on account of its peculiar usage in their dialect, as the relative pro-
noun, signifying who, which, §c. in both genders (i. e.masc. and fem.) The
Poet has said, « My well which (A¥) I digged, and which (43) I enclosed.
Dathe thinks, that there is an ellipsis of "Ws in these instances. See
Glass. Philol. Sacr. ed. 1776. p. 160.
ART. 191. ] THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 175
Ib. vi. 17; ONW for DF WS that they, Eccl. iii. 18,
&c. It is perhaps difficult to say, in what cases the
vowel (-) is to be preferred to (-); but it is not of much
importance. Kaméts is used only when a letter inca-
pable of receiving Dagésh, follows: as, MANY which
thou, Judg. vi. 17. But, even in this case, (~) is often
found sustained by an accent: as, yw they who went
up. Nor can the usage of (:) in these places be easily
accounted for.
On the Interrogative Pronouns.
191. These are for persons: M2, M2, or Mf,
who, which, what? 3, 3, 3, what, whether? and ‘8
where, how ? &c. for things: all of which are invariable,
and of the common gender: as, AMX") who (art)
thou (masc.)? Gen. xxvii. 32; MANY who (art) thou
(fem.)? Ruth iii, 9; MPR who (are) these?
Gen. xxxili. 5. We also have "OW YD what (is) thy
name ? which Schultens says, refers to the person never-
theless : as, Quis nomen tuum? (Institutiones ad Fund.
Ling. Heb. p. 228.).. Examples with are: 119P M9
NRO 7D) What (is) our inquity, and what our sin?
Jer. xvi. 10; WNT OBYD MQ what (is) the manner of
the man? 2 Kings 1. 7; Dip M2 what noise, 1 Sam.
iv. 6, 14.
2d, MD, with Kaméts, is used when the article (17),
or any other letter incapable of receiving Dagésh,
immediately follows, excepting M or Y: as, INO 7D
what confidence ? 2 Kings xviii. 19; WIND what (is)
man? Ps, viii. 5; MII MD what (are) they (tem.) ?
Isa. xh. 22; ms i) what he (was) to her, Esth.
vil. 1.
3d, Exceptions: 1. We have 1 with Pathakh, notwithstanding
the article following: 2982 what prevarication? Josh. xxii, 16.
176 LECTURE IX. [ ART. 191. 4.
Also in NYT" what it is, Ps. xxxix. 5; VOS8M M2 what (is) my
sin ? Gen. xxxi. 36.
4th, Whenever any letter capable of receiving Dagésh follows,
M2 is with Paihakh, and Ddgésh is expressed in the following letter :
as, DYPITVA Bw MN. how good, and how pleasant? In ‘wT
what two (fem.)? Zech. iv. 12, the Dagésh is omitted.
5th, When any guttural letter, having (+), or TT or Y not having
it, immediately follows, we have VD with Ségél, apparently for the
sake of euphony: as, % TT what has happened to him? Exod.
xxxii. 1; PINIM2 what defect? Ps. xxxix. 5; YYWY M2 what
have I done? &c.
On the Interrogative and Inseparable Particle i.
192. The Interrogative particle (7, or 7, has by
some been classed with the definite article; but, if we
consider either its construction, or office, we must be
convinced that they are totally different words.
_ 2d, The office of this particle is interrogation, like
the Latin an, annon, num, utrum? or the like; and, in
this capacity, to affirm or deny; and thus to increase or
diminish the importance of subjects with which it is
connected.
3d, It is always prefixed to some word, and is often
followed, in the succeeding member of a sentence, by
the particle OX, having nearly the same signification
with utrwm and an, in Latin, when corresponding to each
other in different members of a sentence; or, as an and
vel, in the following passage, S5-px WY 2 TT OASs
“ AN tu es, filt mi Esave, VEIL” non, Gen. xxvii. 21.*
* These particles correspond, both in sense and construction, with the Arabic
s cs vs-u-c$ 3
) and i as in the following passage from the Koran, c. 1. v. 5. mem
OF LP L- OF
.
edo « el WHETHER thou admonish them, on whether thou do not admonish
them.
ART. 192. 4.1] ON THE. PARTICLES. 177
4th, In many instances it loses its interrogative power,
as it often happens with similar particles in other lan-
guages, and then may be construed as a relative, or
otherwise; as, 18 NDT who came with him,* Josh.
x. 24; DAWN whether you are, Deut. xiii. 4; ANION
whether it blossoms, Cant. vi. 11, &c.
5th, When prefixed to any word commencing with Sheva (:) or (-)
it takes the vowel (-) with the Euphonic accent; and, therefore, does
not require, that the following letter should take Dagésh forte: as,
DAMDWT have ye forgotten? Jer. xliv. 9; M2IBM num benedictio?
Gen. xxvii. 38; Wy whether on thy account? Job xviii. 4, &c.
With gutturals; SVN whether truth 2 OXI whether time ?
6th, In these cases, however, the Dagésh is often found written :
as, ‘DIT whether my ways? Ezek. xviii. 29; ADDS have ye seen?
1 Sam. x. 24; FI2YS21 whether according to her cry? Gen.
xvii. 21. And once, when Sheva is not attached to the first letter of
such word: as, 2°97 will it be well, Lev. x. 19.
7th, When any word, to which this particle is prefixed, commence’
with a consonant and a vowel (excepting gutturals with +), the interro-
gative will take (-:): as, YYFTVAM whether of the tree? Gen. iii. 11;
IN2T7 shall the flock...? Num. xi. 22; PANT shall it happen to thee ?
8th, Guttural letters having (+) require the Interrogative particle
to be prefixed with (=): as, 29ST) whether I? Num. xi. 12; TO
has it come to pass? Joeli. 2; PITT whether strong? We also have,
MoINT shall I cease? Judg. ix. 9, &c., which is perhaps erroneous,
for Salpaiatn . We also have, DEIST whether you? Judg. vi. 31; and,
UVES whether an Ephrathite? Vb. xii. 5, which are anomalous.
9th, Noldius is of opinion, that this particle is a mere interjection
forced out by the breath with some effort, in order to give the passage
the force of an interrogation, or otherwise to heighten the expression,
which is extremely probable. The passages too, which require to be
construed interrogatively, but in which this particle is not found, must be
* In which case it differs but very little from the definite article when
Sr7rur DIESE Ge
equivalent to “WR. So, deol) in Arabic, for Xx~ usw Gram, Arab,
vol. i. p. 338.
N
178 LECTURE IX. TART. 192. 10,
so enounced, otherwise their interrogative signification will not be per-
ceived; e. g. In 2 Sam. xviii. 29, we have pio for DyowT,
which is found Ib. 32. and also in the similar passages, 2 Kings
ix. 18,19. In like manner perhaps NWS for NWN shall I lift up,
Ps. cxxi. 1; and YWY for Vw Ezek. xvi. 59, which, when
expressed with emphasis, would have the same effect as they would
had the particle been prefixed. Indeed, this is very much the case
in all languages. But, in those of the East, where no note of in-
terrogation is used, we are compelled to determine by the context,
whether a sentence is to be taken interrogatively or not; and, hence,
whether it is to be understood in a positive or negative sense. When
this particle is prefixed, however, the ambiguity is in a great measure
removed ; but, unfortunately, this is not always the case.
10th, The Interrogative particle "8, which is sometimes
written separately, and at others, is prefixed to pronouns,
is probably nothing more than an interjection, like the
preceding, so enounced as to imply an interrogation.
It is sometimes found of the forms NJ and NO, and in
conjunction with a pronoun: as, J and JX.* Ex-
amples: JIS SAM NS where is Abel thy brother ? Gen.
lv. 9; JI-TMION nxr) % how can I pardon thee for
this? Jer. v. 7. With pronouns ; MON where, Est. vi. 5,
1 Sam. ix. 18, Is. 1. ly 720 TIVI TIOS which way
went he? 1 Kings xiii. 12; ADS WW AIDS from what
city (art) thou? 2 Sam. xv. 2; AYR PR how knowest
thou? 2Sam.i.5; YT ADS how can we know? Deut.
xvill, 21, &c.
11th, It also occurs with a paragogic 11, N; as, DwINT TS
where (are) the men? Gen. xix. 5. )
12th, This particle is sometimes expressive of desire, admiration,
* In Persian, Sanscrit, and some other Oriental languages us) is an inter-
\
jection O, Oh, &c. In Arabic &
| has the same meaning as in Hebrew, viz.
Quisnum, quis, quod, &c.
ART. 192.]] ON THE PARTICLES. 179
lamenting, expostulating, insulting, or negation, as it is also the case
with most of the interrogative pronouns: as, TT TPS where is
Jehovah! Jer. ii. 8. (desire) IVA IPS TPS where is now my hope!
Job xvii. 15. Of admiration; TAR PR how hast thou perished!
Ezek. xxvi. 17, &c.
On the Definite Article 7.
193. The Hebrews have a fragment of a word which
they prefix to others for the purpose of restricting, or
otherwise modifying, their signification, as will presently
be seen.
2d, Some have supposed this particle, which is nothing more than
the letter ™ with some accompanying vowel, to be an abbreviation of
the pronoun S17 he, or, of one or other of the interjections 777, Ni, 87
behold. Others, again, have affirmed, that it is only another form of
the Arabic article VJ}, ON, which should be written On# In this
case, as in many others, each party is, perhaps, both right and
wrong. That both these articles have a common origin is extremely
probable; and, that their force is the same in both languages, there can
be no deubt. But, perhaps there is no good reason, why we are to
derive the Hebrew form of the article from the Arabic one, any more
than, that we should derive the Arabic one from the Hebrew. Pro-
fessor Gesenius thinks, that there are still manifest traces of the Arabic
article to be found in the Hebrew Bible, such, for instance, as, Dapp
9 7UF
Prov. xxx. 31, which he considers as equal to the Arabic ey! the
people ; TTInOS Gen. x. 26, and TADS Josh. xv. 30, which, 1 Chron.
iv. 29, is written Tin, With respect to the first of these, there
seems to be but little necessity for supposing the syllable OS to be the
Arabie article UY). The interpretation of Schultens, Hiller, and
others, who suppose (ON ) to be the prohibitive particle here, appears
to me to answer the intention of the Sacred Writer much better. With
respect to the proper names TTR , and TPIN?R, the particle OR
or ON is sufficiently applicable, without having recourse to the Arabic
* Storr. Observ., &c. p. 121.
N 2
180 LECTURE 1X. — CART. 193. 3+.
article. The circumstance of ON being omitted in one place, in the
parallel passage, is nothing more than what is found to happen in
other words and phrases, and particularly in proper names, (See Art.
178. 9, &c.).
3d, Another particular dwelt upon is, that in Hebrew, the letter
following the article is almost always doubled; and, that in Arabic,
the ? of the article is so assimilated to the following letter, in many
cases, that the first letter of the word may be said to be doubled:
9% Be
as, wow in Hebrew, and pert] pronounced Ww in Arabic, both
signifying the sun. It might be suggested: In Hebrew the imperfect
vowel (-), with which this article is usually attended, makes it
necessary, that the following letter be doubled, in order to complete
the syllable commencing with the article, (Art. 34.). In Arabic, the
of the article must either be pronounced or not. In many instances
it is pronounced: it is only in others, that the sound of » is merged
in that of the succeeding letter: to which no parallel is to be found in
Hebrew. Iam of opinion, therefore, that the Arabs have introduced
the ? of the article, and not, that the Hebrews have rejected it.*
4th, The article is regularly prefixed with Pathakh
(-), occasionally with Kaméts (+) or Ségél (+): as,
W120 the great ; DIN the man, or DW the cities.
5th, Whenever any letter capable of receiving Dagésh
follows the article, it will be doubled by that mark, and
the article will take Pathakh; Ww the sun.
6th, But, 2, veh , or 3, (with Shévd) are frequently found so
situated without Dagésh: as, TYNOT the salvation, Ps. iii. 9; “NT
the river, Exod. vii. 18, &c.
7th, Of words commencing with %, Dyn the Levites, Num. iii. 12.
—With 9, W222 the teacher, Ps. cxliv. 1; MMWIMN the pro-
* In the Commentary on the Kafia by Moolla Jami, published at Calcutta
in 1818, itis cited as the opinion of El Mobarrad, that S is the original form
of the article, and that the ‘w has been added, in order to distinguish it from
the interrogative N, }, p. !". The words are, U3] eel Card Orta],
pl ysind) Fad rdry Liar cFyild pW) dy; doy Hogi) Hal
ART. 193. 8. ] ON THE PARTICLES. 18]
claimers (fem.) of good news, Ps. Ixviii. 12.—Yet we have Daw the
msane, 2 Kings ix. 11; Aa¥BIT the delicate woman, Jer. vi. 2;
DDNIT the adulteress, Ezek. xvi. 32, and mown .the cooks,
Ib. xlvi. 24, &.—With 3: as, DYTIDZ the frogs, Exod. vii. 29.
Yet we have YDS the frog, Exod. viii. 2. In most of these in-
stances, it is probable, the negligence of the transcribers has been the
sole cause of the omissions. |
8th, If, however, either of the letters ™, TM, or Y, follows,
Dagésh is mostly expressed : as, BTN the setts ay
Oth, But, when any letter iehaelitte of receiving Ddgésh follows
the article, it will take the perfect vowel corresponding to (-) in
order to complete its syllable: as, wsiy the man; wiry the head ;
M20YT the virgin, &e.
10th, In many instances, however, when ‘7 or 17 follows, (- ) is still
retained: as, qwnn that which proceedeth, Gen. ii. 14; "307 the
living creature, Gen. viii. 1. In all which cases (-) will either be
sustained by an accent, or must be considered as placing an occult
Dagésh in the following letter (Art. 115.).
11th, In words, not monosyllables, commencing with 71, 7, or Y,
having Kaméts (+), the article usually takes (+): as, BMW the
nise man; OY the cities (Art. 93. 6.).
12th, When such words are monosyllables the former rule prevails :
, IGT the mountain; OYE the people, No. 9.
pa The letter 7, however, having (+) or (7: ) in monosyllables,
will mostly prefix the article with (-): as, i] 1 Kings iii. 22. 23.
(where it also occurs, YT); MIDI the wastes, Ezek. xxxvi. 35.
The word Y OS earth, always takes (+) with the article, and changes
its first (~) to (+) for the sake of euphony: as, YDS the earth.
14th, On the use of the article we shall speak par-
ticularly when we come to the Syntax. It will suffice
for the present to remark, that its offices appear to
be two: one, to mark the noun to which it is pre-
fixed, as beimg already known, either from the con-
text, or from general consent: as, INT the light, Gen.
1.4; or, DYQWI the heavens, Ib. i. 1; mlay)'bn * n rapdévos,
* The Jews and some of the German Divines have thought, that in this,
182 LECTURE IX. CART, 193, 15.
Is. vii. 14, &c.: the other, for the purpose of impressing
upon the mind of the Hearer or Reader, the peculiar
property, nature, character, &c. of the noun to which
it is prefixed: as, N87 an animal remarkable for its
properties as a dion, 1 Sam. xvii. 34. So Ib. AIT a
very bear. So, passim DTINA the real or true God.
In this sense it is occasionally used as a vocative
as, Oya, Being designated as Lord Possessor, or the
like, 1 Kings xviii. 26. So, in the N. Test. o Qes, Heb.
i. 8. Apoc. xv. 3, &c.
15th, This particle is also said to occur in the sense of the Latin
versus, when found prefixed or postfixed, or both, to words: as
MVIWI towards Ramah, 1 Sam. vii. 17; OF DET to, or towards,
T TIT pl ¢:
the Philistines, Ib. xiii. 20; YT to the city, Ib. xx. 40. 42; rabyni sia
JAN TTIW to the tent of Sarah his mother,* Gen. xxiv. 67. To which
many others might be added. In these instances, however, it is very
doubtful, whether the article does not retain its original signification,
the noun following being considered as complementary to some pre-
ceding verb: as, Josh. viii. 19, VA aNa)) and they entered tue city, &c.,
or, by the preposition ON being understood. The following examples
will tend to confirm this opinion, in which, according to Buxtorf,} the
preposition is to be supplied ; Down S129) and he came to Jerusalem,
1 Kings iii. 15; 72 NIDN J nill enter thy house, Ps. v. 8; Dy}
MM MB 20 and the king went up to the house of Jehovah, 2 Chron.
xxxiv. 30; 2233 ON and he (caused them to enter) brought them
to Babylon, Jer. xxvii. 3.
16th, The passages in which *7 occurs postfixed to words, and in
which it is said to have the signification of versus, are numerous; yet,
and some other cases, the article is equivalent to the Demonstrative pronoun
this, than which nothing can be more unfounded. :
* This sentence is elliptical, for Was Tm Sa MPN See Gen.
xxvii. 22, &e. BPYs YP Vprt.
+ Thesaurus Grammaticus, lib. ii. cap. xii. Reg. v. See also Hilleri. Onom.
p. 339.
ART. 193. 17..] ON THE NUMERALS. 183
it must not be dissembled, that passages which must be so construed,
but in which this particle is not found, are also numerous. Noldius
is of opinion, that it is nothing more than a paragogic letter, added
for the mere sake of Euphony; or, with the view of giving some
emphasis: and, if this latter be the case, it will be the definite article,
as used in the Chaldaic and Syriac.* Buxtorf holds, that it is not
paragogic, because, says he, “ tales literae nihil ad vocem consigni-
ficant.”*+
17th, When this particle is postfixed, it does not take the accent,
in which particular it differs from the feminine affix 7. The following
are a few examples of its occurrence: MDI to Egypt, Gen. xii.
10. 14, &c.; Tw tonards heaven, Gan. xv. 5, xxviii. 11, &c. ;
TANT into the rwer, Exod. i. 22; 'T)2'T3i0 towards the desert, Exod.
nae: &c. In these cases, it is said by some to be equivalent to the
Ste and Chaldaic 8, which either makes the noun definite to which
it is attached, or gives some emphasis to the sentence.
On the Numerals.
194. The last species of nouns, of which we have to
treat, are the numerals: these are of two kinds: ist,
those which designate the number of persons or things
to be thus defined, and are termed the Cardinal Num-
bers ; and, 2d, those which determine the order in which
they are to be taken: as, first, second, &c., which are
termed the Ordinal Numbers.
2d, The Cardinal Numbers are designated in Hebrew
by substantives put either in apposition, or in the state of
construction, with the persons or things to be numbered :
and they have this peculiarity, that those which designate
* fT paragogicum nil nisi pronunciantis pnisus est, qui vel impetum et
tendentiam ad locum objectumve aliud; vel admirationem magnitudinis,
aut, in negativis, exiguitatis rei significat ; vel ob soni saltem suavitatem voci-
bus adjicitur.” Concord. part. Ed. 1734. p. 217, note.
+ Thesaur, Gram, p. 568.
184 LECTURE IX. (ART. 194. 2.
the numbers from three to ten inclusively, take the
feminine form with masculine nouns; and, vice versa,
the masculine form with feminine nouns. But of this
more will be said in the Syntax. The decimal numbers
may be considered as adjectives or epithets.
Table of both the Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers.
CarRpDINAL NUMBERS.
Masc. Fem.
One, abs. TAS nnis
In construction WAS id.
Two, my ony
const. Ww wal
Three, wou) my ow
const. wu) nyu
Four, pais MWaAIs
const. id. MYVAIS
Five, wn Twn
const. won nwo
Siz, wy elegy
const. id. nw
Seven, yay mya
const. paw nyaw
Eight, Maw maby
const. id. niu’
Nine, pwr sun
const. pwn nywin )
Ten, wy mip
const. oa niwy
ART. 194. 2. ]
ON THE NUMERALS.
wae
Twenty, Diy com. gen.
Thirty, Dw ou
Forty, DYVaIN
Fifty, Dyin
Sixty, Ow uy
Seventy, OWA
Eighty, Dw
Ninety, DWwwn
A hundred, AND
constr. AND
Two hundred, OND for DON
A thousand, FN
Two thousand, DIDIN
Ten thousand,
first,
Second,
Third,
Fourth,
Fifth,
Sixth,
Seventh,
knghth,
Ninth,
Tenth,
maT oF NDT
OrnpinaL NumBERS.
Mase.
WNT or THN
el,
wr DU
yw
wn
waw
Way
Wun
PY
maa Ni37,
yet
Fem.
AWN
maw
mere
mya
Munn
mvp
my aw
ry IMU
nywin
ne pey
185
3d, The rest of the Ordinal Numbers are made by the terms
appropriated to the Cardinal ones : as, } TIWY MINT MIWA the eleventh
year; so, [MWY MYAW the seventeenth day.
186 LECTURE IX. CART. 194. 4.
4th, In some other cases also the Cardinal Number has been pre-
ferred: as, TON DY the first day; TXNW NW the second year ;
o, Y2W Iw the seventh year. But fees are elliptical expressions,
see Te xxv. 10,11. MW Dwar NW the 7 year of fifty years,
i. e. the fiftieth. And Ga: vii. 11, TW ONS WwW MWD in the
year of six hundred years, i. e. in the six Meieiiedsh's Set Gen. vid ao
5th, The decimal numerals ending in 0: as, DQWY are never
found taking the form for construction, WY, a (Are 1 oie)
6th, When the feminine form occurs in these numerals, distribution,
or parcels consisting each of that number of persons or things, is
intended to be conveyed: as, MWY ~) and chiefs of the tens,
Exod. xvii. 25.
7th, The intermediate numbers from ten to twenty,
twenty to thirty, &c. are made by connecting a decimal
with an unit, in the following manner.
Masc. Fem,
Eleven, “wy THs Mwy mos
or WY wy wy onuy
Twelve, - wy Ww ey pali7g
Tey DAW Mey DnY
Thirteen, wy meh my wow
Fourteen, WY AYA Mwy YaIS
Fifteen, bY nw maey wen
Sixteen, Tey mwy my ww
Seventeen, wy Ayaw mawy yaw
Eighteen, Wy Tipw mivy maw
Nineteen, wy AYN maby pwn
8th, Some passages occur in which 18 is found as the absolute
form: as, DF IN? to one of them, Deut. xxviii. 55. So 2 Kings
ix. 1, Ezek. xlvi. 17, Zech. xi. 7, &c.
9th, In two instances this word is found defectively written, Ezek.
xvill. 10, ms. and Ib. xxxiti. 30, TH.
10th, The feminine form *Y¥8, when found at the end of a sentence
ART. 194. 10. | ON THE NUMERALS. 187
with the accent Athnakh, or Ségél, is written WIS. See Exod.
XXxvi. 10 where it occurs twice.
11th, This word (718) is also found in the plural: as, YTS OAT
dictiones une, like meeniis unis m Latin, Gen. xi. 1, it. Ib. xxvii. 44,
xxix. 20, Ezek. xxxvii. 17, Dan. xi. 20; mimw is put for Dnaw, the
2 being dropped, and its loss supplied by Dagésh (not forté) (Art. 82.).
12th, From twenty to thirty, &c.
Com. Masc. Fem.*
One-and-twenty, DWP “TS o OOS
Two-and-twenty, OWL) Dy — DAY
Three-and-thirty, DWIW) = mew — wu
Four-and-forty, DOVYAIS) AVBIS — VAIS
Fiftyfve, = DWDM mweN— wan
Sixty-six, Dw) mw — wy
Seventy-seven, OYA AWPIw — yay
Eighty-eight, pubwi 8 6Ajpw —mibw
Ninety-nine, oywN Aw — pwn
Com. gen.
Three hundred, IND wow
Four ditto, Nind yaIN
Five ditto, MIND won
Three thousand, DDN ny Ww
Four ditto, DAPN AVAIN
Five ditto, D|IN NWN
Twice ten thousand, njaq nw
Twenty thousand, ADS Dy wy
Ten times ten thousand, may awy
A hundred thousand, AON M82 or AND
Sia hundred thousand, A 2N Nixa ww
* See No. 2. above.
188 LECTURE IX. [ART. 194. 13.
13th, The Cardinal Numerals, from three to ten inclusive, require
the word designating the thing numbered to be put in the plural
number: all the others require the singular. Examples, D2 Wit
mw DIS) five years and a hundred year, Gen. v. 6; Daw yaw
TW NIN AAW? seven years and eight hundred year, Ib. 7.
There are, however, some instances in which this rule is not ob-
served: as, DWI) OMWY twenty tables, Exod. xxxvi. 23; DWT
pow Jifty shekels, Josh. vii. 21; aa MYA) OIWwyY twenty and
four thousand, 1 Chron. xxvii. 1; 7128 WM DM wy 72 a son of
twenty and five years, i. e. a man five and twenty years old. So
Mw YW DO IWY twenty and nine years, 2 Kings xiv. 2. But of
this more will be said in the Syntax.
14th, When the decimal number takes the precedence, the con-
junction is used: as, TIYDW) mpaw seventy and seven; DYYWM
TT Ww) ninety and six, Ezr. viii. 35, &c.
15th, When the numerals are to be used distributively, they are
repeated like other nouns: as, maw Dyaw ino and tno, i. e. by twos ;
Ds Own owen by fifties, or every fiftieth man.
16th, Numerals signifying the repetition of any quantity or thing,
are generally expressed by the dual number: as, BYQYD IN four-fold ;
DINYIW seven-fold, or, seven times repeated.
ART. 195. ] ON THE VERBS. 189
LECTURE xX. |
ON THE HEBREW VERBS.
195. We now come to treat on the theory of the
Hebrew Verbs, and to shew, first, In what way they
appear to have been formed; and secondly, To delineate
and explain their several conjugations.
2d, The verb, we believe (See Art. 152.), is, in its
crude state, nothing more than a noun of one form or
other ;* and, that its signification will be regulated by
that peculiar to the form of the noun to which it belongs,
whether that form be primitive or derived.
3d, If, therefore, we have the means of knowing what
signification is to be attached to the different forms of the
primitive nouns, as also how the augmented forms are
* Kimchi says in the Mikhlol. fol. 3. verso. PIT TVW SINS
ses bya op bypd Ep Cwiiw. by 7S) momma oybyen
Tps ws Sypm myapan sw AMT wD Ow Ms) Own
“I first proceed to write the chapter on the Grammar of verbs, although the
noun precedes the verb: for the verb proceeds from the noun. And they say,
that the noun is, as the body, the subject of accident; but, that the verb (may
be considered) as the accident (only).” And again, fol. NB Verso. yg... yy
ww oOYIED yoo Snw ow ome wo op>om ow on myer
MOVIN PD TW Ow Nymw 7 paar jpiveaw AN wD we Syn
mw 7 Bye waa o> mya ww aI AE pws oon
i.e. “ Observe that nouns are of two sorts. There are those which are either de-
rived from verbs, or, from which verbs are derived : as, Reuben, Simeon, Zebulon,
each of which is derived from a verb; =) a wise ; yw wicked ; YTS just ;
22tI a sword; xuy snow, and the like, are nouns from which verbs are
derived” (Art. 152, 2, note).
190 LECTURE X. [ART. 195. 4.
derived, and the sense they will bear, we shall also know,
to what class the verb itself is to be referred, and what
must be its general force and meaning.
4th, In our Lectures on the forms and derivation of
nouns we endeavoured to lay before the Student all that
appeared necessary on that subject, leaving it to his own
industry to follow out the enquiry to any extent he may
think proper. We now come to shew how this bears
on the question before us.
5th, The different forms of the verb, as found generally
in the conjugations, amount to seven; four of these
have an active, and three a passive (and sometimes a
reciprocal) signification.
6th, The first of these has been termed Kal, b i.e:
levis, light; because the root is here exhibited in its
simple state. Verbs of this species may be either
active or neuter.
7th, In this conjugation, or species, as we shall term
it, three forms are in use, which may be represented by
the measures 7?), T?P2, and TPH, corresponding to the
forms of nouns given in Artt. 161. Ff. II. II. X.*
8th, Again, in this, as in every other species of the
conjugations of Hebrew verbs, two tenses only are
found: namely, the Past, and the Present.
9th, The leading word in every species will designate
the third person singular of the masculine gender of the
* The same distinction of vowels proper for the medial radical letter of
the root exists in the Arabic, where, as in the Hebrew, the first generally
Aaa
denotes transitive verbs: as, bom he assisted: the second, verbs of sense: as,
oO hit FA te Uy
ei he heard; oo he was glad: the third, imply habit; as, ass he was
generous, &c. So TB he visited; TW he was glad ; p>) he was powerful.
ART. 195. 10. | ON THE ‘VERBS. i91
Preterite Tense; and, in Kal, this will always be the
primitive noun of the form T?9, IP, or TPB.
10th, The leading word proper for the present tense
of this species is always a noun of one or other of the
primitive Segolate forms: as, 7pPd, TPH, or TPB (See
Art. 156, &c.), which, when combined with one or other
of the pronouns, will present both the vowels, and signi-
fication, proper for this species of the conjugation.
196. The next species, taken in the usual order, is
termed Niphhal, WWD}, because, as it should seem, that
word presents the conjugation itself of the word formerly
taken as a paradigm for the verbs in general, which was
WD. This we shall arrange as being the passive of the
foregoing, although strictly speaking, 1t is not always so.
2d, This species, according to our system, is an aug-
mented word, combined of two others, giving both the
form and sense peculiar to this conjugation (See Art.
165. 18, 19, &c. 170. Ff. I. If.) ‘T2532, therefore, will be
the measure generally taken for the leading person of
the Preterite tense of this species: as, 775) he was,
or became, visited.
3d, The Present tense of this species is formed on the
measure 775] (for Ip) Art. 165. 18. 170, &c.);
which, with the abbreviated form of the pronoun of the
third person sing. masc. will become TP) he was visited,
and, by Art. 82. TPA.
Ath, The third species has been termed Piheél OUD.
This is always of the active voice; and, for the most
part, it has a transitive signification (See Art. 162. 7, &c.).
The measure proper for the leading person of the Prete-
rite is 722, which is one of the augmented and intensi-
tive forms given under Art. 162. 4, &c.
5th, The form proper for the leading person of the
present tense is of the cognate form, Ib. Form I. 4P2,
192 LECTURE X. [ART. 196. 6.
which, with the abridged form of the pronoun, will
become 723).
6th, The passive species peculiar to this class of verbs
is termed Puhal OD. Its leading word will be of the
measure 723, and will always be a noun of the form given
in Art. 162. Form V. This may be termed the fourth
Species.
7th, The fifth species is termed Hiphhil MDT, the
leading word of which is cognate with those of the
augmented nouns given Art. 168 : that proper for the
Preterite being of the measure T°?5 ,—for the Present,
P57, for the signification of which see Art. 165. 2—9.
Sth, The sixth, and which is passive of Hiphhil, is
termed Hophhal bya . This takes for the leading word
of both tenses, a word of the augmented form ‘TPd5i1
See Artt. 165. 10. 168. F. VII. having a passive signifi-
cation.
- 9th, The seventh and last species is called Hithpahél,
byani, which, as before, is the form taken in the old
paradigm Oy in this species. Our formis TPS. The
leading words proper for the roots of both tenses, will
always be of this measure, affording the sense proper
for nouns of this form, See Artt. 165. 12—I5. 172.
Ff. I. I.
197. These are the forms of the several Species of the Conjugation
of Hebrew verbs, as usually given in the Grammars. But, to these,
a few others are added: which, as they occur less frequently, have been
considered as anomalous. ‘They are, however, according to our view
of the subject, just as regular in their formation as those already
mentioned: and, although they occur less frequently, which might
easily be accounted for, they are quite as consistent with the analogy
of the language, as any verbs can possibly be.
2d, These additional species are thought to be analogous to the
Pihel, Puhdl, and Hithpahél, species; because some reduplication
of the letters or syllables of the root is generally found to take place,
in these, as it does in those, forms; and consequently affording similar
ART. 197. 3..] ON THE VERBS. 193
significations ; although the same letters are not always doubled, ner
the same vowels found to accompany them.
3d, It has been remarked (Art. 162. 5.), that the nouns of excess
formed from roots having 7 or * for the middle radical letter; or, which
have the same letter in the second and third of the root, usually take
the forms THe, for the active, and TTD, for the passive signification :
as, pai, 2, aid, for the active; and, pai, 1215} aD, for
the passive of these words, respectively.
4th, Instead of We, and TPS, therefore, which is the measure
proper for the species termed Pihél and Puhal, we shall always have
these forms from roots of this description: the same word being taken
as the ground form for each tense respectively ; pip, pai, DAP,
&c.
5th, The same form is taken for the Hithpahéi species, i. e.
instead of TBAT, we shall have THaNn for the measure: as, pain ;
any; and so of others.
198. There is, moreover, a great number of forms peculiar to certain
species of the conjugation, as laid down by Schultens and Schroeder,
and, before them, by David Kimchi, and other Grammarians; of these
some notice should be taken. These writers, then, have considered
these species as having sometime existed: and, hence, they have
proceeded to derive nouns of similar forms from them, even when the
form itself has not occurred as a verb; all of which seems to me to
be proceeding in an inverted order. According to our system, the
addition of one or other of the pronouns to any noun, simple or
augmented, will always have the effect of investing it with the powers
of a verb: and hence it probably is, that we occasionally find this
done both in the Hebrew and all its dialects. This will perhaps
account for these rare augmented forms: as also, for the instances, in
which nouns, which were originally the mere names of substances, are
found acting as verbs in these tongues.
2d, But, to come to these remaining and rarer forms, which are some-
times found as verbs: Ist, T2%7, the passive form of TWHEMT, just
as TET) or WATT, is of WAT. Of this form we have NSIT (for
NDOT Art. 89. 2.) rendered impure, or polluted; prim. noun, SPY,
So mwa made fat, for maw aman Is. xxxiv. 6, where, however, the
Dagésh proper for the W is omitted.
3d, II. This form is given by Schroeder 82, from which we have
O
194. LECTURE X. CART. 198. 3.
only a noun supposed to be derived from this species of the verb,
Viz. maz perfidious, Jer. ii. 7. 10. This, therefore, does not occur
as a species of the Conjugation: it is also doubtful, whether it is to
be referred to the form given by this excellent Grammarian. Surely,
as the (+) is immutable, TND would be the more suitable measure.
4th, III. WPS2NW1, Of this form is T17BAN, and VTPRMT, oc-
curring Judg. xx. 15.17. But here we have no necessity for intro-
ducing a new form; the omission of Dagésh in the ?, which might
have been merely accidental, would make it necessary that the pre-
ceding vowel should be a perfect one, (Art. 34.). This form, there-
fore, may be considered as belonging to Hithpahél, which has already’
been considered (Art. 196. 9.).
5th, The next form given by Schroeder is T28BNT, or TENT,
which may be referred to the first of these forms (No. 2.),-with the
additional consideration, that the Ddagésh proper for )? has been
omitted, and supplied as in the last. The examples occur, Num. i. 47,
1 Kings xx. 27, &c.
6th, His two next forms, viz. apie) and 2595 having a reciprocal
sense, are unsupported by the passages adduced. We may dismiss
them, therefore, without farther enquiry.
7th, The next form, TPIT, should have been THEN, his
example being Dian, which is manifestly derived from the root
Ui23 See Art. 197. 5.
8th, In the form 7/72, as exemplified in 2778, and Don , we have, I
believe, nothing more than a form equivalent to 1/22, in which the
Dagésh being omitted, we have a perfect vowel supplied to compensate
for the defect thus occasioned. See Art. 115.
9th, The next form given is 1/2, which Schroeder exemplifies
by “OAT Is. xliv. 20: but this does not occur as a verb.
10th, Of his next form TS)/?2, no example occurs ; Dny as given
by him is fictitious. The noun is 288 left hand, &c.: which,
when augmented, becomes OONOETT signifying to proceed in that
direction. Whether Schroeder's derivation of it from 728, be correct
wi be
or not, may be matter for dispute.
1ith, We next have Ti, and the example given 722) green,
which is said to be put for ]297, or 7297. But all this is extremely °
doubtful. The noun appears to be merely one of those augmented by
the addition of } (see Art. 176.); DIP for OD) as Schroeder has
ART. 198. 12.7] ON THE VERBS. 195
put it, we think comes more properly under another form, which
however, is nothing more than a noun.
12th, His next form T1228, has, for the same reason, no connection
with 029?. And the other example given is manifestly a noun,
DOOR, referable to the compound form (Art. 177. 7.).
13th, The form TW27 should rather have been THEA, in Bede
to admit of the form SAPNA. But, as we have already considered
this form (Art. 197. 5.), we need not dwell any longer on it here.
14th, The form 117122, is that of a reduplicated noun (Art. 177.),
which is often conjugated as a verb: as, [TID travelling about as a
merchant, &c. of which examples will be given hereafter.
15th, With respect to the other forms, viz. TDW, IPED, TWA,
the first does not occur, and the rest have been given under the
different forms of the noun, and accounted for; we need not, therefore;
add any thing further on them now.*
199. The forms, therefore, proper for the leading
words of all the species of conjugations now in use will
be as follows:
* In the cognate dialects of the Hebrew, viz. the Arabic, Ethiopic, Syriac,
and Chaldaic, we have a considerable number of forms seldom found in the
common Grammars. In Erpenius’s Arabic Grammar, we have only thirteen
forms of the triliteral, and four of the quadriliteral, verb. In M. de Sacy’s
Grammar, we have two more noticed in the triliteral verbs, four under the
quadriliterals, and a few others, which are said to belong to the triliterals, but
which have been augmented by a letter or two. Scheidius gives upwards of
forty forms in his “ Prime Linex Institutionum Arabicarum.” Lugd. Batav.
1779. And Mr. Lumsden, in his elaborate Volume on Arabic Grammar, has
given a list of still greater extent, amounting to fifty (Gram. p. 162, &c.), from
which it appears, that it has often been a matter of difficulty with the native
Grammarians to determine, whether many of these should be referred to
triliteral or quadriliteral roots. Some of them do not occur more than once '
and this should suggest, that the language itself acknowledges no such conju-
gations generally; but, on the contrary, that nouns of these forms “have
occasionally been made to occupy the situation of verbs. |
0 2
196
SPECIES. Forms.
TPS active.
1 TPS neuter.
“pb id.
TNS id.
pe a) | active,
5 causal, &c.
* reciprocal,
or &e.
TTIANT ia.
_S TPA] active,
LECTURE X.
SPECIES.
CART. 199.
GENERAL Force.
2 TPE) passive or ~
reciprocal.
j TPE passive.
{ TTD ia
TPM passive.
or
TRB
6
TPANT passive.
8 Sor
SPAN id.
f 9 TIPS neuter.
10 TP TPS or TPTPD. neuter.
Ss 11 “IPD neuter.
L 1 t Tp neuter.
Simple, or translated, sense
of the root.
Transitive, when the root in
Kal is not so. Sometimes
intensitive, frequentative, or
even causal. Names of sub-
stances often take this form
when converted into verbs.
ae)
Ve—-—
Causative. Transitive. Al-
so the form assumed by many
substantives when used as
'
|
j
Reciprocal, Passive, Re-
flective occasionally.
Intensitive.
Frequentative, Intensitive,
or the like.
Frequentative.
Habit, or custom, perhaps
it occurs, however, but sel-
dom; and, therefore, little can
be said as to its general sense.
* It is remarkable enough, that some cases occur in the Arabic, in which
2, JI, occurs, even when the verb has already been augmented by that
Or% --7
letter: as, Lonabat she, or it, has cut. The same excess occurs in the word
G +2 G@-
Kee his she resembled, in which the additional ( is implied in the (~)
teshdeed, with the Ue
+ In Arabic we also have verbs augmented by ¢>
Fhe pte)
2, as G>ye and
ART. 199.2. ] ON THE VERBS. 197
2d, But, for particulars, as to their several significa-
tions, see Artt. 196. 197. &c., with the references.
3d, It must be borne in mind, that any change occur-
ring in the forms of the nouns, with respect either to the
vowels or consonants, will also occur when they are used
as verbs: i.e. whenever any guttural letter occurs in
the root, certain changes may take place, on that account,
in the vowels: and that even the consonants “TN, as
well as the letters ) and 5, may disappear in certain
cases: of these we shall give examples hereafter, when
we come to detail the forms of the conjugations at
length, when we shall also point out the rules on which
these changes, &c. are founded.
200. It should be premised, that there are in the
Hebrew, as in other languages, three persons, each of
the singular and plural number :—that, in the verbs,
there is no dual number; and, that the second and third
persons, both singular and plural, have forms peculiar
to both genders. The first person is, under one form,
common to both genders; as in the pronouns (Art.
153. 2.).
2d, These distinctions, however, do not appeay to
arise out of the root itself, but out of the pronouns
which are found either prefixed or postfixed to it in an
abbreviated form.
Aue 2 7 2b 4 IS mor rr be
uowe » as in the phrases Names al ie ‘© May God muke
matters broad and easy for you.” Lumsden’s Arab. Gram. pp, 147. 154, in
which there can be no doubt, that such words are nouns.
198 LECTURE X. CART. 201,
201. Paradigm of the Preterite Tense af a Verh, conjugated
with the Pronouns in the First Species, or Kau,
First Form, TP2 visiting .*
SINGULAR.
Masc. Fem.
the same in the
3 IPD the primitive concrete noun. M729 < fem.gen. (Art.
ay ut $43.45,
A aco PE POTS Tpat ATR US Re
3 TPS — AN TP2 TPS as before.
PLURAL.
3 T1pPa for my or “IPS (Art. 147. 7.) VIPS as before.
2 DNTPS — OHS TPB INTPD # JS TPB
1
7p2 Bat 1M] pd eg je as before.
* This, according to D. Kimchi, is the form taken by certain nouns: as,
DoT wise ; vwI wicked ; 520 intelligent, &c. The only difference being
that the noun ends in Kaméts, whereas the verb ends in Pdthakh. But, he
goes on to say, each equally ends in Kaméts, when at the end of a verse, or
accompanied by certain accents: as, VAS NWND as he had said, Gen. xxi. 1.;
aw 89 hus not sat, Ps.i.1. There are also instances, pointed out by him,
in which Kaméts is the terminating vowel, just as it is inthe noun, when nei-
ther the position of the word, nor the accent requires any change in the vowels:
as, 1 Sam. vil. 17, DSains maw nw there he judged Israel. To which he
adds a number of similar examples. Mikhlol. fol. 51, verso. et fol. 1, in which
we have Kaméts with the accent Zakef.
+ The pronouns of the second and first persons sing. and pl. have been
abbreviated by Art. 79. The third sing. masc. and fem. is merely the noun.
In the third pl. the 77 is dropt also by Art.79. The 43 of the first pers. pl.
is rejected by Art. 82.; and the guttural T7 is omitted, perhaps for the sake of
euphony.
ART, 201. 2.1] ON THE VERBS. 199
2d, In the other forms, viz. TP and “IPD in this
tense, the final vowel is considered as being mutable.
The conjugation, therefore, will proceed thus :
Second Form, yon willing.* ;
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Pers. Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem.
yan "YD ABM ¥OM
2 MYDD MBM DAYT = |A¥a
Sar ‘YAN N¥BN NI¥ET
Third Form, vps) able.+
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Bin IN m3 172) 192.
spe ae are) are 12>"
ee ee
3d, It may be observed, in general, that the conjuga-
tion of the Preterite tense of every species, will be
carried on just as in the instances here given; that is,
by attaching the same abbreviations of the personal pro-
* Of this form are the following: YRC fermenting, 125, old, wa) dry,
sot hating, maw rejoicing, Nbr filling, OBS defective, DW a “ba
ceasing, *\aII hypocritical, YQTT defective, 33 cutting wood, “SD impure,
iz withering, wyyy corroding, aly) becoming dry, ©. Taw he paw
desplatne b))-9) Hannes to which many more may be ree
+, These, ering to D. Kimchi, (Mikhlol, fol. 71), are of the same form
with “iT great, yor small, ni distant, ap near. The words so
found as ave are, > fearing, Wo? litile, wp snaring as a hunter, 459
able, bow bereaved, “VV8 lighting, 333 stealing ; some of which occur as
nouns,
200 LECTURE X. [ART. 201. 8.
nouns to the leading word of the species, whatever be
the form or character of such leading word; 1. e. whether
it include one or more of the guttural letters, or whether
it be defective by the loss of one or more of the letters
sits, 5, or 2: due regard being had to the rules laid
down respecting these letters, as well as to those con-
cerning the changes of the vowels. ‘The conjugation,
therefore, is but one, however varied the ground form
or leading word may occasionally appear.
4th, As the changes which take place in the vowels in the conjuga-
tion depend, in a great measure, on the situation of the accent, it may
be proper here to advert to that subject.
5th, It has been remarked, that in neither of the preceding leading
words are the vowels immutable by usage. The nature of the
syllabication, therefore, which depends on the situation of the accent,
will universally regulate the vowels (Artt. 101. 102. &c.).
6th, It will be seen, by a reference to the paradigm, that the asyllabic
adjuncts 1, >, as well as the syllabic ones O/1— and jf), take the
tonic accent with them. The preceding vowels, therefore, of these
words, will be shortened as far as circumstances will allow (Art. 104.).
In the first case, the vowel immediately preceding is rejected, in order
to make way for the exertion of the accent; and, as this restricts the
word to its primitive quantity, there is no reason for any further
change taking place: we have, therefore, 7/72 and 1778, in these
instances. In the second case, we have the syllabic adjuiicts OF), and
1%), with the tonic accent. The preceding syllable must, therefore,
contain an imperfect vowel, in order to comply with the laws of sylla-
bication (Art. 34.). And, as the first vowel is not immutable, it is
rejected: the whole word still retaining its primitive quantity, 1. e.
consisting of two syllables, as in the former case, and no more.
7th, In all the other cases, the accent retains its original situation:
and, as the noun seems here to be in apposition, not in construction,
with the pronoun, the vowels remain unaltered throughout.
8th, Hence in the second form, exemplified by YOO willing, the (+),
when made imperfect, becomes (-) instead of (.), by what has been
termed an oblique correspondence (Art. 102. 2.), as in DAISHM, WSEN,
which is retained likewise in every other case of increment, in which
the accent remains on that syllable. In the remaining cases, when
the verb receives the asyllabic augment, 7T~, and 1, it is rejected.
ART. 201.9. ] ON THE VERBS. 201
9th, The first syllable is rejected in DMS], ZO, for the
reasons already given. ‘The substitute of Sheva (~:) is added, on
account of the guttural letter, see Art. 112. 4.
10th, In the third form, oo, the vowels follow the paradigm of the
first, and for the same reasons: except in the third person singular
and plural, where the 1 entirely disappears.
11th, When, however, verbs receive the illative particle 1* as a
prefix, the accent is removed to the first syllable of the verb, which
will necessarily be perfect, and the following one imperfect: as,
ENTE and I will visit ; m2") and thou wilt be able. The last syl-
lable will be subject to the same law, when the accent is removed on
account of any affixed pronoun: as, ale) I have prevailed (against)
him, Ps. xi. 5.
12th, The (--) Tséré of the second form, and of the third and
seventh species, viz. 122, and 187, will undergo the same changes
during the process of conjugation, as it does in Y20) in the paradigm.
13th, The following examples present some anomalies, with which
the Learner ought to be made acquainted.
On the Third Person Singular Masculine.
In one instance, the verb mp2 drops its first radical letter: as,
T2 he took, Ezek. xvii. 5; so, for TM), by a similar omission, we have
T) he declined, Judg. xix. 11. But see p. 37, note.
14th, Whenever the third person singular of either gender is accom-
panied by a pause accent, the final vowel will be made perfect, and, in
some instances, changed: as, 3W 8) he has not stood, Ps. i. 1; 1pwW
he dwelt, Deut. xxxiii. 12 (Art. 130.). The same often happens in the
feminine, as also in the plural number, whenever the accent is drawn back :
as, MAT it adheres to, Job xxix. 10; 2A they were ponerful, 2 Sam.
i, 23 (Art. 127.): all apparently belonging to the roots 123 12, or
i- 7?
* This has generally been termed Vaw conversivum. But, as I see no neces-
sity whatever for supposing, that it has any such conversive power as this name
implies, I have rejected it: as it has an illative power, however, and even in
Arabic has a manifest influence on the vowels, and sometimes on the consonants
of the verbs, I have thought it more consistent to give it the title of wlative. See
Schnabel’s Commentary on the Agrumia, p. 26, where this property is ascribed
to both § and Ww). See p- 52, note.
202 LECTURE X. [ART. 20], 15.
PDI, respectively. They may, nevertheless, be of the form 73,
although the other form most frequently occurs in the context. We
have something similar to this in Gen. xlii. 14, ‘aw “now “WD
even as I am bereaved I am bereaved, where the first verb is of the
form Dow, and the last of ?2U).
On the Third Person Singular Feminine.
15th, Our measure is 7772 in every case. In some few instances,
however, we have the Chaldaic instead of the Hebrew feminine ter-
mination: as, nS, instead of 7738 Deut. xxxii. 36, So DIS)? , for
Chessy,
«
DIST. she called; IMWY, for MWY she made ; which seems to shew,
that this termination is not a part of the pronoun, but the distinc-
tive form of the feminine gender, as stated above (Art. 201.).
The same holds good in the Arabic dialect, where the feminine
termination is also $1, which cannot be derived from the feminine
pronoun. See also Art. 144. 2.
16th, When the accent is removed from the ultimate to the penul-
timate syllable, the original vowels of the root will return: as, 7203
she gave, Judg. v. 25; TIMAW she was glad, Est. viii. 15. So, MAW
it hath fatled, 1s. xli. 17, with an euphonic Dagésh in the F (Art. 127.).
17th, In Ezek. xxxi. 5, we have NiJ3a for W124, the Chaldaic for
the Hebrew termination.
On the Third Person Plural, Common Gender.
18th, We have a final } sometimes added to this part of the verb,
which is either intended to obviate a hiatus, or, as in the augmented
nouns, to give some emphasis to the sentence: as, YT) they knen,
Deut. viii. 3; TS for WS they pour out, Is. xxvi. 16. See Art. 188.
19th, In some cases, this plural form appears with the vowel (~)
and T: as, TIDDW they poured out, where the ™j?, or marginal reading,
has 1W , which is, most likely, the true one. According to the
Masora, as cited by Buxtorf, there are fourteen such instances as these
in the Biblical text, (Thes. Gram. p. 102.*) Ina few cases the 7 is
not found: as, VAS they said.
* Ed. 1630.
ee
ART. 201. 20.,| ON THE VERBS. 203
20th, When the accent is on any account drawn back, the original
vowels return: - as, 79 they have brought forth, Gen. xxxi. 43 ; ala
Iv T
they ceased, Judg. v.7 ; yD 42 they became debased, Is. \xili. 19, Ixiv. 2 ;
11755 they were able, Exod. viii. 14. Ina few instances, a paragogic
S is added : as, NIDoon JOS. x. 240 UATIC Ley. LOS. Oe).
On the Second Person Masculine Singular.
21st, Instead of the termination , we sometimes have 1h), which
is the more usual, termination of the pronoun (Art. 153. 2.): as,
MATIZ thou hast dealt perfidiously, Mal. ii. 14; 33 thou art grown
old, Josh. xiii. 1, &c.
22d, Whenever the root ends in 4), and also receives this prono-
minal affix, both these letters will coalesce by Dagésh ; as, 172 thou
hast cut, Deut. xx. 20, for (N42. When 7 is the last letter of the
root, and this or any similar suffix is added, the { is dropped (Art. 82.),
and, for this, a compensation is made by inserting Dagésh forte in the
first letter of the affix; as, MUNI, for 292 thou gavest, Gen. iil. 12.
So, ‘FIN, for “FI J gave; OFVIR, for SAI you gave, &c.
On the Second Person Singular Feminine.
23d, When the last radical letter happens to be 1, or Y, (-) stands
in the place of the first Shévd (Art. 49.): as, nop, for AID D*
thou didst recewe, 1 Kings xiv. 3; nyAw thou didst hear, Jer. iv. 19;
FY thou didst know, Jer. 1. 24. In roots ending in 3, that letter
will be dropped as before: 513 thow gavest, Ezek. xvi. 33.
24th, In many instances, particularly in the Books of Jeremiah and
Ezekiel, this affix assumes the form “, for 4, which is also a ter-
mination of the original pronoun (See Art. 153. 2. 187. note): as,
SANT? thou milt call, for MNF? Jer. iii. 4; YAYAW thou hast heard,
Ib. iv. 19; to which many others may be added.
On the Second Person Plural Masculine.
25th, We have occasionally a Khirik with the second radical letter,
instead of (-): as, DEW, for SAWN ye shall possess, Deut. iv. 1.
ae —— eee a nee
* In some editions only.
204 LECTURE X. [ ART. 201, 26.
In others (+): as, ombsw ye asked, 1 Sam. xii. 13; and, as before,
DMN, for BINS ye gave, Jer. xxxvii. 18 (Art. 82.).
On the Second Person Plural Feminine.
26th, Instead of the termination }{}-, we sometimes have ‘2/}~,
which is also a termination peculiar to the pronoun of this person
(Art. 153, 2.); mins 2wn ye cast forth, Amosiv. 8. (This, how-
ever, is an example belonging to the Hiphhil species).
On the First Person Singular, common gender.
27th, A few verbs have Khirik for their second vowel: as ‘TDN
Ihave begotten, Ps. ii. 7, for mT So, SEND # for Pall S|» I asked,
1 Sam. i. 20. Here also, as before, (Nos. 22. 23.) roots ending in
M1, or 3, will reject those letters, and supply their place by Dagésh.
28th, In the first person plural also, roots ending in 7 will cause
that letter to coalesce with the 2 of the pronominal suffix: as, 72/12
(for 133512) we gave, Lam, v. 7.
29th, Upon the whole, then, these are rather apparent than real
anomalies. It is consistent with the analogy of this language to
make certain changes in the vowels, upon the occurrence of any of
the guttural letters. The concurrence of any two identical letters is
also regularly expressed, by placing a Dagésh in one of them, and
omitting the other, provided no vowel ought to intervene (Art. 51.).
Nin 3 likewise is regularly rejected, whenever it should receive a
* But perhaps these vowels do not belong to ‘the form WP but TP or
perhaps, HE. 9, V7), is certainly the root in Arabic to which
paw may be referred; and ab) a son, may be the root of the second,
Sis t-
and OND, Arab. choles a beggar, of the third. And hence, perhaps, it is,
that the same root is occasionally found with different vowels. In Arabic,
me a“ I h. “Ae
also, we have | > hiding one’s self; — 5% concealing something ; ve)
“- “37
he raised; and rad he was elevated, ennobled ; te) he had «a high voice, &c.
De Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. i. p. 119.
ART. 201. 30..| ON THE VERBS. 205
final Shévé (Art. 82.). Other varieties in the vowels may be
accounted for, by supposing different nouns derived from the same
primitive, to have been originally taken as the leading word.
30th, N. B. The remarks here made on the Preterite tense of the
first species Kal, will apply, in a great measure, to those of all the
rest.
On the Present Tense of the First Species Kat.
202. It has been remarked (Art. 195. 9.) that the
leading word of this tense in Kal is always one or
other of the Segolate nouns of the Forms 775, TP),
or TPD. There are, however, a few examples, in aga
TPD is the form taken, as we shall see presently.
These nouns are generally abstract as to sense (Art.
160. 10.): if, then, a personal pronoun, or any abridged
form of it, be affixed, we shall have a meaning something
like the following: He (is) a visiting; Thou (art) a
coming, &c. where the words visiting and coming are
not used as participles, but as abstract nouns, which
must necessarily intimate a present tense. How this,
as well as the preterite, tense, is used in composition,
will be shewn when we come to the Syntax.
Paradigm of the Present Tense.
Form I. Tp2 .
SINGULAR.
‘Pers. Masc. Etymon. Fem. Etymon.
3 “pd? for IPD NUT He visits. Span unknown. She visits.
2 Span pd AN Thou visitest. TPan 7pa vals: Thou, fem.
1 TPDN _ pp SIN L visit. TIPDN as before. I, fem.
206 LECTURE X. [ ART. 202. 2,
PLURAL.
_ Pers. Masc. Etymon. Fem. Etymon.
3 YTPD for MYT or IA TPD NVI They visit. FPIPDM for 7 “Tppe They visit.
2I7PAM— Td. TPA MN Yowvisit. MYTPRM PH WAN Yow vise
1 TpD3 Tpd 1373 We visit. TpD3 as before. We visit.
2d, In resolving these Forms, we have given ap NT for TD),
after Jahn. His reason is, that this pronoun was formerly used for
both genders, which is not improbable. Still, I believe, the * is put for
1: the pronunciation being nearly the same as if the 1 was actually
prefixed, not Yifkéd, but I[fkéd. The aspiration may have been lost
in process of time, as it is the case with many words among our-
selves, where h is unaspirated: as in hour, humble, and even in
some cases gh: as, daughter, knight, light, &c. In Syriac and
II UF
Arabic the same is the case: as, ensuro, not yensuro, for yok and
so of others (Art. 14.).
3d, The etymon of TDA, fem., I have stated as unknown: because,
I cannot agree with what has hitherto been said on that subject. If,
however, ‘is put for 7 in the masculine, *1 might have been chosen
for the feminine, which becomes a substitute for ‘ on many occasions
(Art. 151. 4.). Or, if 8°77 be taken as the original masculine form,
ANT, or PCT might have been formerly used as its feminine. In
Arabic we still have _,2, 241, which would require to be written in
Hebrew in full, 377. “If this be the case, may stand for M37, a
fragment of this pronoun in the state of construction. The form
“122M may, perhaps, stand for T)P MAS, with the > of “AN trans-
posed, as we say, what man soever, for whatsoever man, &c, in
English.
4th, Of 11725) the same may be said which has been said of
others (Art. 147. 7. note). As to the 1 prefixed to the feminine,
what has just been said of 7//DF must suffice. The 72 suffixed is
probably a fragment of the pronoun 1277, as Jahn has observed
(Gram. p. 177. Ed. 1809.). The derivations of the other forms are
sufficiently obvious. |
ART. 202. 5. | ON THE VERBS. 207
5th, Paradigm of the Second Form “Ip .*
SINGULAR.
Pers. Mase. Fem.
3 32) He lies down. Sy She liesdown. '
a ews
2 33un Thou liest down. SADWH Thou lest down.
1 sDuiN IT lie down. DWN Tle down.
tats ee se ine
PLURAL.
3 A3Dw They lie down. MIIDwWI They lie down.
ase t> . * : eh Dl) Gea is °
2 993DwK) You lie down. MID DwWT You lie down.
gt oo" Tint; eae
1 3Du!3 We lie down. Duh) We lie down.
iT fe Seraiat le
6th, Paradigm of the Third Form Tp).
This form never occurs except in verbs which are
subject to some defect, and then but seldom.
Example.
SINGULAR,
Pers. Masc. Fem.
3 hy for Foph He gives (Art.82.) {IVF She gives.
rans wd facts:
2 AN = AIA Thou gwest. fA} Thou givest.
a. ee. et ot
Faby: or Mais — JIS { give. Fab, or Prats, T gwe. *
PLURAL.
Pers. Mase. Fem.
3 Wary" They give.
2 A RN: Ye give. wanting.
1 2 or Prop We give.
* So ADDN he rides; THN he spreads; YAN he lies down; Phe
he increases, ‘ke. When the last letter is euttural, the final Jean is, for
the most part, (- ): as, paw he hears; mow he sends; T1225 he rises,
is exalted. This also will te the case, when the ‘middle letter j is guttural, as it
is with the Segolate nouns (Art. 156. 9.).
208 LECTURE X. [ ART. 202. 7.
7th, It has been remarked (Art. 202.), that the form of TAPED is
sometimes taken as the leading word of the Present tense. But, of
this form we have met with the following examples only: viz. Exod.
XVI. 26, WOW they judge ; “AAW it (fem.) preserves, or keeps,
Prov. xiv. 3; “PAYA pass thou over (fem.), Ruth ii. 8 ; TWAS (for
TDA Art. 78.) Lam mortally pained, Ps. Ixix. 21.
8th, According to our system, indeed, any noun may be con-
jugated with the pronouns, respect being had to its signification :
and hence it appears to be, that so many forms have been thus
found ; while so few have generally obtained as verbs.
9th, Of these forms, the first THe is by far the most generally
used in Kal: and, for the most part, it has a transitive signification.
772 occurs but seldom, and is mostly intransitive. j?2 is perhaps
not to be found in another example, if we except the final (~) or (=)
in several verbs having 8 with Kholém for their first radical letter ; as,
TBR or TER, TAN or TEN, &c.
10th, In all cases wherein the terminating vowel is perfect, and
accompanied regularly by an accent, upon the’ accent’s being with-
drawn (which always takes place when the verb is joined with any other
word by Makkaph, &c.), such final vowel will be changed for its
correspondent imperfect one (Art. 140, &c.): as, ae “AWS T will keep
or Wim, Ps; 1 RRkIR 29 a7 208 I nill sustain him, Is. xlii. 1, for
Haws and 7ia08 respectively.*
11th, The same verb is sometimes found to occur in more than one
of the forms: as, naw he rested, Gen. ii. 2; and nawn it rests,
Neh. vi. 3; YEmS 8D I am not milling, Ezek. xviii. 52; and Y2TT
* Tt is a curious fact, that the tense corresponding to this in the Arabic
verbs, is subject to the same government with the nouns, i. e. having termina-
tions answering to those of the nominative and objective cases. This tense
GS
’ ahh
they term r jae alike, because it is said to be like the noun. In a few
g
instances, indeed, we have the ) of the accusative with the verb: as
G7 UO--
(eda) we will surely draw, &c. In others we have an additional
G - Su
W> 7, as in the nouns of excess (Art. 176.): as, wat he wtll surely
asstst.
?
ART. 202. 12. ] ON THE VERBS. 209
he mill approve, Ps. xxxvii. 23; anh) he mill tear, Ps. vii. 3; and
120) Gen. xlix. 27. To which many others may be added. (See
the Mikhlol of D. Kimchi, fol. 2, verso.). This may be accounted
for by supposing, that the Segolate noun belonging to both forms was
once in use. ]
12th, When, however, any paragogic letter is added, this distinctive
vowel, be what it may, disappears (as it is the case with the Segolate
nouns): as, TTAWS, not TITAWN Twill keep, Ps. xxxix. 2; MADwN ,
not TIA2WN T mill lie down, Ps. iv. 9; TIFVIN I will kill, not
M27 Gen. xxvii. 41. In the last case, the substitute of Sheva is
resolved by Art. 112. 2.
13th, In a few instances the letter 1 is still retained, which was
perhaps formerly a mater lectionis : i. e. was used instead of the vowel
1 Kholém: as, TOW I rest, Isa, xviii. 4; MWS I weigh, Ezra
viii. 25. In which cases the “7, or marginal reading, generally gives
the more usual form. This 1, however, is mostly omitted, and
Kaméts Khatéf then found to supply the place of the rejected
Kholém (see Art. 160. 3.): as, IYWES I step, Isa. xxvii. 4; TVOWS
I hear, Dan. viii. 13 ; “Iw thou bribest, Ezek. xvi. 33. In some
copies, however, we have (:) Shévd only in most of these cases,
which is perhaps the true reading.
14th, With the third person plural masculine we sometimes have
an additional paragogic 1, supplied, perhaps, for the sake of euphony :
as, FYAW they will hear, Exod. iv. 9. Sometimes the preceding
vowel is perfect: as, PNW they will ask, Josh. iv. 6; IS they
nill reap, Ruth i. 9. (See Art. 187.)
15th, When the first radical letter happens to be a guttural, the
substitute of Shévd will be resolved into its cognate imperfect vowel:
as, TDS) they will extend (for 1DTS2, by analogy 1798), see Art.
112. 2.).
16th, In the feminine, we have M22WM for 7223WM, by Art.
187. 5, &c. Ezek. xvii. 23. The final 1 is sometimes omitted by
apocope, by Art. 80, of which more will be said hereafter.
17th, The abbreviated pronouns are regularly prefixed to the
present tense, in every species, with Shévd (:): as, TD? ; but here,
as two Shévas cannot concur at the commencement of a word, the first
is changed to (*), (-), or (+), as circumstances may require, (Art.
gE
210 LECTURE X. [ ART. 202. 18,
112., &e.}: as, WEY, TIS, WEN, &c. Where no such necessity
exists, Shévd remains, as it does with the particles noo. | (Art.
181. &c.): as, WE, WEI, WEE, &e.
18th, The principles, therefore, by which the vowels of both the
verbs and nouns are regulated, are precisely the same. This is also
true of the letters, as well as the forms of words: for these, as we
have already seen, are such as the nature of the several cases
seems to require.
Of the Infinitives and Imperatives.
203. Which of these two ought to take the pre-
cedence, it is difficult to say; both presenting the same
form. But, as that which has been termed the Im-
perative is sometimes found conjugated with one or other
of the pronouns, the Infinitive has usually been placed
first, as exhibiting the more simple form of the verb.
2d, It is now pretty generally agreed, that’ the Infinitive (as it has
been termed) is nothing more than a Verbal noun, having either an
active, neuter, or passive signification: as, TD, and in construction,
TPE a visiting, visitatio, or the like, the signification of which is
active; and, 22W lying down, which is neuter. In some instances,
these forms will have a passive signification.
3d, Any of these words, according to Schroeder, when pronounced
with some emphasis, will become imperative in signification: as,
HD or 7D inspicere! i. e. “ inspice, vel inspicite.” So, continues
he, “‘ Ab initio nullum discrimen habuit numeri et generis: e. g.
ViAW audire! non tantum pro audi, sed et pro audite, Deut. i. 16;
“INS infestare! pro infestate, Num. xxv. 17, &c.
4th, Having premised thus much, we may now come to the forms,
and other particulars, connected with this species of words.
5th, The forms of the Infinitives are numerous: they may be either
primitive or augmented, according to the sense required by the con-
text. We shall, at present, notice only the primitive forms, re-
serving the others till we come to treat on the augmented species of
the conjugation.
soe
ART. 203. 6.1] ON THE VERBS. 211
Forms of the Infinitive er Verbal Noun, belonging to the First
Species of the Conjugation Kat.
6th, TPB, constr. TpP2* is the most frequent: TPd,
TIPB, TPD, WPA, and TPH are more rare. These forms
are peculiar to the masculine gender. The following
ere feminine | eps ITE PSso TIPS, i ipa. Tipe,
Mpa, MIRE, MPR, OP, MPR, NPS, &e.
These are all, excepting the first three, of the forms of
the Segolate nouns (Artt. 156. 157. &c.); and, as these
nouns are for the most part abstracts (Art. 160. 10.),
they are well suited for the functions which they here
sustain.
7th, These, when in conjunction with any of the particles
obon, will afford a sense similar to that of the Gerunds
in Latin: as, IpDA in visiting ; aly, for visiting ;
TPaD according to the act of visiting ; pb from, or
by, the act of visiting. In which cases, the form proper
for construction is necessarily taken, on account of the
following context.
8th, In lke manner with the pronouns, “TP my
visiting ; JIPD thy visiting, &e. in which “IPD is pre-
ferred.} Baal tt
9th, When the terminating vowel (1 of 12) happens to lose the
accent, it becomes imperfect as in the nouns: as, T2772 a king’s
* Of this form in the nouns is Na, constr. Oita, Pats, S197, which
imply habit, custom, &c. ; and sometimes have an abstract signification.
+ The nouns equivalent to these in Arabic are subject to the same usage :
and they are occasionally found in the plural number, which never occurs in
Hebrew. In the last instance, Grammarians have thought, that a trans-
position of the o has taken place, supposing TPH to have been the original
form. But as TIP is regularly the feminine form of T22, I do not see
why ‘7/22 may not be derived from the same form, particularly as these forms
are 1n use.
p 2
212 LECTURE X. [ART. 203. 10.
reigning, Gen. xxxvi. $1. In one instance we have an additional ”
inserted: as, “270 wy? for investigating the matter, Ezra
x. 16.
10th, Buxtorf* thinks, that, in the phrases mw for anointing,
Exod. xxix. 29; my123 for elevating, Zeph. iii. 11; man? for
using patience, Ezek. xvi. 5, the o has been transposed, on ac-
count of the additional paragogic . But, the truth of this I doubt.
First, because ‘7 is not here paragogic, but feminine, as the situation
of the accent is sufficient to shew. In the next place, it is not
necessary to suppose, that the o is transposed, for reasons just given
(No. 8, note): and hence we have, in the next example adduced by
him, mpr for removing far anay, Ezek. viii. 6, where the o is not
transposed, but remains in its original situation.
lith, Again, the examples which he also gives, viz. JOYAWD,
DN2122 shew, beyond all doubt, that the ™ above mentioned is of the
feminine gender, and not paragogic. Other examples are, MOOW
slaying, Hos. v. 2; TON asking, Isa. vii. 11; MST fearing, Deut.
iv. 10. These, however, Buxtorf confesses, after all, are feminine
forms of the Infinitive, which the Jewish Grammarians term Verbal
Nouns. —
12th, It will be difficult, perhaps, and certainly unnecessary, to lay
down rules for the use of the other forms. The Student may note them
down as they occur. We will merely remark, that cases will happen here,
as in the Arabic, in which it will be extremely difficult to say, whether
a noun is to be referred to this class, or to that of the participles: and
further, that, it is not improbable, the very same word may occasionally
be found in a situation suitable to both.
On the Imperative belonging to the First Species.
204. This is usually 772 or IPD visit, for the second
person singular masculine; “TP, for the same feminine ;
J1Ph, mase. and 3 Tp2 or ITP, fem. for the same
person plural. In which will be perceived some of the frag-
ments of the pronouns as already mentioned (Art. 202.).
* Thes. Gram. lib. i. ¢. xiii.
ART. 204. 2.7] ON THE VERBS. 213
2d, It has already been remarked, that the form “ip5
is sometimes used for both numbers and genders (Art.
203. 3.).
3d, As the Imperative is generally formed on the same word with
the Infinitive, it will occasionally be found with the feminine termina-
tion 7, as also with the same vowels: as, 7TI4W keep,* Ps. xxv. 20;
iT123 remember, 2 Chron. vi. 42. Khdlém remains unchanged in
Mays vilify, curse, Num. xxiii. 7. Judg. xix. 5, we have TWD
support (from the form TY), and v. 8, “TY with Makkdph (from
TDD): and, 1 Kings xiii. 7, TIPO (from TYD) with the paragogic
letter >, whence it should seem, that each of these forms of the
verbal noun was once in use.
4th, 228 lie down, of the form TPH, will, upon receiving the feminine
termination, lose (-), and then change the first (: ) into Khivik: as,
M22. Upon the same principle, the o of 12 is generally rejected *
asin “IPD, TPB, &c., as above (Art. 202. 12.). In M2) keep,
Ps, cxli. 3, we have either an euphonic or intensitive Dagésh.
5th, Of the form Me, NII destroy ye, Jer. ii. 12; ADWD draw
ye, Ezek. xxxii. 20 ; VT Tw lay ye waste, Jer. xlix. 28, are instances.
So 29 reign thou, fem., Judg.ix.10; YF cry thou, Jer. xxii. 20;
(the medial + has been added on account of the accent’s being
drawn back, Art. 127. 4.); “2001 make thou dry, Is. xliv. 27.
6th, When a guttural is the first letter of the root, (+) is taken
instead of Khirik (-) whenever any asyllabic augment is affixed to
the word: as, ‘BY make thou bare, fem., Isa. xlvii. 2; YTIN take
thou, fem., Ruth iii. 15.
7th, “2D/2 divine thou, 1 Sam. xxviii. 8, takes a substitute of Shévd
with the second radical letter, upon the principle of assimilation,
noticed Art. 114., for “20/2. This is sometimes found to take place
in the present tense also. }
8th, The feminine plural occasionally suffers apocope: as, 7Y2W
Gen. iv. 23, for M2P2W hear ye, which also happens in the present
tense, as will be seen hereafter.
* See Ps. cxli. 3, where this word is used as a noun; unless, indeed, we
construe the former word Tw with it: thus, mow Tw place, keep,
i, e, keep constantly.
04
214 LECTURE X. [ART- 205.
On the Participles.
205. We now come to that species of words which
have been termed Participles, and classed with the
verbs as such: contrary perhaps to every principle of the
Hebrew Grammar. The fact is, these are nothing more
than attributives of one form or other, into the etymology
of which nothing having the least connection with
tense has ever entered. Nor, are the forms usually
ascribed to these words, exclusively applicable to nouns
of this sort. DIM wise, piri distant, 012 growing,
being just as much participles as I?) masc., fem. 7/715
and MIPiS visiting, or TPH, mase., MTPD, fem. vi-
sited, can possibly be; to which a considerable number
of others may be added. The fact appears to be, that
all these nouns, together with those conjugated as verbs
(which, indeed, is sometimes the case with some of these),
are to be regulated in tense by other considerations,
which will hereafter be mentioned.
2d, It is curious enough to remark, that Simonis has, in his Arca-
num Formarum, assigned a whole section to words of the form usually
ascribed to the first participle, in which they occur as agents, without
the least reference whatever to tense. Yet, in one of his notes he
says,* ‘ Exinde vero non sequitur, omnia Participta mera esse
Nomina, quod contendit Paeninus in Institut. Hebr. p. 229. If by
this he means, that these words may occasionally be construed as
participles, perhaps no one will object: but, if he contends, that they
are not originally nouns, I believe, he will contend for that, for which
no proof can be given.
* P. 604.
ART. 206. | ON THE VERBS. 215
LECTURE XI.
206. Having dwelt thus much on the first species of
the Hebrew Conjugation, which is indeed the model,
and contains the principles, upon which all the rest are
formed, we may now proceed to give the others, with such
notes as shall seem necessary.
Paradigm of the Second Species, or Passive Form of the First’
usually termed NIeHHAL. WD).
PRETERITE TENSE.
SincuLtarn NuMBER.
tah “p53 He was visited. “p33 She was visited.
Zz AM IpD4 Thou wast visited. T2535 Thou wast visited.
1 pal I was visited. VTPOI I was visited.
PruraL NumBeErR.
3 177253 They were visited. WIPS2 They were visited.
2 ON TPD2 Ye were visited. A TP23 Ye were visited.
1 F754 We were visited. WI TP23 We were visited.
PRESENT TENSE.
SincuLar NuMBER.
3 “IPD He becomes visited. Tpar She becomes visited.
2 TpPan Thou becomest visited. VTPaN Thou becomest visited.
1 “TIPAN I become visited. TIPAN I become visited.
PruraLt NuMBER.
3 Ip) They become visited. M2 TpaNn They become visited.
2
JIPAN Ye become visited. rat Sy Ye become visited.
vein? CRA abe
1 IPD We become vistted. IPD) We become visited.
4°
216 LECTURE XI. [ ART. 206
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR.
Masc. Fem.
2 TPan Be thou visited. “PEM Be thou visited.
PLURAL.
2 WTIPHM Be ye visited. MITpPSt Be ye visited.
Forms of the Inrin1tI1vE, or Abstract Verbal Noun.
IPD, TRAS, TP5), TPA, TPIT, and Ipan being visited, Se.
PARTICIPLES (usually), rather Versa Concrete Nouns.
SINGULAR.
ua TDI ov TBR Piste 5
or HPD :
PLURAL.
DTP niTpa @
We have here given the Infinitives, Participles, &c. as usually found
in the Paradigm, which we shall do in all the rest of the Species ;
not because we believe this arrangement to be the best, but, because
we would depart as little as may be from the method usually adopted ;
and, in order to familiarize the mind of the Learner with the several
forms of nouns which most frequently occur.
2d, The sense afforded by this species is mostly passive ; sometimes,
however, it is active: as, p73 he fought; YBWI he swore: JPW
he reclined ; new he contended ; where co-operation seems rather
to be implied. Sometimes, too, it is reflective: as, “aw natching
one’s self; Dawa asking for self; and at others, its force may be
expressed in English, by using, may, can, must, ought, or the like.
See Gen. vi. 21; xvi. 10; xx. 9. All of which may be very well
comprehended in the compound form of this word, when regulated
by the circumstances mentioned in the context. See Art. 165. 18. 20.
ART. 206. 3. | ON THE VERBS. 217
On the Preterite Tense.
3d, When the primitive words happens to begin with a guttura]
letter, the vowel accompanying 3 may be either (-) or (-), but not
(+): as, 2WTI2 accounted, Num. xviii. 27; WAS] said, Dan. viii. 26 ;
iar overturned, Esth. ix. 1; pin sealed, Ib. viii. 8; “nya
placated, 1 Chron. v. 20; where we have the form TPP or TPP,
instead of 1)? which is mostly used in this species. So Sita and
yo 4D2 circumcised, Gen. xvii. 27, for Sie (Art. 82.). In one instance
2 seems to have been affixed to one of the augmented forms “522 it
shall expiate, Deut. xxi. 8, for “222, in full MBSE (Art. 89. 2.),
of the form T?22INT7.
®
4th, In WSWS2 left, Ezek. ix. 8, the additional word forming this
species (see Art. 165. 18.) seems to be given more at length than
usual. Buxtorf thinks we have here a form compounded of both
tenses, than which nothing can be more unlikely.* For > in 71183
we sometimes have the Chaldee 1, as in Kal (Art. 202. 16); as,
naw forgotten, Is. xxiii. 15.
5th, yossh9 they were polluted, Lam. iv. 14, on the form 5,
probably from S82 an avenger. The form 72 is also in use: as,
VONAN ye are avenged, or redeemed, Is. lil. 3. Of the same form
with the preceding, is 130182 they shall be possessed of, Num. xxxii. 30.
In the word *) 183 Exod. xv. 6, we have perhaps an abbreviated form
for ST MISA it ts become glorious, the preceding word 72) being
regularly of the feminine gender. ‘This, therefore, need not be con-
sidered as anomalous, in any other point of view.
On the Present Tense, Imperative, §c.
6th, The form mostly taken for this tense is 7/22, and sometimes
the feminine form 117/72 : PD and T7228 are also found, as in Kal: but,
72 is found only with the Infinitive or verbal noun, examples of each
of which will presently be given.
* Thes. Gram. lib. i. c. xiv. ad particip. Niphhat.
218 LECTURE XI. [ ART. 206. 7.
7th, 8 is sometimes regularly prefixed with (-) for the first person
singular : as, WTS I am enquired of, Ezek. xiv. 3 ; Daws I snear,
Gen. xxi. 24. With the feminine form: as, moran I escape, Ib.
xix. 20; TTTI238 J am honoured, Exod. xiv. 17; also found 7228
Hag. i. 8, where the ‘ seems to have been lost, as in other instances
(Art. 78, &c.). in most of which, however, it is restored in the marginal
reading. |
8th, For EBM, we have 2WM thou milt* be broken, Ezek.
xxxii 28. So WIS) he nas infirm, 2 Sam. xii. 15; WED? he nas re-
Sreshed, Exod. xxxi. 17; =P) he was weaned, Gen. xxi. 8; WORT
it was said, Josh. ii. 2. So also, 27234 they shall be commemorated,
Is. Ixv. 17; MVNA they shall be eaten up, Jer. xxiv. 2, to which
many more may be added.}
9th, To the plural 17/222 a paragogic } is often added as in Kal:
as, TUN12) they shall be cut off, Ps. xxxvii. 9, &c.
10th, We have in the Imperative, 132/22 assemble yourselves,
Joel iv. 11, for 1F2/F7, which seems to be grounded on the form 12
or T28.
11th, Whenever, in this, as in other instances, the first letter of
the root is incapable of receiving Dagésh forte, the preceding vowel is
necessarily made perfect, as in WIN? &e. above given (No. 8.).
12th, In the Infinitive we have DONT eating, Levit. vii. 18; Jian
giving, Jer. xxxii. 4. And with 4 for the first letter, pins fighting
together, Judg. xi. 25; Uw requesting, 1 Sam. xx. 28; FD22 de=
siring, Gen. xxxi. 30; m pw sending, Esth. iii. 13; 32, for 4322
striking, Judg. xx. 89, on the form TH72 or WH7P. To these may
be referred *)]}77 (by Art. 82.), for 17277 or 711201 propelling, Ps.
Ixviii. 3. We also have WITT enquring, Ezek. xiv. 3, of the same
form, with 8, instead of 71 prefixed ; which is the letter usually taken
by the Chaldees and Syrians.
13th, The Dagésh forte found in the first radical letter in these verbs
is merely compensative for the characteristic 1 which has been rejected
according to rule (Art. 82.).
* Reasons for translating this present tense by a future will be given in the
Syntax.
+ Buxtorf. Thes. Gram. lib, i. ¢. xiv.
ART. 206. 14..] ON THE VERBS. 219
14th, The noun, given as a participle, has, in a few instances, (-)
instead of (+): as, W713 (for WN, form WH2 Art. 93.) taken in a
net, Ps. ix. 17. Alting* is of opinion, that the plurals D°822 persons
prophesying, 1 Sam. xix. 20, Jer. xiv. 15, Ezek. xiii. 16; D822
hidden, Josh. x. 17; DOYS) polluted, Ezek. xx. 30, 31; OS3IP2
Sound, Esth. i. 5, iv. 16, 1 Sam. xiii. 15, and some others, are formed
on the measure 7//23. But this is by no means necessary. The (7)
of the singular is, it is true, mostly found with the second radical: as,
D822, but then, this vowel is not immutable, but may be altered for
the mere sake of euphony, which is perhaps the case in all these
instances.
207. Paradigm of the Conjugation of a Verb of the Third
Species, PIHHEL.
PRETERITE TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Mase. Fem. Mase. Fem.
aia nap "P "Pe
2 Ape ‘asia ROT | ARIPA
COV TRA WTS 1 TR2 TPA
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR. PruraL.
3 TRY TRAN TTP2? Mm Tpan
2 Span pan TIPDN nan
1 "TPBS TPRAS “TPD 4 TPES
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
th ot oles MP2 MP3 MW 1p2
* Sect.-vii. §. 119. de verbo perfecto.
220 LECTURE XI. [ART. 207.
INFINITIVE, or Versat Novwn.
Mase. Form. Fem, Forms.
TRA TIPD, NPB, NPB, NVTPB
PARTICIPLES, or Concrete Versat Nowuns.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Masc- Fem. Masc. Fem.
TRAD Mpa DYTIPa? NIIPaD
oF IRA
Passive Voice of the same, or Fourth Species, which is termed
PUHHAL.
PRETERITE TENSE.
SINGULAR. Prorat.
: pR "yp TPR "7p
2 MV IpR IPD DN IP2 INTRA
1 DIPS TPR WIR TRE
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR, PLURAL.
5 TPR Tpan MPR? ATpAN
2 TRAN “TPaN VPaN MIPpan
1 PBS PBN TPR TPR?
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
2 RR mp2 MIP
INFINITIVE, or Versat Noun,
ai)
ART. 207. 2. | ON THE VERBS. 291.
PARTICIPLES, or Concrete Versat Nouns.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Mase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
TRAD TIRE ORR NPA
o VPRO
On the Persons, §c. of both Voices of the Third and qt
Species, PIHHEL and PuHHAL.
2d, Whenever the last radical letter is either one of the gutturals,
or 7, (~) Pdthakh will be the terminating vowel; which is also
found in some other words : TRE will, therefore, be the measure in
such cases: as, TAS he deleted: 2 Kings xxi. 3; "2 aw he broke,
Ps. cvii. ‘as he snallowed, Is. xxv. 8; nei he sent, Exod.
eee ce as Also when followed by Makképh; as, ny he
taught knonledge, Eccl. xii. 9.
3d, In a few instances (+) is the terminating vowel: as, "2'T he
said ; O22 he wasted ; “22 he expiated.
4th, When any letter incapable of receiving Dagésh is the medial
letter of the root, a compensation is made, by changing the;preceding
imperfect vowel to its correspondent perfect one: as, IN> he refused,
for TN. So 72 he blessed; and, in the participle J22> blessing ;
ANI detesting, &c. ; “82 he explained ; WS he delayed (Art. 102. 2.).
In a few instances (-) Khirik remains, without any apparent compen-
oy as, Whe removed, 1 ieee xxii. 47; YS2 he vexed, Ps. x, 3;
es delayed, nae V. 28, ane 8 occurs soil Ségél. bait in ee
Participles : 2), fearing, Prov. xxviii. 14; OPI leading, Is. li. 18.
In all which cases Dagésh is said to be implied (Art. 115.).
5th, When the accent is drawn back, in the feminine, 1/2, the
characteristic vowel (-) returns : s, M2? it licked, 1 Kings xviii. 38;
TERY she collected, Ruth ii. 18, bee (Art. 127.).
‘6th, In some instances Dagésh forte is omitted in a letter ca-
pable of receiving it: as, my pw she sent, Ezek. xvii. 7: aT ow they
sent, Ps. lxxiv. 7. So, on passim, for yobr praise ye. See
Art. 119.
7th, We have in the participle 2>)=b)- our teacher, Job xxxv. 11,
for aIBYND , by ‘ATt* 79% © And wW yer.) xv.'/10, 27949109 cursing me,
222 LECTURE XI. [ARTs 207. 8.
where we have in the margin, 29D, which is probably the true
reading, giving the participle or concrete verbal noun, written with
the vowels proper for a verb with the fragment of the first personal
pronoun.
8th, In the participle of the feminine gender, (-) occasionally
remains: as, maw causing abortion, Exod. xxiii. 26 ; we also have
Nn7Dwr inebriating, Jer. li. 7; and, without Dagésh, NDS (for
FIPS) committing adultery, Prov. xxx. 20; and, by contraction,
maw (for DWI) ministering, 1 Kings i. 15 (Art. 82.).
9th, For the force of this species, see Art. 162. 7—9.
On the Passive Voice.
10th, We sometimes have (+) Khattiph in this species, instead of
(), e.g. FVD tt was cut, Ezek. xvi. 4; where it should be observed,
that 7 receives Ddgésh, contrary to the usual practice : MITW it és
destroyed, Nah. iii. 7. So, also, SISP made red, Ib. ii. 4; and, in the
plural number, OD TN,* Exod. xxv. 5.
11th, In many instances, the Dagésh is implied (Art. 115.): as,
YO) wasted, Prov. xxx. 12; TPIT) object of mercy, fem., Hos. i. 6.
The Kaméts found here in the penultima is on account of the pause-
accent (Art. 127. 4.). So, MVT12 consoled, Is. liv. 11.
12th, When Dagésh is neither written nor implied, the preceding
vowel is necessarily made perfect: as, 37 slain, Is. xxvii. 7 3 ap
torn, Gen. xliv. 28; wb declared, revealed, Num. xv. 34; ‘QY
agitated, (as with a whirlwind), Is. liv. 11. In all which cases the
correspondence of the vowels. is oblique (Art. 102. 2.).
13th, In some other instances. the correspondence is direct: as,
Ty born, Judg. xiii. 8; DWP taken in a net, Eccles. ix. 12: TY
out of joint, Prov. xxv.19. In the first.two examples Dagésh is per-
haps euphonic; in the last, Kaméts is put for Ség6/ on account of the
pause (Art. 127..5.). But here the Grammarians differ, according to
Kimchi, whether these are nouns or participles. In Jer. xxii. 23, we
have this participial noun, with several others, so combined with the
* In some of the editions, and as cited by Buxtorf, this word is written DISD
and DYATND, with Kaméts Khatéf under yy, which is contrary to the first
principles of Hebrew syllabication. They are thus also cited by Kimehi, in
the Mikhlol, from which Buxtorf probably took his examples.
ART. 207. 14. ] ON THE VERBS. 223
feminine pronoun of the second person singular, as to have given con-
siderable uneasiness to the Grammarians: the passage 1s,—
mbar AP Naa vIn OV IND sma yhghz «maw
Thou (who) dwellest in the Libanus, art nestled in the cedars, how
shalt thou be consoled when pains come upon thee ?
Here AW? js put for “MS BW, VAZBND for WAN 7222, and VIN2
for “FS 2. In all which cases, we have nothing more than the
feminine form of the pronoun in conjunction with a participial, or
verbal concrete, noun. In the example 1232, Rabbi Jona was of
opinion, according to Buxtorf, that some of the vowels only had been
retrenched: by which he probably meant, that the pronoun was
added, some abbreviation being also made (See Art. 186. note.).
14th, In a few instances we have a substitute of Shévd, where
analogy requires Shévd, which seems to have been introduced merely
for the sake of euphony : as, aimiple) taken, Gen. ii. 23; WAN thou
shalt be sought, Ezek. xxvi. 21 (Art. 112. 5.).
15th, For the force of this Species, see Artt. 162. 7—9. 16.
208. Paradigm of the Conjugation of the Fifth and Sixth
Species, i. e. in both the Active and Passive Voices, WipHuth
and HoruHat.
PRETERITE TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Masc. Fem. Mase. Fem.
5 TPA TPA TPPaT UPPaT
2 PAP APH. DN Ta7 WTp|N
1TH oMNTPAT WPT WTpaN
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
sc TPE) TPaAn YP PD My Ppan
2 TREN “PPAR "TPN MATAR
1 PPD — PPDN TPB TD
224 LECTURE XI. [ ART. 208.
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Mas. Fem. Mase. Fem,
2 pay Ppa ppas = myqpan
INFINITIVE, or Axsstract Versat Noun.
Masc. Forms. Fem. Forms.
TPT © TRAN TIPET NIPRT. naan
PARTICIPIAL, or Concrete Versa, Novun.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.
TRAD ITPPRaD OMe Mpa
o VIRDD
Passive Voice, HorHnat.
PRETERITE TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
s apRT TM IpaT "pay PBN.
2 APA A TPAaT DNTP = ATP aA
PORTRAIT ON TPAN WTRAT = WTRAA
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
ah ees TRAN TIPE} TPA
2 TRAN (NIPAN MIPAN = TPA
1 TPN TPA TPA? The
ART. 208. 3._| ON THE VERBS. 225
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Pers. Mase. Fem. Masc. Fem.
2 Tpa) VRE VIPaI APTRAN
INFINITIVE.
TRE TRAM» TRAN
PARTICIPIAL, or Concrete Versat Nouns.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
TPA TIPBP oypap niqpap
TRE?
On the Active Voice.
2d, The characteristic T of this species occurs also with (+), (-),
or (-), but this happens only when a guttural letter follows: as,
PENT he believed, Gen. xlv. 26; TART he caused to stand, Lev.
xiv. 11; SPENT thou hast professed, Deut. xxvi. 17; SAV thou
hast caused to pass over, Josh. vii. 7. We also have Sad
Exod. xiii. 12, and SAY Zech. iii. 4, &c. And with (:) under
the guttural in DFW it is obstructed, Lev. xv. 3.
3d, In one instance we have (-) with the middle radical letter:
as, ATE PNwT I have requested him, 1 Sam. i. 28. See the notes on
Kal (Arts 201. 27.2). 7
Ath, On the word smbInn shall I leave? Judg. ix. 9, 11, 13,
much has been written, and, as I think, not very conclusively. But
let us endeavour to resolve it. It will be seen, by turning to the
lexicons, that on is the form of the Imperative in Kal: which,
according to our system, will give Dn, for the primitive Segolate
moun. Here, then, we have, perhaps, nothing more than this
Segolate noun, instead of one of the other primitives, conjugated
with the pronoun, which in the first person will regularly be ADIN,
Q
226 LECTURE XI. [ART. 208. 4,
and, by rejecting the Kholém (as in the Segolates, Art. 160. 3.), and
retaining the correspondent substitute of Shévd, in order to preserve
the form, we shall have ‘DIT, which, with the interrogative
iJ prefixed (Art. 192. 8.), we shall have Palette am I a leaving ?
e. shall I leave? According to this analysis, therefore, this word
belongs not to the fifth, but to the first species, conjugated, however,
with the abstract, instead of the concrete, noun, which is unusual.
5th, In another instance, viz. *ADEIN I have polluted, Is. xiii. 3,
we have the augmented verbal noun commencing with ® instead of
MT: i.e. the form usually taken in the Chaldee and Syriac (Art.
165. 2. 168. 2.).
6th, Again, we have, in Amos iv. 3, MIMD Pwr, which I take to be an
unusual, though a more regular, way ie writing the second person
plural feminine of the preterite tense: i. e, T2008 Tew , usually
M2ywM (Art. 201. 26.), ye have cast. In Isaiah also, chap. xix. 6,
we have ‘W33NTT they shall abhor, with two letters of augmentation,
S and 77, added for the purpose, perhaps, of giving the greater
emphasis.
7th, In the present tense we also have the form 75/7: and in
both, * is frequently omitted. With the paragogic 77, however, *
is always added: as, T2°PWN T will cast, Nehem. xiii. 8. With (~ ):
as, JON) he may believe, Job xv. 31. And, by a further con-
traction, TTO2? he will give confidence, 2 Kings xviii. 30, for TMD)
or TMO2).
8th, In some instances every trace of the characteristic
as, WET) they arrived at, 1 Sam. xxxi. 2; 1PTT they bend or tread
as a bow, Jer. ix. 2. Where the primitive form seems to have been
taken, instead of the usual one of the measure T?2.
9th, FOS J will collect, 1 Sam. xv. 6, is put Ge DIN (for FPDIS
Artt. 78. 93.), root FID* or OV. So, MDPAN T will ruin, Jer. xlvi. 8
.a4"*
\ is lost:
(for FTPDIN Ib. for APD), xoot 1, Arabic Jy, cognate
with TAS.
10th, 8 is. sometimes rejected together with the characteristic 17,
to facilitate the pronunciation perhaps: as, TS £ will hear, Job
xxxii. 11 (for PERS Art. 93. 5.). So, GDYOS J will destroy them,
Jer. viii. 13, for DDYDRSS ; OMT he shall pitch a tent, for DEIN, Isa.
xiii. 20; WW) he tarries, 2 Sam. xx. 5, is perhaps for the passive
form “TTS), for ITNT (Art. 79.), and, as the quiescence of & after
~
ART. 208, 11. ] ON THE VERBS. 29%
Kaméts Khatif is rather unusual in constituting a syllable m Hebrew,
the 9 may have been taken in order to avoid that concurrence.
The final (+) may also be euphonic, and taken on account of the
guttural, as in other cases.
11th, Some are of opinion, that 2771 1 Sam: xv. 5, is put for
= 8") by omitting the &, as above, by Art. 93. 5.
12th, In the Imperative we may have a paragogic 1, which will
then, as before, (No. 7.) take the characteristic *: as, nmpoen
prosper thou, Neh. 1. 11.
13th, Whenever the second or third radical letter is either a
guttural or 7, the terminating vowel will be (-): as, W127 cause
fo come down, Joel iv. 11; ITO remove far anay, Job xiii. 21;
WIT , margin WIT make straight, Ps. ve 9.
14th, In the Infinitive or abstraet verbal noun, the characteristic
has (-) for the most part: as, M7277 cutting off, Jer. xliv. 83
ATI commemorating, 2 Sam. xvi. 18. When any one of the
particles contained in’ the word D722 js prefixed, this form is
always adopted: when this is not the case, we may have T)2s3, or
THEM: as, ODWT rising early, Jer. vii. 13; TPMT setting wp,
Neh. vii. 3; WOW destroying, Amos ix. 8.
15th, When either the second or third letter is a euttural, or 7,
we then have (-) for the final vowel, as before: as, 3507 re-
sisting, 1 Sam. xv. 23; B21237 your bringing to recollection, Ezek.
xx 29.
16th, In many instances, we have the first vowel of the Infinitive
the same with that of the Preterite tense: as, Y\217 giving rest;
PAW shaking, Jer. \. 34: moan liberating ; xr saving, Isa.
XXxl. 5.
17th, IN? 1 Sam. ii. 33, is probably put for NTT? (Art. 79.),
vi. a S or
derived from the root Wd); ITS he punished. Whence dh
correction, punishment. See Hichhorn’s edition of the Lexicon of
Simonis, sub voce 218,
On the Passive Voice Hopnuat.
18th, This voice, it will be seen, is grounded on nouns of the form
of TET or WHET (Art. 165. 10.). And here, as im Puhdl, the
Q.2
228 LECTURE XI. [ART, 208. 19.
agent never appears, and hence, both are called by the Hebrew
Grammarians, as are also those corresponding to them in Arabic by
the Arabians, Conjugations the agents of which are not named.*
19th, With Kzbbiéits accompanying *7, instead of (+) Khatuph : as,
a2wiT thrown down, Ezek. xxxil. 32; Twn cast down, Dan.
viii. 11.
20th, When the first radical letter happens to be a guttural, (+ )
occupies the place of Shévé: as, MAIN she is laid waste, Ezek.
xxvl. 2, where Kaméts Khatiph )becomes a perfect vowel, and
remains under the characteristic 7 by analogy (See Art. 58.).
21st, The participial nouns frequently occur with (-.) instead of
(+) Khatiph: as, ABW laid down, 2 Kings iv. 32. So in the
feminine, n2>bwn cast down, 1 Kings xiii. 25. In one instance, the
characteristic *? is retained, as it is often the case in the Chaldee:
as, mipspr (for MiyE") made angular, Ezek. xlvi. 22. But,
when the first radical is a guttural, it will take (+: ), as before: e. g.
T2D'D set up, 1 Kings xxii. 35: DTIND contained, held, 2 Chron.
wT: IT
ixe BOs mage wasted, Ezek. xxix. 12. So ON (who is) for-
bidden, Exod. xxii. 19.
22d, The characteristic of this and the preceding species, is
generally rejected when preceded by any preformative taking an
initial Shévd: as, V2) for TET; TW? for WM, &c. See
Art. 79.
23d, For the peculiar force of this species, both active and passive,
see Art. 165. 2—10.
- @ -9 u- a G-
* Heb. YB ow Bw Nby p27, Arab. els pan, pl be drro
The reason of this seems to be, that, as the nominative is included in the verb,
and, as in these passive conjugations, this nominative is not the agent, but
the patient on which the influence of the verb is exerted, if any other word is
added as a nominative, (which will then be in apposition with the pronoun so
included) it will not represent the agent, but the patient: and, further, as it is
unusual in the Shemitic dialects to use a periphrasis: as, Judah was killed by
Simeon ; for then, it would be shorter to say, Simeon killed Judah, the Gram-
marians have laid this apparent omission down as a rule, although some in-
stances are to be found to the contrary.
ART. 209. | ON THE VERBS. 229
209. Paradigm of the Conjugation of the Seventh Species
termed HitHPAHEL.
PRETERITE TENSE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem.
> Span TPANT NIB] TTPRAN]
2 PENT TREN DIRS TPN
‘RTPA MTRANT TRENT RBI
PRESENT TENSE. |
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
3 SPAM = TPANA PBN. -7qpann
2 TRANN wIPBON VIPBDA 2 TRAN
1 TPES TPES TREN TRAD
IMPERATIVE.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
mee Divers ee 17 2) MIpan ADTRAN
INFINITIVE.
“pany
PARTICIPIAL NOUNS.
SINGULAR. PLURAE.
Rane TIPE ONTPan nv Ipand
or VIRB
2d, Of the passive form of this species, only a few instances occur :
as, VBI they were set im order, arranged, Num. i. 47, ii. 33,
xxvi. 62, 1 Kings xx. 27. In our authorized version, this word is
230 LECTURE XI. CART. 209. 3,
translated by numbered, for which there does not seem to be any good
authority. For some account of (+) instead of (-) under the first
radical letter, see Art. 198, 4. 5,
Other examples are: MSF) polluted (for TN2ONT, where ©
and 1 combine under ®), Deut. xxiv. 4; and IWIN made fat,
Isa. xxxiv. 6, for TWAT Art. 89. 2.
On the Seventh Species termed HiTHPAnEL.
3d, The last vowel in both tenses, as well as in the Imperative, is fre-
quently (-): as, PSTIIVI he seemed strong, 2 Chron. xiii. 7: many
he shall be shaved,* Lev. xiii, 33, and, with the Chaldaic prefix
“MIAN he joined himself, 2 Chron. xx. 35. So in the present tense,
EIS I nill console myself, Ps. cxix. 52 (the primitive word being
BM, not O72); WIM thou arrogatest praise to thyself, Prov.
xxv. 6; TEE thow shewest thyself kind, 2 Sam. xxii. 26; DIAN
thou shenest thyself perfect, Ib. et Ps. xviii. 26; Darn thou shewest
thyself perverse, 2 Sam, xxii. 27. See Ps. xxxvii. 4, and 1 Kings
xx. 22, for the Imperative. Here the primitive word seems to have
had (- ) for its last vowel.
4th, In 232 he shall be expiated, Deut. xxi. 8, it has been thought,
that we have a contracted form for (22/02, a compound of both the
Hithpahél, and Niphhdl, species. ‘To which I see no reason for
objection ; because I hold, that the augment of the Niphhal species may
be prefixed to a noun commencing with 51, with just as much propriety
as it can do to any other. The Rabbinical writers, it may be re-
marked, often use this form.
5th, Any root, having for its medial radical a letter incapable of
receiving Ddagésh, will make the usual compensation (See Art. 115.).
The verb here also, as in other instances, may have the paragogic #7
(See Art. 184. 3.).
6th, In a few instances, (- ) attends the medial radical letter: as,
MMI I will shew myself to be holy; “PTA Twill shew
myself to be great, Ezek. xxxviil. 23 (See Lev, xi. 44.). We have also
Kholém: as, "BYR they shall be moved; 12277 they shall be
made mad, Jer. xxv. 16. The primitive nouns here are’ perhaps
* The future signification of this tense will be accounted for in the Syntax.
ART. 209, 7] ON THE VERBS. 231
wT, D7, wy, and DDR » which will account sufficiently for the
forms.
7th, In the participial noun we have YS3%9 irritated, Isa. lii. 5, for
YS8209, where the primitive noun is of the form TPB.
Sth, The feminine form has sometimes a segolate termination : ‘as,
MSENIM strengthening herself, Ruth i. 18; Amp contained,
Exod. 1x. 24.
9th, In Exod. ii. 4: ABM and she stood, we have a very singular
anomaly, and one which has given great trouble to the Grammarians,
among whom Albert Schultens seems to me to have approached
nearest to the truth. His solution of the difficulty is :—‘“ It is not
only,” says he, “ in the sibilants that a transposition might take place
(Art. 89. 2. 3.), but also in any other letter, as in the Arabic species
o~ A276
xis]. If then we take 23) for the root, and write 224M for
5
322M, and then drop the ’ (Art. 78.) we shall have 2302), which
will be sufficiently analogical. Alting refers the form to a Syriasm.
Heb. Gram. §. 163.
10th, For the properties of this species, see Art. 165. 12—16;
and for the transpositions which sometimes take place in the letters,
Art. 89.
Of the remaining and less usual Species of the Conjugation
of Hebrew Verbs.
210. Of these, the forms T7315, TTS, and TTiannh
classed under the third, fourth, and seventh species (Att.
199.), will be considered when we come to treat on those
roots which have 4 or * for their middle radical; or,
have the second and third the same: because those verbs
alone are subject to these forms.
2d, It must have appeared, from what has already
been said, that, although the roots or words to be con-
jugated may be multiform, the conjugation is but one:
that is to say, the different persons, &c. are formed
in all cases by one general and regular process. The
persons, for example, are formed, either by prefixing;
or postfixing, the defective forms of one or other of the
232 LECTURE XI. [ ART. 210. 3.
pronouns (Artt. 201. 202.). The Imperative and In-
finitive, by taking the root, and suffixing the pronouns
or not; and the participles, by prefixing 3, which then
may be inflected like other nouns. The following ex-
amples, taken from the Mikhlol of D. Kimchi, will
sufficiently illustrate this subject, as applied to pluriliteral
roots.
53D he put on a certain garment.
PRETERITE TENSE.
3 pers. pale pa) us no272; 1 7272, &c. as before.
PRESENT TENSE.
3 pers. 9299; 2 729DH; 1 AIDS, &c.
ACTIVE PARTICIPIAL NOUN.
Mase. 92120, fem. marzo or n3120, sing. ;
masc. p»27D0, fem. nioaion; pl.
PASSIVE PARTICIPIAL NOUN.
92ND, &c., 1 Chron. xv. 27.
3d, In the same manner may be conjugated MD 2 he cut off;
WED he was full of moisture ; WWD he spread; WN he undermined;
TEM he inflamed, &c., which are nothing more than reduplicated
nouns. See Art. 177.
4th, From the noun TA a breast-plate, we have TIT thou
puttest on a breast-plate, Jer. xii. 5. And as a sacticipla’ mone
Ib, xxu. 19.
5th, Of primitive words dropping the medial 7 or °, and redupli-
cating the first and last radical letters (Art. 177. 5.), the following
are ae as the leading persons of verbs: Dabs sustaining ; 272
leaping ; FIP arming ; ZQZ chirping; WRN (rather WP, as
above), Ciatlentiiaanie Many of these, however, are placed by other
Grammarians under roots having the second and third radicals the
ART. 210. 6. ] ON THE VERBS. 233
same. In one instance we have a passive form, Wa2 mere sustained,
1 Kings xx. 27.
6th, The following are supposed by Kimchi to have been formed
by reduplicating the first and second letter of the root (Art. 177. 3.):
as, 2WAL causing to increase; ywyw soothing, delighting; YAY
ridiculing. Whence YNYIND Gen. xxvii. 12; MY. thou art ex-
ceeding ly beautiful, Ps. xlv. 5; SQSO sweeping, overwhelming :
7th,—These, by reduplicating the last two, and dropping the first,
radical: 2227] turning about, tortuous; AVA becoming very hot ;
WMWID perambulatory (see Art. 177. 6.): and the following, by also
prefixing the particle W7: as, MATA delaying.
8th, All these, as far as they are found conjugated, follow the
general analogy already laid down: e.g. YNPDPD TI (will) arm,
Is. xix. 2; DID) he will arm, Ib. ix. 10. From swat , ‘abatyn
thou (fem.) causest to grow, Isa. xvii. 11. So MPEVINT he delayed ;
WVAMINT they delayed, Judg. xix. 8; VAVATVDINT we delayed, Gen.
xliii. 10. Infinitive, EVATVDINT delaying, Exod. xii. 39. Participle,
MMVI, Lt. V2ITVBIM he will, may, &c. delay, Hab. ii. 3.
In the last instance, the final ‘7 is radical, and therefore it has the
Mappik, and remains unchangeable, of which more will be said
hereafter.
9th, It should be observed, that these verbs are found in a very
few of the persons at most, some only as participles or verbal nouns;
and, in no case, perhaps, is any verb found conjugated throughout
all the species.
234. LECTURE XI. TART. 211,
LECTURE XII,
ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS.
211. Having given tables of the verbs whether simple
or augmented, and explained some occasional anomalies,
as they have been called, we now proceed to consider
those verbs which seem to present some further irregu-
larities.
2d, It has already been shewn, that primitive words
having a 2 in certain situations (Art. 82.), or either of
the letters "78 (Art, 78. &c.), may occasionally drop it ;
and that one of the two last radical letters of any word,
when both are’the same, may also be rejected. We may
now remark, that when words thus circumstanced are
conjugated with the pronouns, they will be affected,
both mn their vowels and consonants, in these particulars.
We do not think it necessary here to divide these verbs
into Defectives and Quiescents, as is usually the case;
because that would, perhaps, be multiplying distinctions,
without sufficient reasons for doing so.
3d, All the anomalies or defects, then, that can pos-
sibly occur, must arise from having one or more of these
letters as the first, second, or third, radical letter of the
root; or, when the second and third radicals are the
same.
4th, Let us begin with those commencing with 3.
The rule is (Art. 82.), to this effect: Whenever 3} is
affected with a final Shévd (:), it must be dropped:
i. e. whenever the 2 in 775 of our paradigm has a
final Shévd, then, putting any verb commencing with
ART, 211. 5. ] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. . 935
aod
) in the same situation, the 2 will be rejected, and the
defect supplied by Dagésh forte.
5th, All verbs of this kind, therefore, will be conju-
gated regularly in the Preterite tense of Kal; as, WA] he
approached ; TW], WWI], MWA, &c., as also in the
Pihél, Pihal, and Hithpahél, throughout.
In the Present tense, the leading word is WJ}; here,
then, we shall have Wi}, but by Art. 82. WP, Wan,
WAN, WY, Ke.
6th, In the same manner in the preterite of Niphhal,
wii, for #/3]1; and so on, by the same rule, through the
Hiphhil and Hophhdl species.
7th, The Infinitive, or abstract verbal noun, is, for
the most part, of the form NIPH; as, NWI, and,
dropping the 3 (Art. 82.), MNWa; but, if a guttural
be the last radical letter, (,,.) will become (_._), as it is
the case with segolate nouns (Art. 114.).
8th, The Imperative is Wa for Wal, which is regularly
conjugated: as, Wa, WA, Wa, Miwa. It will not be
necessary to notice this verb farther.
9th, As the verb ]02 he gave, placed, &c. has a little
peculiarity about it, in having j also for its final letter,
it will be necessary briefly to notice its conjugation.
10th, Here, then, the final } will also be rejected by our rule
(Art. §2.), whenever that has a final Shéva: as, 9402, for 1203,
&c. And, as We is the leading word for the present tense, we shall
have regularly, JAN, 120, &c.; but, by our rule, WN, FUN, &e.
This, howeyer, does not always take place in other verbs ending
in .
11th, In the Infinitive, for 12/02, or 3K), according to our last
example, we haye J), by a further contraction, as if 4 or AI
had been the primitive form; and hence, with the affixed pronouns,
YM my giving; VAM his giving, &c.
12th, In these, as in other verbs, we may have (-), (+), or (3), for
the last vowel of either of the tenses: hence W2) thou shalt exact,
4
236 LECTURE XII. (ART. 211. 18.
Deut. xv. 3; bf) it shall fall, wither, Ps. i. 3; the primitive being,
perhaps, 23, and pbb respectively.
13th, When the second radical letter is either a guttural, or 1, and
therefore incapable of receiving Dagésh, the compensation, when 4 is
dropped, is either expressed, or implied (Art. 115.); as, first, 72, for
FEM (for WIN) he will descend; second, O73, for OFA, of O22 he
nill receive consolation.
14th, In some cases, when the middle radical is a guttural, the 2 is
not dropped : as, PS2) he groans ; DID he rages ; raph he nill possess ;
DY) he is mild. There are also a few instances in which the 2 is re-
tained, when the second radical is not guttural: as, “op he nill keep,
Jer. ii. 5; WAM ye nill exact, Is. lvii. 3, &e.
15th, The 3 is also occasionally preserved in the Infinitive: as,
ek mithering ; YA2 touching : also in the Imperative ; as, wr leave ;
3) keep ; 13 dig ; 902 plant, &c.
16th, As one verb commencing with ey namely, m2 he took, is
subject, in some degree, to the same rule, it may be proper to notice
it in this place.
This verb, then, is found in the species Kal, Niphhal, and Puhal
only. In Kal, the » is dropped, whenever it is accompanied by a
final (:), as also in the Imperative, and occasionally in the Infini-
tive. In the preterite tense, therefore, it will retain all its letters,
like 122. In the present, we shall have M1, for mp ; and so on.
In the Imperative we have 2 and mp, i? and %1P?, &c. In the
Infinitive, we have two forms, W1? (once 1? 2 Kings xii. 9.), and
mp2, Deut. xxxi. 26.
17th, In Niphhal the » is retained : as, m3 and m3 it is taken,
1 Sam. iv. 11, 17, 22. Infinitive, mor being taken, Ib. 19, 21.
18th, In Puhal we have m2 in the preterite, and 12>, for mp2,
in the present. But in the third person singular feminine of the
preterite, mp2 (for TI? ) Gen. ii. 23, which has probably been
effected by attraction.
19th, The participles are regular as far as they are found : as, mpi
one who takes, &c.
On the Verbs commencing with & or.
212. The next class of roots we shall notice, as being
subject to certain defects, are those having 8 or ° for
their first radical letter.
ART. 212. 2. ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 937
2d, Now, as these letters being the first of any word
will lose their consonantal power, only when preceded
by certain vowels (Art. 43.), the eotpeduence is, the
conjugation will be regular as in 7p, in the preterite
of Kal, the Infinitive and Participles ; as also in the
whole of Pihél, Puhal, and Hithpahél; but, in this
last, they seldom occur. We need not therefore give
any table of these forms. Let us now proceed to con-
sider those parts in which any defect or contraction
arises, in consequence of either of these letters losing their
consonantal powers; and, first, of those which have &
for the first radical.
3d, The leading word for the preterite tense of Kal
may be either of the forms 7P5 or Ip: as, VOX he said ;
8 he shone (for V8 perhaps, Art. 81.); that of the pre-
sent of either TP, 7/72, or 1p), and rarely Tp): as, IN
(for TSS Art. 93.5.) I say ; ity binding ; TRA thou
bindest ; }\A8M) thou art angry; OOS) he comes. A
few have two forms: as, 8 and 1X; WS and TOR.
In one case, we have TIPS: as, WIIN; and, in a few
we have Pathakh: as, WWAIX, contr. for AWN I am
languid, Ps. \xix. 21; OS &c.
4th, Taking 18, then, or any other of these leading
words, and prefixing the abbreviated pronouns with (:),
we shall have “AN, “ARN, UORD,, “PRS he, she, thou,
ys speak, &e. : but, by contraction, (Art. 93. 5.), WON,
TORN, ONT, TPR ; and, without the accent, IDs),
IDNN, &e. ; ; also with (-), ON", TONF, &c.; or, Spin
S omitted, 179°, 7Ph, &e.; TOS Ta Feith has Tae and
this Haina have two ae in Wire present tense.
5th, In the Imperative TDS, MPN, &c. the Infinitive
is MON or WON; the participle active VN, plural DVDR,
&c. as in 7P8. So in the Passive Participle, M128.
238 ; LECTURE XI. [ART. 212. 6.
6th, In Niphhal the initial & is treated like any other
guttural: as, V8), TIO83, IORI, &c.; and, in the
present tense, W989, JOSE, OSH, &c.; TIS has in
this species, 1MN3, (for 108) Art. 93. 5.), plural WON
they are taken, Josh. xxii. 9; the leading word taken
here being similar to that in the present tense of Kal.
The participle is regular, WN), 182, &c.
7th, In Hiphhil and Hophhdal, the same rule prevails :
as, MONT he believed; TPRT, AION, PINT,
AION, IORI, &c. Present tense, PPR, POND,
PORN, &c.; or, with the 7 omitted, |28", JOR, the
defect being supplied by (- ).
8th, So in the Participial noun, }AND, fem. TIDSA,
pl. ON, &e.
9th, In a few instances the radical 8 is dropped: as,
yon consuming, for DONt, where there is also a con-
traction of the vowels (Art. 93. 5.), Ezek. xxi. 33.. So
I, for JIN) he hes in wait, 1 Sam. xv. 55 VIS L will
hear, for S88, Job. xxxn. 11; OS for }OSX L will
collect, Zeph.i. 2,3; JAYS for AY ISS& I will depress
him, Jer, xlix. 19; to which several other of the same
kind may be added. So in the participle }W/> for PID
hearkening, Prov. xvii. 4.
10th, In Hophhal, DION) things or persons held,
contained, or the like, 2 Chron. ix. 18, is according
to analogy.
11th, Enough has perhaps been said, to shew what the process of
conjugating these verbs is: we may now proceed, therefore, to those
which have ” for their first radical.
213. One remarkable circumstance attends these verbs, which
is this: There seems to be considerable difficulty in ascertaining
whether 7 or ’ has the greater claim to be the first letter of these roots.
This is also the case in the Arabic; and, from the frequent substitution
of one for the other in the Hebrew, the same difficulty must have long
ART. 213..] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 239
existed in this language.* We shall, therefore, in considering the
conjugations, take it for granted, that the primitive forms were
occasionally written with 7 or >; and, that one or other of these
letters has been occasionally taken as the most convenient for enun-
ciation, when preceded by some vowel depriving it of its consonantal
power. .
On the Kat, Prret, Puwar, and Hirupransn Species of
Verbs commencing with’.
2d, In Pzhél, Puhdl, and Hithpahél, as before, we have no
defect, which is also the case in the preterite of Kal. In the Infinitive,
Imperative, and Present tense of Kal, and in the Niphhal, Hiphhil, and
Hophhal species, therefore, our only defects will occur ; and these we
now proceed to detail.
38d, In the Present tense of Kal, then, as in former cases, the last
vowel of the root may be either (-), (-), or @ ), which may be
accounted for in every case, by supposing a different form of the pri-
mitive word to have been originally taken. So far all is as before.+
4th, In the next place, when the preformatives are brought in. con-
tact with », two modes of adjustment will take place among the vowels.
and consonants ; the one by contraction, and occasional omission also:
the other by a sort of accommodation and omission: e.g. Ist. WD?
becoming dry; present W2™, contracted by Art. 93. 5. W2%,; and
by omission, W25, where (-) is a perfect vowel by analogy. So wr
he will possess; YS I shall sleep; YIM he will anake; BY he will
place; YZ he will form.
5th, The second method is, by contracting the (-) and (:) into (~),
and omitting the radical»: as, 2W2, for 2WY he will dwell; WLS L
* Thus we now have ™ for 1 descending, 1 Sam. xxx. 24; 15 progeny,
Gen. xi. 30; To) id., 2 Sam. vi. 23; V2) heavy, Prov. xvii. 27; 1) laden,
Ib. xxi. 8. In all which cases, and indeed in almost all others, in Arabic 1 is
taken for the first radical letter.
+ I must dissent from Schreder in supposing many of these roots to be
conjugated like those commencing with 1 (Reg. 72.), because, the analogy of
the language requires a different process when certain vowels precede 3, from
what it does when they precede 1, or; and. because the signification of these
roots, though cognate, requires no such saerifice of principle.
24.0 LECTURE XII. CART. 214. 6.
mill go; YIS L shall know; TWH) she shall descend. This sort of
contraction generally takes place, when the last vowel of the leading
word is (--), probably for the purpose of promoting euphony, as in the
segolate nouns. See Art. 114. In the following examples, (1) is
the last vowel of the primitive form: M82 we agree, Gen. xxxiv. 15 ;
ANN? they agreed, 2 Kings xii. 9; WI) he blushes; but these two may
be derived from 38 and WD as the roots.
6th, Of this kind the following are, according to Alting, the only
verbs which occur; viz. FS) he agreed; YW} he knen ; 2 he begat ;
72 he went ; 83° he went out; YP, it was dislocated; TX he descended ;
YD it seemed evil ; aw he dvelt. The following have both forms ;
DM he became hot; “32 he formed; Ti he burned; TP it was
precious ; DW. he desolated, and W2 he became dry, to which win?
above noticed is referred by some. In a few the ” is retained with
(+): as, MIPS I will go, Mic. i. 8; “WY he shall be precious, Ps.
Ixxi. 14.
7th, The former of these modes may be considered, therefore, as
conformable with analogy; the latter, as accommodated to euphony.
8th, In all those verbs which are conformable with analogy (and
all are so except the few above noticed) the Imperative and Infinitive
follow the general paradigm: 77) spitting, abs. T° founding, in con-
struction SD. fear thou, &c.
9th, But, when this is not the case, the first radical letter is dropped,
the final vowel remaining: as, T,) Infinitive and Imperative, fem. 77M
and NT. This verb has also 17) and 11) for the Infinitive. So Imp.
VAN and AT give, root AM; YT know thou, and with the paragogic
M1, FMT. Infin, YT for NYT and MYT (Art. 114.). But, what
verbs may be used in the several forms, can be determined only by
usage.
10th, Several forms of the Infinitive are occasionally derived from the
same root: i. e. according to our system, sometimes the abstract noun
of one form is taken, and sometimes the other: as, aa) bringing forth,
Job xv. 30, form THD ; ny? Gen. xvi. 16 . nb (for nT, form TP)
* Kimchi tells us, that his brother derived this word from 9% , thus: for
ny, striking out the latter >, no , and varying the vowel ny. In the
ART. 213. 11..] | ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 241
1 Sam. iv. 19. So 7 descending, Gen. xlvi. 3; YT? (form 772)
my descending, Ps. xxx. 4. |
11th, To this variety of forms, perhaps, may be referred the follow-
ing examples; 12WM AIW-ON Jer, xlii. 10, sf ye will still abide, where
IW is put for aw the ’ being dropped, by Art. 82. ban Paps that
thou shalt surely prevail; or, prevailing shalt prevail, Job xlii. 2, where
0 is put for epeb root peli by the same rule. |
12th, This verb ir) forms the Present tense in Kal, as if the root
had been D2): as, DAS, Soin &c. for DDS, D2 . See Art. 93. 2.
214. In the other species, viz. Pihél, Puhal, and Hithpahél, the analogy
of the paradigm 728 is regularly followed ; excepting only, that in the
verbs YT he knew, 1) he threw, and, >> he contended, the » of the
root is changed to 1: as, YAWN he made known; VINMT he con-
Jessed ; TZUN he disputed. In Pzhél, however, we have 12) (for
May Art. 79.) he shall make grieve, Lam. iii. 33; 12 (for W722) they
shall cast out, Ib. tii. 58. In Puhal we have S312 for O23" Jer.
v. 8.
2d, Let us now proceed to the others; viz. Niphhal, Hiphhil, and
Hophhai, in which the first letter of the root will lose its consonantal
power.
5d, It has already been remarked, that these verbs are sometimes
conjugated as if ) had been the first radical letter: this is the
case in the three species before us. In Niphhdl, for example, we shall
have in the Preterite 2W52 (for 2W2 Art. 93.), from the root 3Y or
2W1, Present tense SW) (for 2W)2)) where ) retains its consonantal
power. In a few instances ’ remains in the Present: as, T°) he
shall be prerced nith a dart, Exod. xix. 13; om) he remains, Gen.
viii. 12; O12 for OFM made hot, Is. lvii. 5. So also the Imperative
and Infinitive are formed regularly: as, SwarT, The participial noun,
awi3, fem. AW, NAwWI2; pl. D2wWi2 and NIBWI. We have,
however, m3 made mournful, fem., Lam. 1. 4, and ‘AD id. masc.,
Zeph. iii. 18. (for V2 &c. Art. 93. 2.).
Mikhiol, we generally have the leading word for the Present tense given: thus
the root 229-23); root AM)—AM; whence we are to infer, that the persons
of the Present tense will be 2PM, AIT] &e. root 202-2‘; whence Pres,
26", and so on.
R
242 LECTURE XIl. [ART. 214. 4,
Ath, In Hiphhil, DWI (for DWT Art. 93.) and, in the Present
tense, DW oy AW, AWIN, and so on throughout.
5th, In some roots, however, the (*) remains, and either forms a
diphthong with the preceding vowel, or coalesces with it by contraction :
" first, S27, or NZ according to the Kéthiv (for NZ, root
>>) lead out, Gen. viii. 17; “wT or "WT direct thou, Ps. v. 9;
2 Ai I mill chastise, Hos. vii. 12) $80 tatthe Participle, or noun of
agency, D°2D using the right hand, 1 Chron. xii. 2. In the second
place, the contraction may take place by. the preceding letter taking
(-): as, AO (for DOW Art. 93. 3.) he gave prosperity, Gen.
xii. 16. So PON, AON, or JON &c. throughout; MIDS I nill
take the right-hand direction, Gen. xiii. 9. Inf. 1277 &e. In Exod.
v. 7, we have PANN repeat ye, where § stands in the place of ) or 7:
but, here the leading word may be 7)OS, from the root FPN, cognate
with *)D?: ata) for 20”) Job xxiv. 21; ir birhh for Hoy Is. xvi. 7;
and ied for Peas Jer. xlvili. 31, may perhaps be attributed to the
mistakes at the Librarians.
6th, In Hophhdl the 1 of the root takes 3 throughout: as, war (for
awn , see Art. 93. 2.), he was made to dwell. So in the Present tense,
aw, Swan &e.; or, in both cases with (~) for 3: as, AW, ap
&c.
On the Conjugation of these Verbs which have ) or » for their
Medial Radical Letter.
215. When these verbs terminate in a quiescent 7, in
mM, ¥, or 43 as also, when conjugated in those species
which have Dagésh in the middle radical, they follow the
general paradigm: as, M7 at was watered ; 1 wt
became ; TW he breathed; Ya he expired ; “IK he be-
came white. So also YP vomit, Jer. xxv. 27, from iP; IX
he acted as an enemy ; *\U he was weary, which are per-
haps only nouns.—With Dagésh in the middle radical ;
as, MY he made crooked; NIV and NAN he was made
Mibked: Verbs with a medial ", 2 he ecriminated ;
TON he procured by hunting. In all other cases, the
ART. 215. 2. ] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 243
medial radical 1 or 9 loses its consonantal power, and gives
rise to several apparently defective torms.
2d, Whenever, therefore, a single medial 1 or ° is
preceded, either by a vowel or a final Shéva ; and,
at the same time, is followed by any vowel, it’ will
be dropped, with the preceding vowel or Sheva, and
its own vowel will be transposed to the first radical
letter (Artt. 79. 81.): as, DP for DIP he stood; IND for
AV he died; V8 for "aN he shone ; m0 for at he
was good; Dip tor DIP or OVP. In Niphhdl, Dip. for
DNPI; Hiph7il, VST for VST, IPM for DPA ; Hophhal,
pin for DIPM ee In like manner, when ” 1s. the
middle radical, ja for PA he understoed ; (A for \3, or
3; Hiphhil, 2X0 for MOM, PAD for AI; Hophhal,
{a7 or JIT, for PAM &e.*
3d, For the forms 7?) and ‘IPS which may be used in
the Imperatives and Infinitives, we here have 0)? (for
DIP or Pip Art. 93. 2.), and, PA Cor Pa, or Ne Ib. 4.).
4th, In the Pihél, Puhdl, and Hith pahél Species,
when the middle radical is not doubled, which is mostly
the case, the leading forms will be, 7755, TTD, ana
TTDI, respectively (Art. 210.): as, OMIp he raised ;
DDIP and OIPNT he was raised: and in these cases
the process of the conjugation is regular throughout.
Nouns of agency, &c. will be DAIPH, ODIPH, DAIPNA,
respectively, the feminines and plurals of which are regu-
larly formed, when in use.
* In OP, MP, and 7B, the vowels become perfect on account of the accent.
In Pa y neth ts OTT, DPT, P2O and JW, the first vowel is made
perfect, in order to complete the syllable ; which becomes necessary on account
of the first radical being taken to commence the next syllable. The (--) is
taken in Hiphhél, beg the vowel obliquely correspondent to (-) of the regular
paradigm. See Art. 102. 2.
R2
24.4: LECTURE XII. [ART. 215. 5
5th, The Participial noun in Kal is, for the most part, constructed
on the same form with the Preterite; as, 5j), pl. O32 &c.; OP, pl.
DY; JZ, pl. O32 &c. The passive, 19 for O9N2 involved, form
TAD ; a) for yaya circumcised. So OW for DYW; form THD placed.
In a very few instances the Participle, or noun of agency, seems to be
of the form THPP: as, DIP for OV2 standing, 2 Kings xvi. 7; DV2
treading, for DVB Zech. x. 5.
6th, In the first and second persons of both genders and numbers,
in the Preterite of Niphhdl, the leading word seems to be a segolate of
the form 7/2 or TB, i.e. DP for D2, P2 for PES in which cases,
the vowel (7) is introduced between the root and the abbreviated
pronoun: as, ANI, NapP2Z, ONIN &e, So M1732, M1723,
6N12°33, and so on. Alting thinks this has been done, in order to
give the fuller pronunciation to the accent, as in 29)3; but, in
omiaaps the accent does not accompany that syllable. That reason,
therefore, will not hold good. I am inclined to believe, that >),
or its equivalent Y3")?, is rather the leading word taken in these
particular cases. Certain it is, that in Arabic we have in the fourth
species the masdar LeolSl, i.e. TMANSPS for ONIPS, from the root BY).
If, then, we take V4}3 and by Art. 93. 372972, we shall have the pre-
cise form here used. What might have induced the ancients to select
one form in preference to another, it is not easy to say.
7th, In every other case Niphhal takes the leading word DI): as,
D372 for OVP2, as in DIMI, WY &c.
8th, A similar anomaly takes place in the corresponding persons of
the Hiphhil species, which may perhaps be accounted for in the same
way : as, Mp, Nia, MNP &e., but here, we also have
the regular form; as, HVaPTT, MNT, WaT.
9th, It must be remembered, that whenever the first radical letter is,
by any accident, made to commence a syllable, the preformative must,
by our laws of syllabication, either take Shéva, or a perfect vowel.
When the accent is far removed it will be Shéva; but, when not, the
vowel will be perfect: as, Present tense, Kal, B92, DAPM, YMAPR,
pl. TPRAPM &c.* So, in the nouns of patience and agency, in Niphhal
* Here as in Niphhal, noticed above, TWIP, or TAI, and hence YAP,
may have been the leading word.
ARTS2155u1. | ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 245
and Hiphhil, O32, fem. mina, pl. OIP2 &e. Hiph. OPA, fem.
Ma, pl. DP" &c. In Hophhal, however, no such change takes
place: as, DPT, 2 pers. pl. OMAP, WAT &c.
10th, Verbs having a medial (°*) will sometimes drop it, and sup-
ply its place by (.-), as it often happens in the Hiphhil species; as,
12h for PON thou shalt lodge; and, with the accent placed on the
penultimate, PA 2 Sam. xvil. 16. But, when either the first or last
radical happens to be a guttural, we shall have (-): as, abe he nas
mearied, 1 Sam. xiv. 28; 113) he rested, Exod. x. 14, for 2) or
~It
M2). So with 4, 0) i put anay, Gen. vill. 13. The same will
L130.
occasionally take place with a pause accent : as, red) Judg. xix. 20.
11th, Hence it will appear, that verbs having a medial > may, in
the present tense of Kal, take the same form, which they, as well as
those having a medial ), will in Hiphhil; and, that they can be dis-
tinguished only by the context.
On the Third Class of Defective Verbs.
216. These verbs are formed upon roots whose third
radical letter is subject to elision; and this may take
place, either when one of the letters 178 occupies that
situation (Art. 211. 2.), or, when the second and third
radical letter happen to be the same (Art. 83.) : as also
in certain cases, when 3 or XM is found in that place
(Artt. 82. and 201. 22.).
2d, But, before we proceed to the detail of these
defects, it will be necessary to offer a few observations
on the causes which have led to them: and first, we shall
consider those which have one or other of the letters
“VI for their third radical.
3d, It has already been remarked (Art. 213.), that
considerable difficulty has been felt both in the Hebrew and
Arabic, in ascertaining which is the proper root, in many
instances wherein these letters are concerned. It is
also a fact, that primitive words having either of these
letters for the first, second, or third radical, as also those
246 LECTURE Xil. TART. 216, 4.
which have the same for the second and third, to which
may be added those commencing with 3, are generally
found to have either the same, or very nearly the same,
signification. Of course we speak here, only of those
words which are found thus assimilated, and not of every
possible case that can be imagined: for example,
A¥?, AX] or AX] he ser up, to which perhaps may be
added, as being cognate, NAY he arranged, or assembled,
an army, performed divine service, &c. which some also
make cognate with "A¥ beauty, and MAY he became in-
flated, &c. So 1, 02, 9D, D2, m3 comprehending,
completing, &c. - to abidh many others omay be added,
were it necessary to do so.
4th, If this be the case, then, we need not be surprised
in occasionally finding the vowels, and even the signification
* So WE. and WAR; DO, Bw; WW, a; IW, WS; Ya, vn;
Vitvs VA; ay 217 &e. See the Mikhlol of Kimchi, fol. OY, where a
large list of this sort of verbs is given.
It may be proper here to notice remarks sometimes made on verbs of this
kind, which, I am induced to believe, are entitled to little credit. ‘‘ Singularis
Lingue genius,” says A. Schultens, Inst. Ling. Heb. p. 399, “et granditas
stili, sepe ansam prebuere, ad geming Radicis formas in unam conflandas.”
The first example he gives is wWSsait Is. xxx. 5, which he calls ‘* specimen
insigne. Hiphh. Radicum we ane et WD fetuit, signantissimi pre se
ferens: ex wrsary fatere fecit, et wean acescere fecit, coalitum.” Remarks
of this kind are often met with in the Thesaurus Grammaticus of Buxtorf, in
the Mikhlol of Kimchi, the Rabbinical Commentaries, &e. I must confess,
however, I can see little in all this, but the occasional adoption of one or other
of the cognate roots, as indeed it occasionally happens in the Arabic, without
any intention, on the part of the writer, to combine more ideas than one in such
verb. In the above instance, then, I believe wD to have been the root taken,
to be used nevertheless in the sense of WD. is this instance, therefore, I
must object to the vowel (3) Kholém: because, I think, it may have been
introduced for the purpose of supporting an hypothesis, unworthy of the sim-
plicty of character always attendant on the sacred writers. In Eichhorn’s
edition of Simonis’s Lexicon, sub voce WAD, Nis said to be otiose.
ART. 216. 5:,] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 247°
of one cognate root applied to another : as, D7, for x7
heal thou (root 27 becoming laa), Ps. Ix. ic MDI,
for RBIS J will heal, Jer. iii, 22. So, with respect to
the vowels only: as, ND, for Bale I restrained,
Ps. exix. 101; as if the root had been M22; SID, for
N¥VD finding, Eccles. vii. 26 ; JIN|DI, for IN| we have
healed, Jer. li. 9; MR33R7 prophesying, Zech. xiii. 4;
ROM sinning, Ficcls viii. 12, where the vowels belong to
roots having 7 or ° for the last radical.
5th, The following assume their vowels; and, in some
instances, their forms, from a cognate root: WI taken
away, Ps. xxxii. 1, where the form is derived from MW3,
the root being 8¥3. So AP|IN they (fem.) well bon
Job vy. 18; JAN they will heal, ‘Jer. viii. 11, and Mp)
she, or 1t, was healed, Ib. li. 9; aby ae I wondered, Ps.
exxxix. 14; NDS thou hast thirsted, Ruth ii. 9 (for
NP¥ as if the root had been MY, but which is NX).
In like manner, we have 1¥/} they bear (root 82) Ezek.
xxxix. 26; 172 they are full, Ib. xxviii. 16; 12°90) we
are vile, Job xviii. 8, to which many more might be
added; but, as they are always noticed in the best
Lexicons, they need not be detailed here.
6th, [t may perhaps be said, that these variations of the vowels
may all be ascribed to the Masorets. I answer, had not the analogy
by which the vowels are thus varied, extended itself also to the conso-
nants, this suggestion may have had some weight: but, as this is also
the case, it is hardly fair to ascribe to that school of Critics every
apparent anomaly in the vowels, with which we may occasionally
meet: besides, it seems to me more likely, that if the Masorets had
affixed these vowels according to certain established rules, we should
have met with no difficulties of this sort; which, nevertheless, are
consistent enough with the analogy of this language.
7th, Thus much being premised, we may now proceed
to consider the conjugation of these verbs.
8th, In the first place, then, every root, terminating
248 LECTURE XI. [ART. 216. 9.
with a radical 77, that is, with | having Mappik inscribed,
will be regularly conjugated pik ce TPB: as, M22 he was
igh; INI22 thou wast high; Wi) they were high, &e.
This eteer. Aerave is not Bes to any elision, either
here or elsewhere.
9th, It is, therefore, when 1 is a substitute for 4, or 9,
only, that any departure from the general paradigm can
take place, in any case.
10th, In the following instances, however, no such substitution has
taken place, but ) and * retain their original places: ‘you I have
been tranquil, Job ii. 26; Infin. Kal, fem. Tw Participial noun,
sw) of the, samecroot IoW. SovsLIN 2] afie eek. meen 17,
iss (2
from the root 18), usually TS). In Pzhél, PIS J mill mater,
Is. xvi. 9. But, in Job xii. 6, we have () for the last radical:
as, you they nill be tranquil (where the accent has been drawn
back) Art. 125. 11. So, THOM it trusted, fem., Ps. lvii. 2; NAN
they multiply, Deut. vii. 13, where, in the nee’ member, we have
MAN; WAT ye assimilate, Is. xl. 18. 25; MOY becoming languid,
Cantic. i. 73 TPDID weeping, Lam. i. 16. So also, DEVI things full
of marrow, Is. xxv. 6. In all other instances, 1 will be substituted
for either ) or ’, and then will be subject to elision, by the general
rules affecting the letters WTS.
11th, In the Preterite tense, therefore, of all the
species, 71 will be the termination for the third person
singular masculine, instead of "> or >; NM of the femi-
nine, just as it is in the feminine nouns in construction.
In all the others,» will represent the third radical : as,
23 he revealed, discovered ; fem. \}3; so 2 pers.
masc. nvo3 id.; fem. M°72; 1 pers. com. wma;
3 pers. com. 13; 2 masc. pny3 id.; fem. 22;
1 com. 93.
12th, It must be remembered, however, that in every other species
(+) is the vowel which precedes ° in the Preterite. Even in Kal (~)
would be more agreeable with the analogy than (- ), because m3 &e.
should be, according to the general paradigm, ny23 which by Art.
247)
ART. 216. 13..| | ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 249
93. 3. would become ma: but, as (~), &c. preceding , may also
become (:): supposing (-) to have been with the second radical
(Art. 93. 4.), this may have been adopted in this species.
13th, The Present tense of every species here ends
in --,* as do also the Participles. The Imperative has
—, but this is the form of construction assumed by all
nouns ending in 7~ (Art. 151. 5.), and such must the
Imperative generally be.
14th, The Infinitives follow the general paradigm, and
end in 4— in the masculine: as, M87 and Mk" seeing.+
The feminine form always ends in 1: as, nyo or mop
(for ny Art. 93.).
_ 15th, The agent or active participle will end in 7:
as, m3; fem. m3 (for m7) Art. 79.). The patient
or passive participle ends in “1: as, 92, form TIPD, regu-
larly, where the final 5 is quiescent, fem. ryy72, pl. ony
and nya: and » appears as the proper radical
letter: {
*
* Except the 2 pers. sing. fem and pl. masc. and fem., as also, 3 masc. and
fem. pl., where 77 is dropped, or changed to 7: as, 3 m. abn, f, mwa
2m. M23, £. MA (for ETPUA Art. 79.); 1 com, TAN. Pl. 3m. 35.
(for Ty Art. 79.), £3 naban; 2m. 02M (for WPM as before), f. } mpban,;
1 com. m2. In the same manner are the Picsent tenses of all the species
conjugated.
+ In 37 acquiring, 2 Sam. xxiv. 24, and in 27) 7 conceiving and medi-
tuting, Pele, 13, Schreeder thinks we have ) final forithe last’ radical letter :
but this is far from being certain ; 713)2, man and § Mant would terminate
regularly according to our pardigm; and, omitting the final TT by Art. 78, we
shall have the forms, 1372, 7 and ith The other example, viz. ‘27 Hos.
vi. 9, adduced by him, may be a plural noun in construction.
{ In Is, iii. 16, we have a various reading, viz. mypy and mya} » as also
in 1 Sam. xxv. 18; Mmawy and myawy , no reliance, therefore, can he placed
on Schreeder’s remark, that these are words retaining their primitive radical 1.
250 LECTURE XII. [ART: 21%
On those Verbs which have an & for the Third Radical
Letter.
217. The only departure from the general paradigm
found in verbs of this kind is, in the & becoming quiescent
in the preceding vowel: as, Pret. Kal. S¥D for N¥ID he
found, f. T8¥D, 2m. ONS, f. NRYD, 1 com. NRO;
pl, US$O,..com. 2 m. DANyD, f. {OSSD, 1 com.
WINN.
2d, The Present tense, N¥7°, N¥OM, and so on.
In every person of both tenses, except the third smgu-
lar and plural of the Preterite of both genders, in every
other species (except that of Puhal, and the Present of
Hiphhil), the vowel preceding 8 1s (~). As Mphhdl,
3m. NM}, f. JSD), 2m. ON¥, f. N88), 1 com.
“ANYDI; ; plur. com. Ny &e. Pres. tense, NYD &e. ;
Hiph. SSI, f. yO, 2mase. NYO &c. Pres.
3 m. YD, f OXON &e. In Pihél ‘and Hithpahél all
is regular. In Puhal we have, Pret. 3 pers. masc. S¥D,
f. IRS; 2m. ONO, f M&O &c. Pres. 3m. N¥D}, f.
NYDN; aan: NYDN, f. NYOA &c, and so on éhrouslonl
We have, Loreen Nowy it shall be changed, Eccl. viii. 1, where,
according to Kimchi, the vowels belong to the root 712W, Mikhlol,
fol. TYP.
3d, In the Infinitives and Participles a contraction
mostly takes place: as, NSW or ORY, for MSY, of
NNW. bearing, root RW; NSD for NXXid, root N¥D
finding. We also have MS¥iD. So also NNIY for
Nei hating, form MIPS, root 83W; MX IP or ninap
calling ; NM nxn or MND filling.
So likewise wy Job xli. 24, may be a verb, and ADS Ib. xv. 22, for MAPS by
Art. 78. By the sume rule we have %)}2 clear, innocent, for 7Y72 &e.
ART. 217. 4. ] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 251
4th, Some verbs here, as in the other classes, have (~ ) for
the last vowel of the Preterite of Kal: as, 8) he feared;
ND he filled; 83% he hated; XP¥ he thirsted, which
they will retain throughout that tense, where other verbs
have (+): as, 3m. NW, f. IND; 2m. DN, fi AND;
1 com. NN; and so on. In every other tense and
species they are conjugated like 8¥-
5th, For the rules and examples relating to Apocope when happen-
ing to these or any other verbs, see Artt. 80. 125. 3—8.
252 LECTURE XIII. CART. 218.
LECTURE XIII.
ON THOSE VERBS WHICH HAVE THEIR SECOND AND THIRD
RADICAL LETTERS THE SAME.
218. It has been laid down as a rule, that whenever
the last two letters of any primitive word happen to
be the same, one of them may be dropped for the sake
of euphony (Art. 83.). There are cases, however, in
which this cause has no influence: these we shall notice
first; and then proceed to shew in what instances, and
in what way, our rule applies.
2d, First, then, in the reduplicated species, i. e.
in Pihél, Pihdal, and Hithpahél, the middle radical
letter will either receive Dagésh forte, as in IP, or,
the reduplication will take place on the measure 7715,
TTD, or TMNT; or, lastly, on one or other of the
reduplicated forms (Art. 210.). In these cases, therefore,
no defect takes place.
3d, In the next place, the following examples follow the general
paradigm: as, OT he intended, Deut. xix. 19; SET I intended,
Zech. vii. 14; oa they finished, Ezek. xxvii. 11; 22D they sur-
rounded, Eccles. xii. 5, &c.; TWWY it decayed, Ps. vi. 8: 13D being
gracious, Isa. xxx. 19.
4th, The Participial nouns of Kal: as, 22D surrounding, Gen.
ii. 13, pl. O'P2D 2 Chron. iv. 3; TAR cursed, Gen. xxvii. 29, pl.
DMN Josh. ix. 23, &c.
5th, In some instances the Infinitive also takes the form 172 : as,
nan for surrounding, Numb. xxi. 4; pm for warming, Isa.
xlvii. 14, form )2, with (-) changed to (+) on account of the
pause (Art. 130. 5.).
6th, Again, i no case, in which either the first or
third radical letter of any root is subject to elision or
ART. 218. 7.| ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 253
contraction, will our rule take place: as, with reference
to the first, {VT for JIN they flee, Ps. Ixviii. 18 ;
DOM he exclaimed, root bby; WNIT L broke to pieces,
Jeri xlix. 37, for Anan. ve mm for “M7. But,
when this is not the case, and the last ‘radical retains its
consonantal power, one of the two is dropped: as,
for “7 he lived, Gen. v. 5.
7th, Whenever, therefore, one or other of these ex-
ceptions does not fall in our way, one of the two last
radical letters of these verbs will regularly be rejected
in both the tenses—in the Imperative, and occasionally in
the Infinitive of Ka/,—the whole of the species Niphhal,
Eiphhil, and Hophhal.
Sth, The most convenient method, perhaps, of stating
this defect, is by saying, that the second radical with
the preceding vowel, or Shéva, is rejected: as, 30,
for 220; Niph. ADI, for 120), &c. which will hold
throughout.
9th, In both tenses, then, of the species Kal, Niphhdl,
Hiphhil, and Hophhal, as also in their Infinitives,
Imperatives, and Participles, excepting those already
mentioned, will the second radical letter of all such
roots be rejected ; but, whenever any asyllabic augment
takes place, this rejected letter will be restored by the
operation of Dagésh forte (Art. 83.).
10th, If, in the next place, we except the first and
second persons of both numbers and genders, through-
out all the Preterites of these species, the abbreviated
pronouns which are asyllabic will be the same in these
as in other verbs. But, in all the first and second
persons of these Preterites, the vowel 3 is introduced,
as in Art. 216.6. between the root and the pronouns:
as, taking 22D for the root, 3 m. 2D, f. 13D, 2 m.
miap, f. NAD; 1 com. NAD; pl. OND, MSD, WA.
254 LECTURE XII. [ART. 218, 11.
So in Niphhal: 3 m. 3D), f. 72D3, 2 m. MAD, niadi,
and so on.*
11th, It should also be observed, that, as the first
letter of the root, in these cases, necessarily commences
a syllable, the preformative will either take Sheva (:),
or a perfect vowel. It will take Sheva, when the accent
is on the third letter, or farther from the beginning of
the word; in all other cases the vowel) will be perfect :
as Pres. Kal, 3 pers. m. 2D", f. 20; pl. m. 1203, f.
MYAoM, &c. Niphhal, Pret. 3m. ADI, f. NADI, 2 m.
miadi, f. Mad, &c. Hiphhil, Pret. 3m. ADT, f.
m3a07, 2m. nin00, f. MADD; 3-pl. com. 1207, 2 m.
oniap, f. \nia04, &e. Pres. 3m. sing. 3D}, f. nae
2 m. apn, f. "20M; 1 com. JP, 3 pl. m. IAQ}, f
mpaon, &e.
"12th, It should be remembered, that the > usually
found introduced between the second and third radical,
and which is considered as characteristic of the Hiphhil
species, never appears in these verbs.
13th, In Hophhdl, } is inserted after the characteristic
rt, in order to complete the initial syllable; after which
this Species is conjugated like the preceding: as, Pret.
3.m. sing. IDIN, f. N3A0IN, 2m. Nia, f. NAD;
1 com. YVAN, &c. Present: 3 sing. m. IDV, f.
ADIN, 2m. ADIN, f. ADIN; pl. WPAN. In the last,
and every similar case in this Species, the first vowel is
necessarily immutable: it must, therefore, remain per-
fect. So in the. Imperative and Participle, ADI, f.
ADIT; &e.; ADWs f MAD, &e.
* In these cases, perhaps, as before, we have some such form as MAD for
the leading word of these persons: and, it isa fact, that we have Infinitives
occasionally appearing of this form: as, VAT shewing favour, Ps. xxvii. 10,
root ]2tT ; minw desolating, Ezek. xxxvi. 3; smb my wounding, Ps. \xxvii. 11.
ART. 218. 14._] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 255
14th, In these, as in all other verbs, the final vowel
of both the tenses in Kal may be (-:), (~), or (1).
The root above given exemplifies (-) for the last vowel
of the Preterite, and (}) for that of the Present. The
only variety, however, which occurs is, in having (1) for
the last vowel of the Preterite, and ¢ -) for that of the
Present: as, 12) they cast, of 127 Gen. xlix. 23; 73 he
(who) devolves upon, Ps. xxi. 9. Soin the Infinitives
and Imperatives, which are generally constructed on the
same form with the Present, with (~-): as, 2 , for 993
devolve thou, Ps. cxix. 22. Present: 1?P> they shall be
vile, for 1p) 1 Sam. uu. 30. In Hiphhil, also, we have
occasionally (-): as, opr he made light, for “Opn
Is. viii. 23. Participle: 9¥ giving shade, for 92¥1
Ezek. xxxi. 3.
15th, In the species Pehél, Puhal, and Hithpahél,
the forms assumed for conjugation must be determined
by usage, 1.e. whether they are to be “pa, TAs 37125
“pana, WSN, or any other of the reduplicated
forms (Art. 210.); and when this is done, the process
will be analogous to that of the general paradigm.
16th, Of the verbs terminating in } or M, enough
has been said, Art. 211. 10. 201. 22.27. 28.
On the doubly Defective Verbs: i.e. Verbs, in which more
than one of their Radical Letters may be subject to quies-
cence or elision, by the operation of the preceding Rules.
219. Roots may be supposed to exist composed of
such letters as may all be subject to elision or quies-
cence, when occurring in certain situations: but, that
they all should be subject, at the same time, to such
rule, the nature of the case makes impossible: because,
quiescence can take place, only when some homogeneous
_.. vowel precedes; and this pre-supposes that such vowel
is enounced by a consonant. And, m the case of
256 LECTURE XIII. [ART. 219. 2,
one of the two last radical letters of a verb being
dropped, itis also supposed, that some preceding vowel
is enounced, which cannot be done without the influence
of a preceding consonant.
2d, Hence it will follow, that such part of any root
as is unaffected by the influence of a preceding vowel
will remain unaltered : and also, that no two contiguous
letters can at the same time be subject to defect by the
process of conjugation, if we except the operation of
apocope, and those cases in which any of the 78 let-
ters are dropped, as being unnecessary to the pronun-
ciation. Of two contiguous letters, the one may be
subject to defect, the other to quiescence, or even both
to quiescence. But, when the first and last are sub-
ject to quiescence or elision, the middle radical letter,
be that what it may, will generally retain its conso-
nantal power, and may receive a Dagésh forte ; or if not
capable of being doubled, may be compensated in the
preceding vowel being made perfect.
3d, In this case, therefore, as in all the preceding ones,
the general paradigm holds good: but, as the concur-
rence of certain sounds is incompatible with the pro-
nunciation of a Hebrew, some changes regularly take
place, in order to avoid this difficulty. And, as these
changes cannot exceed certain limits, some part of the
root must necessarily remain, and such compensation be |
made as custom has established. Example, however, is
always easier to be understood than precept, we shall give,
therefore, a few examples of all the cases that do occur ;
which after Schroeder, we shall divide into three classes.
First Class.
4th, This class will have the first and third radical
letters subject, at the same time, to elision, or quiescence.
And first, when both are subject to elision: as, | he
oF
ART. 219. 5.] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS. 257
gave, placed ; {34 he played on the psaltery ; N11 he
descended, which will drop either the 3 or N, or both, by
ruJes already detailed (Art. 82. 211. 10. 201. 22. 28.
&c.): e. g. in Mphhal, Pret. 2 pers. FI, ADI, WD,
for FIFI, HID]; and so of the rest.
5th, When the first is subject to quiescence, and the
third to elision: as, |O8 he was faithful; \w he slept ;
NaS or ND. ke was handsome. Here the } will be
rejected, as ‘before, whenever it is affected by a final
Shéva (:) by analogy: the final n, by Art. 201. 28: and
the initial ° or 8, will be quiescent, according to the
rules detailed in Artt. 212. 213. 214.
6th, In the next place, the first will be subject to
elision and the third to quiescence, in such roots as
Riv) he bore; as, Present tense, 3 p. m. Kal, RW? for
Rv) (Art. 211.); Imp. 8; Inf. Si’, MRY, or Dey.
Niph. Pret.and Part. XW). Hiphtil, Pret. wn. Hoph.
NWI: also in roots terminating in 7, for) or 7: as, 793
he extended; Pres. Kai, 2; and, by Apocope (Art.
125. 7.), 0° or 02. But here, the Imperative and Infini-
tive are sometimes written at length: as, 7] extend,
Exod. viii. 1, &c.; MIO) declining, Num. xxii. 26. In
Niphhal, 31 for 700)), and, with a pause accent (Art.
125. 11.), cap are they extended, Num. xxiv. 6. Hiphhil,
AYA, 3 sing. fem. with the pronoun 17, for IWNIOIA
she subdued him, Prov. vii. 21. Pres. Dn for MON, by
apocope, ézcline, Ps. cxli. 4, and Imper. 07 for riot
encline thou, Ps. xvii. 6.
7th, Again; verbs, having both the first and third
radical letter subject to quiescence: as, SM (for NON},
contraction of NAS? Art. 93. 5., from the root NIN) he
will come, Deut. xxxiii. 21; MDX. (for MD. Ib. from
the root MD&) ke will bake: and 1 Sam. xxviii. 24,
~ man she bakes it, where the first and last radical are
s
258 LECTURE XIII. [ART. 219. 8.
dropped; 8¥) he will go out, for NYY, root N¥>. Imper.
8¥. Infin. si, NY, INN, and AX¥. So 8D ‘he feared;
Pres. Kal. 8 or 8D; igs 879 for NiDO. Niphhdl,
Pret. or Part. STi; Mm. he cast, Pres. Kal, W.
Hence 071 we shoot them, Num. xxi. 30. In Hiphhil,
man, and, by apocope, 11 he shot, 2 Kings xiii. 17:
md he gniduga ; Pret. Hiphhil, 7219; Pres. pl. 121; and
Job xix. 2: JVI, with a paragogic Nin (Art. 127. 6.).
Hophhdl, 4, whence M21 pain. Participle of
Niphhal, nino persons (fem.) pained, Lam. i. 4, &c.
Second Class.
8th, The second class of doubly defective roots, are
those which have a medial} or > subject to quiescence,
and the third subject to elision: as, }}2 or }A he under-
stood ; \1) he lodged ; NW he placed; as, NW for NNW
thou hast placed ; 132 we have lodged, for 99979 ‘(Art.
81. 82. 201. 22.). But, in these verbs, the final is not
universally rejected: as, MAJA thou hast understood,
Ps. exxxix. 2.
Third Class.
9th, The third class comprehends those verbs which
have \ or ° for the middle radical, and 8 or M7 for the
third: each of which may be subject to quiescence, and
in certain cases to rejection.
10th, Of the first sort NIA entering in; 81} being
crude, and Nip or S&P vomiting, are examples, which
may thus be conjugated.
PRET.
KaL.
3 p.m. sing. 82, f. T82; 2m. Na, f. N83; 1 com.
kA. Pl. 3 com. 8a, Xc.
ART. 219. 11..] ON THE DEFECTIVE VERBS, 259
PRES.
3 p.m. sing. S2, f. ae 2m. 82M, f 83; 1 com.
NAN. PL 3 m. INT,
Imp.
3 p.m. sing. Nia, f NIA; 2m.3Na. Pl. f. APKS,
or TN3.
INFIN.
NIA, or NA, NB, AA.
Part.
Masc. sing. 8a, f. ORD. Pl. OND, f NINa.
ilth, In those cases, wherein Kholém seems to represent the middle
radical, } is often inserted: as, S172, SIAM &c. for 823, SAA &e.
And, in others, where Karidis aeiirie the dical 8, S is sometimes
omitted (Art. 78.): as, 122 for 1282 we came in, 1 Sam. xxv. 8.
In Hiphhil we have, Pret. 8.2AN, DAT, or NINA &c.
Pres. 8°) or 82° or NA, NBN, and so on. Infinitive,
RAI, NAMI, and, with & dropped, ‘AM. Part. NAD or
Yan. Pret. Hophhdl, S37, ANI, ANAT, ANAT,
NAW. Pres. NAY, SAM &c.: Part. NAW &c.
12th, Examples, in which both a medial 1 or.*, and final 77, are at the
same timé quiescent, seldom occur, if we except those forms of the
Present, which are said to be subject to apocope: as, 47}, for VT)
he shall, or may be; so SVT) for WT) by apocope (Art. 93. 2.), “at
with a paragogic §: root f mA for ma Eccles. xi. 3. In all other
_ cases the middle radical idee Hiei its consonantal power, the third
only being subject to quiescence: as,
PRET.
3 p.m. sing. MT, f. TUN; 2 m. EPI flO RVIET BENeboy oe reer,
3 p.m. pl. aH, aint on7, f, IND; 1 com. NT.
s 2
260 LECTURE XIII. CART. 219. 13.
Pres.
Z p.m. sing. TPN, apoc. W1, f. MAU, apoc. WIN &c.
13th, Verbs of this kind are seldom found conjugated beyond the
first or second species ; and perhaps never throughout those.
It must be borne in mind, that in any of these verbs the paragogic
8 or } may occur in their usual places—that any of the ‘18 letters
may be dropped or not, when the preceding vowels will preserve the
pronunciation of the word—that the second persons singular of the
Preterite may have 7 added: as, WAN thou gavest ; and that Dagésh
Tt ei
forte may occasionally be omitted, and a compensation made by the
preceding vowel being made perfect. But, as the Dictionaries and
Concordances will always shew in what cases these take place, it will
not be necessary to note them down here.
On the Inseparable Pronouns when attached to Verbs.
220. When the inseparable pronouns are found at-
tached to nouns, the meaning of the compound will,
as we have seen (Art.153.1.), be propriety, possession, or
the like: for in no other way can nouns and personal
pronouns be construed together: but, when the same
pronouns are combined with verbs, which are already
compounded with pronouns by the process of conjuga-
tion, then, if the verbs are transitive, these further affixed
pronouns must be considered as being complementary of
the signification of such verbs, or what we usually term
an objective case: but, if the verbs be intransitive, then
must they be translated, by introducing some preposition
or other word explanatory of the connexion thus formed:
as, 2973 he grew up for me, or with me, Job xxxi. 18;
PHAwWIP LI am holy (as to) thee, i.e. [ am holier than
thou, Is. Ixv. 5. So 373) shall dweli (with) thee, Ps. v. 5.
But, we shall have occasion to speak more particularly
on this subject when we come to the Syntax.
ART. 221.1] ON THE PRONOUNS WITH VERBS. 261
221. The next question will be, How will the addition
of these pronouns affect the vowels and consonants of
the verbs? Generally, having the vowels of the affixed
pronouns given, those which precede and are mutable
will be regulated by the general laws prevailing in the
nouns: that is to say, any mutable yowel, situated at
some distance from the accent, will be rejected: while
any perfect vowel being deprived of the accent, and
followed immediately by a consonant, will be changed
for its correspondent imperfect one. But, as a table will
make all plain, we shall give one with the regular triliteral
verb: those which are subject to any defect will receive
these affixes according to the same model.
222, Table of the Abbreviated Pronouns as attached to
Verbs.
SINGULAR.
Pers. Forms proper for the Preterite Tense. Do. for the Present.
1 com. S— 3— NS ee
° i= CF e ee
2 masc. 7) in pausa clas or Fer —T— or ra in
° sim eo ew ee I “7|_— — nity: AE
2 fem gins lz, q7 ' a he aC r ies
3 masc. 5 bes cee le ae j—
3) fem. i eo} lose Lear i|— Phos
PLURAL
1 com. Biba 1) rene i Ret
2 masc. abe D2
2 fem. ts len
3 masc, D— D> poetice 1D D— D—, poeticé in
3 fem. Vay aay ir
~
262 LECTURE XIII. [ART. 222. 2.
2d; iia of the Present, when preceded by an Epenthetic
Nun.
SINGULAR.
4 com. 3 AQ for 9939—
aisaby AN MALE: cee PD
3 masc. 13— for Wa
Sf. 7 Bh
Examples oF THE THIRD Person SINGULAR PRETERITE oF
THE VERB, WITH ITS VARIOUS AFFIXED PRONOUNS.
IPD he visited me; TPP — us; IPD — thee,
m., TPB — thee, f.; OQIZD — you, m., |2IPR —
you, f.; IPD, or contr. 1478, or ITPB— him, MIPS
— her; DIPS, poeticé WOIPS — them, m., |IPd
— them, f.
Third Person Singular Feminine.
INTPD she visited me, com.; 1INIPH — us, com. ;
INIA — thee, m., WNWR — thee, f.; DINTP2 —
you, m., IAI — you, f.53 WIVIPB or INILR —
ris MINTPA or NHIPSD — her; DNTPS — them,
., JOIES — them, f.
Second Person Masculine.
TPS thou visitedst me, com.; 1 IP) — us, com.;
IAAP! or INIPD — him, SI TPD — her; OF TPS —
them, ., DIpA — them, f.
Second Person Feminine.
NTR — thou (fem.) visitedst me, com.; 1351p
— us, com.; WFVTIPS or WIPER — him, AIPA —
her ; OYVIPD them, m., PRIPB them, f.
ART. 222. 2.1) | ON THE PRONOUNS WITH VERBS. 263
First Person Singular Com.
pats L visited thee, wm. THIPR — thee, £3
DINIPR — you, m., IPNTPR — yous fs WONTRD oF
Ba > or him, OATPD — her; DIPS — them, m.,
pAtpS — them, f. Ae
Third Person Plural Com.
IPA they visited me, com.; 111P2 — us, com. ;
TIP — thee, m., JIIPA thee, f.; ODIRE — you,
m., J2 IPB — you, f.; IPR — him, WIRE —
her ; OIPR — them, m., or, poetice joyIpa, pips
them, f.
Second Person Plural Com.
VINIPD ye (com.) visited me; 1FIVIP2 — us, com. ;
WMNIPa — hem, mmtpa — her; Dina — them,
m., PAIPa — them, f.
First Person Plural Com.
ITPA we (com.) visited thee, m.; VI1PR — thee,
f.; DDIIPS — you, m., DTPA — you, f.; WAITPD
— him, MIR3. — her; DTA — them, m., }21P>
— them, f.
EXAMPLES OF THE PRESENT ‘TENSE, WITH THE AFFIXED
PRONOUNS.
Third Person Singular Mase.
IPE? Ae visits me,'com.; IPP) — ws, com. ;
q1p>) thee, m., J1p>. — thee, f.; DATPD: — you, m.,
iTpE — you, £5 WIPE: or TIRE: — him, IPD? or
mapst — her; DIP’ — them, m., oY, poeticé WO"TPD. ,
yIPa’ — them, f.; and so throughout.
264: LECTURE XIII. TART. 223.
Remarks.
223. It wilt be seen by the Table, that every possible combi-
nation of the verb with the pronoun thus affixed is not made: £
visited myself, thou visitedst thyself, and the like, would rather fall
under the province of one of the reciprocal species: as, F132, or
YAVTPEAT in Niphhdl or Hithpahél, and would not, therefore, be
made in Kal by affixing the pronouns: but, which of these species
is to be adopted, custom alone can determine. We have, never-
theless, a very few examples in which this combination is made in
Kal: as, wy I8 I have made myself, or, for myself, Ezek.
xxix. 5, in which the repetition of the pronoun seems to add some
emphasis to the passage.
2d, With respect to the vowels of the root, it will immediately
be perceived, that they are subject to the same laws which prevail in
the nouns, when receiving similar additions. In the asyllabic affixes,
for example, as the last consonant of the root must be taken in order
to commence the syllable, the preceding vowel must either be per-
fect, or rejected. But, neither of the vowels of the root in Kal is
immutable; and, as the first is the farthest removed from the accent,
it is rejeeted as in the nouns; and we have ‘31/22 just as we have
27, (Art. 161. 2.). In like manner, when the affix is syllabic, we
have the first vowel rejected, and the second made imperfect, as often
as the accent is with the affix: as, 527/25, just as we have N2727 in
the nouns. This necessarily holds good in the Present tense, the
Imperative, Infinitive, and Participles; as also in all the other species
Niphhal, Pihél, &c. as well as the defective verbs, nouns, and par-
ticiples, respect being duly had to the etymology of the words.
3d, In a few instances, the affix of the first person has (+) instead
of (-): as, "229 he hath heard me, Ps. exviii. 5; “2 thou hast
despised me, 2 Sam. xii. 10. But in the last case this seems to
have been brought about by the influence of the accent (Art.
130. 5.).
4th, For the feminine affix 4. "we sometimes have Fz: as
TSI? he hath called thee (fem.), Is. liv. 6. So 7ST thy being
created, Ezek. xxvill. 15, which are generally thought to be Chal-
daisms. In the last case, however, the pause-accent will be sufficient
to account for the anomaly (Art. 130. 5.).
5th, When, however, the accent is, on any occasion, drawn back,
?
ART. 223. 6..| ON THE PRONOUNS WITH VERBS. 265
the vowel accompanying the affix will necessarily be imperfect:
as, "OATS she hath loved thee (fem.); ©0322 she hath
them, &c.
6th, It should also be observed, that whenever the root ends in
either 1 or *> by the process of conjugation, &c. the affixes are
simply added: as, ‘217i22 without any previous vowel or Shévé; and,
that when the affixes are found both in the syllabic, and asyllabic,
forms, the syllabic must be taken in these cases: as, FVT22, not
TAPE they visited her; WWTP, not WD they visited him. The
reason is obvious: one vowel following another will remain unut-
terable; and, in order to avoid this, a consonant must be intro-
duced.
7th, In 417/72 the terminating vowel gives place to the vowel of the
affix: as, "2212 thou visitedst me.
8th, The form 7/22 is found in a few instances with the pro-
nominal affixes: as, 12AYDWT thou (fem.) hast adjured us, Josh.
ii. 17, 20: but, most frequently, the form ‘31722 is taken (see Art.
201. 24.): as, “I4VIP2H; and, without %, “222 thou (fem.) hast
visited me. When this is the case, it must be determined by the
context alone, whether the verb is of the first or second person. Ina
few cases also, (~) takes the place of (-): as, DATWT thou (fem.)
hast caused us to descend, Josh. i. 18.
9th, The second persons masculine and feminine plural take the
forms FATPB, instead of BAIT22 or W—- before the affixed pro-
nouns: as, "PUNT ye (com.) visited me. In this case, the conju-
gated pronoun seems to be of the Chaldaic form 78 you, instead of
the Hebrew one SES or JAN.
stolen.
On the Vowels of the Present Tense, Imperative, Infinitive,
and Participles.
224, As the terminating vowel of the Present tense is mutable
in the regular triliteral verb in Kal, it will be rejected upon receiving
any asyllabic affix: as, "21/722 he visits me; but, when the affix is
syllabic, it will be changed for its correspondent imperfect vowel : as,
TE? he visits thee, &c. due regard being had to the vowel as de-
termined by usage: 1. e. whether it be (1) (-), (-), or (+), and to
the following consonant, whether it be guttural or not.
In a few instances, the vowels proper for the affixes of the preterite
266 LECTURE XIII. [ART. 224. 2.
are found with those of the present: as, 29°DW) he will fill me, Job
ix. 18; 22D) he will acknowledge us, Is. \xiii. 16 ; OY) we mill strike
or pierce them, Num. xxi. 30, &c. And, vice versa, those proper for
the present with the preterite; as, ‘222. he hath corrected me,
Isa. vill. 11.
2d, These observations will apply to the affixing of the pronouns
to the present tenses of verbs of every species and sort.
3d, In the Imperatives, however, as they receive no preformatives,
the vowels will be regulated as they are in the nouns (which in
reality the Imperatives all are): and, as the form proper for con-
struction will take the affixed pronouns, the ultimate or penultimate
vowels alone can be subject to change, as in the nouns: e. g. rw
send me, from nw send : Dyow hear ye me, from yaw hear. So
WTI know thou him, from YF.
4th, Those terminating in (1) are thought to be subject to a
transposition: as, ‘27%2W keep thou me, from AW, I am inclined
to believe, however, that ay is the primitive word taken in these
cases, just as 12 seems to be in the forms ‘172 visit thou (fem.),
and 17/22 visit ye (masc.), whence we shall regularly have IAW, &e.
5th, The Infimitives are subject to the same general laws with the
Imperatives of Kal, and which also prevail in every species of the
Segolate nouns, i. e. we must enquire in the first place, what form of
the primitive has been taken, and then add our affixes, &c. just as the
augments are added to those nouns. Examples: pon his reigning,
from 720, or rather Th, OT my persecuting, from VT) or
FIN. So OPPNID for GPDNP (Art. 112. 2.) your spurning, from
pin or PNB; BZPW,, for O2DIP, your drawing near, from 29 or
a7). Sometimes obliquely (Art. 102. 2.): as, Q273P your reaping,
from 3)? or 73).
6th, It may be observed that, with the affixes 7—-, O2~-, and J2-,
both forms are found : as, ON thy eating, Gen. ii. 17; DDN your
eating, Gen. i. 5; Ww thy hearing, 2 Sam. v. 24; n2yw your
hearing, Josh. vi. 5. But, it seldom happens that the same word
is found in both forms: which seems to shew, that in one case,
one primitive form has been preferred, and in another, another.
7th, Infinitives of other forms are subject to the general laws which
prevail in nouns of the same forms.
ART. 224. 8..] ON THE PRONOUNS WITH VERBS. 267
8th, Nothing need be said on the manner in which the participles
receive the pronominal affixes. They are nothing more than nouns,
and are, therefore, subject to the same variations which are found to
prevail in them.
On he mode of affixing the Pronouns to the different parts of
the Defective Verbs.
225. It will not be necessary to detain the Student long
on this subject. He will only have to bear in mind, what
has been laid down in our Canons on the mutable and
quiescent characters of the letters “I$ —on J, as being
occasionally rejected —on roots, having the second and
third radical letter the same, and occasionally losing one,
which will, however, return, whenever circumstances
will allow it, under the form of Dagésh forte —and on
the vowels, as being regulated according to the occur-
rence of gutturals, the addition of syllabic, or asyllabic
augments, and the like; all of which has been abun-
dantly exemplified in the preceding sheets. We shall
now, therefore, take our leave of this subject, and
proceed to lay down tables, shewing the full conjugations
of the different kinds of verbs, in further illustration
of the rules detailed and exemplified in our present, and
preceding Lecture.
The following Table is taken from the “ Lehrgebaude
der Hebraischen Sprache” of Dr. Gesenius, with some
slight alterations.
PRETER.
Sing. 3 m
Plur. 3
In¥. abs.
Inr. const.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
iv
Plur. m.
.
PRESENT.
Sing. 3 m.
Sif
2 10.
mane
1
Plur. 3 m.
3 f.
gin:
A
1
PREs. apoc.
Part. act.
pass.
LECTURE
XIil.
Paradigm of Verbs in Kau.
Regular _—- Verb.
Verb. 1 gutt.
™eR GTP?
mop TTP
mye? ATWY
nyo my
sma AID
op ATA
ono? OTD,
eo WT
amp WTTPY
inn Tiny
Dep Tay
Mtn Thy
Op | TY
oe TY
mae mITHY
Dion Tay
Dopm Ty
Dep Way
Dips Tips
yep aye
nsbinon m7 PRE
soon yyy
mbbpans ayn
Depa Tay?
oop TAY
eR TMP
Verb.
2 gutt.
ppy
TDR
ADV
AV
ANY
UF,
onny
TAY
M3793
piyt
PY
ree
aye
WP¥E
TIRE
Py
py
PRIA
‘ET
Pais
WY.
Wee
wei
BREA
eke
pyr
raps
Verb.
3 gutt.
yaw
yaw
yy
AYPW
mY
apy
Day
yaw
yew
DAWA
EWN
DABS
aRW
MIVPwA
ApRwWN
mIVRwA
yiawa
vAw
paw
PART. 225.
Verb. Verb.
§ init. 44
wa2
m22 aR
Awa NBD
mw22 NAD
MwA RD
"P22 RP
DAwaa BEAD
WIDE
NWay = ANA
wig HRD
nwa ab
wa le)
wa = BD
i
mwa Mad
war a?
wan = 2Dh
wan = Dn
Win BDA
way DR
sie ie
nwam MZOA
Wan BDA
mwa MPAA
war 3
vs Ad
waa? DAD
ART. 225..|
ON THE
VERBS.
Paradigm of Verbs in Kau.
Verb. Verb.
S init. § init.
aw a
= =
aw} ai)
nw ni’
samme a
we
ee OORT 6s
oF
maw Tw
ay ow a
2h WOM Ap
2A wn An
AW OW) APN
aWN WN aR
ARES ERI | AHEM
naawA mw MANA
avn WA FO
MIawWA NWI NBA
oe
Net
pol a a5
aw pe ahy
Verb.
5 med.
ae
pays
3709799
DPPH
APA
MDRPA
Dap)
Di?
Oi,
map
Verb.
$3 med.
12
Verb.
Ry init.
NgD
PINVy
It sit
FASS
Tr #+%'I}‘T
AS3
‘HNP
ered)
DoNy2
Tans
TANS
NP
yen
a
masEn
Nem)
Sa
Nem
‘HEBA
NeDN
NID)
— mNgaA
BA ANZA
— MNzBA
DP?
Tre
iF
269
270
PRETER.
Sing. 3m.
3 f.
eke
2 4.
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
f.
Plur. m.
fr.
PRESENT.
Sing. 3. m.
3 f.
2 m.
2 if
Plur. 3 m.
PREs. apoc.
PARTICIPLE.
LECTURE XIII.
Paradigm of Verbs in NiPHHau.
Regular Verb. Verb.
Verb. 1gutt. 2 gutt.
Sop) Tey. = PP
m2079 MPEP. APY
MPO ATP APP?
ABP ATP APP
M?7wP2 UNTEP] APPA
Nop? APPZ AV
DA POP ONTY? ONPYI
TPO WNT? WMV
9772 NITAY2 PPI
BRT REI PT
RR TRY PRIN
eR NPRM BIT
WoT MRT VIN
FAVA TITY MINI
DPR TAR py
OREM TAyA ppin
OpPA AYA pyIN
OAM TEM VIA
DORN TRS PPIs
MOP. ATM. PVA
MI7AAMITAVA MIPIM
eA ATAPAS APIA
TIPOPATMITAYA MIpVIA
SPP] TAR PMID
Sop) Tey. pyr
Verb.
3 gutt.
AY WI
rpnws
DAY Dw.
WAyIw?
“IVAW?
yawn
wT
Vwi
AVIw TT
[ ART. 2265.
Verb.
5 init.
wing
ra
mwa
mw33
smwa3
33
nid}
Jabiloy
12D}
Bpw2a Oia
Ww
AWA?
waar
waa
aT
pT
17203
qaDd3
2p
2pm
polol a
yD
MIVA MWA NPBA
Dw
DEwWA
yEwN
‘pewA
YEwS
APIW?
waa
wan
waam
wan
waa
awa2)
2p.
apn
npn
ale} a
2PN
92D
NIVEA MW MBN
AVwAA
aw2AM
I2DA
TRUPBA Nha MEA
a
wea?
=)
ART. 295. .|
Verb.
Ug
nS init.
2283
4408 “MT ISIY BAL]
ON. THE
VERBS.
Paradigm of Verbs in NiPHHAL.
Verb.
§ init.
ple
maw
paws
Aw
mapit
VWI
onawsa
ABW
NAW
AIBWAN
aAWAR
maw
3y)92
awy3
Verb.
5 med.
bi
min
Hyp
nian
vanatire
3073
Enis
rablaniee)
937199}
Verb.
S med.
sey ay am 5h
Verb.
8 final.
NeP2
M32
ORz2
Falseaap)
WINRD
URZI3
DANE?
TSR 3
TINY
mANwN
N32
271
Verb.
- final.
T7223
mae
ma
m3
5 my 3
1729
eer
W229
>be >b)
272
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
re
Plur. m.
f.
PRESENT.
Sing. 3 m.
Sth
2m.
eit:
1
Plur. 3 m.
> f.
2m.
ii.
1
PrEs. apoc.
PARTICIPLE.
LECTURE XIil.
Paradigm of Verbs in Pret.
Regular
Verb.
boty,
men
m7?
m7?
Smo
WU?
pA yap
abu
mp
atepM
ma?
t9)22
Sranta
Verb.
1 gutt.
"repNSaI
Verb.
2 gutt.
TR
MF
NaF
NDF
SAIN
1972
DADA
W212
12292
arene ls
AIAN
ma>yBn
m3
Taye FW}
Verb.
3 gutt.
MIVEwA
spain
nayawin
vet
yew war
TART. 225.
Verb.
5 init.
war
‘IepNsaI
tian
Verb oT s
THe.
azo
Mani
AID
A230
‘22D
AAI
Dpmaaio
12210
132310
3310
*BBID
AAQIO
M2221
azip*
azion
anion
‘anion
33708
aaaio’
nzzzIon
aaTiOon
mzazion
ani02
aaion
ART. 295. |
ON THE VERBS.
>
Paradigm of Verbs in PiuEu.
Verb. Verb.
Ky init. $ or § init.
Dan By De)
“ 3 a
“e a ‘e
= 5 5.
bos mm 3
VaR sw aM
&e &e. &e
Day ap apy
&e. &e &e.
“AND
apy. 2
Verb.
5 med.
Dip
mip
rabalably
Mapp
vatelabip
MIP
app
DPD
AWAD
PPD
ops
mI
naapipn
aA
mp
opi
opp
si
Verb.
$ med.
ya
ISP] OY) OFT]
wa
7232
&e.
72)
&e.
rp hla)
Verb.
69 final.
NED
nye
ONE
fal -2a)
WSR
a2
TWINS
ANS
Niz79
Natt
BED
ake
TINE
nen)
Nm
nen
NEN
NEDN
aE}
mpNzA
EA
masern
Sage
Noh
273
Verb.
— final.
m3
m3
mya
mna
13
oma
abe
nA
ripa
274
PRETER.
Sing. 3 m.
3 f,
2 m.
Bt
Plur. 3
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
i.
Plur. m. |
e
PRESENT.
Sing. 3 m.
Di
2m.
2K.
1
Plur. 3 m.
Paradigm of Verbs in Punat.
Regular
Verb.
ta}?
mize
‘aaeyy
NE
APE?
17)
BAe
We?
a7)?
72
None.
le
Sen
Senn
wenn
el
12082"
sf nye
2.10;
AS
1
Pres. apoc.
PARTICIPLE.
(tA
mae
hte
tpn)
LECTURE XIII.
Verb.
1 gutt.
ee
Verb.
2 gutt.
722
272
A212
n22
wae
1972
onl1
7D
17992
“1e]nsa1
Tey 772
Lp >>
AN
TAN
PIAA
TAN
973)
M222AN
DIANA
MPAA
73?
&e.
apm Tb
Verb.
3 gutt.
yw
nyew
nyew
HYBwW
ADEW
ayEw
DAyEw
Paw
ay pwW
vw
ypw?
vEwA
yawn
Iw
DEW
apwW?
MIVEwA
PAWN
MIWA
yew)
pwn
CART. 225.
Verb. Verb.
5 init. S-+.
waa
mm api
mano
Haz
mato
‘nazio
AAI
mon
112270
122210
‘1epNsa1
wag = agi
wars anioy
anion
a2iDn
*ApION
Sa ION
ap 2iDY
nzazion
aapion
mgazion
32 1D3
&e.
war Spion
ART. 225. | ON THE VERBS. 273.
Paradigm of Verbs in Puwat.
Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb.
wf
& init. S or § init. § med. Smed. § final. 77 final.
box = aw 2 nai wis RBD m3
mip ratst=2A) mua
pip nese iba
mp mye NPR
‘ADE saga untba
sari aye ae
oan passe =o omsba
Tain SBD NPR
Ebial aarp) NB Pe?
Iejnger
*qepNsal
jepnsa1
FET OY) ONE]
Bs wy oppip «=o pia. NED riba
[PS SB aw DpIpy ay BB. APM
Daipn Neem PAA
ppipn nye Tyan
Dis MBN TPA
tay ioe vp2
mPRBIPA mysgeA Dan
appa apn pan
myapipA maxgen mp
nip NBD 7233
&e. &e. &e.
“4Se] OU) OY!
Yee apy ppine SBR P29
hee
276
Paradigm of Verbs in Hirunin.
Regular
PRETER, Verb.
Sing. 3m. SyppT
30 mosapr
om. APO
2 f, mop
1 PONT
19)
v M7. yovapT
2m. onbopm
Wet ties te dea
Plur.
af. IApopA
DONT
INFINITIVE. sop
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m. BNE
f. DONE
Plur. m. NOT
f, - MPPBAT
PRESENT.
‘Sing. 3. m. BI
sf BRE
2m. rai
af, ayn
1 ‘MOS
Plur. 3 m. VOD
gf MP pwPA
2m. al
af m2~AM
1 2079
Pres. apoc. Sep
ph) 27) =)
PARTICIPLE.
LECTURE XIII.
Verb.
1 gutt.
mpey
ATR
ATIVE
WTPRA
AMET
BA Teese
DRIA
DEPA
TDEYE
ATHY?
MITRPA
TMP
MTPYA
VPYA
Tay,
TRYP
Verb.
2 gutt.
Verb.
3 gutt.
PPI pws
TP wT
nypwin
AYIwH
‘\ApRwWT
AD Aw
Aya
IPIwT
yaw
*1epnSa1
DpH yawn
ma Daw
yyw
PWT
myEwA
Pp Dypw
DPN
pwn
saw
yaw
TIPPwA
ADAWN
AIPM
yaw
&e.
pyr | pipes
Py yyw
CART. 225,
Verb. Verb.
§ init. s+.
wat | Pn
mya MBPA
Awan OVD
mwa NiaoT
‘Awa ROT
wat ADD
DAW IT DAA
yRwam yao
yIwart ANAT
writ = ADI
wag = ART
Wat YARE
wham BPA
MIwan MPa
uray PY
wan apn
wan PM
sty an ADA
was = SPS
yway ADS
TIWAN APRON
wa APA
MIwan Msn
wrad pa
way
wad oP
ART. 225. _] ON THE VERBS.
Paradigm of Verbs in Hiruutt.
Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb.
sf init, —§ or § init. Smed. §Smed. & final.
SOS win =e oop pad owen
= OPPIT MET my _ mpg
iy AIWIN AAT Ove s ASeen
5 omavin ape nippy = onsen
+ onagin cmap onippy 2 ns
wit ADOT wp AN LT
DAawin onan aniapr DOSY
MQW Wao Wop Sg
W.IwiT IAD pT VNB
OW win Ip BP Pa Sean
CAS win ap OBR ra NBT
Dwi Don “Dp eT
&e owin ame | (pA ANSE
maw AAP TBA MARZO
a aw a BN PRD NBD
win | Aa mp NBA
“win opp oop Fo ween
win sn pabieia) zt oS etatg)
DWwIN | _ DS pyps 3 NYS
yw aay 729? ANNE)
MWWIN MIRA APA MRED
win ADA AMPA ANN
mawin mI! APA MBNBOA
= nrg.
Das. SBP RN ON, Nee?
asp swin DH DYE PRP NPE
277
Verb.
= final.
maa
ANAT
alien
abe
5 fab) am
rein
non
Wea
a7
Aw
2a
“a0
1237)
D2
a>
m2
man
waa
mas
173)
maa
730
mp2
ae
278 LECTURE XIII. CART. 225,
Paradigm of Verbs in Horunar,
Regular Verb. Verb. Verb Verb. Verb.
PRETER. Verb. 1 gutt. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 5 init. 7:
Sing. Sm. Dep eR PRN DPW wart Span
$f Mop MPP TPR MpRwr mwa mapan
2m. MPT ATP
af Ape ATP
BY
APY HyRwW Awan Mian
ANY HYPwW Ava NipDaw
1 SmbYP TERT MARI ype Awan snips
Plur. 3 Nop PART) WRT ApEwry wT AApAN
am. DAVE BATODA BAVA oAyew opwa oniapan
2f. INPOPT WNT API WPI Awa Wiapan
1 IPT TERA UaPPIFT ayPwWrT AQwWarT AaipDAM
Ineimve. OOD TAY Py pew | owan | oSDn
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
f none.
Plur. m.
f.
PRESENT. ;
Sine. Smtr RT), SER ARS SRR wae Soe
sf Soph EPA PME) Yew wan spam
2m. OPA BRA Py YEwmA wan spam
af, POP OIA PEED pew Wan = Yapan
I Sops PPS PRIS VERA wis — IpAN
Plur.3m. VO PHY. MYR PW. Way apy
gf, TRYOPM ATIPRA MIPVIN MIPEwW MIwWan MPzZd»n
am. S7OPA TRPA PMI ApRwA Awan japan
of MIPOPN NITRA TAVIN MVEwWM MwWan MpP_DaNn
1 “op? eee Pw. wag ap
PrEs. apoc.
Partiortxr. PPh WYP Pry vewe wap 3p
ART. 225. ]
Verb.
& init.
bown
iT lt
LIAL ant
ON THE VERBS,
Paradigm of Verbs in HopuHat.
Verb.
Miers
Se i init.
“
apa AT
TM2waAN
papi
ABwAT
‘ae
NAW
pAawart
WADwaN
VIDWAT
ayant
apa
wan
wan
‘pean
WAN
aan
nyapan
AAWAM
n3apan
awd
awa ap
"ySB] OY} OXI
po
ba
Verb.
5 med.
BPA
TDP
mp
mewn
SEDAN
aA
Dpapan
Aaj
op
ppm
DPA
‘BPA
Dyas
7
nA
pate ya)
nIPAM
nya
pp
Verb.
S med.
wn
“SPT IYI Ol]
7M
72
&e.
1272
Verb.
3 final.
NEOT
FSS]
ANT]
ANBEH
Fal etaTa
ASBIOTT
DANS
TANSET
NEI]
Neon
Nyt
Nzn
Neon
NEBR
NEN
ann?
MNzOA
NEA
mNzAA
Nem
See
279
Verb.
a final.
maa
mea
man
mii
Fable? in
re
Fade
abe
2a)
row
mn
man
m2
>To)
mas
v2
man
avo
man
223
m2
280
PRETER.
Sing. 3 m.
'e be
27m.
“dy f
l
Plur. 3 m.
Ae 0
Pet
i
INFINITIVE.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. m.
f.
Plur. m.
f.
PRESENT.
Sing. 3 m.
a
aN Wf
2 it,
]
Plur. 3 m.
Pye
2m.
9 f:
Pres. apoc.
PARTICIPLE.
LECTURE XII. [ART. 225.
Paradigm of Verbs in Hitupanet.
Regular Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb. Verb.
Verb. 1 gutt. 2 gutt. 3 gutt. 4 init. s4-
Sapam apa end onbana wand bbiann
meno MDIBOM Apa mya ian
moepo @ aenn Anbpn 6 — Aen
Apppn = onpend moan & oAbbiann
Saber ala Mp WanT MANA many
ea AIBN NRT TUM
opvepnm = BRENT DAMP poi
wnoepnn WWSIaAT yAMPan 122
a7 DENT MANN Parlay
Denn Tapnm Tan ombang wana Ybiann
“eNO Tayo En npn wan Sbiann
ey ‘PIpO nan 27 aN
sep &e. asranm apa ke. ian
men MIEN MINT m2? 2a
boom taym amam oobam gam Sbian
Sep Tana mbann 22a
bypnm Se oqmann ombanm §& bbiann
apn Nm opm og = ebann
buon Tans mans —£ dbany
DMN mam oamam "beta
mPa MI2VEanA MINA my?2iann
yee rials aaNA Pann ree tals)
mayepmn MIAN Mana mayan
rapa Tam many i2ia3
bypna apne anana nobane wane dbiann
ART. 225. | ON THE VERBS.
Paradigm of Verbs in HrruHraur..
Verb.
& init,
Verb.
$ init.
Verb.
$ init.
Verb.
5 med.
Verb.
$ med.
PASO apo api epiphany
mamipny
nepipay
NANT
DPA
apa
DAD pT
WDA
VDP
“Iv[NBa1
*1epnsel
"1B[nsal
“yse] OU} OF!
Yasin ayunin apm opipnt iiann
besoin awn aun
&e. &e.
paipan
ppp
MUN
mI PAT
wanhy
&e. &e.
beam awem ayn
&e. &e.
papa
papa
‘RPA
oR PAS
mT
mI PAN
app
map
DAWN
wWaM
“repasal
“Iepnsal
‘JeNGaI
“ysey] oy} 9%]
boxna agyme awe opipme jinn
Verb.
Ky final.
SEO
aaa
ABT
nSeDOT
sONBBNT
NIONT
opsspnn
TOSEENT
‘NBO
SEDO
NEDO
ST
SEIT
MINN
NED
Serra
SEDI
‘WEIN
RBIS
WS”
Masse
ARS
MSA nn
sen
Sbiatale)
281
Verb.
= final.
mann
mR
pan
nybann
5 fab) Prara
ape balay
oo ban
Faber taral
sani
nvanm
abr ial
sbanm
abana
maT
areray
mann
‘ban
abetaly)
aU
mann
NAMA
mpPann
Tan
282 LECTURE XIV. [ ART. 226.
LECTURE XIV.
ON THE SYNTAX.
226. In endeavouring to investigate the principles of
the Hebrew Syntax, we shall first consider the nature
and construction of propositions; secondly, those of their
several parts; and, lastly, shew how these have been
combined, according to the Authors of the accents.
2d, In the first place, then, every proposition will be
either general or particular. A general proposition is
that which contains a complete sentence, expressive of
some general truth, without reference to particulars :
as, “‘ Men die.” A particular, or singular, proposition (as
it is sometimes called), expresses only that which relates
to particular individuals: as, “ The men die.” Hence,
3d, When any general proposition is enounced in
Hebrew, the word, or words, used for the purpose of
expressing the subject, will, generally, be indefinite:
i.e. will not have the definite article, or be otherwise
defined ;* while that which is intended to be the most
impressive, will stand first in order: e.g. pay") pay
* In such expressions as FT/D*TIN m7 IM the law of the Lord is
perfect, &c. Ps. xix. 8, &c. although the ne is general, the proposition is not
so; because it relates to one particular, not to any general, law.
The subject and predicate are, according to the Grammarians of Arabia,
two words so placed, that they may be independent of each other in a
grammatical or formal point of view, their relation being purely cna The
ite of the Hiduyat oon Nahve (p. *°) says, a Lar a sia
S
Sir S>-
eae Jat “Soy ya pa poe
ART. 226. 4. | ON THE SYNTAX. 283
JIN“ VP? (any one) * sowine iniquity, reaps vanity, Prov.
xxii. 83 WeN7D2I ANY DP DY (as) DEEP WATERS
(so is) counsel in the heart of man, Ib. xx. 5.
4th, And, on the contrary, when any particular pro-
position is to be enounced, the word or words ex-
pressive of its subject must be made definite: as,
DW M4 wma (as to) THE sERPENT, he was subtle,
Gen. iii. 1; DW FI PD THE PRECEPTS oF JEHOVAH
(are) right, Ps. xix.9. This holds good whether the
proposition be affirmative or negative.
5th, Hence Isa. i. 13, ‘ It is iniquity, even the solemn meeting,” is:
incorrect ; for then we must have had 23357) 78 in order to
point out the subject as definite. We must consider T73¥, therefore,
as being in apposition with the predicate ; and the sense will be: “ it
is iniquity and a restraint,” or the like.
6th, Propositions may also be Incomplex, Complex ;
Simple, or Compound.
7th, Incomplex propositions are those which contain
Ea
sl dd} > The subject and predicate are two words construed inde-
pendently of uny GRAMMATICAL government. The first is that of which something
is predicated, and 1s called Vines! or, the beginning: the second is that by
which this predication is made, and s termed rx)] the enouncer : as, ZatD (is)
stanpinc. The government of them is regulated by the sense (or, is logical ),
that is, by the beginning,” or subject matter of the discourse.
This conjunction of words is termed by them ald, and is thus described
= we we
by Ibn ul Hajib: us? ENS ty re wl als Bison) lo
en!s ee &e 5) opel “Tt is that which comprehends two words in
connection with each other, which cannot happen except in the concurrence
of two nouns, or, of a verb and noun.” The word constituting the subject
(s) xine!) is, according to El Hazeri, placed first, on account of the importance
which it holds in the estimation of the speaker or writer.” See Commentary on
the Agrumia, by Schnabell, Amsterdam, 1755, p. +-W91.
* The capitals are intended to point out the words upon which the rule
immediately bears.
284 LECTURE XIV. [ART. 226. 8.
no qualifying, or otherwise modifying, words in con-
nection with either the subject or predicate. Complex
propositions are those which have such words. Of the
first, MA 33) a house is built, Prov. xxiv. 3, is an ex-
ample. Of the second, Ma M2) MDInA4 in, or by,
wisdom is a house built, Ib.
8th, Simple propositions are those which contain no
supplementary or subordinate parts. Compound pro-
positions are those which have such parts. Example of
the first, M2 722. MQINA in wisdom is a house built.
Of the second, APD) HOLM AN AM 7 YW ANI the
spirit of Jehovah, the spiriv of wisdom and discretion,
shall rest upon him, Is. xi. 2.
9th, Of Complex and Compound propositions examples will be given
hereafter. We shall now proceed to consider the relation of the sub-
‘ject with the predicate; which is indeed necessary to point out the
construction of simple and incomplex propositions.
Of the Predicate of Propositions.
227. The predicate of any proposition may consist of
nouns attributive or substantive (if predicables), or of
verbs or pronouns, as in other languages.
2d, Every proposition, whether general or particular,
will, unless something particular require the contrary,
have its predicate indefinite. (Verbs, of course, when
in the predicate, do not come under this rule, because
it cannot be said of them, that they are either definite
or indefinite): e. g. AIT ApwY AMw a@ whore (is) a
deep ditch, Prov. xxii. 27.
3d, Here, 72% being indefinite, the proposition will be general:
and, as the rule requires the predicate also to be indefinite, this
becomes a case in which some ambiguity might arise, as to which of
the substantives is the subject of the proposition. And such am-
biguities are occasionally met with.
ART. 227, 4. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 285
4th, Examples of particular propositions: 7 wm3m)
OMY and (as to) THE SERPENT (he) was subtle, Gen. iii. 1 ;
#7919 mim Jehovah (is) king, Ps. x. 16. With a verb:
DTN S72 HE CREATED (i. e.) Gop, Gen. i. 1.
5th, When, however, any thing specific is intended
to be enounced by the predicate, it will be made defi-
nite: as, DT7NT NIT im OANT NIM MIM Jehovah
he is tHE Gop, Jehovah he is THE Gop, 1 Kings
xvii. 39.
6th, Here, as both the subject and predicate are made definite,
unless a pronoun (as 8¥7 in this instance) be introduced in the place
of the logical copula; or, unless the construction shall otherwise tend
to explain the intention of the writer, an ambiguity will arise, as to which
of the words so defined is to be considered as the subject: e. g. SATIN
“2TSN I (am) he who speaketh, Isa. li. 6. Or, taking S71 as the
logical copula, I am the speaker. But, by inverting the proposition,
(as to) the speaker, itis I, In all these cases, however, the sense af-
forded is the same. In others, where it is not, we have no other
resource than the order of the construction, or the general sense of
the context to guide us.
7th, From this and the case above noticed (Art. 227. 3.) some
difficulties will occasionally arise in construing the Hebrew text,
particularly in the books of Job, the Psalms, the Proverbs, and the
Prophets, where the style is often sententious and the order
inverted.
With respect to the last example, it may be remarked, that as the
Hebrews have no abstract verb, which can stand for our logical
copula is; and, as any pronoun may stand in the predicate of a sen-
tence, due regard must be had to the subject of the context, in order
to ascertain which of the pronouns, when more than one is used, is in
the predicate: e. g. In Isa. xli. 4, we have SVI™2IN TJ he, where a
* Exod. xxxiv. 6, &c. 1977) OAT ON mala TIT Jehovak Jehovah (is)
a God merciful and gracious, &c. Both the construction and accents require
that this passage be thus taken. Our translators, however, have taken it
differently.
286 LECTURE XIV. [ART. 298.
very slight consideration of the context will shew us, that ‘28 is to be
considered as being in apposition with the subject of the sentence
M7, and that NYT must be in the predicate. See also Deut.
xxxli. 39, Neh. ix. 7, Jer. xiv. 22, Isa. xli. 4, xl. 25, &c.
Of the Concordance of the Subject with the Predicate.
228. Whatever is predicated of any thing, must not
be incongruous with it, in sense at least; what the
grammatical agreement may be, we shall see presently.
2d, As the Grammatical forms of words were perhaps
not much attended to in very early times, a difference
in termination, for the purpose of distinguishing between
the feminine and the masculine gender would, pro-
bably, be among the first wanted, particularly in cases
wherein there was no other means of intimating of what
sex the person spoken of may be. Number would
soon be in the same predicament; and hence, such ter-
minations generally agreed upon, and allowed to intimate
these particulars; or, other words used at first as attri-
butes, and afterwards abridged and adopted as ter-
minations, would be made to supply these defects. The
latter of which I am inclined to believe is the fact.
3d, If, then, it could ever be necessary to make any
such distinctions as these, it must have been so in the
subjects and predicates of sentences: because, as the
one must be known to refer to the other; and, as this
could not be pointed out, in many cases, without some
mark to apprize us of such relation, these terminations
must necessarily have been employed in such cases.
4th, In process of time, however, recourse would be
had to the several figures of Rhetoric, such as Personifi-
cation, Epanorthosis, Metonymy, or the like, each of
which would exert a very considerable influence on the
ART. 228. 5..] ON THE SYNTAX. 287
construction of sentences. This is often found to be
the case. When, therefore, we are to consider the
relation of a subject with its predicate in the Hebrew, it
will sometimes be found necessary to have recourse to
one or other of these figures.
5th, Generally then, the Predicate is found to agree
with its subject in gender and number, considered either
in a logical or a formal point of view.
By logical we mean, when the gender, number, &c. is regulated, not
according to the grammatical forms of words, but by their significa-
tions ; in which case they may be influenced by any of the figures of
rhetoric, or not. By formal we mean, when the gender, number, &c.
are considered, with reference to the grammatical forms only: e. g.
>> MTTAM my pwa mwa Jerusalem HATH STUMBLED, and Judah
HATH fallen, Isa. iii. 8. Here py opiany is considered as being feminine,
not as to form, but signification (Art. 142. 4.); its predicate, there-
fore, mow , may be said to be in logical, not in formal, concordance
with it. In the next member, MTV, though feminine im form, is not
considered as being so in signification; its predicate, therefore, is put
in the masculine gender, ?22.*
6th, In the example mon MV) And (there) shall be a high way,
Is. xi. 16, the concordance is purely formal. The same may be said
Olin: Dw mts God (is) holy ones, Jos. xxiv. 19; YS VST
DTS They caused me to wander, (i. e.) God, Gen. xx. 18. See also
Gen. xxxv. 7, 2 Sam. vil. 23, Jer. x. 10. In all which cases the
agreement seems to have been made with reference to the forms only,
and not to the significations, of words.
* Hence the names of nations, tribes, or families, may be taken either as col-
lective, or as singular, nouns; and the names of regions, cities, &c. as singular
feminine nouns, considered as containers, &c. See Exod. xiv. 30, Jer. xlviii. 11,
1 Kings xx. 20, 2 Sam. xvi. 3, Ps. exiv. 2, Jobi.15. When, however, a
verb is used as the predicate, as will be presently seen, the apparent nominative
is not the real nominative or subject: but, as this must be in apposition with
the real subject, the rule respecting the concordance holds good.
+ I am well aware that these and similar passages have been appealed to in
support of the doctrine of the Holy Trinity; but, until it shall be made to
288 LECTURE XIV. [ART. 228. 7.
7th, The following is an instance of Personification :
pw Die pIY wD) MOSrIM grace and truth
have met each other, righteousness and peace have
SALUTED each other, Ps. \xxxiv. 11; i.e. they have met
and saluted as men generally do, when on good terms
with one another.
8th, The following ones, of Metonymy :* OJX"J3 an
UND BID the sons of mean men (are) vanity, the
sons of eminent men (are) a he, i.e. they are in effect
as deceptive as vanity, or a he; yv abs bie) its walls (are)
wood, i.e. made of wood, Ezek. xi. 22; OMYII oD yw)
wip the vessels of the young made (are) holiness, i.e. made
holy, 1 Sam. xxi. 6; M279 Mangan + The work (is) an
increasing, Neh. iv. 18, 1. e. is in a state of progress.
So we say in English, “ Knowledge is power,” i. e. it is
the cause of power; ‘‘ Money is a defence,” is the means
of obtaining a defence.
9th, When one Predicate answers to several subjects,
differing from each other either in gender, number, or
both, it may be put in the plural number, as referrmg to
them all; or, it may be made to agree, both in gender
and number, with the nearest, or, with that which might
be considered as the most worthy :{ e.g. 77W1 0779281
Ot and Abraham and Sarah (were) op, Gen.
xviii, 11; 12 ixay-y %D\) Joma OP So he
appear probable, that the Sacred Writers did usually involve doctrines of this
kind in the mere forms of words, I must be allowed to object to such methods
of supporting an article of faith, which stands in need of no such support.
* See Glass. Philolog. Sacr. p. 838—97. Storr. Observ. p. 13, &c.
+ Storr. pp. 11.17, &c. The use of abstracts for concretes, Storr refers
to a Synecdoche, see p. 20; and vice versa, p. 21.
{ The plural is considered as more worthy than the singular, and the mas-
culine than the feminine gender. But, in the last case, the mother will be
considered as more worthy than the children.
ART, 228. 10.1] ON THE SYNTAX. 289
arose, (i.e.) Abimelek and Phicol the captain of his
host, AND THEY RETURNED, Gen. xxi. 32.
10th, When, however, the predicate precedes, it generally agrees with
the nearest noun; but, when it follows, it will mostly take the plural
form, as in the last example. See also Gen. viii. 16. 18, xxxi. 14,
paelieie ee OUs) XVilwlO, XXII, 4° XXIx. Lo, o NUMCRU, Fo XX Vile |,
Deut. xxvii. 32, Judg. xii. 20, Ruth i. 3, Est. ix. 31, 1 Chron.
TeV, JODERIX Aloe Prous vile (4 1S. XVIe) 0, lings Blerrmavile 20:
fizek. 1. 11, xxxv. 10.
11th, When the subject is a Collective noun, the
Predicate may be in the plural number, agreeing with
its subject logically: e. g. OTIS) May-2D the whole
of her people (are) sicuinc, Lam. 1. 11; NIwy
TOS Na WY. DID TON ten acres of vineyard (THEY)
YIELD one bath, Is. v. 10.
12th, When the subject of any Proposition is found
in the definite state of construction with any word (see
Art. 151.), the predicate is mostly made to agree in
gender and number with the last of them, provided the
signification of the predicate can apply to both (by the
figure Zeugma): e. g. ON DPS PON W7 “ip the
voice of thy brother’s bloods (THEY ARE) CRYING to me,*
Gen. iv. 10; DAM D2) NYP the bow of the mighty
(ones, THEY ARE) BROKEN, 1 Sam. ii. 4.
See also Lev. xiii. 9, 1 Kings 1. 41, xvil. 16, Job xv. 20, xxxii. 7,
RX VII) 21 ed CLE LV129 5) X28) &e.
* M. de Sacy says on the Arabic construction which is parallel to this:
“¢ On peut regarder la concordance, en ce cas, comme une concordance logique,
parce qu’on y a plus égard au rapport logique qui unit les idées, qu’au rapport
ee Ch ees
grammatical qui se trouve entre les mots.” Vol. ii. Art. 332. e.g. Cammy w)|
+ CPUma + Ss 7 fwm2Q .
en ws uy rau Surely the mercy of God (is) near to those
who do good. And Storr, (Nomen) rectum numerari debet principale. Observ.
p: 362.
U
290 LECTURE XIV. [ART. 228. 13.
13th, In some cases, however, it is made to agree
with the subject: as, “Wy 85 MND oD the whole
of the work (it) SHALL not BE DONE, Exod. xu. 16.
See also Gen. v. 23, 31, Is. Ixiv. 10, Nah. iii. 7, &c. And par-
ticularly when the predicate stands first in the order: as, Nj? TD
BYMIDS the envy of Ephraim (it) suatt prepart, Isa. xi. 13.
Of the Concordance of the Nominative with its Verb.
229. The Concordance of a real nominative with
its verb, is that of a subject with its predicate. By a
real norninative, we mean, the pronoun which is always
inherent in the verb when in the state of conjugation
(See Art. 202.). What, therefore, is usually taken for
the nominative is, in fact, either a noun or a pronoun
put in apposition with this nominative ; and consequently,
as before, agreeing either logically or formally with it, or
with the predicate. Considered, therefore, in this point
of view, all the cases of apparent discrepancy which
can happen under this head, may be resolved into one
or other of the preceding ones: e. g. DYN 872 he
created (i. e.) Gop, Gen. 1. 1.
Here the word Dy is manifestly a plural form : but, as the Being
here designated by this word is every where affirmed to be one, the
agreement between the pronoun inherent in the verb 872 and this
word is logical, not formal. The same may be said of DTN 738)
he says (i. e.) God; and of many other similar constructions.
2d, Examples of apparent discrepancies in gender and
number : Ist, malaylpln --- DIM at became strong (i. e.) the
war, 2 Kings iii, 26; 2d, JNMDW KAA he hath brought
(i. e.) thy handmaid, 1 Sam. xxv. 27; 3d, MWYI AM
mana he may be (i.e.) the young woman, a virgin, Deut.
xxii. 23; 4th, PDI YIN what they will be (i. e.)
his dreams, Gen. xxvii. 20; Sth, IIA TAN they saw her
(i. e.) daughters, Cant. vi. 9.
ART. 229. 3. | ON THE SYNTAX. 291
3d, With the apparent nominative preceding: 6th,
OVUI).-- AYA knowledge ... it, or he, is pleasant, Prov.
i. 10; 7th, oy ri (as to) her cities, it, or he, has
ascended, Jer. xlviii. 15; 8th, NDT DM nia (as to)
the arms of the orphans, tt is broken, Job xxii. 9.
4th, The first five of these examples seem to involve an Epanor-
thosis, a figure constantly used in the Arabic, by which something
enouuced in a general manner, is afterwards restricted by the addition
wI Um IP -w
of other words. Of this the Arabs count four sorts, 1, rate} eBS)
wI Um i,
raed) wre? i.e. the change of the whole for the whole, or, when any
thing is enounced by one or more words, another enunciation is added
RAS -
to the same effect, but in a different point of view: as, ree usiite
AVES 7 O7U md IAN
Os Omar came to me (I mean) thy brother ; 2, ye een! Gay
w I Cm o9 9 eo ghee 7
JS) the change of a part for the whole: > prin po) 3jtl>
- © la WM
the people came to me (1 mean) some of them; 3, tes eRY)
the change of the contamed for the Re Or, vice versa: as,
oad SLR) SHAR FLUmD 977
hy) dh 5 Qavw Zaid was stripped (I mean) his garment ; 4, bls! Ja
“7 Uo ~SUre
the change of error: as, Urs KK yo I passed by a dog (I
mean) a horse. See M. de Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. ii. pp. 225. 394.
The 4] gy by Moolla Jami, pp. "+-r*0, Glass. edit. Dathe,
on the Epanorthosis, pp. 1350—2.
In the first example, then, it is generally announced, that some
person or thing has acquired power ; it is then added, that this is the
nar. The same may be said of the four following ones. In the sixth
example, either a personification is resorted to; or, some such word as
27 affair, matter, thing, or the like, is to be supplied by the ellipsis :
as, knowledge (it is a person, or thing), that gives pleasure. In the
seventh and eighth, the plurals seem to be taken collectively : as, her
cities (the whole), has gone up. The arms of the orphans (the whole),
ts broken.
U2
292 LECTURE XIV. [ ART. 229. 5.
5th, When the verb 1" is introduced, it is sometimes
found to agree with the subject, at others with the
predicate: e.g. FIDW AYN OMI thy reward SHALL BE
the spotted ones, Gen. xxxi. 8; WYyrI MIN ADAY
IT SHALL BE a devastation (i. e.) Mount Seir, Ezek.
Xxxv. 15.
6th, So also when a personal pronoun occupies the
place of this verb: e. g. 817 2725 DVT Nipm (as to)
the statutes of the people, 1v 1S VANITY, Jer. x. 3.
i.e. taken collectively.
7th, When, however, inanimate or irrational beings
are represented as agents, the feminine form of the verb,
is, for the most part, preferred :* e. g. MMFPDD FOWN
VIS “DY a bears away (i. e.) her effusions, the dust of
the earth, Job xiv. 19; OVW DYDDN ‘naw the lips
of the wise, it preserves them, Prov. xiv. 3. See also
1 Sam. iv. 15, 2 Sam. x. 9, Job xu. 7, xx. 11, Ps. cxix. 98,
Is. lix. 12, Jer. xlviil. 41, li. 56, Mice. iv. 11.
8th, When the apparent nominative is in the defi-
nite state of construction (see Art. 151.) with another
noun, the verb will occasionally agree with the latter:
e.g. Taw 1) Mayr 39D WDD the concubine of Caleb
vies Maachah (he) begat Sheber, 1 Chron. ti. 48.
Which is the same case with that detailed (Art. 228. 12.),
subject to the figure Zeugma.
9th, When courage, virility, fortitude, efficiency, or
the like, is intended to be predicated of females, verbs
expressive of any acts, &c. done by them, seem to be
put in the masculine gender for that purpose; e. g.
* This is a constant law in the Arabic, and generally in all the dialects of
this family of languages, viz. that it is only when the agent is a rational being
that the concordance is formal.
ART, 229. 10. | ON THE SYNTAX. 293
Tay) DVT OY Dw IWS as ye (women) HAVE
DONE (courageously) with the dead and with me, Ruth
i 8; FID WIR UND OMIM and ye (women) sHALL
KNow (effectively) that I am the Lord Jehovah, Ezek.
xxi. 49 ; Som Mya WYN) and thou (fem.) doest
evil things, and thou PREVAILEST (manfully), Jer. ii. 5.
See also 1 Sam. ii. 20, 1 Kings xi. 3, 2 Kings viii. 6, Is. lvii. 3,
Ezek. xxii. 4, Hos. xiv. 1, Job xxi. 10, Cant..ii. 7, iil. 5, v. 8, viii. 4,
Est. i. 20, Ezr. x. 44, &c.* |
10th, It has been laid down as a general rule, that the
word intended to be considered as the most important in
a sentence will stand first (Art. 226. 3.). When, there-
fore, this happens to be the apparent nominative to a
verb, it has generally been termed the Nominative
absolute.
11th, The office of a nominative absolute is to enounce
the subject matter of discourse (p. 282. note) ; which, as it
is done in a manner independent of any of the following
context in a formal point of view, has been termed abso-
lute. Nevertheless, any nouns, pronouns, &c. following,
and referring to this nominative, must agree with it either
logically, or formally: e.g. MWY)..-- SOTIMN7D WH] &c.
(as to) a soul, when it shall sin ... AND HE DO, &c., Lev.
iv.2; i.e. as spoken of a person, DANY] DOWIN AIWYI
and (as to) TEN MEN, they were found among them,
Jer. xli. 8; TOM DDN PIN Ja Nw) but (as to)
Mephibosheth, the son of thy master, HE SHALL EAT con-.
tinually, 2 Sam. ix. 10; 77M) ABW Aa jwiyar
* It is a curious fact, that the Grammarians of Arabia consider females as.
being unintelligent agents, not absolutely, but relatively; and hence they
account for these agents having in grammar the same government with collective
inanimate nouns. See the Shurho Moolla Jami, p.™'4.
294 LECTURE XIV. [ART- 229. 13.
and (as to) his concubine, whose name was Reumah,
SHE ALSO BROUGHT FoRTH, Gen. xxil. 24.
12th, There is also a great number of instances, in which
the Subject of the discourse is thus absolutely enounced
(Art. 226.), by one or more words, which are not apparent
nominatives to verbs, but which are nevertheless termed
NOMINATIVES ABSOLUTE: e. g. AYDW IWS OMAN (as to)
THE worps which thou hast heard, &c., 2 Kings xxu. 18;
Ow JINR - mat Ws ID (as to) THE WORD
which thou ae ee . we regard not, Jer. xliv. 16;
PSI AAT Mo faye (as to) THE SIMILITUDE of
the living creatures, THEIR appearances, &c., Ezek. i. 13;
PNY) ::-- OPS NIN WF Em and (as to) EVERY
MATTER of wisdom (and) discrimination .... so he found
them, Dan. i. 20; FAS IT 727 US (as for) Me, be-
hold my covenant 1s with thee, Gen. xvii. 4, &c.
13th, The relative pronoun "WN seems often to be
subject to this kind of construction, though always in a
subordinate point of view, and when the subject matter
of such proposition is not the real subject of the discourse,
but is to be referred to it: e. g. M17 1257 WR (as to)
WHICH, the wind disperses it, Ps. 1. 4; snbab NW IWR
ara) 28 (as to) WHICH, a Romnancss thee for not eat-
ing of it, &c., Gen. i ; DIX TT IDI YI Awe
(with respect to) WHOM, “ae word of the Lord came to
him, &c., Jer. 1. 2.
14th, This view of such constructions will account
for the apparent pleonasm of the pronoun in Hebrew ;
and which, in some instances, has found its way into our
own version. See also Exod. vi. 4, Lev. xviii. 5, Num.
xi. 27, Deut. xxvii. 49, 2 Kings xi. 14, Jer. xiv. 1,
Ezek. xx. 11, xxxvu. 25, Joel iv. 2, Ps. xev. 5, and with
w Kccles. u. 21.
15th, From the unconnected situation of words thus
ART. 229. 15. _] ON THE SYNTAX. 295
constructed, it will be necessary, In rendering them in
our language, and some others, to prefix some such
expression as, with reference to, with respect to, as to,
or the like, otherwise. our construing, will appear. bald
and unintelligible. This will account for most of the
additional words found within brackets in. this work.—
There are instances, however, in the Hebrew, in which
these supplementary words are given:* e. g. Dwitp?
YISATWS as to the saints who are in the land, Ps.
xvi. 3; JOM IAS DID? as To the afflicted man, from
his friend (there should be) kindness, Job vi. 14;
‘XDD DIPS with respect to the place of my throne,
&c., Ezek. xlii. 7; VIN and, as to his generation,
Seveies li. 8.
16th, Any word, like 7Ws (No. 13,) may be em-
ployed as a subordinate nominative absolute, according
to the pleasure of the writer; but, when this is done, its
connection with some former word, &c., which may involve
the real subject matter of the discourse, will be pointed
out by the intervention of some other word: e. g.
mio 9 Talat 1D FoR, (as to) him who announced to me,
saying, &c., 2 Sam. iv. 10; ‘37) 87D) EVEN, (as to) me,
at will happen to me, Eccl. ii. 15.
17th, In some instances, also, we find both the leading
and subordinate subject of a discourse placed together,
without any such mark of distinction: e. g. TI 13718)
WAAW x79 IDOI and, (AS TO) OURSELVES, (WITH RE-
GARD 10) JeHovan our God, we will certainly not forsake
him, 2 Chron. xin. 10.
* So in the Arabic, Gram. Arabe, vol. u. Art. 158. Also with Sts (ae J
&c., passim.
296 LECTURE XIV. [ART. 299. 17-
18th, The recurrence of 5, in all such constructions as
this, is said to have the effect of pointing out the com-
parison or correspondence intended to be instituted
between the preceding and followmg member, i. e. the
relation between the prodosis and apodosis: e. g. DN)
mp) --+- V2 OVD. anp if the house be small....
THEN let him take, &c., Exod. xii. 4.
But of this more will be said when we come to treat of the con-
junctions.
ART. 280. | ON THE SYNTAX. 297
LECTURE XV.
ON THE GENERAL DEPENDENCE OF WORDS ONE UPON ANOTHER.
230. Having considered the structure of incomplex
propositions, and endeavoured to reduce-to some analogy
those apparent anomalies which so much perplex the
Learner, we now come to consider that dependence of
words one upon another which will take place when
propositions become complex, and to investigate the
principles by which this is regulated.
2d, It will readily be admitted, that when words are
to be added, either for the purpose of defining or modi-
fying the signification of others, or, for completing the
ideas conveyed by them, the relation which such words
bear to one another must be regulated by some easy and
intelligible principles. We shall now proceed to point
them out.
3d, The principles found to prevail in the Hebrew
language may be reduced to two: viz. apposition, and
what has been termed the defintte state of construction,
(Art. 151.)
4th, By Apposition is meant, the juxta-position of
two or more words which are, Ist. either different names
for the same idea, or, 2d, being such as are not incon-
eruous with it, are added for the purpose of presenting it
in some other point of view, or otherwise to modify and
define it: e.g. Ist. DIN Mim Jehovah Elohim, pre-
sents two words in apposition; by the first of these
the reader is put in mind of that Being alone, who had
revealed himself to the Jews; by the second, the name
of any Deity, either true or false. But, when these
298 LECTURE XV. CART. 230. 5.
two are combined, the sense of the latter is so restricted,
as to be applicable to none but the God of Israel. Again,
in the example, 711 922" the king David. By the
first we shall understand the king; but by this we shall
not know what king is meant. It may be the king of
Assyria, Samaria, Egypt, or of any other country; but,
when the word David is added, the phrase becomes
perfectly definite. The first of these may be termed appo-
sition of identity; the second, of specification.
5th, Apposition may also be said to be either amme-
diate or mediate: Immediate, when the words ‘so con-
nected. have no intervening word or words: as, ‘i
DoE: mediate, when some such word, &c. intervenes :
as, ona raw Jesse: the Bethlehemite.
6th, Under this head we shall consider the construc-
tion of attributives with substantives, or when used as
adverbs. Nouns used as specificatives, 1. e. when m ap-
position with others signifying number, weight, measure,
&c. Pronouns demonstrative, interrogative, or personal,
when added for the purpose of defining, specifying, or
otherwise restricting, the significations of other words. ©
7th, .The other principle just mentioned, by which
two or more words are so connected as to present one
definite idea, is that which regulates the juxta-position
of two or more substantives, or attributives wsed as
substantives,* which are not names for the same‘ thing ;)
* It is usual with writers on the Arabic Grammar to say, when speaking
of (what we term) adjectives, or attributives, that they are put to stand for the ~
essence or being of the person or thing described, including also the properties
expressed by such words. So the Moolla Jdémi, on the Gram. of Ibn ul Hajib,
ply pe BBgdbe, kaye ld gle To pull Uahigdy Cidogl
ART. 230. 8. | ON THE SYNTAX. 299).
but which, having a certain relation to one another, will,
by their being combined, afford the idea of proprietor-
ship, materiality, peculiarity, or the like, which exists
between them. This we term the definite state of
construction, generally: but, when the first of two or
more such words in construction is an attributive, used
as a substantive, we shall, for the mere sake of dis-
tinction, term this, the distinctive state of construction.
8th, This may be considered as being either emmediate
or mediate, as before, and for the same reasons.
9th, The complements of all verbs, G. e.. their ob-
jective cases, as considered in Latin and other Grammars),
whether transitive, intransitive, or neuter; as well as
the construction of prepositions, adverbs, or interjections,
we shall consider as being regulated by one or other of
these principles.
Remarks.
231. All indefinite attributes found in the predicates of proposi-
tions, may be considered as being in the state of wmmediate apposition
with the noun, either expressed, or implied, which is the real predicate :
e.g. TIT PAT BVT merciful and gracious (is) Jehovah, Ps. cil. 8,
&e.; which, Exod. xxxiv. 6, &c. is given, Fa) BVT) ON mT
Jehovah (is) a Gop merciful and gracious. So the passage mw
prwn Jerusalem hath stumbled, might be thus fully expressed,
mw YY psduian? Jerusalem (is) a crry (that) hath stumbled ; and.
hence perhaps, mows is put in the feminine form. So Gen. vi. 9,
PYTS Ws 3 Noah (was) a just MAN.
Sos -: ll Lyslao Yarn po ods} be wold reyo
See also the same sentiment repeated under the els, gre >» and ko00
Liditne « and Mr. de Sacy’s Gram. Arabe, vol. i. p. 228. The same is
found to prevail in the Persian, Sanscrit, and Bengali. On the last, see Mr.
Haughton’s Gram. p. 35. Art. 120.
300 LECTURE XV. CART. 231. 2.
2d, It is obvious from the first of these examples, that both DT)
and 7277 are to be considered in apposition with ON which is there
amplied, but which is expressed | in the second. In the last example
also the real predicate is expressed (WS), with which the following
word 713 is in meager yeti In like manner, in the Arabic,
SS Par i IG Aw-
py ei] is put for rs =) «J! God (is) a bountiful Gop. Hence
I Aw
the expressions we so often meet with in the Koran, “] God, or
“$7 BO - Pe Ee ee
Sab! ee the God of thy fathers, or, aa) thy God, or pale! A
ee =.
the God of Abraham, &c. aol, a or lo, uel (is) one Gop,
according as the grammatical aa of the pas sage may require.
Hence, also, the absence of the article universally after the negative
particles ee ON 3, bey &e. no, not, &c. because the word thus
negatived must necessarily be a predicate, and not a subject as in the
Ao Owes eee oe
European languages.* Hence 5> J] 4} 3 sWl (as to) God, there is
eg
no Gop besides him, &ce. In all such cases as the above, then, we have
a Nominative absolute (Art. 229. 10.), or a Subject, attended by its pre-
dicate, e. g. as to Jehovah, (he is) a merciful and gracious God: and
so of the rest. Where the subsequent words may also be considered
as specific (Art. 230. 4.)
3d, In all cases, in which both the subject and predicate are made
definite, we have nothing more or less than nouns in immediate appo-
sition; where the following ones may be considered as being specific
as before: and hence the rules relating to the concordance of the
subject with the predicate holds good here.
4th, The construction of apparent nominatives with their verbs,
* We say in English, No one came; not so in the Hebrew, &c. Here we
: : sj!
must say, Any one came not, which is much more proper. So No of)
wes oH us C-- a C- OURO “He
Ibn Malik, in the Alfia, 3) ToC ao SOpdo 3G 3 My Ura} 0) Uwe
ow a-s# -
She Its government is such, that 3 must accompany an indefinite word,
whether it be single or repeated.
ART. 282. | ON THE SYNTAX. 301
has been shewn to be nothing more than nouns, &e. in immediate appo-
sition with the real nominatives, and which must always agree with
them either in a logical or formal point of view.
Of Words in immediate apposition with one another.
232. When two or more substantives, or attributives
used as substantives, are found in Apposition, one or more
of them may frequently be considered as occupying the
place of adjectives in other languages.* Examples of
* Nouns, as already observed, put in apposition, may further be considered
in two points of view: the one may be termed Identity; as in the phrase
bales: malah) Jehovah Elohim: the other, Specification, as in the instances
Ss uz
above. This last is termed by the Arabian Grammarians jon specification,
and is thus explained in the Hiddyat oon Nuahve, p. ¥%: 50 cis test)
“7 a
jidie pt o _ Ns e eh ah ¥ oll ve ies _ (Be
Ol 5) Wa ,) Waxes dy) Lull - Ltaand ‘THE (noun of) SPECIFICA-
TION is always Pree and is placed after a noun of NUMBER, MEASURE,
WEIGHT, DISTANCE, &c., in which the signification is vague, im order to
render it SPECIFIC: as, twenty MEN, two measures (termed yA? ) (of) WHEAT,
a
Two pounds (of) Fat, Two measures (termed ie) (of) coTTon :
ZUR
or, when speaking of a single date (fruit, saying) ly Jy Tue cream. It is also
used when quantity is not meant: as, a ring (of) IRON, a bracelet (of) Gop.
Ii sometimes comes after a sentence, in order to mark the thing referred
to with the greater precision: as, Zaid (is) fortunate (in) PERSON, or,
LEARNING, or (in his) FATHER.” The following is the account given of it in
302 LECTURE XV. [ART. 232. 2.
immediate apposition : OVD DWAIN men, a FEW, 1. e. a
few men, Neh. ii. 12; MOS ONION words, TRUTH, 1. e.
true words, Prov. xxi. 21: 98 ny a sheep, FATNESS,
i.e. fat sheep, Ezek. xxxiv. 20.
2d, Examples, in which the latter designates the mate-
rials, metal, &c. out of which the first is made: DMSD2
D2 two talents (of) sitvER, 2 Kings v. 23; 1pan*
PUFA OP- Cr 1G c4 Us
the Alfia of Ibn Malik: by ee Waals ae ute ue usines wl
Pal Oa co et ae Gud “+ Zus PUA Ge OF gid
| pady ee uty: V9 Sree) Le poe i.e. A noun which,
1o
in the signification of wy of, explains something that is vague, is placed, for
the sake of specification, in juxta-position with the word so restricted: as, a
span (of) EARTH; a measure (termed yp) of WHEAT; two pounds of HONEY,
or of DATE FRUIT.
According to the opinion of Ei Aklifash, oo) , and Soheili shes
as recorded by El Azheri (Schnabell’s Com. on the Agrtimia, p. 4") and
condemned by him, this construction is to be considered as a species of the
zaéfat, or definite state of construction; which is no doubt erroneous.
* We have a construction, perfectly parallel to this, which M. de Sacy has
put down in bis Gram. Arabe, (vol. ii. p.110.), as being anomalous: it is
“7 UR “7b
given in these examples: viz. eaeves) sel I the billets, the wood, i. e.
7 fwad ““ ol “ “Und AUF wr
the wooden billets. So as] abe, i'l phall and
“~ 7 Um a
ae corel So in the tale of Sindbad, by Langlés, Fracal ype
p- *, and without the article Cnc oy p. !%- There is no reason,
however, for supposing, as M. de Sacy does, that this construction is
modern ; nor, that these are to be considered as nouns in the definite state of
construction. The fact is, they are mere nouns in apposition, and involve
Sse
the rhetorical figure which the Arabs term Jw, and we, EpaNoRTruHosIs.
ART. 232. 3.1] ON THE SYNTAX. 303
NWI the owen, THE Brass, i. e. braxen, 2 Kings
xvl. 17; {28 O° orders (rows) stone, i.e. of stone,
Exod. xxviii. 17.
3d, So also, when the latter word signifies the person,
thing, &c. numbered, measured, or weighed; and the
preceding one the name of the measure, &c.; e. g.
DY) ONY two years, Days, i. e. the space of two
years, Gen. xli. 1; DD) OWAW weeks, vars, i.e. the
space of certain weeks, Dan. x. 8; DTWY ADS an
ephah (of) BARLEY, Ruth u. 17; N2D-AND a seah (of)
FINE FLOUR, 2 Kings vii. 1.
See also Gen. xv. 1, Num. ix. 19, 20, xxviii. 23, 1 Kings xxii. 17,
Neh. u. 12, Prov. xxii. 21, Is. x. 19, xxx. 20. 33, &c.
4th, Apposition may also take place mediately, i. e.
when one or more words intervene between the nouns to
be thus construed.
Under this rule may be placed all those examples, in which Schroederus
has said, ‘' E'mphatica est construendi ratio,’ &c. (Synt. R. 18.) which,
however, are nothing more than words put in mediate apposition with
others, i. e. having an intervening particle expressed ; and which seems
to be added rather for the purpose of modifying the signification of
the preceding word, than for addizig emphasis to the context: e. g.
SVT VIA 2 for he is in evil, i. e. m an unfortunate situation, Exod.
xxxii, 22; ADT WPD in holiness (is) thy may, Ps. Ixxvii. 14;
T2022 MT? MIT Jehovah suai Be iN (or for) thy confidence, Prov.
©
This construction may also be explained, by supposing the proposition wf
to be omitted; which has been adopted by El Azheri, us p23 , in his Com-
mentary on the Agrimia, published by Schnabell, p, *”. But I prefer the
former method. Seealso Josh. ili. 14, 2 Kings ix.4, 1 Chron. xv. 27, 2 Chron.
xv. 8, Ps. lix. 6, Jer. xxxviii. 6. In which there seems to be an excess of the
definite article, but which may be accounted for without having recourse to
the ellipsis as Schreederus bas done. Synt. R. II.
304 LECTURE XV. [ART. 232. 5.
iii. 26; * MHI DDD ITS the Lord (is) amone the sustainers of my
soul, Ps. liv. 6.
See also Ps. Ixxxix. 14, cxvill. 7, Prov. xvi. 6, Is. xl. 10, Hos.
Killa Os
5th, Words are sometimes put in the mediate state of
apposition by means of a conjunction. This is gene-
rally termed Hendiadys. Examples: DS} VV a city
AND mother, i.e. a mother city, or metropolis, 2 Sam.
xx. 19; TVVDI APIA in Ramah anv in his own city,
i.e. in his city Ramah, 1 Sam. xxvii. 3; DyaN 2a
pyphyny..-- on the shepherds’ vessel, anv in the bag,
Ib. xvii. 40.
See also Is. xxxviil. 18, 2 Chron. xvi. 14, Ps. Ixvi. 20, Dan. iii. 5,
vill. 10, &c. And in the New Test. Acts xiv. 13, xxui._6, Eph. u. 3,
&e.
On the Nouns of Time and Place.
233. Under this head may be placed certain words,
signifying the time or place in which any thing is done,
the construction of which in the Arabic is absolute ;+
FH 7 DM OF“ aie
* M. de Sacy remarks on the expression Lak= wor ws Lockman was
a wise (man), Gram. Arab. vol. ii. p. 74. ... “ enfin Lesko sage, est un
terme circonstanciel ou modificatif, un sur attribut ... exprime sous une forme
S eae oo
adverbiale, e qui équivaut a wks! , ou a fs 5.” And in a note,
of - SOF ot “lb wo”
“< C’est ainsi que l’on peut dire Lok Oo és ou ws, ou obit ws?
a la lettre, non Zeidus mendacem, ou in Be. ou ev a Po he
+ These are termed rey], Be) 35,6 containers of time and place:
“Gath Bp ore OS K I 6b mor-rE
e. 2. SOg hee Leb] yom fast ye (for) days numbered ; dl] bel before
the mosque, Gram. Arab. M. de Sacy, vol. ii. p. 59. 60, &e.
ARTE 2834 204 ON THE SYNTAX. 305
these words, are, therefore, construed by them as being
in the objective case, and not standing in need of any
intervening particle: e. g. DY DNIW two years (as to)
pAys, the space of two years, Gen. xli. 1; AW 817)
IANA MDD and he standing (in) THE OPENING of the
tent, Gen. xvi. 1; DONA FINS Wo and it stood (at)
THE OPENING of the tent, Exod. xxxui. 9; MUD DY TD
Maia? standing (at) THE EASTERN PaRY of the altar,
Mec hronav. 2.
As the construction of the numerals will occasionally require the
application of our other principle, which we have termed that of
“ definite construction,” its consideration will be postponed till we come
to treat on that subject.
The preposition, however, is sometimes used: e. g.
TWIT OANA VY they stood BENEATH the mount,
Exod. xix. 18.
2d, In all these cases, as the qualifying word seems to
have no formal connection with the word qualified, its
position may be termed absolute: and, in this point of
view, it may be said to have the same relation to the word
qualified, that an adverb has when used for the purpose
of qualifying a verb.
3d, We sometimes find a pronoun joined with the first
of such nouns: as, 72 3D wis GARMENT (of) linen, Lev.
vi. 3; TYODMO my RerucE (of) strength, Ps. lxxi. 7.
See also 1 Sam. xxii. 13, Is. xxxi. 7, Lam. iv. 17, Ezek. xvi. 27,
ere
4th, Attributives in Hebrew being considered as in-
cluding some substantive in their signification (see Art.
230. 7.), need not, when put in apposition with other
substantives, be made to agree with them formally,
* Examples of this description have been improperly laid down by Schreederus
as being in the definite state of construction. Synt. R. 10.
xX
306 LECTURE XV. [ART. 233. 5-
in the same gender and number: e. g. DOD mip an
offering, @ COMPLETE ONE, 1. e. a complete offering,
1 Sam. vii. 9; FHI MwA “wa flesh in the field, TORN
(flesh) i. e. flesh torn im the field, Exod. xxi. 30;
DYy? py) jor a people, for THE DESERT-ONES, 1. e. for
those inhabiting the desert, Ps. Ixxiv. 14.
See also Gen. xxiii. 3, Exod. xxix. 22, Deut. xiti. 17, 1 Kings
xix. 11, Ps. xvii. 13, Ixxiii, 10, Ecc. xii. 13, Cant. iv. 2, Jer. xx. 9,
xxi. 13, Ezek. viii. 3, xxix. 1.
5th, When, however, attributives are put in apposition
with substantives, they must agree with them zn a logical
point of view at least; i.e. if the substantive is either
definite or indefinite in signification, the attributive must
also be made definite or indefinite. As to number and
gender, the agreement is that of a predicate with its
subject (see Art. 228, &c.). And, with respect to the
order, it will be the same as before (Art. 226. 3.): e. g.
DIM LN a man, wisz, 2 Sam. xiii. 8; APOY AMY a
ditch, DEEP, Prov. xxiii. 27; OYDPY DAD Many hunters,
Jer. xvi. 16; M2NM OMl"1 the words, THESE, Gen.
xvii. 1; MSI VIN the land, tus, Ib. v, 4; 73
pian thy sons, THE BORN ONES, Ib. v. 5.
6th, Pronouns have the property of making the
words to which they are attached definite ; and hence,
in the last example, the article is necessarily affixed to
the attribute oti. Hence also, it is only when the
antecedent is definite, that the relative pronoun WN,
or any equivalent term, being also definite, ought in
any case to be introduced: e. g. "WAY TANI Ws TWN
THE woman, WHOM thou hast placed with me, Gen. i. 12;
THY IWS AY AI who (is) rH1s shepherd wuo stand-
eth? Jer. xlix. 19; JIA MIT wD who (is) vHIs
MAN, THE (one) walking, Gen. xxiv. 65. But, to this
rule, there are many exceptions.
ART. 233. 7._| ON THE SYNTAX. 307
7th, In some instances, however, the attribute appears to be made
definite, when the preceding substantive is not so: as, =>) sr) = T2
D’S2iT by the hand of messengers, THE coming ones, Jer. xxvii. 3;
MSN OY servants, tun runamays, 1 Sam. xxv.10. But,
in these cases, we seem to have an Mpanorthosis: as, in the first case,—
I mean those who are coming, &c. (see Art. 229. 4.).
8th, In other cases, the latter is without the article when the first
is not: as, WIS THT rus basket, one, Jer. xxiv.2; DDI mya Dy?
in the eyes of THE nations, many, Ezek. xxxix. 27 ; mwa Tarn
the new cart, 2 Sam. vi. 8. But, in these instances, we have probably
an ellipsis of one of the words so connected: e.g. TIS THT TT as to
the basket, one basket, &c.: or, the latter word may be considered as
specific : in which case the article is necessarily omitted; and so of the
rest.
9th, Proper names are definite in their own right: they do not,
therefore, receive the article. Nor will two nouns in the state of
definite construction admit of the article being prefixed to the first:
as, IVT ADV or T20 “21: because, in all these cases, the
last word, whether it be a proper name, and therefore definite in itself, or,
an appellative with an article, is added for the purpose of defining the
first; which will not then admit of being made still more so, by the
further addition of the article.
10th, There are, however, many examples in which
this doctrine about the force of the article seems to
be contravened, and in order to be able to account for
these, it becomes necessary here to consider the prin-
ciples by which the use of the article is regulated.
11th, The article, then, seems to be used for two pur-
poses generally (Art. 193. 14.): one, to point out any
person or thing already mentioned or well known: as,
YUso the earth, Gen. 1. 2, which had just been men-
tioned ; or, WWM the sun. ‘The other, to restrict the
bearing of any generic, abstract, or other noun, to the pe-
culiar property, quality, &c. expressed by such word;
which may hence be considered as an individual, event, &c.
thus distinctly characterised, rather than as including the
whole class in a general or vague manner, as would
x 2
308 LECTURE XV. CART. 233. 12.
otherwise be the case: e. g. Gen. xviii. 25, 1? mom
PMID MM ywrcoy py nvan>> ay 7275 neyo
pwd far be it Srom thee to do after this manner, to put
to death RIGHTEOUS and EVIL; $0, THOSE WHO ARE TRULY
RIGHTEOUS shall become as THOSE WHO ARE WICKED: or, and
thus THE TRULY RIGHTEOUS MAN Shall be (considered here-
after) @§ THE WICKED ONE. So Ib. xi. 7, YODT) VI)
YIN2 AL tk and tHE CANAANITE and THE PERIZZITE
dwelt then in the land. So also with respect to ab-
stract nouns: 1 Kings vi. 14, M2QINI-NS NID
nyma noxbobs nivyy nytocny) opannns
and, he is filled with sucH WISDOM, and INTELLIGENCE,
and KNOWLEDGE, (as are necessary) for making all work
in brass,* &c. See also Gen. xxiii. 17, PYM; Deut.
xxx. 4, VIS; 2 Sam. xi. 7, WNT, &c.
12th, The reason of the rule seems to be this. These generic,
or abstract, nouns may be considered as proper names for the
ideas for which they severally stand; and, therefore, as being
definite within themselves to a certain degree. But, as they may
stand for any individual of the species to which they belong, and,
likewise, for every individual, they may also represent whole classes.
In this case, the addition of the definite article can affect their signi-
fication in no other way, than by giving a sort of importance, not to
such class or individual, but to the property expressed by its name.
And, vice versd, any proper name receiving the definite article, will
necessarily become an attribute expressive of the properties, &c.
expressed by such name.
* This appears to me to be equivalent to the use of the Arabic and Persian CS,
~~
which is termed > of kind: as, seal! one like Abraham, faithful ;
™ ee ee
ble one liberal as Hatim Tai: which is sometimes also preceded by ml
in the Persian ; as, my vw! that bountiful one, such a bountiful one. See
M. de Sacy’s notes onthe Pend-nameh of Attar, p. 13.
ART. 233. 13. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 309
13th, Hence, we find words used as proper names, sometimes with,
and at others, without, the definite article: e. g. 77? the Jordan,
Jer. xii. 5, xlix. 19; but Job xl. 23, &c. TT. Jordan; "8°T the
Nile, Gen. xli. 1, 2. 18; but al Isa. xix. 7, xxiii. 3, Zech. x. 11;
yaar the Libanus, Deut. ili. 25, &c.; but Ps. xxix. 6, &c. 7229
as a proper name; ana py amie Ve ean coe Jt “2 Josh.
xv. 55. So W2MT and JW, “IVEM and IY. So also in the
names of men: P2I¥T1 Num. xiii. 22. 28, but P2Y Deut. ix. 2;
MYINT 2 Sam. xxiv. 16; 2M Ezek. xxxviii. 2, &c.* See Nold.
Concord. Part. annot. and vind. p. 855, &c.
14th, This sometimes takes place also, when a proper name is
compounded of two words put in the definite state of construction:
as, VEINS MP Neh. xi. 25, but VAIS AMP Gen. xxiii. 2. So
DITA) Jer. xxvi. 20, but DIY? NYP Josh. ix. 17, &e.
15th, A case similar to this occurs in the Arabic, though not in
proper names, which has given endless trouble to the Grammarians
who have attempted to explain it. See the muta Moolla Jami,
2Uned # w OURO ad
pp. "t- rit. The examples are es se us? oe ie,
Ap NP 7 USUI vUr
9) Sylo, and lins!| kkis. Now, if we consider the last word,
in each of these cases, as being an attribute including a substantive
noun in its signification, just as the Moolla himself has taught us.
(Art. 230. 7.), we shall have nothing more than two nouns in the defi-
nite state of construction: as, the mosque of the worshippers, &c.
* In the xl} ust bell Ws by Essoyuti, ne have the following
remark to this effect: a3} also es 43 pro La col alls ss ws
rial 80 4] cho} AS ae MS Ls 3 le END Vy lal aul,
18 le pStssaly Nex Jes Loads! Lal > coe Nally isl, . Tf it
a said, Why is Ew fee with the article, when its additiun is not allow-
able? The answer is, that this is allowable in all proper names, the origin of
which 1s AN ATTRIBUTIVE: as, cred] Ex Abas; als Ev Harite.
And as to Ex Farat, its signification is, THE SWEET WATER: ds té 1s said in the
Koran, “ And we will surely water you with sweet water.” (Sur. 77.).
310 | LECTURE XV. (ART. 233. 16.
The solution offered by the Moolla is incapable of affording any idea,
as far as I can see, viz. pels! 3s)! Oe ar
16th, For the Moolla’s account of the usage of the article just
noticed, see the Shurh ul Kafia, p. “r+, &c. where he tells us, that the
I 2k uy
word dw)! El Asad, although with the definite article, is to be taken
as being indefinite. Compare 1 Sam. xvii. 34, “UST and ANTI, put
for a hon, and a bear, not the lion, &c. See also Mr. de Sacy’s Gram.
Arab. vol. i. pp. 326—8, vol. ii. p. 276, &c.
17th, Some appellatives which are much in use, seem to take
the article by way of distinction: as, "S82i7 the well, Exod. ii. 15;
YM the servant, Gen. xviii. 7, &e., just as we use the correspondent
words in English, without intending to make the word definite. For
a similar reason perhaps others omit it: as, 27 B ied great king, for
the great king, Ps. xxi. 2, xlv. 16, xlvin. 3, xlix. 7, Ixi. 1, Est.1.9. So
wry for Wrawit Ps. lxxit. 17, Jer, xxxi. $5, &c. So YJS5! tor
Yost! Ps. “Gi 2s Joby a 14, xxxv. Lit Scere and =a) fre-
quently for man
234. Words generally construed as adverbs are
nothing more than verbal nouns, attributes, or particles,
put in zwmmediate, or mediate, apposition with those
which they are intended to qualify.* The order is regu-
lated as before (Art. 226. 3.). Examples of such words
in immediate apposition: VIPA Tip visiting,+ I have
* The construction is here, as before, eae when immediate. This is
Ces od
termed by the Arabian Grammarians Jl eS) i. €. the state; and, as with them
it consists of one or more words added for the purpose of qualifying either the
subject or object of a verb, it must necessarily be an attributive. Mr. de Sacy
seems to have confounded the > with the yAAo . The principle, however,
is the same in both.
a Cy a ok
+ Ibn Malik says on the use of the Infinitive thus added, Jai as)
Ora 407 Crruy AOE G Oe nS RED Meals oe Cy
dv) GSO ph cS ra Sys Os 5] P Sr les; 5] “It is selected for
the purpose of giving emphasis, or specifying, or to intimate number: as, F
went two journeys, or, on a journey of observation.”
<i
ew” Ae
ART, 234. 2.] ON THE SYNTAX. Sil
visited (or will surely visit) ; aw) Dawn YAW DN wn
so the Philistine approaches warty and Late, 1 Sam.
xvi. 16.
See also Gen. iv. 25, xxili. 17, Exod. iii. 15, xxxii. 8, Deut.
ihe sexi, 12; .xxxiv. 10, Josh. wii. 20; Jud. xin. 8,1 Kings
Xx1. 27, 2 Kings xix. 17, Neh. ii. 2, Job xxxiii. 3, Ps. xxv. a
Prov. xv. 24, xxxi. 9, Jer. xlvili. 10, Dan. viii. 9, Mie. ii. 8, &c.
with passive verbal nouns, Gen. xvii. 13, xl. 15, Lev. xix. 20, Num.
xi. 4, 1 Sam. ii. 27, 2 Sam. xvii. 10, 1 Kings xx. 39. So with ad-
jectives or substantives: see Gen. xxxviii. 28, Eccl. vii. 16, Dan. xi. 3,
1 Chron. xxix. 9, Jer. li. 39, &ce.
2d, Examples of such words in mediate apposition
with others, i.e. with some particle or other word or
words intervening: 229? ION he giveth food to
abundance, i. e. abundantly, Job xxxvi. 31 ; S22 WA
they fled in becoming hidden, i. e. secretly, Dan. x. 7.
See also Gen. iv. 15, Exod. xxv. 20. Numb. x. 31, Josh. xxiv. 14,
Jud. vi. 22, ix. 16, 19, 2 Sam. iil. 27, xviii. 5, Job xxxiv. 27, Ps.
igs) 0, Xxki., 24, Isanxxvi.l13, xxxu. A, Jer) vi.2, vin dds: van. Lt,
xxxvul. 4, Hos. ii. 20, Mic. vii. 3, Zech. xi. 7.
3d, In all these cases, specification is obviously the purpose for
which such words have been introduced. With verbs, these will
necessarily be construed as adverbs; but, with nouns, as adjectives,
attributes, or the like. The addition of the particle can have no other
influence than that of making the passage more specific, or in some
way or other modifying it.
4th, Hence, when it is necessary to express the com-
mencement, repetition, hurry, progress, the ability of
effecting, intensity, certainty, &c. of any action, pas-
sion, &c. it may be done, either by putting two verbs |
in the tense and person suitable to the passage, with or
without the copulative conjunction; or, by one verb
only in such tense and person, and the other, either in
the Infinitive, or in the Participial, form:* e.g. W1 Pate
* This, according to the Moolla Jami, is done either for the purpose of
312 LECTURE XV. TART. 234. 4.
begin, possess, i. e. begin to possess, Deut. 1. 31;
OWS YON... m3 om) so Noah begins .... and plants
a vineyard, i. e. to plant, Gen. ix. 20; ‘ypDIN Nd
JIS IP do not repeat (that) they call thee, i.e. do not
allow them again to call thee, Is. xlvu. 1; mou AD}
and he repeats sending, i. e. he sends again, Gen.
vill. 10; 2p) FDS 85 T add not to curse, i.e. I will not
curse again, Ib. v. 21; TAA) WIM so she hastes and
puts down, i. e. hastens to put down, Gen. xxiv. 18;
83 JID LID why have you hasted coming, 1. e. to
come, Exod. ii. 18; DIA TRY mar prim IA I
pon so David (was) proceeding and becoming strong ;
but the house of Saul (was) proceeding and becoming
weak, 1. e. David becomes gradually stronger, &c. 2 Sam.
ii. 1; i2°ND2 ODN TI may be able (that) we may smite
him, Num. xxii. 6; AMPWI AYO) let us spread out,
let us send, 1. e. let us send out extensively, 1 Chron.
Xi. 2.
See also Gen. vill. 3. 5, xii. 9. 1], xxv. I, xxvi. 13. 18, xxx. 31,
xXxxvil. 33, Exod. xix. 19, Jud. iv. 24, 1 Sam. ii. 26, iv. 14, xiv. 19,
rousing the hearer, or to prevent mistake (Com, on Ibn ul Hajib, p. "O=1,).
His words are: «ib iw 4! peoiwn| Big sos] yr? pw ue No,
g) 35 ey Gye ge BAU) 2b ES pall EUS, . bball Gell,
a Ld Wyo : ‘and this,” he adds, ‘‘is done by repeating the word : as,
He struck (i. e.) Zaid, Zaid: or, he struck, he struck (i.e.) Zaid. But, it is not
to the repetition of the same words that this rule is confined, any other words
may be added, as the sense may require. So Ztzeni on the Moallakah of
Iv sr
Antara Ed. Menil. v. 5: ssi wr ya! Lads >... _ esi}, s\523!
OK 9 ust sy dhe wo) ust &3 yo J LS ive. The becoming void
and desert. These words are conjoined for the purpose of strengthening the
passage, just as the poet Tarafat has said, When I come near him, he wanders
and separates from me.”’
ART, 234. 5. | ON THE SYNTAX. 313
xvii. 41, xix. 8, 2 Sam. xviii. 25, Is. vi. 13, xlix. 4, Jer. xii. 2, xiii. 18,
Hos. ix. 9, Jonah i. 11, Ps. xxxiii. 3, Ixxviil. 38, cxiii. 5; and, for
the New Testament, see Glass. pp. 273, 275—6, 277—9, &c.
5th, The repetition of nouns or particles is often
recurred to, for the purpose of denoting distribution,
diversity, comparison, or the like: e.g. INA DY Dw
m3-?8 two (and) two came they to Noah, Gen. vii. 9;
VW Pai Iw pa between flock and between flock, Gen.
xxxil. 17: "P22 7PAa ink WPM and let them collect
at MORNING by MoRNING, Exod. xvi. 21; mi ja) {AS
120?) sTONE and stonE, a great and a small (one), i.e.
diverse weights, Deut. xxv. 18; MAT 30) 293 in HEART
and HEART they speak, i.e. while they profess one thing
they mean another, Ps. xii.3; JAYS JT3D Ov. mM
YIIND it shall be, L1KE people LIKE priest, LIKE servant
LIKE master, &c., Isa. xxiv. 2; MY W123) TR TDD as
my STRENGTH (was) then, EVEN SO (18) my STRENGTH now,
Jos. xiv. 11.
See also Gen. vil. 2, xviii. 25, xliv. 18, xlvii. 3. 19, Exod. vii. 19,
xiv. 20, Deut. xxv. 13, Jud. villi. 18, 1 Sam. xxx. 24, 1 Kings xiv. 5,
xx. 40, xxil. 4. 20, 2 Kings 1. 7, Is. xvi. 7, Ezek. xvi. 4, xxxvil. 7,
Psoxx. 8) cxxx1x.12, Prov. xx. 10.:23) sHccl, tity 1992) Chron: 1x27.
32.02) Obrone xin. bk
6th, When, however, the demonstrative pronouns are
used; or, a singular personal pronoun, referring to an
antecedent in the plural number, distribution is generally
intended: e. g. MI"9IN MI this to this, i. e. one to
another, Exod. xiv. 20; MO VIN MD WS a wali from
this, and a wall from this, 1. e. on each side, Num.
xxii. 24; Mim inn ADR oy moM7a? RXYnN-D when
thou goest to the war against thy enemies, and Jehovah
shall give um, i.e. wholly, or every one of them, Deut.
xxi. 10; JIBYA) OWINT WMS AWRI APM so the
woman takes BOTH OF THE MEN and /udes uIM, 1. e. wholly,
or each one of them, Josh. un, 4.
314 LECTURE XV. [ART. 234, 7
See also, for the first case, 1 Kings xxii. 20, Ps. xx. 8: for the
second, 2 Kings ii. 3, Ps. xxxv. 8, &c.
7th, The context will generally be sufficient to inform us, whether
we are to consider these repetitions as emphatical, or distributive.
There are, however, other instances of repetition, which fall under
neither of the preceding heads, but which are to be ascribed to the
simple and unpclished usage of a venerable antiquity. Such is the
repetition of the word TEN? 1 Kings i. 4, &c. Of whole sentences:
as, Gen. vi. 22, xiii. 5, 6, xiv. 5, 8, xxiv. 37, 1 Sam. x. 9. The in-
troduction of words apparently superfluous: as, “ he lifted up his eyes,
feet,” &c. Gen. xiii. 10, xvii. 2, xxix. 1, Dan. x. 5: “ he put forth his
hand,” Gen. viii. 9, 2 Kings vi. 7, &c. ; “ they arose,” Jos. xviii. 4; “ and
at came to pass,” W121, MN); and “ behold,” 377 passim.
Of the emphatic repetition ef Words or Phrases.
235. Tf, upon the addition of one word or phrase,
another will be made more definite, specific, &c., then,
also, upon the repetition of either, a still greater defi-
niteness, perspicuity, energy, fervency, or the like, will
be given to the context:* e.g. DDIM Iw Ww
OVW TURN YE, TURN YE, from your evil ways, Ezek.
KXxXM DSi") Oe a4 “CONTEND with your mother,
CONTEND YE, Hos. ti. 4; FI Pha hin mbt es hind ID
ia) THE TEMPLE OF JEHOVAH, THE TEMPLE OF JEHOVAH,
THE TEMPLE OF JEHOVAH (are) these, Jer. vil. 4.
I.e. hey insisted that the idols, which were called temples,
> Ose
( JS lx , see Pococke’s Spec. Hist. Arab. p. 91.) REALLY contained the
Deity. For similar expressions, see Is. xxxviii, 19, xliii. 25, Ps.
xciv. 3, Cant: vii. 1, &c.
2d, So with the pronouns: 7-990) \alwAD my high
* For similar examples in the Arabic, see Mr. de Sacy’s Gram. vol. ii.
Art. 671— 2—676 ; Moolla Jami’s Commentary on the Kafia, p. FPO. And
with the pronouns, Mr. de Sacy’s Gram. vol. ii. pp. 359, 360.
i
:
i:
t
)
ART. 235. 8. ON THE SYNTAX. 315
tower, and My deliverer ror ME, i.e. my sure deliverer,
Ps. exliv. 2; PTD UNS WAV [NY VY who will put my
DEATH, MINE, 7” the place of thine! i.e. O that some
one had slain me, even me, instead of thee! 2 Sam.
xieh; ve) DAS DDD) and your carcases (even)
yours shall fall, Num. xiv. 32. See Art. 232. 5.
And generally, see Gen. xvi. 9. 14, xxvii. 34, Ex. xii. 17. 20,
xiv. 11, xv. 16, Lev.’xxvi. 14, Num. vi. 9, xii. 2, Deut. iv. 9, xx. 3,
1 Kings xxi. 19, Is. v. 9. 27, xxiv. 19, xxix. 5, xxx. 13, li. 13, Jer.
xxvil. 7, xlvi. 19, xlviii. 29, li. 56, Joel iv. 4, Zeph. ii. 1, Hag. i. 4,
Zech. vil. 4, Ps. vi. 11, 1X. Vy ELOVIING 22,0 Xie eee OD xxx. 8,
xxxiii. 20. So MIQDWID) JPW, mase. and fem., i. e. every species
of support, Is. iii. 1. See the Concessus of Hariri by Schultens, p. 36,
and the Moallakah Antaree, by Menil (Lugd. Bat. 1816.), v. 71,
DU 9 Kaloac , with the Scholia of Zazeni, at p. 113.
3d, Hence, also, words put in the plural number,
(which according to our system, consists of the juxta-
position of two words) may be considered as being em-
phatical: e. g. D7 God ; DTN Lord; ova Baal ;
NMAWwY Ashtaroth, Venus; NVA the Behemoth ;
MIM real wisdom, &c. by way of eminence.
On Nouns put in the Definite State of Construction,
236. Of this construction or regimen, as it has been
sometimes called, there are two kinds (see Art. 230. 7.).
The first we have termed the definite, the second, the
distinctive, state of construction ; merely to denote the
different kinds of words thus used.
2d, Of the definite state of construction we may
reckon two kinds: viz. the /mmediate, and the Mediate.
The Immediate is that which presents two or more sub-
stantive nouns (not being names for the same thing), so
connected, that the idea thus conveyed becomes suffi-
ciently defined for the purposes of the speaker or
316 LECTURE XV. CART. 236. 3.
writer. The Mediate is that, in which this is done by
the intervention of one or more of the particles.*
3d, Examples of nouns in the definite state of con-
struction termed Immediate: INAX-WW captain (of) his
host, 1 Sam. xxvi. 5; D'S AIAM 12 Wald a the wives
(of) the sons (of) the yn cophets, 2 Kings i 1ViaL 5) Maas
the river (of) Euphrates, Gen. xv. 18; NIST MP the
town (of) Khuzoth, Num. xxi. 39; Yeay-na ‘nina the
virgin (of) the daughter (of) my people, Jer. xiv. 17.
4th, In these, and all similar passages, this juxta-position of words
has the property of defining the idea presented by the first, precisely
in the same manner with that kind of apposition, to which we have
given the term /dentity. In the following, the idea, presented by the
first of the words so placed, is made more distinct or specific, Just as it
is by that state of apposition which we have termed specific. It
will readily be seen, that the distinctions here mentioned can arise only
from the consideration of the sense of the qualifying terms in each
* The truth is, however, the particles themselves are really nouns, as already
intimated ; and, when they intervene, the construction is either that of apposition,
or, of what we have here termed definite construction, or both. We have
adopted the term mediate, both here and in Art. 230. 5. in order to conform to
the usual mode of considering these skeletons of words. Hereafter, perhaps, we
may get rid of this distinction.— According to the doctrine of the Arabian Gram-
marians, every example of immediate construction that can occur, may be resolved
COPS PES
by an equivalent mediate one: e. g. oe! J) phe the slave of Zaid, is, according
oy "E a I Pee 1o Fe
to thet. perieoty equivalent to du) ple enc. So boas NS, to kas fo pis
Cran F UY oa ep a) ¥
a ring of (or out of) silver; and es) a iad to ey iy of yd
i.e. « stroke, or blow, of to-day, to a stroke, or blow, happening to-day.
See the Shurho Moolla Jami, printed at Calcutta, p. "-" , &e. This
process, according to my notions, is making the construction less simple than
it stood originally; or, in other words, is making a plain matter difficult, by
placing a greater number of words in construction than in the original
example. It shews, however, that both signify the same thing.
ART. 236. 5. ON THE SYNTAX. 317
case. Examples: wap IAD garments (of) holiness, i. e. holy, or
sacred, garments, Exod. xxix. 29; PTS .... 128 a stone, or weight (of)
justice, i. e. a just weight, Deut. xxv. 15; ONY TW a nife (of)
youth, i.e. a young nife, Isa.liv. 6. See also Gen. xli. 42, Exod.
xi. 2, Jud. vill. 13; 1 Sam.i. 17, Jer. xi. 20; &c.
5th, The case will be the same should a sentence stand in the place
of the qualifying word:* e.g. DOWN MYT SO MDW a lip (or lan-
guage which) I knew not, I heard, Ps. \xxxi. 6; 1728 TY NIN
the acquisition (of that which) he made, they have lost, Jer. xlviii. 36;
pap Yaw SO “DR into the hands (of those) J am not able to rise
against, Lam. i.14. See Ps. Ixv. 5, cxxix. 6, Jer. ii. 8, &c.
6th, This construction, however, will admit of more than one
solution. For, first, if we consider the particles, &c. as nouns,
which I believe we ought to do, then we have nothing more than
an immediate state of construction here, with the preceding word in
the proper form for such a state (Art. 179.). And, 2d, if we suppose
that the relative pronoun WWS who, which, &c. has been omitted by
the ellipsis, which has been preferred by Schroederus, the construction
will also be explained.
7th, In some cases, however, the order is found to be inverted,
which has been termed Hypallage: e. g. 2°" AOD argentum scoriarum,
for scorie argenti, Prov. xxvi. 23; DOSY JBI oblatio lignorum, for
ligna oblationum. See also Lev. v. 15, vil. 21, xxii. 4, Deut. xii. 3,
Josh. ii. 6, 1 Kings xvu. 14, Ezek. xxi. 30, Est.ix. 19.
8th, As the perspicuity of these passages greatly
depends upon the juxta-position of the words employed,
should it be necessary further to define or qualify them
by the addition of any pronoun, &c., it will generally be
* A similar practice exists in the Persian with be to the vowels which
(Kop Pa brovr ry
mark the state of construction: e. g. Mine aceon) 138 ld oy » od
of taking up the heart, it is a difficult thing, i.e. the heart’s ze. ce &e.
Xs o Ao
So wy cs! wo)! the will of (him who is) without a when, i. e. is eternal.
But in these cases both§ palo Se and WI us + may also be considered
as nouns.
318 LECTURE XY. CART. 236. 9.
added to the last: e.g. WIP WI the mountain (of) my
holiness, i. e. my holy mountain, Ps. 11.6; FBO2 Dd
the wmages (of) thy silver, i.e. thy silver images, Is.
Ge op ap ee Moen Niaynn vay the peoples (of) abomina-
tions, these, 1. e. these abominable people, Ezra ix. 14.
See also Exod. xxvii. 38, Neh. tx. 14, Ps. iv. 2, lix. 18, cx. 2,
CXIX~d 2351s. .11..20, xxx. 22, xxxi. 7, Dan. ix. 24., For similar con-
structions in the New Testament, see Rom. vii. 24, Col. 1.13, &c.
9th, In the preceding examples, the qualified and qualifying noun
have been considered as being in juxta-position with one another ;
but, after all, this is neither necessary, nor is it always the case; for,
in some instances, we have the intervention of particles, such as
the definite article, &c.; in others, whole words or phrases: e. g.
ovaw) Yas DTN mim WY Tue Lorp Gon’s making (of) the
earth and heavens, Gen. ii. 4; amy Ws min mow THE SEND-
ING aIFts of each man to his friend, Est. ix. 19; T1272 JOS mwa
in Sarcon’s sending him, Is. xx. 1.
See also Gen. vii. 6, Jos. xx. 3, Isa. v. 24, xx. 1, Prov. xxv, 8,
&ec. Storr thinks, that these examples are not to be considered as
being in the state of construction, but to be accounted for in some
other way (Observ. p. 282.). I believe it is of little importance
whether we consider them in this point of view, or as being in appo-
sition with the preceding noun, or otherwise qualifying it, the end
arrived at is precisely the same in every view of the case: the only
question here being, whether one or more words do not parenthetically
imtervene between such qualified and qualifying terms. ‘That such is
the case, perhaps, there can be little doubt: and, as the usage of the
language, in this particular, is all we wish to ascertain, we need not be
very anxious as to the terms used, particularly where no change of
vowels or consonants can be appealed to as decisive on the subject.
The parallelism of the following passage requires that the construction
be considered as definite : YOYF OTD SAT TED JSS naw “AWS TT
O Asshur, the rod of my anger : even the rod is he, for their sake, or, in
their hand, oF my wrath,* Isa. x. 5.
Letid| ls LoS just us the book
was written by the hand, one day, of a Jew. See Gram. Arab. M. de Sacy,
vol. il. p. 125—6.
~ FPS
* So in the Arabic US Os Loge
w
°
.
-
ART. 236. 10. | ON THE SYNTAX. 319
10th, Great care should be taken in translating passages found in this
state of construction, i.e. in considering whether the last of such
words is to be taken in an active or passive sense: e. g. 2S8VTA NHS
ihe reproach of Moab, Zeph. ii. 8, is not to be understood as the re~
proach afflicting Moab, but that which others suffer from them.
So 7 T22 NSW Ps, Ixxxix. 51, the reproach of thy servants, is that
which they suffer, not that which they inflict. In like manner,... DBM
DAW IIT the violence (exercised by the) inhabitants, Ezek. xii. 19;
but yan YH... DIT the violence (suffered by the) children of Jerubaal,
Judg. ix. 24. OTnpy the cry of the poor, Prov. xxi. 13: but
DID MPV the cry (excited by the oppression) of Sodom, Gen. xviii. 20.
The same holds good with reference to the pronouns. See Gen.
avin LO shad, ders, lis 35,) 28am; xvi. 125) Is. xxi, 2,9 Bsa xewiniz 8,
byadiay Sse.
11th, The following are examples of what has been
termed the “ mediate state of construction,” i. e. when
the connexion of nouns, thus situated, is im one way or
other defined or modified by the intervention of one
or more of the particles:* “YD IN a boar out of
the forest, i.e. of the forest, or, a forest boar, Ps.
Ixxx. 14; pimp DWN people of, or, from, a dis-
tance, i.e. distant, Isa. xlix. 1.
See also Exod. i. 14, Ps. xc. 4, Cant. in. 8, Jer. v. 6, &c. Of
this kind are the passages IT? “at — FOND a psalm of David,—-
of Asaph ; roe) “WS which (is) Solomon’s, 1. e. belonging to Solo-
mon, Cant. i. 1, &c., where the proprietor, author, possessor, or
the like, is designated. +
12th, This rule, however, with its exemplifications, coincides with
the correspondent one given under the article of mediate apposition
(Art. 232. 4.), i.e. the preceding word generally suffers no abbre-
* If we consider these particles as nouns, which I believe they are, all
these cases may be resolved to those of mmediate construction or apposition, as
before.
+ It has already been remarked (Art. 236. 2.), that the Arabian Gram-
marians consider every construction of this kind, as perfectly equivalent in signi-
fication to those in which the particle is not introduced. In many cases, how-
ever, the particles tend to define the relation more specifically. ;
320 LECTURE XV. [ART. 236. 12.
viation either in the quantity of its vowels, or in the number of its con-
sonants. The words so connected may, by taking the particle as a
noun, all be considered as being in tmmediate apposition. In the fol-
lowing cases, the first so connected is put in the definite state of con-
struction, e. g. AWD “OND... “P32 YDDWY those arising early
in the morning... lingering after the twilight, Isa. v. 11; ‘aw
nyary VOR82 dwellers in the land of the shadow of death, Ib. ix. 1.
See also 2 Sam. 1. 21, Ps. ii. 12, Ixxxiv. 7, Isa. xiv. 19, xxviti. 9,
Jer. xxii. 23, Ezek. xii. 2, xxi. 17, &c. So also with the conjunc-
tion}: as, NYT) N20 wisdom and knonledge, Isa. xxxiii. 6. With
TS: as, BTN PS PH there is no deliverer from their hands, Lam.
v. 8.
13th, It must appear from these passages, that the particle here
found, so influencing the preceding word, must have been considered
as anoun; otherwise it will be exceedingly difficult to conceive why
this word should have taken the form for construction (Art. 179.).
On the DISTINCTIVE State of Construction.*
237. It has been remarked (Art. 230. 7.), that, in
this case, the preceding word to be qualified, must always
* This kind of construction is termed by the Arabian Grammarians
$B OD MILL +
dabal)] esLod} ie. verbal construction, in order to distinguish between it
- &
LEP
and that which we have termed “ the definite,” which they style aslo)
s
GDS SURO
Xy gine] the logical, or, significant, construction. It is curious enough to ob-
serve, that they exemplify this state of construction in three different ways,
which may serve to shew, that in fact they all amount to the same thing in mean-
SOS TS AS PA
ing: e.g. A>9 px handsome (of) face, in immediate apposition ; ofr>
ov CU AiG ae
& >» handsome (of) face, in the state of definite construction; and Las o>
id. when the latter or defining word is put absolutely, and construed as a noun
s G
of specification, yises . See M. de Sacy’s Arab. Gram. vol. ii. p. 159, &c.
Byer.
ART. 287, 2. | ON THE SYNTAX. 321
be an attributive. The effect here produced is, that of
rendering distinct or specific, the person or thing
designated by this attribute ; coinciding in this respect
with what has been termed definite construction: the
qualified word being always an attributive involving the
signification of a substantive (Ib.), e. g. T¥PA ia great
(of) counsel, i.e. a great being, &§c. (of) counsel, or
counselling being, Jer. xxxii. 19; Ora VATP the holy
(one of) Israel, Isa.i. 4; JY those perfect (of)
way, 1. e. men of perfect way, Ps, cxix.1 ; mn bu low
(of) spirit, i.e. an humble man, ‘Prov. xxix. 23 ; Mmwn
M1 the anointed of the Lord, 2 Sam. i. 14.
See also Gen,. xxxv. 29, Exod. xxxv. 22, Ps. xxiv. 4, Isa.
Loa} &e:
2d, Under this general head, may be exemplified certain idiomatical
expressions which will frequently meet the Learner in his progress.
These are, phrases having WS man, each, 12 son, bya Lord, possessor,
&e. ; WI , EVD men, &c. for the first member, followed by certain
others in the definite state of construction: e. g. TAS WD WS thou
art a man of death, i. e. deserving death, 1 Kings ii. 26; Y2W"]2
jove2 wim DW the son of seven years (was) Joash when his reign
(began), i. e. he was seven years old, 2 Kings xii. 1; SW1 OVO 42
a son of death (is) he, i.e. he shall die, 1 Sam. xx. 31; mnpw ws
a man of lips, i. e. loquacious, Job xi. 2; D727 WS a man of
words, i. e. a speaker, Exod. iv. 10; VOR WS a man of truth, i. e.
a true man, Neh. vii. 2; OWT Wass the men of name, i.e. famous,
Gen. vi. 4; mwas men of might, i.e. mighty men, Gen. xlvii. 6 ;
“BD MVD men of number, i.e. few, Gen. xxxiv. 30; T2W Oya ws
a man possessed of hair, i.e. hairy, 2 Kings i. 8; 732 Dyn-b2 every
(one) possessed of ming, i. e. winged bird, Prov. 1. 17.
So BID WIN men of Sodom, Gen. xix. 4, for Sodomites. See Gen.
Y
322 LECTURE XY. TART. 237.
xxill, 3, xxiv. 13, Numb. xxi. 28, Josh. xxiv. 11, Judg. ix. 2, x..1,
Jer. ii. 16, Ezek. xvi. 26, Ps. cxlix. 2, Cant. i. 5, &c. And generally,
Gen. xiv. 13, xxxvi. 39, xlix. 23, Deut. iii, 18, xxv. 2, 1 Sam.
xvi. 18, 2 Sam. ii. 7,)'xi. 6; Isa. v. TUS" Hos. x. 9,. Ps. xxx 28;
Prov. xv. 8, xxl. 24, xxiii. 2, xxiv. 8, Job xi. 11, xxxiv. 8.10, Dan.
viii. 6, Eccl. vii. 12, &c. To this class may be referred alr).
sons of God, pious persons, and DIST N32 daughters of men, lon,
wmpious women, Gen, vi. 2, &e.
On the Construction of the Numerals.
238. The numerals in Hebrew being all substantive
nouns ‘are put either in apposition, or in the definite
state of construction, with the word signifying the thing
numbered: e. g. In apposition: DIW OPS rams two,
On OMY cities two, meray enhiob aay eye Ba muy ous SONS,
three, or three, sons.—In construction: DWI8 nwow
three, or, a triad, of men ; D2 W two sons; MID Ww
two daughters.
2d, All the dual and decimal numerals, however, sig-
nifying numbers exceeding ten, prefer the state of appo-
sition: snch as, DIWY twenty; DIN two hundred, &c.
On the Concordance of the Numerals with the T. hing, §c.
numbered.
3d, Generally, the numerals taken from ¢hree to
ten, inclusively, are put in the gender different from
that of the thing numbered, perhaps for the sake of
variety; and they require the thing, &c. numbered to
be in the plural number: e.g. DW2D AVI, or nyaw
DWAD seven male lambs; NIWAD VAY seven female
lambs.
ART. 238. 4.] ON THE SYNTAX. 323
4th, Also, when the numeral signifies any number
exceeding ten, it may likewise disagree in gender with
the thing, &c. to be numbered; while the thing, &ec.
numbered, will be put in the singular number: e. g.
UN maw DWAW seventy and seven men; Mwy yaw
IW seventeen years; NI OX DI WN five years
and a hundred year, Gen. v. 6.
5th, There is nothing peculiar in the construction of the numerals
TN an hundred, and 28 a thousand; other numerals being madé to
agree with them or not, according to the preceding rules: while they
will be put either in apposition.or construction, in the singular or
plural number, according to those rules: e. g. FD maw FPN ON'3
NINA-VDIND DPYS"AWW) an hundred thousand, and eighty thousand,
and six thousands, and four hundreds, Num. ti. 9.
Other Modes of Construction.
239. In many cases, however, we find, that when the
numeral exceeds the number one, the thing, &c. numbered
is put in the plural, whether the numeral precede or
follow it, the gender being as before: e. g. WWD YW OPS
rams twelve, Num. vii. 87; WY DAW... DWIAD lambs
male ..:. twelve, Ib.; DID WY Dw twelve bullocks,
Ib.; OND APS IN] ONWY twenty and four bullocks, Tb.
v. 88. | rv
See also Gen. xvii. 20, xxv. 16, xxvi. 12, xxxi 15. 23, Josh.
iv. 2, xxi. 19, 2 Sam. xix. 18, 1 Kings iv. 13, Jer. xxxvill. 10, Ezra
viii. 35, &c. And, vice versa, raw wan five year, 2 Kings xxii. 1, &e,
2d, The intermediate numbers between ten and twenty, twenty and
thirty, &c. are formed upon the principles already investigated in the
cases of words added for the purpose of qualifying, specifying, or
otherwise restricting, the meaning of others; that is, either by appo-
sition or definite construction, immediate or mediate: e. g. “wy mylw
seventeen, in wmmediate apposition : DYaw) YIW seventy and seven,
y 2
324 LECTURE XV. [ART. 239. 3.
mediate apposition: "WY %2W twelve; WY NIWwW eighteen, definite
construction.
3d, In many cases, when the numeral is in apposition, it is to be
taken as an ordinal: e. g. TW DDD the fortieth year, Deut. i. 3;
i. e. taking it in the order of computation, the year, forty.
So Gen. i. 5. TS BY day, one, i. e. the first. Sce also Exod.
xu. 6, Num. xii. 2, Deut. xv. 9, 1 Kings xvi. 10, 2 Kings viii. 16,
xi) 2; Bzek.ixxixd7, Dandi. 1421, vith ixwl,. sabe.
4th, When it is necessary to qualify the thing, &c.
numbered by the addition of some attributive, this
attributive will be made to agree with it, either in
a formal or logical point of view, at the pleasure of
the writer: e. g. in the first case, WN TWN) DIDYW
TIDN NWI eighty and five men, bearing (sing.) an ephod,
1 Sam. xxii. 18.—In the second, DY WR DWM fifty
men running (pl.), 1 Kings 1. 5.
5th, The thing numbered, measured, &c., may also
be considered as specific (p. 301, note), and to be
construed as adsolute with reference to the preceding
noun: as, 0'J2 Dwi ow thirty, sons ; *\D2 abs a thousand
(of) silver, &c. We, nevertheless, have occasionally the
state of construction: as, Dna nw two (pieces, &c. of)
bread, 1 Sam. x. 4, &c.: as, WY OND (Art. 238. 4.).
6th, From the facility of supplying certain names of
weight and measure on account of their frequent oc-
currence, they are often omitted by the ellipsis: e. g.
ais) wow Dw -NR pwn so they weigh for my price
thirty (shekels of ) silver, Zech. xi. 12; DY ww TON
so he measures six (measures of ) barley, Ruth iii. 15. 17;
win? TINA in the first (day) of the month, Deut. i. 3;
WRIA MODAN WL and they keep the passover in
the first (month), Num. ix. 5; WIN? IoNa ws72
ART. 239. 6. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 325
in the first (month) in the first (day) of the month,
Ezek. xxix. 17.
See also Gen. xx. 16, xlv. 22, Lev. xxiii. 17, 1 Sam. x. 4, Ezek.
xlv. 21. And, where some of these ellipses are supplied, Gen. xxii. 15,
Lev. xxvii. 3. 6, Ruth ii, 17, &c.
326 LECTURE XVI. [ ART. 240,
LECTURE XVI.
ON THE COMPLEMENTS OF WORDS GENERALLY, AND OF VERBS
IN PARTICULAR.
240. It will perhaps be readily granted, that the
character of the words necessary to complete any sen-
tence must very much depend on the signification of the
preceding ones; or, which is the same thing, on the
signification intended to be conveyed in them by the
Writer. I may say, for example, J am now riding, equi-
tans ego ; or,am a riding. But it may also be necessary
to state whether this be on a horse, in a carriage, &c. as
also to, or from, what place I am thus proceeding; or,
for what purpose, &c. The same will hold good of all
attributives. A man may be said to be swift generally,
or swift on foot, swift in the chase, in the pursuit of an
enemy, to revenge, to do good or evil, or a thousand
other things, which it may be necessary for a Writer or
Speaker to state.*
2d, Now, all verbs are necessarily attributive in signi-
fication; and, from what we have seen, as to their
etymology, there is strong reason to suspect, that they
are composed of nothing more than nouns, put in
a state of conjugation or combination with one or
other of the pronouns. If then, attributive nouns will
necessarily stand in need of such complementary words
* So in Is. xiii. 19, and Amos iv. 11, we have DBMS construed as a verb ;
and, in Infinitives and Participial nouns this is done regularly.
ART. 240. 3. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 327
in order to complete, or modify, the sentences in which
they are found, the same must necessarily be true of the
same words, when found in the form of verbs. We shall
take it for granted, that this is the case. Usually, how-
ever, this has been expressed by saying, that nouns de-
rived from verbs are subject to the same mode of con-
struction with the verbs from which they descend. I
prefer the contrary method of stating this question; be-
cause I can see why nouns as such, require this kind of
construction: of verbs we know nothing, on the other
supposition. I think, therefore, that this method is
both the most natural, and the most easy to be under-
stood: and, as I find constructions which can be un-
derstood on no other principle, I have been induced to
prefer it.
3d, We have seen, that nouns substantive or attribu-
tive may be qualified, &c. by the addition of other words,
either in a state of apposition, or of definite construction,
immediate, or mediate, just as the signification of such
word shall require, or, as the intention of the Writer
or Speaker may be. ‘The same is the case with verbs,
whether active, passive, transitive, intransitive, or
neuter.
4th, In treating of the complements or qualifying
words of substantives and attributives, we adopted the
terms Immediate and Mediate as best calculated for our
purpose on that occasion. We shall use the same now ;
because, we believe this to be sufficiently easy and in-
telligible ; and, because it may be interesting to find the
same principles prevailing throughout every part of this
Language.
5th, But it will be necessary to make another dis-
tinction here. The influence of any noun or verb may
extend to one or more subsequent words with some vari-
328 LECTURE XVI. [ ART. 241,
ation of the sense in each; e.g. I may say, “ I am riding
a horse.” Here I would term the influence of the verb
riding, Simple, because it affects one object only, which is
here “a horse.” But, if I say, “I am riding a horse
towards the city at full speed,” then I should term the
influence of the verb Various, because various subsequent
terms are affected by it. I prefer this method of con-
sidering the influence of verbs, &c., because the Latin
cases of nominative, genitive, accusative, &c., as taken
by Schreederus and others, seem to me ill calculated to
convey just notions on this subject; and, because |
believe these distinctions to be perfectly foreign to this
language. ‘The truth is, the qualifymg words added
here, as in the rules already given, are nothing more than
restricting terms, added for the purpose of defining, &e.
the signification of such verb: and, they may be resolved
by recurring to one or other of those rules.
241. Generally, having determined whether the signi-
fication of any verb or verbal noun, is to be taken actively
or passively,* the influence of its action or passion, con-
sidered with reference to the subsequent terms either in
immediate or mediate connection with it, will be Szmple
or Various, just as the signification of such verb shall
require, or, as the intention of the Writer or Speaker
may be.—Laamples of active verbs and verbal nouns in
immediate connection with a following term, and where
the influence is, consequently, simple ; DIR AW. let us
make, MAN, Gen. i. 26; YUYW seeding, or producing,
SEED, Ib. 29.
* We must not always suppose, that because a word has an active or passive
form, it must necessarily be so construed. See Storr, p. 200, &c.—It will
immediately be seen, that this is nothing more than an inversion of the rule
respecting the mutual dependence of words (Art. 230.).
ART, 241. 2. | ON THE SYNTAX. 329
2d, In mediate connection: DYOWT AN pbx N13
God created tHe HEAVENS, Gen. i. 1; TINTTNN-- NY
and he saw THE Licut, Ib. 4; PRI WNIT Pa--- S24
Wr and he divided BETWEEN THE LIGHT and BETWEEN
THE DARKNESS, Ib.; NIP JWI --- “iN9 N1P% and he
called the Licht... . and THE DARKNESS he called... .
Ib. 5; DVO Pa 2D (a thing) dividing serweEN THE
WATERS, Ib. 6.
3d, Both in zmmediate and mediate connection, or,
where the influence is various : inn? "5 MWY (a tree)
producing FRUIT, ACCORDING TO ITS KIND, Gen. i. 11;
wD? yu. Dw cherb) producing sEED AFTER its KIND,
Ib. 12.
The verb 77 construed with % will signify either fo have, or to
become, according to the context: e. g. Ws mn yd the rich man
had flocks, 2 Sam. xii. 2; nT YIN) so they shall become blood, i. e.
the waters, Exod. iv. 9.
4th, Where the connection is mediate, and the influence
various: YIST oY PRI) OWT WPA NAiNg? pn
242°. and they shall be ror LIGHTS IN the FIRMAMENT
of the heavens, ror giving light UPON THE EARTH, and it
was so, Gen.1. 15; ata, DYIWIT pra DVN DNk im
pr owixe pa oat apa ofa Ob sc yasn-oy
)0R5 DoN RT JWT and God placed THEM IN
THE FIRMAMENT of the heavens FOR GIVING LIGHT UPON
THE EARTH, and FOR RULING OVER THE DAY and OVER
THE NIGHT, and FOR DIVIDING BETWEEN THE LIGHT and
BETWEEN THE DARKNESS. And God saw THAT (it was)
coop, Ib. 17, 18.
5th, So, in causative, and other doubly transitive
verbs, the influence will be necessarily various: e. g.
3a TVA apa yind and I caused HER to walk THE DESERT,
Hos. ii. 6; AMD OPM DvD who causes THE SOLITARY
ones to possess A HOUSE, Ps, Ixvili. 7.
330 LECTURE XVI. [ART. 24]. 6.
6th, In these cases, though the objects are more than
one, the connection is immediate, which is rare: in the
following, both immediate and mediate: e.g. .... AW)
aa JIT NS and he caused word to be returned To
THE KING, 1 Kings i. 80; OVI" Nya 12? he taught
KNOWLEDGE TO THE PEOPLE, Eccl. xii. 9; 72T Ww
VOUS let them cause My PEOPLE to hear MY WORDS,
Jer. xxiii. 22.
7th, In these the connection is miscellaneous, and
some of the verbs passive: NOH DVT Np? DTN 77)
SJ2VIN AWD ARID) TWAS Oipa-IN Down and God
said, Let the waters be gathered FRoM BENEATH the hea-
vens TO one place, and let the dry land appear, and it
was so, Gen.i. 9; JIDANS ris )* then let it be
shewn TO THE PRIEST, Ley. xii. 49; 2 ASTI WR
which thou wast shewn IN THE MOUNT, Exod. xxvi. 30 ;
DIAN 85 thou shalt not cause tHEM to be worshipped,
Exod. xx. 5, xxiii. 24; FUTOY2 MNT pasoc-ny yA let
wt be given (i. e.) this land to thy servants, Num.
SERIO?
See also Gen. xxvii. 42, 2 Sam. xxi. 6, Jer. xxxv. 14, &c.
Observations.
Sth, A little consideration will enable any one to see, that the con-
struction must in all cases very much depend on the intention of the
Writer. It is true, certain constructions only are allowed; because,
they have been generally adopted, and these are to be known only from
long and constant practice in the language, or, from the use of the
Concordance: but, in general, the principle is in Hebrew, as it is in
English: viz. that the significations of words will always be influenced
by those with which they are connected. A few remarks on the ex-
amples given will make all plain. In the first we have OTS MWY) et us
* The particles mostly used with passive verbs, however, are D and D. See
Gen. xiv. 19, Is. i. 26. lxii. 4, Ezek. xiv. 3, Neh. vi.1, 1 Chron. v. 20, &c.
ART. 241. 9. ] ON THE SYNTAX. ddl
make man. Here, the word man may be said to be in zmmediate connec
tion with the preceding word, and to qualify or restrict its signification,
just as F12W year does the word DY2IS forty, in the phrase DXB
3w fortis year (Art. 239. 3.); or, as the English word year deci the
et forty, mn the same example; absolutely, as it regards the gram-
S bos
matical construction, and, therefore, just as the poses i. €. the specific
construction does in the Arabic (see p. 301, note). This would be
exemplified in that language, by what is termed a juxta-position,
I GULL Fret S74 I rUr
Kwai), or S gxiel) , thus: ules; pia, or pian, which is, in
S oF
reality, nothing more than As, i e. specification, with reference to
the signification of the verb. The next example (Art. 241.) is perfectly
3 CABG Hi FAG ASA 7
parallel to the Arabic: &>, eyes OF Lys uy handsome (of }
face. See p. 320. note.
9th, The next instance (Ib. n. 2.), is one which has been termed
mediate connection, that is, where we have the particle MS falling
between the verb and its complementary or restricting word, ap-
parently for the purpose of shewing, that the following, not the pre-
ceding, word is to be construed as complementary to the signification
of the verb. Kimchi has remarked long ago (see Art. 179. 11. note),
that such is the office of this particle. His illustration is the phrase,
Judah killed Simeon YYW TTA WT, where he says, that the par-
ticle being omitted, it could not be known which is the subjective, or
which the objective, case to the verb. This would undoubtedly be the
case in this and all similar passages; and I believe, this is one of the
offices of this, and perhaps of all the other particles, so situated, though
this is certainly not all. The other particles have, likewise, the force
of defining the relation, which the action of the verb has, with refer-
ence to that word or words, which designate its object either directly
or indirectly: e. g. 3277 construed with ON will signify, he walked
towards ; with © or > from; with ‘3p? before; with TOS or OS
after, and so on: and even MN, as Schroederus has remarked, always
requires, that the word following it be definite in signification.*
Situated, then, as this and other particles are, in mediate connection
* Syat. R. 31.
332 LECTURE XVI. [ART. 241, 10.
with verbs, they may be considered as occasionally pointing out the
objective, or, perhaps, some oblique, case of the noun immediately
affected by them: and hence it is that the particle 8 has been said to
mark the objective case in active, and the nominative (which is really
the objective case) in passive, verbs.*
10th, This particle, however, is often found without any preceding
verb; and, in those cases, seems manifestly intended to impress upon
the mind the force of the word immediately following it, as being of
considerable importance. Of this character is the following passage, to
which many more might be added: MON) 72YTT TAY" as ro the
pillar of the cloud, it passed not away, Neh. ix. 19. The verb follow-
ing is manifestly not passive, 8, therefore, does not here point out
the objective case: on the contrary, it is found in appos‘tion with the
nominative of a verb in the active voice; and apparently for the pur-
pose of impressing that word on the reader’s mind, as being import-
ant. I find that in most cases, as to, mith reference to, or the like,
will give a translation, perhaps, exactly suiting its import: and, if I
am not greatly mistaken, will hold in all others: e. g. prior S72
pyawi FS God created (1 speak) wit REFERENCE to the heavens,
&c. So DRT NS HB paarab he walked about, i. e. daily exercised
himself (1 say) WITH REFERENCE to God, Gen. v. 22; YTS 839)
and he went out (i. e.) witH REsPEcT to the city,+ Exod. ix. 33. That
* The Bengali particle Ké is used in a similar way, as is also the Persian
|,. See Professor Haughton’s Bengali Gram. Artt. 90. 91. 92.
+ Schrederus has endeavoured to explain this sort of construction, by
having recourse to a metonymy, by which he says, intransitive verbs take the
signification and construction of transitive ones (Synt. R. 69.). For my part,
I can see no necessity for this; nor, for introducing the doctrine about nomi-
native, accusative, or other, cases, in conformity with the usage of the Latin
and Greek grammars, which has really been the cause why Schreederus has
been driven to this expedient. In Hebrew we have no cases. Why then
should we talk about that which has no existence, and then coin rule after
rule in order to conform ourselves to notions thus groundless? If then we can
conceive these particles to have the same defining character that they have
when coming between nouns in construction or apposition (see Art. 236), we
shall have no difficulty in perceiving why they are sometimes omitted, or used
the one for the other: e.g. 7922 YOS A825) so they enter the land of Canaan,
Gen. xlv. 25, for ]¥2D YOS ON into the land of Canaan; YT TMIwW
return (10) the city, for YET PS to the city, 2 Sam. xv. 27; ITY OW AY?
ART. 241. 11.1] ON THE SYNTAX. 335
is, generally, the person or thing recommended to the attention of the
reader, as being the object influenced by some important word in the
context, may, whether it be in the situation of a nominative or objective
case, be pointed out by the particle US being put before it.
11th, In the eighth example (n. 3.) we have both the tmmediate and me-
diate connection of a verb or verbal noun with its complementary words.
And here, it will be immediately seen, that had not the particle » been
introduced before the last, some ambiguity might have arisen, as to the
precise sense in which it ought to be taken: or, in other words, as to
the precise relation of the latter, to the two former, words. The same
has been remarked of words in the state of mediate apposition and con-
struction. The principle in each case is one and the same.
12th, With respect to the causative verbs, if we suppose them to be
actually composed of two words; which, according to our system, is
always the case with Hiphhil and Hophhdal, we shall readily perceive
why two complementary, or restricting, words would be necessary to
complete the idea contained in each of them. This is what Gram-
marians usually term, a double accusative: and these verbs, doubly
transitive. It is curious enough to remark, that when these verbs
become passive, the object of one of them will stand as its nominative,
that of the other as the accusative: for this obvious reason, viz. that,
in thiy case, one of the verbs only, in the compound takes the passive
character, the other remains active: e. g. Lev. xii. 49, as above,
Fac eam videri a sacerdote. This is still more evident in the Arabic
Io CrGs
where we have terminations marking these cases: e. g hy Z
Ff £UnD a Pima rk
Uae Kul T caused thy son to eat flesh ; passive, las J sil exe!
niin they ascend the heavens, they descend the deep, Ps. cvii. 26. In all
which cases, the latter word in the construction may be considered as being
merely specific, as in the case of nouns of number, weight, measure, &c. In
other instances the particles sometimes vary: as, Tens S7) 1 Kings
indL; risbw EI NT he feared the king—he feared from before Solomon,
Tb. 50. And Ps. lv. 20, DXTHON ANTS they fear God, without a particle. So,
with S39, YY SSS he went out (intg) the city, 2 Kings xx. 4; “ON NS)
TINA he went out to the altar, Lev. xvi. 18; piawn MSS) Num, xxi. 28
mim OS TSS) Num. xvi. 35; mT “bn NS) Ib. xvii. 11. With >) =)
Est. vii. 8, compare vill. 15; ara aE NE) Cone 4, &c.
334 LECTURE XVI. © (ART. 241. 13
thy son was caused to eat bread. See M. de Sacy’s Gram. Arab.
vol. ii. p. 101. In the other species, viz. Pihél, and Puhal, the acces-
sory idea may be considered as being equivalent to an additional
word.
13th, Of the other examples nothing need be said; the variety of
the particles introduced is such as the various relations of the words
to each other seems to require, for the purpose of presenting to the
mind of the reader the various circumstances, which the writer wished
to detail; but without these, all must have been error and confusion.
14th, It has been said, that practice and the Concordance must be
relied on, as to the use and signification of these particles, and in
order to know, what verbs are construed with or without them. Some
general rules, however, have been given on this subject ; but, as they
cannot be entirely relied upon, we may be excused if we omit them
altogether.
The question relating to the omission, &c. of the particles, is one of
so much importance, and generally so little understood, that I shall,
perhaps, be excused if I cite a paragraph from Storr on it; Sect.
Ixxiill. 11:—‘ Prepositiones seepe omitti videntur, ubi accusativum
potius intelligere aportet; ut Hos. i. 17. in verbis "22, DPD non
defit Beth, sed tempus indicatur accusative, quemadmodum apud
Arabes (p. 267. s.) (Art. 232.), Es. xxviii. 21, “072 valet quidem:
sicut im monte, sed accusativus apud Hebreeos eam vim habet
(p. 321. s.), Jer. xxxu. 24, “ aggeres venerunt ad urbem;” proprie est :
Venerunt urbem. Nam ante suffixum in 2812" (veniat ad me), Ps.
Xxxvi. 12, certe non omissa est przepositio, sed accusativus agnosci
debet (add. p. 272. ss.), 1 Sam. xxi. 2; sensus quidem est: ne quis
resciscat aliquid de negotio, cujus caussa (TW ) mitto te, sed TW
proprie accusativus est, valens (p. 270. ss.) cujus ratione habita,
quemadmodum preecedens, T2TI"N significat quod attinet ad nego-
tum. Sic 2 Sam. xi. 22: “ indicavit Davidi totam rem, cujus caussa
miserat eum, vel: quam in mandatis ei dederat, Joabus,” (add. Exod.
ipso eels
15th, What has been here said of verbs is true of all verbal nouns,
whether of the Infinitive or Participial kind; i. e. the complementary or
defining word may be put, either in the state of apposition mediate or im-
mediate, or in that of definite construction. The former cases have been
sufficiently exemplified ; the following are a few instances of the latter.
Of Infinitives, DODWA VEY DD in the days of the judges’ judging,
Ruth i. 1; 12 727 V2 from the abundance of my speaking against
ART. 242.) ON THE SYNTAX. 335
him, Jer. xxxi. 20; TIAA TDW the keeping of his statutes, Deut.
viii. 11; TO OTS) wpwa MWY she doing of judgment, and the
loving of piety, Mic. vi. 8. Of Participles, WEI WPI seckers of
my soul, SY WIT) and followers out of my evil, Ps. xxviii. 13;
Mw DTT) 732 ‘S73 carriers of a shield, and treaders of the bon,
2 Chron. xiv. 7; WD2 MDW a restorer of the soul, “ND MDB
an instructor of the simple, =p) ‘maw delighters of the heart, &c.,
Ps. xix. 8, 9. See also Gen. ix. 10, xxiii. 10, xxxi. 16, 2 Sam.
v. 8, Is, xxxvill. 18, li. 4, Lam. i. 4, Joel i. 8, Ps. xxxviii. 6, Cant.
ii. 5, &c. With pronouns, Ps. xxxvii. 2, Prov. 11. 9, ix. 18, &c.
242. Having thus far stated and exemplified the
general law relating to the complementary or restrictive
words attendant on verbs, we may now proceed to notice
a few particular instances, which may otherwise give
some trouble to the Learner.
On apparently Eliiptical Constructions.
2d, The nature of some active,* neuter, and of all
passive verbs, being such as to include within themselves
the word expressive of their object, complement, or other
restriction, will not stand in need of any other for that
purpose, when their influence is semple: but, when it is
various, the connexion will be either zmmediate or me-
diate, as before. In the one case, the connection may be
said to be Implicit, in others, Explicit. N.B. This
has been usually termed by the Grammarians, “ Con-
structio pregnans.” Examples: 927 8? thou hast not
made usury, or gain, Ps. xliy. 13.
This is an instance where the influence may be said to be simple
* These are for the most part verbs of the Pihél and Hiphhil species, which
have been formed from substantive nouns, Art. 162. 8. 165. 5, &c. See Glass.
Philol. Ed. Dathe, pp. 185-254, &c. Storr, p. 15, &c. For similar instances
in the Arabic, see Mr. de Sacy’s Gram. vol. ii. Art. 653—657.
336 LECTURE XVi. [ART. 242. 3.
and implicit ; but, when we add EFIYITIPA by their price, it is various,
and necessarily explicit, and we have the particle 2 introduced for the
purpose of pointing that out. So YIND WAW-SD ix hath not struck
root into the earth, Is. xl. 24. See Jer. x. 18, Josh. xxiv. 20, &c.
So MENS cleanse yourselves, or rather, become ye clean, Gen. xxxv. 2.
See also Ib. xxv. 22.
3d, Of this character are the following examples,
which have usually been considered as being impersonal :
j5 Man he became hot to himself (or, heat became hot
to him), Ps. xviii. 8; ‘YIN (VA IMVA-ON Let it not be-
come hot, (i. e. let not heat exist) zn the eyes of my Lord,
Gen. xxxi. 35; PVA YY ON let not evil be in thy
eyes, Ib. xxi. 12; 377? ISI and (pressure) pressed
upon David, 1 Sam. xxx. 6; mov ODN NO* (rain)
rains not upon it, Amos iv. 7.
4th, So with passive verbs and participles: as, 1/28)
WI) so they said, it has become desperate, Jer. xviii. 12,
i.e. WN] VOR, or V7 739 THE MATTER has become des-
perate; IND Myw) it became very tempestuous, Ps.
1. 3, ie. the tempest AWW became so; JA TAY WS
which has been imposed as slavery upon thee, Isa. xiv. 8,
i.e. MTNIVI the slavery mentioned just before; WS
p 9 which had been caused to be born to him, Gen.
xxxv. 26, 1. e. the sons mentioned just before ; MA ATW
in which it shall be spoken respecting her, Cant. vii. 8,
i.e. 251 a word.
See also Gen. iv. 26, x. 25, xlvi. 22, Is. xxiii. 1, Lam. v. 5, Job
xxx. 15. And with participles, Is. xxvi. 8, Ps. Ixxxviil. 8. ©
5th, Hence it is, that in many instances the word
necessary to complete, or qualify the sense of the verb,
o- 427 Gr CFS
* This would universally be so supplied in the Persian Bd} ra wb
Ur G te
sani Law
ART. 242.6. | ON THE SYNTAX. : 337
is frequently omitted by the ellipsis: e.g. 19 m9 85
she had not borne to him, i.e. a son, Gen. xvi. 1; nw)
so he sent, i.e. a messenger, Ib. xli. 14; 728) he accu-
mulated, 1. e. wealth, Ps, xxxix. 7.
See also Ps. Ixxvi. 12, 1 Sam. viii. 15, &c. The same often takes
place in phrases of common occurrence : as, 117D° he cut, or made, i.e.
a covenant, V2 1 Sam. xx. 16; O59 Ne) they broke not, i. e.
or? bread, Jer. xvi. 7; aia they cast, i. e. S78 the lot, 1 Sam.
xiv. 42,
6th, Under this head may be arranged the apparently
frequent ellipses of the antecedent to the relative pro-
noun WS The reason seems to be this: viz. TYR
ought to be considered, not as being a mere adjective
signifying qui, gue, quod, &c. but, is gui, ea que, id
gquod,* &c. including a substantive, like other attributes.
Hence, in such cases there is no real ellipsis: e. g. NW
PIN-RI wry he will take thee up to (a place) which
I know not, 1 Kings xvii. 12; PaARw IWS ONw)
DWI and thou shalt drink out of tHar wuicn the
young men draw, Ruth i. 9; MVS NVI WR in (THE
PLACE in) WHICH thou diest, I will die, Ruth i. 17.
7th, This relative pronoun (WS) must be considered,
moreover, as being definite in its signification, like other
pronouns: and, consequently, not necessary to be ex-
pressed when the antecedent is indefinite: e. g. DV2
nw “ON MT 3" on a day (on which) Jehovah spoke
to , Exod. vi. 28; Pw 37 Tim ab 8 DIN-TIWE
blessed 1s ANY MAN, Jehovah imputes not to him iniquity,
i. e. to whom, &c. Ps. xxx. 2, comp. Ps. i. 1.
* See Noldius sub voce, p. 98, note d. It is also a remark of Noldius,
‘< Prepositio semper pronominis relativi, ad quod se refert, objectum supponit,
atque in quod ipsa inflecit ; sive id exprimendum concipiatur per nomen, sive
per pronomen antecedens ‘f9 vel 179,” &c. See also his note under TWD.
Concord. Part. Ed. 1734. :
ZL e
338 LECTURE XVI. [ART- 242. 8.
Sth, There are, however, some instances in which this rule seems to
be contravened: e.g. *2¥, ISD T2aT 38 J am tue man (who) has
seen affliction, Lam. iil. 1 ; mys So ow) IDI) they sacrificed to
the devils (who are) not God, &c. Deut. xxxii. 17. But in these cases,
the article does not refer so much to the definite character of the noun,
as to its properties, i.e. I am that sort of man, &c. See Art. 233. 11.
9th, In the following examples, some consequence
seems to be intimated by the influence of words termed
pregnantia, which may, therefore, be supplied by the
ellipsis: INQY AWS Aim MAMI. Oe FIN? Awd Ww
and Moses relates to Aaron all the words of Jehovah,
which he had sent him, (i. e. to relate) Exod. iv. 28;
see also the remainder of the verse ; MINYON J7MD) and
they shall fear towards Jehovah, i. e. fearing shall turn
to Jehovah, Hos. in. 5; INSP? +++ JIU and they
fear meeting him, i.e. they fearing proceed to meet him,
1 Sam. xvi. 4; FW jaw 199M YN? to the earth have
they profaned the habitation of thy name, 1. e. profaned
and cast it down to the earth, Ps. lxxiv. 7.
See also Gen. xii. 15, Exod. xxvii. 20, xxxiv. 15, Lev. iv. 2,
Numb. xix. 2, Deut. i. 36, xxv. 18, 1 Sam. x. 9, xxiii. 7, xxiv. 6,
2 Sam., xviii 29.531, Oxi.) 9.2912). 2 Kings.v) 3.)6) Ps. xxne ee,
xxvill. 1, lv. 19, Ixvi. 15, lxxiil. 27, Ixxxix. 40, exviii. 5, Is. vii. 6,
xxi. 9, Jer. iii..20,~xli..7;.. Hos. i. 2,‘iv..12, Job-vi. 14, Ezra ii. 62,
2 Chron. xxxul. 1, &c. |
10th, On this principle it is, that words, the same or
similar with those preceding, when apparently necessary
for completing the sense of a sentence, are often omitted :
one P¥DON 28) POV ON .29-O INCLINE MY HEART
to thy statutes, and not to gain, Ps. cxix. 36; oya-9D)
sav Dip nxy7 opabn-nar mibipacnsy oN and the
whole of the people saw the thunderings and the light-
ningos, and the sound of the trumpet, &c. Exod. xx. 18.
See also Deut. iv. 12, xxxil. 13, Job x. 12, Est. iv. 1. And in the
New Testament, 1 Cor. in. 2, 1 Tim. iv. 3, James i. 9,10. Hence,
also, the word hear, &c. has often the signification of understanding,
ART. 242. 11.) ON THE SYNTAX. 339
obeying, or the like. Comp. Acts ix. 7, with xxii. 9: and, generally,
verbs of sense are used the one for the other.
11th, Hence, also, verbs, nouns, or particles, which
may be supplied from some part of the context, or which
are necessary to it, are often omitted by the ellipsis:
e. g. of verbs: DIWANA Wa YO-MW observe ye who
(whoever of you concERNING) the young man Absalom,
2 Sam. xvii. 12; ANON UR) iny-oR UN (let) each
man (GO) to his city, and each man to his land, 1 Kings
Xxil. 36. }
Ome x NV al Lowe XXXL Oe XXXIV. LOW PtOVevi cOMmLa xvi, 6,
Hos. viii. 1, &c. And particularly of “AND saying, e. g. 32212)
DWNT min (788? ) they consider (saying), Is this the man? Is.
xiv. 16, ib. 8, &c. which is perhaps owing to the direct and abrupt
manner in which citations are generally made by the Hebrews. See
Art. 244, 13.
12th, This often happens also with the noun, which
is the apparent nominative, and sometimes when it must
be supplied from different parts of the same context:
e.g. TIN Dy? ae md? why gieth he (Gop) hight to
the sorrowful, Job ii. 20; vl Nal) TINY he asked
(i. e. THE PEOPLE) and he (Gop) brought the quails,
Ps. cy. 40; 177DN MUM PID? Dos TT Woxapy
IVI NX" and David called him (Urian), and he
(Urntan) ate before him (i.e. Davin), and drank, and
he (Davip) made him drunken, and he (URiaH) went
out in the evening, 2 Sam. x1. 13.
13th, The most frequent ellipsis is of the negatives,
85, px, ON, &e.: e.g. DY mpm pray mow m2 xb
Wy? SANK the poor (man) shall not be forgotten for
ever, (Nor) shall the expectation of the humble (ones)
for ever perish, Ps. 1x. 19.
See Deut. xxxiii. 6, 1 Sam. ii. 3, Ps. xliv. 19, Prov. xxv. 27,
xxx. 3, Is. xxxvill. 18, xli. 28, &c. Of 12 lest, Exod. xix. 22, Is.
vi. 10; mp why? Ps. ii. 1, 2, x. 1; ‘32 how often? Job xxi. 17,
VY
340 LECTURE XVI. [ART. 242. 13.
18, 19, 20; 7S how? Ps. Ixxiii. 19; 7728 Id. Lam. i. 1, 2, 3, 4,
i. 1. 2, iv. 1. 4. 8.10; 2 what? Joel 1.18; T2"TY how long?
Ps. iv. 3, Ixxxix. 47; “TY how long? Ps. xciv. 4, 5, 6, &c.
For an ample consideration of this subject, see Glassius’s Philologia
Sacra, Edit. Dathe, vol. i. p. 608, &c.
It has not been deemed necessary to enter at length into the consi-
deration of the government of verbs when followed by the personal
pronouns; or, of that of Infinitives or verbal nouns, &c. The view
which has been taken of the subject makes it unnecessary to enter into
any such discussion; the nature of the case requiring, that the con-
struction be analogous in every instance.
ART. 243. | ON THE SYNTAX. 341
LECTURE XVII.
ON THE MODES AND TENSES OF THE VERBS.
243. Having considered the construction of the Hebrew
verbs, we now proceed to discuss the doctrine of their
tenses.
2d, As the Hebrew Language recognizes no variation
of termination in verbs, indicative of mode, no place has
been assigned to that distinction in the paradigms:
nor will it be necessary to enter on that consideration,
until we have considered the doctrine of the tenses: but,
when this is done, we shall offer a few remarks on that
subject.
Of the Tenses.
244. In our theory of the verb we have proceeded
upon the supposition, that the Preterite tense is formed
on a Concrete noun as its basis;—the Present on an
Abstract.
2d, If, then, the basis of the Preterite be a Concrete
noun, such word considered alone, will necessarily refer
to some past time, for the commencement of the action,
passion, state, &c. meant by the root; and which, when
put into a state of conjugation, might be considered as
intimating some indefinite past tense. If, for example,
I say in Latin, Amans ego, or Amatus ego, the meaning.
must be, that at some time antecedent to the present,
I began to be, and consequently am, either the subject,
or object, of the action intimated by the verb amo: but,
342 LECTURE XVII. [ ART. 244. 3.
whether I shall be found to be so hereafter, must be
- determined by some word, or words, added for that
purpose.
3d, Accordingly we find, m Hebrew, that our Prete-
rite tense universally refers to past time, unless some of
the circumstances hereafter to be detailed, shall require
the contrary.
Ath, Again, if the Present tense be formed on an
Abstract noun, as no intimation whatever can be given,
by this combination, of any person or thing being at any
time past or future subject to the influence of such word,
the sense to be thus supplied will naturally apply to the
present time, unless indeed some of the circumstances
hereafter to be detailed suggest the contrary.
5th, But here an important question will arise, which is
this: How are we to determine the period from which we
are to reckon, when speaking of past, present, or future,
tenses? This, I believe, involves the principal part of the
question before us: and, unless we can shew in what respects
the Oriental writers differ from our own on this point, we
shall never be able to account for the construction of any
considerable part of the context found in any book written
in the Hebrew or any of its Dialects: but, if we can do
this satisfactorily, I think we shall be able to solve a
problem, which has hitherto baffled the skill of every
European Writer.
6th, In the first place then, if we suppose any writer to
be commencing a narrative, he must necessarily speak of
past, present, or future time, with reference to the period
at which his statement is made: and, to this period it
will be in his power to recur, whenever it may suit his
purpose to do so. ‘This use of the tenses may therefore
be termed Absolute.
7th, In the next place, a writer may speak of past,
a tiga Gee »
ART. 244. 8. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 343
present, or future events, with reference to some other
period or event already introduced into the context.
This may be termed the Relative use of the tenses.
8th, In the Hebrew paradigm, we have only two tenses,
viz. a Past, and a Present, tense. To the present tense,
the Participles* and Infinitives are nearly allied. That
is, either of these when unrestricted by any other con-
siderations, are generally to be understood as referring to
the present time, either absolute or relative. Besides,
in every case, both these tenses, together with the Partici-
ples, &c. may also become relaieve in their application; i.e.
they may be considered as speaking of a time either past,
present, or future, with reference to some other period
or event already introduced to the reader’s notice. Hence
a Preterite connected with another Preterite, may be
equivalent to our pluperfect; a Present following a pre-
terite, to our imperfect; and so on, affording every dis-
tinction of time necessary for the purpose of language.
Of these examples will now be given, beginning with
those which have been termed absolute.
9th, Generally, in the commencement of narrations,
paragraphs, &c. the use of the tenses will be absolute,
as in English: e. g. IN N72 MWR in the begin-
ning God cREATED, Gen. 1. 1; OVI OS YT OTR]
JAWS and (as to) the man he Knew Eve his wife, Ib.
iv, 1°
See also.Gen. iii..11, 12,13. 16, 17,. Isn 111415) &e.
10th, When it is necessary to enounce any thing in
* Participial nouns may, indeed, have been used as preterites, for the
reasons just given respecting concrete nouns: but, in practice, they include
within themselves no particular tense, and are, very much like ‘the present,
to be construed either in the past, present, or future, tense, as the context may
require: and may in almost every case be substituted for the present.
344. LECTURE XVII. [ART. 244. 10.
the absolute present tense,* either our present tense,
or one of the participles may be used: e. g. mp?
* See also Is. v. 23, vi. 2, vii. 14. In this last instance, I understand Jf),
he gives, to refer to the declaration or prediction of the Prophet, which is here
termed NIN sign, or wonder. See Gen. iv. 15, Exod. iii. 12, iv. 8. 28, 1 Sam.
il. 34, 2 Kings xix. 29, where it seems to mean a prediction, not « visible
sign.—-That, which has been termed an Aorist, by the Writers on Arabic
Grammar, is really the present tense, as will appear from the following
considerations. In a Commentary on the Kafia eels of Ibn ul Hajib, by
Najm Oddeen of Irak, preserved among Mr. Burckhardt’s books in the Public
Library at Cambridge, it is said of this tense, us ERAS > t ra Sea Jus,
sll ye He 15) ay 53!) py Suiial 3 je Ns!
Vi, Kyyil rind S spaie By ts!) dle MN reese ol
Leal, iis Be ie. “Some say, that itis absolutely a present tense, but al-
lowed to be used as u future, which is the bestopinion. For, when it is accompanied
by no other (words, &c.) it can refer to the present tense only: nor is it used as
a future, except when so accompanied. This is what we mean by absolute, and
FS £4 Um DI ”
allowable.” See also the following examples ; Jal SOL ay gas? st le
(or o ee vs
HAA) a man IS NOT JustTIFIED by the testimony of his own family; Og) le
-——
CIwsr & CStr 7 2Or9 OS WS Pee BOR
‘a a re eis ys By }, 508 onl those who have not believed
pO Nor kIKE, that any good thing SHOULD BE SENT down to you from your Lord.
M. de Sacy, Arab. Gram. vol. i. p. 132.
Again, they consider the present tense as being of two kinds ; one they term
G Zz 9 oy
the real present ; Keg ss FE: by which they mean, the tense which we have
termed absolute ; or, in other words, in which a person commits to writing
any event or number of events he may have to detail. This is what our
Grammarians always understand by I'he Present tense. The other is that
o-sr Po
which is termed a) on sx! » 1. e. the present, as to narration ; by which they
mean, the time contemporary with any event, and which may, therefore, be
considered as being present with it, although past, present, or future, with
regard to the real or absolute present tense. The following passages taken from
the Commentary on the Kafia by Moolla Jami will be sufficient to shew in
RS ee
pws ae t
Pee
-
wee
ART. 244. 10. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 345
MT) WON? DID AI what (is) the multitude of your
sacrifices to me ? satu Jehovah, Is. i. 113; AMD NI 139
mam “DN come now, LET US REASON together, SAITH J EHO-
vAH, Ib. v. 18; Va72% Mw my MI2M. Wap aha
woe (to those) wHo Join house to house, (who) tay field
to field, Is. v. 8.
In this last instance the participle holds a place in the parallelism
corresponding with the present tense.
NInY DvD 22 PIS IP PIV" 278 WwW.I9 Peg Ais
Gai 2) paz oD DNS? NAM for the Lord thy God
-
what manner toes speak on this subject (p. pret hie of the use of the
bgitels e it is said, Le st 28 EN ee us! us A)
i. e. when the avo (i. e. our present) is to be he as a pare with reference
to what may have gone before; or, with reference to the tune in which the relation
was first made, aS A PAST, PRESENT, Or FUTURE. And again, wo) ye
oye cs! Unie’ Uls!l J isis As} gio ado cdl Jel
Pr ekihe tac, Lolule v aiuy cecal
J Biahs al Use! (A io 7) pw is yi Les ri
ile eS ail ge Ach od ks, sta! SAD Rant:
i. e. if you intend by the verb preceded i ae to express the PRESENT TENSE,
i.e. the time of the ABSOLUTE PRESENT ; that is to say, by way of verifying tt as
present wrth the time of the original narration itself, &c. .... Or, by way of
(subsequent) rae NARRATION, (i. e. relatively) as if you should say, I was (so
circumstanced that) I proceeded yesterday, in order that I (may then) enter the city.
Here the word ev! I ENTER (is used in) the NARRATION of @ past circum-
stance, as though you had expressed yourself in this manner at the TIME of
entering, relating the circumstance in the relative present im consequence of having
so conceived the matter (in your own mind).
346 LECTURE XVII. CART. 244. 11.
(now) BRINGETH thee into a good land, a land of brooks
of water, of fountains and depths that sprina out of
the valleys and hills, Deut. vin. 7.
11th, When, however, any event, hereafter to come to
pass, is enounced prophetically ; or, any circumstances
are mentioned, manifestly relating to a future period,
either the present tense, or one of the participles may
then also be used: e. g. INI J27ANI 2573 42) TWN)
Jw and I maxe thee a great nation, and 1 BLEss
thee, and MAKE thy name great, Gen. xii. 2; WS PIS
ma 95 apmn-x? on? macbokm nizopa N° a land
wherein THOU MAYEST (or SHALT) EAT bread without
scarceness, thow SHALT (OST, MAYEST) not lack any
thing in it, &c. Deut. viii. 9; “MANN DPD UIT IN)
DDIOS DAPIUONS) DANN and (as for) me, behold me
ESTABLISHING (ABOUT TO ESTABLISH, 07 WILL ESTABLISH)
my covenant with you, and with your seed after you,
Gen. ix. 9. |
The reason of this seems.to be, that when any thing is predicted,
it.may now be said either to be doing or done in the mind of him who
makes the prediction. This is also the case in Arabic and Persian, and
apparently for the same reason. See Mr. Lumsden’s Persian Gram.
vol. ii. p. 3347. In the other case, i. e. when it takes a future sig-
nification from circumstances, the mind of the writer and reader seem
to be translated to the times referred to, and then the narration is
necessarily carried on in the present tense.
12th, Hence, im all cases in which any other person
is introduced as speaking, or, in which any event, evi-
dently of past occurrence, is mentioned, the tenses will
be reckoned from that period, 1. e. placing both the
writer and reader in the times in which such declaration,
prediction, citation, &c. took place. The same will be
the case, when the mind is carried forward in any predic-
ART. 244. 12..| ON THE SYNTAX. B47
tion.* Examples: Maa INR? Ws DYIWI WON mm
TON? YP VEWI WNL IAT WN NTND PINE VIN
725? 12ND NW NIT ONT PISS |S WT
the Lord God of heaven, who took me from my father’s
house, and from the land of my kindred, and who spaxe
unto me, and that swaRE unto me, saying, Unto thy seed
GIvE I this land, he suenvetu his angel before thee,
Gen. xxiv. 7.
Here we may observe, that the first three verbs, 727, m2, and
Y2W), are all in the preterite tense. The first is necessarily so, by
the operation of the rule, Art. 244.9. The two following are so,
because connected with the first by the relative pronoun “WS, which
is more consistently termed a conjunction ( das} 8 =>) by the Arabs.
In the next place, we have a citation, prefaced by “tas? saying.
Then we have the present tense, JN I give, i.e. I give now, which
' may be taken as a prophetic future (Ib. note, J1.). In the next place,
Abraham, having finished the citation, recurs to the period at which
he set out; and from this, the present mow he sends, he now sends, or,
taken prophetically, he will send, is to be reckoned.+
* Here the use of the tenses is relative: or rather, partly absolute, and partly
relutive.
+ Of this kind are all those expressions in Arabic, in which the leading verb
is found in the preterite tense, and the following ones in the present, or (as the
o 7 bUvs Perse Cee e SrG
Grammarians have termed it) the future: e. g. ds es ahs) Luss ret
v7 le we SY
he sought something that he might (now) eat it, but he finds not; w& 2 LK
g I +9, ‘
Loy 57% they two were (so situated) that they (now, i. e. in those circumstances)
Butt! with the horns of them both. The same principle holds good, when
two preterites follow each other without an intervening conjunction: for then,
the first will have respect to some time anterior to that from which the writer
CAs? kag 777
had set out, the second to one anterior to that of such verb: e. g. Oe ws
ee ot IF 2
youl > ne) and he was (so circumstanced that) he went our (before that time)
" S
to Khorasan, i.e. and he had gone out.
348 LECTURE XVII. [ART. 244. 13.
Corollary. 13th, Hence, it will also follow, that all
citations must be made in the words of the first speaker:
i. e. it is not said, that God sware and declared, THAT HE
WOULD GIVE the land to Abraham’s seed, &c.: but, in the
original terms of the oath, unto thy seed vo, or witt, |
civE zt. And also, that preterites and futures more or
“of
Mr. de Sacy remarks, that “le verbe Be employe comme auxiliare,
influe sur les prétérits om , &c. et les convertit tous en preterits anterieur.”
Arab. Gram. vol. i. p. 131. The reason of this is, that each of these verbs in-
volves a preterite tense in its own right, and the reader is, by the combination
of both, carried back into a time more remote than either alone could ex-
press. This the European Grammarians have termed the Pluperfect tense.
As the Persian language has for several centuries been cultivated on the prin-
ciples of the Arabic grammar, it may not be amiss to cite Mr. Lumsden’s remarks
on this use of the present tense. ‘‘ In the conversation of the Persians,” says he
(Pers. Gram. vol. il. p. 336.), ‘‘ though seldom perhaps in written composition,
the present is often found to supersede the past tense of the verb, in the state-
ment of those propositions which, though past in point of fact (i. e. as to the abso-
lute time in which the statement is ae are rere by the memory as if they
“09 ur Ley,
were present. Example: (7 3°. dsl _diuyod op 2 os Ces ose
Fe he aad “UPS f | er |
HS ce cgitles AS yb, pias us® io sliiose last night I went to the
-_
house of a friend, and there saw (see) a delightful assembly, aud enjoyed (enjoy)
a most pene spectacle. Of this nature,’ adds he, “‘ are the ani
Ciena’, Ot “& 47U7
3,6 oes thaw, The writer thus observes: rae yp pg it eee
S20 the Prophet informs (or has informed) us.”—This must bring to every
one’s mind, the gna, ait, and inquit of the Greeks and Latins, which are used
in the same way, and upon the same principle. I must also remark, that the
translation which puts this present tense in the preterite, or future, in the Eng-
lish or other European languages, as circumstances may require, will not
always be incorrect; although there may be cases when it will. See also
Mr. Lumsden’s Gram. pp. 349—355, with reference to the method of making
citations.
—
ART. 244. 13..| ON THE SYNTAX. 349
less remote from the time in which any declaration is
made, answering to our imperfects, perfects, pluperfects:
simple, compound, or, paulo-post, futures, may be formed
at the pleasure of the writer. The following passage
from Isaiah must suffice on this subject: MIT WONX-7D
oN p2e2-72) yaa ompintawy wind inwas
8> oye ond pad nna mmax ooo cn
mw} ninda WAN om TON pind IN 70
Starnes WN NinyIs ES ANN UN Tals TID AWE
JOWA NPT Fi aN wD yon woo DIMOND &. thus
HATH Jehovah said to his anoinied, to Cyrus, whose
right hand [ HAVE HOLDEN, for the subduing of nations
before him, and that I May unuoose the loins of kings ;
to open before him the two-leaved gates, and (that the)
gates MAY not BE sHuUT: GO, or WILL Go, before thee,
and MAKE LEVEL mountainous places: the gates of
brass Do I BREAK, and the bars of tron po I cuT ASUNDER.
And I have given thee the treasures of darkness, and
the hidden treasures of secret places, that thou MayEst
Know, that I am Jehovah who cau (thee) by thy name,
&c., Is. xlv. I—3.
Although this citation is not quite direct in the first instance,
the passage is nevertheless all put in the first person, as is also
the following, which is a direct citation. As to the tenses, the
first verb is in the preterite, because the prophet recites what he
had already received, perhaps at some distance of time. The next is
also preterite as referring to past events. The following ODE
and 733° are present as having reference to what may have been done
at the time when the declaration was made, or immediately subsequent
to it. The same may be said of the four following verbs. The next,
‘FINI is a preterite to be taken in an absolute future signification (see
Art. 246.); and the following 9) is present to the fulfilment of this
or immediately subsequent to it. The second preterite, SIT)
seems here to refer to time anterior to that of OS, with which His
declaration commences, though perhaps not so much so as to bear our
350 LECTURE XVII. TART. 244, 13.
pluperfect in the translation. The next two, MHSS8 and 38),
though presents or futures to ‘)?3T17, seem, nevertheless, to be an-
terior to YS as to tense. In the next place, TN, “WIS, and Das
are evidently present or future to V28, and consequently, in a tense
future to TINS and 252. In the last place, “02 is manifestly
future with respect to the preceding verb YJAN, &c.: and YIN,
which is present or immediately future to this, may be considered as
referring to something still further removed into futurity. Numerous
instances of this kind occur in the New Testament. For examples,
in which the present tense is thus carried backward or forward, see
Matt. ii. 13, Qaivela:; Mark il. 4, x2a%o,, &c. As future, Matt. ii. 4,
yevila:; Ib. v. 46, fxeles Ib. xvi. 11, texeiae; Ib. xxvi. 29, aivw.
Paulo-post future, Matt. xxvi. 24, waeadidela:; Ib. v.45. See Mark
xiv. 41, Luke ‘xxii. 21, 22, John xii. 3.11. 27. 33, &c. In like
manner, the Aorists are also used for the past, present, or future. It
will be unnecessary to give examples of the past. Of the present,
Matt. ili. 17, gudounca. So Ib. xxiii. 2, Luke i. 47, xv. 16, John i. 12,
1 John iv. 8. Of the future, John xi. 56, %On: xv. 6, 20AnOn, eEneavbn.
See also Rom. viii. 20. With zpiv or wes preceding, Mark xiv. 30,
John iv. 49, vill. 58, xiii. 19, &c. See also Matthize’s Greek Grammar,
vol ii. Art. 504, 505, &c.
14th, From what has been said, it must have ap-
peared, that the writer placing both himself and_ his
reader in times contemporary with the events of which
he is treating, can supply the deficiency of tenses apparent
in the Hebrew paradigm; an expedient often resorted to,
indeed, by the Latin and Greek historians, without the ne-
cessity which presents itself here. We must not suppose,
however, from this circumstance, that they never recur
to the original time from which they set out. This they
seem to do optionally, just as we find it done in the
Greek and Latin historians* (Art, 244. 6.): e.g. NUPM
* This is often done in the same construction: e.g. “ Instanr Volsci re-
centes, qui é castris impetum FECERANT ; INTEGRANT et illi pugnam, qui simulata
v-] — rf 7 4 ¢ 3 , cad ~
CESSERANT fuga. Livy, lib. vi. §. 24. “EQ’PAKAY 0’, “E@H & xipe, ray
a
ey ens =
ART. 245. | ON THE SYNTAX. 351
may) N7p wn =)) ab Ny, DION and God caus the
light day: but the darkness he cauimyp night, Gen. i. 5;
VARA N27] Ow TY WWD PAIN INK 121 50 they
LAY It uP till the morning, as Moses HAD COMMANDED,
and it DID not BECOME foetid, &c. Exod. xvi. 24.
245. If then, events consecutive of each other may
be enounced by verbs intimating a presence of action,
with reference to those primarily introduced into the
context, then may Subjunctive or Conditional sentences
also be enounced upon the same principle, by the present
tense, while the dependence of the different members one
upon another will be determined by the signification of
the particles introduced for that purpose.* Examples:
Gen. xxiv. 49. 50, NON) TON OWy Dav-DN TAyy
Is Por max. +2 72 Nocox1 oD Pha waycny
S28Dw~W and now, if ye Anz DEALING kindly and truly
with my master, tell me; and if not, tell me; and I
turn (or that | May TURN) to the right hand or to the
left; Ib. v. 5, AWK AANN-N? DN Tay POX IBN
YIST IS PANS Dy AIT NNT pays vine nbd
;OWID ONY WN then the servant said (says) to him,
perhaps the woman MAY not BE WILLING to follow me to
ae
yvvaina, nv we KEAEY ELE Quaarlev; Ma Al "EPH 0 xvgos, &e. Xenoph. Cyro-
pedia. Pantheia. See Matthie’s Greek Gram. vol. ii. Art. 504. 1.
* Professor Stewart lays it down as a rule (after Dr. Gesenius), that the
apocopated and paragogic forms of the present tense are generally to be taken in
a subjunctive or intensitive signification, respectively. (Heb. Gram. pp. 161—2,
&c. Andover, America, 1823.) After paying considerable attention to this
subject, I must confess, I cannot see any necessity for this rule; because I
find cases almost innumerable, wherein the common form of the present is to
be taken as a subjunctive, optative, &c. according to the force of the parti-
cles, with which it is accompanied ; and because I cannot perceive the least
possible difference of meaning between either forms when so accompanied.
The same may perhaps be said of the paragogic forms. Euphony is probably
the sole reason why one form is used at one time, and another at another.
352 LECTURE XVII. CART. 245, 2.
this land, must I surely bring back thy son unto the land
from whence thou camest ? Ib. xxvii, 4, DYAYOND “TY
WI FDIAN ava M728) \7 MIP wWMIIN Wwe
and make for me meats such as I have loved, and bring
to me, THAT I MAY EAT, IN ORDER THAT MY SOUL MAY
BLESS THEE.
2d, For the same reason, Commands, Prohibitions,
Blessings, Deprecations, and the like, will generally be
enounced, either by the Imperative, or by the present
tense. Examples: Gen. xxiy. 60, wn 7229 BIND poe
pei Ww OX Wo Become thou thousands of myriads,
and unt thy seed possess the gate of those that hate
them ; Gen. xxvii. 8, 8¥1 TDWPL PPA PID RITRY OMI
my % TTS] TW rake now, I pray, thy weapons,
thy quiver and thy bow, and Go ovr, wnto the plain, and
uunt for me a hunting ; Tb. 26, 0.72 2p Nam
CoME NEAR, I pray, and Kiss me, my son ; Ib. 28, Sata
DVWiT SOD DMI and may God aive thee of the dew
of heaven, &c.; Is. v. 19, WO? INYYD Aw 7MDs
Pay Osabn wip myy Msian) 27pN1 482) wer wo
HASTEN, HURRY his work that we may see (it), and LET
the counsel of the Holy’ One of Israel vraw Nicu, that
we may know (it); Ps. xxxvi. 1, DW"Da Innn-ox
mw WA NIPN-IN BE NOT IRRITATED at those who are
evil, ENVY THOU not the workers of iniquity.
246. Another leading principle, by which the tenses
are regulated, arises from the circumstance, that the
Hebrews, in common with some other nations of the East,
often represent events, of the future occurrence of which
they have no doubt, as having already taken place.*
. : , ; > .
* The following observations, on this use of the past tense of a Persian
verb, are taken from the Persian Grammar of Mr. Lumsden, vol. ii. p. 326.
Se >
ART. 246. | ON THE SYNTAX. 353
Examples: M WAT MI I-A} {a wt) TAD
P Dibey wea tina bs pi Nba iow sap ioaw dy
““ The prophetic denunciation of a future event will be often expressed in
the past Era in order to indicate ny certainty of Bs occurrence. Examples:
G&G YUH o GCG? for G: ot vrs OSU get
Ge C- Cru ros 77 o- 7” & “le
BOS jl f i ee ds SS pes “ The infidel, however happy
to-day, will be encircled to-morrow by a ues of curses, and will suffer miseries
of ey description.”
“It seems to me,”
continues Mr. Lumsden, “ that most of the preceding
rules have their basis in the following principle ...that the occurrence of a
future event is naturally a matter of great uncertainty, and generally speaking,
will be so considered, if expressed by the future tense of the verb. Past
events having already occurred, are subject to no uncertainty at all. And
hence it happens, that a Persian, having occasion to speak of a future event,
which he believes to be of certain occurrence, will naturally enough employ
the past tense of the verb: by the use of which he means to apprise his auditor,
that the occurrence of the event, though still future, is, in his opinion, not less
certain, than if it were past.”
Of this character is the passage cited by Mr. de Sacy, from the “¢ Concessus”’
OL Oke LC eee
of Hariri, Arab. Gram. vol. i. p. 123. &c. 4) ra ieeleold J oT wine
BY NO MEANS TOUCH your meat, unless, &c. Storr, p.163—4. Pococke’s Specim.
Hist. Arab. p. 57. Gram. Syr. Isaac Sciadrensis, Rom. 1636, p. C322, &c,
The following passages copied from a very valuable commentary on the
Arabic Grammar of Ibn ul Hajib, by cell on) es and preserved in
the public library of Cambridge, will put this question out of all doubt, as to
the practice of the Orientals. Speaking of the preterite tense, it is said:
Feels) alll hanes gatlen Lal blll gas fl Sit
elf
s
&-
ps we ia Bebe
3 “U
cdl Syeiny dudy lb) LAT 5,5 Fo
Les all ad 15) Edina! oT
StS ie
pcdalh Gol] eye ye BleKigs] Glee] soli, dls apis
oS Ni) Capt aa cola!) Cottage. cdey gy XW Gal Lei!) gsi
AA
354 LECTURE XVII. [ART. 246.
for a child was BEEN (i. e. shall surely be) BoRN to us, @
Son HATH BEEN (or surely shall be) GivEN to us, and
the government is upon his shoulder, and (one) calls his
name Wonder, Counsellor (or Preacher), Mighty God,
the Father (or Proprietor) of an age, the (pride of
peace ; Ib. vii. 18, WS 39237 Ti PIs 87 OPI AT
DI¥P WIRY AYP &c. AND IT SHALL (certainly) COME TO
PASS, 27 that dar y, Jehovah hisses (or shall hiss) to the
bee which (is) in the extremity of the rivers of Egypt,
eles gly Cede I abil, yo a Bea otic
est aN us | nly FAS ose pe Blea as sda és] (2 Wali,
(as! ay ad (oer ow) igs ied ys ustall c. le (eg
&e. lyn! Cae) tire = rd of cli] Le Repeat i. e.
“ The preterite tukes the future bia ae when used as intimating desire—
r .
prayer: as, ald | ro, May GoD HAVE MERCY ON THEE ;—or, command,
as in the saying of Ali, Ler THE MAN REWARD HIS NEIGHBOUR (Vp pret.)
WHO IN HIS OWN PERSON HAS DONE GOOD TO HIS BROTHER. It is also
changed into the future, when speaking of some future event, and intending
to enounce it AS CERTAIN TO COME TO Pass: asin the passage from the Koran:
The inhabitants of Paradise sHatt call, &c. (have called. Surat. Alaraf.)
where the speaker mentions the event ds HAVING ALREADY COME TO Pass. If
is also taken as a future, when accompanied by a negative, or, as an answer to an
oath: as, By Gov, I witt nor vo it, or, SHoutp I po rr. It és also
used as a future in hypothetical sentences, excepting with the particle » SHOULD,
Oe.
uNLEss, &c. But, as to the verb us , wt will retain tts preterite signification : as,
Ir I wap sarp ir. It ts also changed when the particle Lo is used intimat-
ing time: e.g. AS LONG AS THE HEAVENS SHALL ENDURE,” &c. It is
very evident, that the same principle prevails throughout every instance here
adduced, (if we except the hypothetical ones, of which er will be said
hereafter, and ws which is used as an auxiliary), namely, that of aunty,
and thence intense petition, or command, which seem jo have been grafted
upon this certainty. | Pe
ART. 246, 2. ] ON THE SYNTAX, 399
&e.; Ib. 19, DYIDT pYpia) Ninan ona OPIN IwAd
&e. AND THEY SHALL (certainly) COME, AND SHALL ALL REST
in the desolate valleys, and in the holes of the rocks.
2d, Upon the same principle, the Preterite tense is
often uséd as an Imperative; which may, therefore, be
termed emphatical: e. g. Deut. vi. 5, AIT AX HAIN)
Dyas Tko-o22) qwardon 229° 222 pros
pip? ome: yaao-oy pa yp vie we Abst
TPH FBV WWII WIN yaa Wawa DI NII
pmano) ispry pa mayb? pm aro nis? omwp
Fen a in Ee Sapo by and thou sHaut (surely) LOVE
Jehovah thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul,
and with all thy might. And these words which I command
thee this day SHALL BE upon thy heart: and thou SHALT
DILIGENTLY IMPRESS them upon thy children: and thou
SHALT TALK of them when thou sittest in thy house, and
when thou watlkest by the way, and when thou hest down,
and when thou risest up. And THOU SHALT BIND them
for a sign on thy hand, and THEY SHALL BE for frontlets
between thy eyes. And thou sHaLtT write them upon
the posts of thy house, and upon thy gates.
3d, In the following example, we have both the
preterite and present tenses, to be construed as pro-
phetical futures: the former necessarily so, as intimating
something immediately consequent upon the action of the
leading verb 714; the other, for the reasons just given
(Art. 244, 11. 12.).
Gen. xxvi. 3, JQIAN) FOV TIN) nsin y 182 “a
“my onbpm OS ny Nm ns YAS Ao) 77D
2 DAN sae AVAWI AWN AVAL sojourn in this
land, "and I am, OY WILL BE, with thee, and I bless, or
WILL “BLESS, thee; for to thee and to thy seed I give, or
AA2
356 LECTURE XVII. (ART. 246. 4.
WILL GIVE, all these lands : and 1 wit. (surely) ESTABLISH
the oath which I sware to Abraham thy father.
4th, The following exhibits a prohibitive sentence in
the Present, followed by two predictions enounced in the
Preterite tense: Gen. xxvi. 24, DIN FAN D RYAN
WAN WYDVI WRDIA) fear not, for I (am) with
thee, and witt (surely) BLEss thee, and mMuutTipLy thy
seed.
5th, When a preterite follows a present tense in
the same order of events, and in the same context, the
second of these, with as many succeeding verbs as follow
in the same tense, order, &c. may be translated by the
English compound tense, shall have—shall have had—
or the like* (Art. 244. 8.). Examples: Deut. vu. 1,
MVNA ASW PISTONS PP TIT WI 2
P2D7 POS Fim ony... Pwo DATO WwW AAW?
ee “ eee
° ce
OMS DINAN DANI OMsM &e. when Jehovah thy God
BRINGETH THEE fo the land whither thou art going to
possess it, and SHALL HAVE CAST OUT many great na-
tions from before thee .... and Jehovah thy God sHa.
HAVE DELIVERED them up before thee, and thou sHALT
HAVE SMITTEN them, (then) devote thou them to utter
destruction.
6th, In like manner, when two events are enounced,
one of which is prior to the other, that which occurred
first in the order, being to be taken in the past tense,
with reference to the time in which the relation is made,
the following one may be translated into English in the
* In this case, the preterite is reckoned, not from the period in whieh the
declaration is made, but in one future to it, even in the English.
eas
ART. 247. ON THE SYNTAX. 857.
preterpluperfect tense :* as, Gen. xxvi. 18, 9 walraa
rar yD sop-wsx Ren: niow and he calls them
(by) names, Gein to the names (by) which his father
CALLED THEM (1. e. had called.).
247. General opinions may be enounced either in
the preterite, the participles, or in the present tense.
Examples: Ps. i. 1, MYA 20 Ny) AWS WRT MWS
Pau 89 ov) awom toy xo oxen JI owen
blessed (is) the man who HATH NOT WALKED in the counsel
of the wicked, and HATH NOT stoop in the way of sinners,
and HATH NOT RESIDED 2 the habitation of the scorners ;+
* In this case, the verb NJj?° is an historical present with reference to the
preceding verb aw 2, and therefore preterite with reference to the time in which
the narration is ay but, the following verb N'}j} is preterite with reference
to this time, i.e. the time of 2WY and N'7}22, it is, therefore, a preterite still
more remote, which is equivalent to our pluperfect. So TZ aa ae in Arabic.
See p. 347. note.
v47e FZ ord
+ So in the Arabic Nie fae heal ens stds y had you
Z2O9 iy Po Ome AOS
taken me with you, I had made honey like yourself ; Yio eds wi! ws >
20% mB Me ag
Lo wl] Lv} > HAD IT BEEN (so that) all men were wise, the world HAD BEEN
pesTrRoyEeD. Mr. Lumsden has, I think, been very happy in his remarks on
this sort of construction. ‘‘ General opinions,” says he, “ ought to result from
the observation of facts; and whether we state a general opinion, or the facts
on which an opinion is founded, the effect is the same in either case. An
Englishman will commonly state the opinion, as ‘ Force cannot cope with
fortune :’? and a Persian will be often disposed to state the facts on which the
opinion is founded ; as ‘ The strong have been generally foiled in the contest
with fortune.’ This, therefore,” adds he, ‘ is a case in which the past may be
- or Cn
said to supercede the future tense of the verb.” Example; 4) (jw) _ wry’
OTs O- Ce OIA, F oS TA ey Read -
9? wy dy Oye 539) aS yy bin pins = “ henceforward I shall
358 LECTURE XVII. CART. 248.
Prov. xxviii. 7, OVD) OY AY pay ja Min o¥i3
»DAN an intelligent son xnurs the law; bué he who
ATTENDS upon base men, puts his father to shame;
Ps, xi. 4, :MYDD OSA APTS) Atay ofa yin DwI~R?
riches prorir not in the day of wrath; but righte-
OUSNESS DELIVERS from death.
248. Hypothetical sentences, which are very nearly
allied to the foregoing, will be enounced in the past, or
present, tense, according to one or more of the preceding
rules, as it shall suit the intention of the Writer. Ex-
amples: Gen. xxvi. 10, 22¥ YYDD 9 my mxrny
TDW DIY ANAM) AMWRMN OVI INN what is this
(that) thou hast done to us? some one of the people
MIGHT Lightly HAVE LAIN with thy wife, so thow WOULDEST
HAVE BROUGHT sin upon us; Ib. xxvii. 12, 2W7D) IN
Agta Noy m99p oy nNAd VAYND PVR MID AN
retire and dwell in a corner, like the ant; for even the elephant (which is the
strongest of all animals) cannot master (has not mastered) his fortune by force.”
Pers. Gram. vol. ii. p. 326.
The Arabic Grammarians endeavour to account for this use of the verb,
which they say must be taken as being in the present tense, by saying, that we
. a Om tO
have here, ust exp) sli ¥] , by which they mean, the retention of an event in
eri |S s
the mind, which, although past, as to fact, is nevertheless present in effect: as,
$e © Plena he
Wo») Lhave sold, and am now dispossessed of the thing sold, We pi] fa
- She
have bought, and do possess, &c., whereas, when we use the present tense in such
cases, the thing sold, bought, &c., may be, or not; now in our possession.
So we say in English, I am come, he 18 gone, not | HAvE come, he uas gone.
And in Hebrew, Is. xiv. 7; AP ATED PINAY. MW 7M &e., The
whole land 1s at rest, it 1s quiet (has been), they BREAK forth (into) singing
(have broken forth). See also some of the following verses. This, however,
mostly takes place in intransitive verbs, such as ODF, OD», vv, 7277,
on, YO, or the like.
Py cies 145.
ART. 248. | ON THE SYNTAX. 359
perhaps my father MAY FEEL me; so SHALL I (certainly)
BECOME as a great deceiver in his eyes, and sHALu
(surely) BRING upon myself a curse and not a blessing ;
Proy. vi. 1, NYY ....2 7722 WI YPM AW? Naw-ox ya
ONT &c., my son, if Mon HAST BECOME surety for thy neigh-
bour, uf thou HAST STRICKEN thy hand with a stranger.
Me a this, &e.; Gen. Sav 20, "TY D7 mTOR
le % mm =)! wad ; ‘ resp BE iciths ah
and WILL (surely) KEEP me in this way (in) which I 20,
and wit (surely) GivE me bread to eat, and clothing to
put on,—then suai Jehovah (certainly) be my God. Is.
lxii. 19, PIBN—37D_ OMIT PAD ATP ovow Ayrp-“1?
-21 Da wapst thou RENT the heavens, Havst thou DE-
SCENDED, HAD the mountains BEEN REDUCED before thee,—
the nations HAD TREMBLED before thee ;* Lev. x. 19,
* In translating this passage, I have taken Dba as the Niphhal of bits
to which it seems to me most properly to belong, see Simonis’s Lexicon sub
voce, and Sl? as a particle implying supposition, with a negation, according
to its most usual import both in Hebrew and Arabic. It should also be ob-
served, that in the first and two last examples, tlie preterite is used, as in the
statement of general opinions, and for the reasons assigned by Mr. Lumsden.
The particles preceding such expressions may be considered as intended to put
a suppositious case; or, in other words, to lay down a general fact as acci-
dental, and then to deduce the consequence: which may be stated, either in the
past or present tense, as circumstances a require. Of this character are
PN We a Ue ee ‘i
the following Arabic examples; Sir sie Liles se dy HAD we
not KNOowN thee, we HAD (surely) DONE rier this manner: or, WE SHOULD
(surely) HAVE DONE SO, ies the second member as a future of certainty with
Gi Same One ME A cg ey Aer
respect to the first ; eS Leen) e nla HADST thou BEEN here,
O Aaa
my brother WOULD not HAVE DIED ; dhe Coie 5 eM en w! Hap I
360 LECTURE XVII. TART. 249
SIM PYA DONT OP MR wN7DN1 and, wap I waTEN
the sin offering to day, WoULD tf HAVE (seemed) GooD 7
the eyes of Jehovah ?
Remarks.
249. The preceding rules seem to be governed by two general
principles. One, in which the Writer, setting out from the period in
which he commences his narrative, follows the different circumstances
of it, as though himself and his Reader were present, and dates the
tenses of his verbs from the different periods in which he thus places
himself; but still reserving the right of returning to his original
position whenever he pleases: as already exemplified.
2d, ‘The other leading principle is, to represent events, which it
is believed will certainly take place, as having already come to pass:
and then, applying this principle to Imperative and other sentences, for
the greater emphasis. Nothing, I thmk, can be more natural than the
adoption of such principles. And, when we consider the great degree
of precision which their application must communicate to the context,
we shall perhaps be induced to believe, that the poverty and uncertainty
pe ge 9 UG “3 o
DONE this I sHOULD SURELY HAVE Lost my wealth; Lale wen S i) wl
&
oe ) 7
phar are pip | rncreaseE her food, she wouLp (probably) Lay Two eggs;
i. e. putting the case, that if I had done so, then she would perhaps hence lay,
&e. De Sacy’s Gram. Arab. vol. i. p. 124, &e.
The Persian examples selected by Mr. Lumsden, seem to me all subject to
this distinction, i.e. of certainty or contingency, and to have been enounced ac-
(Oh tok ce | de 227 es
cordingly, either in the past, present, or future tense ; 2 Wau} US dw 5 x
-s oe) =-
o os o- ~<
COS daly HAD you not ARRIVED, the expectation of you, wou.D (pro-
Yew, fart OA es ak COrF 7 OF G Lee
bably) HAVE KILLED (me) ; oy 1o,3 us (>) pS y ysl yl
“s
Ls de if to-day, you (by any chance) shew mercy to mankind, to-morrow you
HAVE RECEIVED mercy, 1,€, CERTAINLY SHALL RECEIVE it, See Pers. Gram.
yol. il. p. 322, &c.
ART. 249. 3. | ON THE SYNTAX. 361
of which it has been fashionable to accuse the Hebrew language, has
rather arisen from our own ignorance, than from any defect inherent in
its construction.—sStill we do not mean to affirm, that we can always
say, why one mode of enunciation is preferred to another, when, as
far as we can see, either would have suited the character of the con-
text. In some cases the parallelism may have had some influence, in
others attraction: but, upon the whole, I believe we can genefally give
as good an account of the use of the tenses in the Hebrew, as can be
given in either the Greek, Latin, or any other language.
3d, There is, however, a case which has not yet been noticed, and
which may probably give some trouble to the Learner, I mean that in
which we find discourses, and sometimes books beginning with a verb
in the present tense, having the particle 1 prefixed. I am very much
disposed to believe, that this circumstance has contributed in no small
degree towards recommending the doctrine, that a conversive power (1. e.
a power capable of changing the future into a preterite tense, and vice
versd) was really inherent im this particle. How a particle,* which has
- not the least reference to time, could change the tense proper for a
certain form of the verb, few perhaps have been able to see: for my
own part, I must confess, I never could see the most distant connection
between this particle and the tense of any verb: but, as passages
such as those alluded to, do occur, it is but right we should en-
deavour to account for them.
4th, The apparently redundant use of the particle 7? then, in passages
of this kind, is by no means confined to verbs as the leading words in
discourses. The book of Exodus, the first of Kings, and that of Ezra,
begin with it prefixed to nouns; and the verbs following appear in
their proper tenses. Ina great number of passages it also occurs at
the beginning of discourses, either with, or without verbs, at the dis-
cretion of the Writer,} in all of which the proper tense of the verb
* There are a few particles in the Arabic, such as 3 1 &e., which are
also said to have a similar power: but, there is good reayon for believing, that
this is not the case, which I may perhaps shew hereafter.
+ See Noldius, Concord. part. p. 309—10. Ed. 1734. Ka/ is often used in
the same manner in the New Testament, as Matt. vii. 28, ix.10, xi. 1, xiii. 53,
xix. 1, xxvi. 1, &c. See Noldius as above. Glassius refers this use of 1 to a
Polysyntheton, Phil. Sacr. p. 513. In some instances this ) occurs in the
middle of a verse, as Is. vi. 1. FISTS), where we can have no doubt, from the
preceding context, that the event related is past, the ellipsis of the verb there-
362 LECTURE XVII. [ART. 249. 5.
:
obtains. In the books of Joshua and Judges there is a manifest con-
nection with the context of the preceding books. In these cases,
therefore, we shall find no difficulty. Let us now take a few examples
from the other books; interpreting this particle according to one of
the significations ascribed to it by Noldius; for, I do not believe that
it is entirely redundant, but that it is added for the purpose of im-
parting some expression to the context: e.g. Lev. i. 1, S372
TaN? Tyin VND POS Mim MAT MAUS so Jehovah carts to
Moses, and speaks to him from the tabernacle of the congregation, saying.
From the circumstances here alluded to, we can have no
doubt, that this is recorded as a past event: and if so, I believe
the Writer has taken the liberty of transporting himself and_ his
Reader into former times, without the usual notice, 1. e. some term
expressive of past time, or a verb in the past tense. The ellipsis
then may be of some adverb, or the verb ‘12 (which last is
i 2 PY tly nae
supplied in Arabic by ws, in such passages as, wy? dls? ws
o- F PURO
ou 1 gh Cron and 1r was (so that) his companions from among
fat beasts come to him.. The particle, in such cases, may be intended
merely to excite attention.
5th, But it has been supposed, that ‘57 never occurs, like the
wae
ws of the Arabs, as a Preterite to its own Present tense: but,
there are many instances in which it does so occur: e. g. Is.
viuly 28; pipe MM ST DPD MAM &e. and wv sHALL coME TO
pass in that day, that every place suaLu BE, &c.—To that of others, as,
ITpea: nay BAST SAT DPD MM &e. and rr sHant come To
pass in that day that a man sHaLL NourisH a calf, &c.; Ib. 22,
SIT Don 25 miyy 3 TT and rz sHar. come ro Pass, for
the abundance oF Ho} they shall ge, that ue sHatt EAT butter, &c.
It is no objection to these passages, that TJ is to be construed as a
future of certainty; because, it is from its being really a preterite
tense that this takes place. Nor does it invalidate the argument, that
fore introduces no ambiguity: but if we go on to the third verse we shall find
two verbs in the preterite tense: an instance of recurrence to the period from
which the writer originally set out, and to which this verb is to be referred as a
historical present.
ART. 249. 6. | ON THE SYNTAX. 363
this verb is not immediately joined with the following one, as it some-
times happensin the Arabic. Every one must see, that they are to be con-
Ie Ii
strued together, just as ws must be with ws &c., however distant
they may be placed from each other. I think, therefore, that the
ellipsis of this verb in certain cases (especially as it may be considered
as inherent in ‘T/T see Art. 242.) can afford no real objection to the
theory proposed, and particularly as we know that this, and every
other Language, presents omissions equally great.*
6th, This, I think, will be sufficient to explain all the passages thus
occurring ; the circumstances of the context always admonishing us, in
what situation we are to place ourselves, in order to see the just force
of the tenses of the verbs.
7th, I would have it, however, particularly borne in mind, that it is
not my wish to introduce, in passages like this, any thing differing
from our authorized version, except where it shall be absolutely
necessary. The preterite has been very properly adopted by the
Translators, because we are in the habit of reckoning our tenses from
the period in which we write any narrative. My object is only to
account for the Hebrew usage; and to shew, why one tense is at one
time chosen, and another at another, where the idiom of our language
would admit of no such choice.
8th, I shall merely remark, in conclusion, that the theory here
investigated holds good in all the dialects of the Hebrew; viz. the
Arabic, the Ethiopic, the Syriac, the Chaldaic, the Samaritan; and, that
it has been introduced (as I believe) into the Persic. There are, how-
ever, a few peculiarities to be observed in each of these languages, as it
is likely would be the case. In Arabic, for example, the ellipsis of
ee .
ws , equivalent to 7177 just noticed, seldom takes place. In Ethiopic,
the preterite is very rarely used for the purpose of enouncing a future of
certainty, which is also the case with the Syriac. The general principle,
however, is the same; the particulars, are subjects proper for those
Grammars, and therefore, need not be investigated here.
* That the verb ws is occasionally omitted by the ellipsis (see M. de Sacy’s
Gram. Arab, vol. ii. Art. 648.), though net often in examples of this kind.
364 LECTURE XVIII. [ART. 250.
LECTURE XVIUL.
ON THE NATURE AND CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICLES,
250. We have seen how one or more words may be
laid down, for the purpose of enouncing and defining any
idea which we intend to communicate to others.
2d, This is perhaps found to be common to all
languages, and to all modes of expression. There are,
however, certain words and phrases found to prevail in
this, as well as other tongues, which, from the frequency
of their occurrence, and the peculiar influence which they
exert in every species of composition, deserve particular
attention. These have been termed Particles generally;
and, particularly, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions,
and Interjections.
3d, Generally, all particles, whether simple or com-
pound, are nothing more than nouns substantive or attri-
butive, placed in the state of apposition or definite con-
struction, emmediately or mediately with one another, or
with the words intended to be qualified by them. The
order mentioned on a former occasion (Art. 226. 3.) is
also preserved here.
Of the Character and Construction of Adverbs.
251. It has been seen (Art. 234.), that adverbs are
nothing more than words added for the purpose of quali-
fying the signification of verbs generally ; we now come
to consider some of those cases, which are of the most
common occurrence, and which may otherwise present
some difficulties to the Learner.
2d, Adverbs in zmmediate connection with verbs may
Se
ART. (2510 35, ON THE SYNTAX. 365
be considered as absolute (Art. 233. 2.), or, as added for
the purpose of specification (p. 301. note). Those in
mediate connection, as being in the definite state of con-
struction with the preceding word or particle; which
word or particle may be absolute with respect to the
verb. General examples are given, Art. 234. The
following are some, in which we have attributives singular
and plural, pronouns, and particles, thus construed :
DNS TI she descends, WONDERS! 1. e. wonderfully,
Lam. i. 9; WAY DMD RIGHT THINGS judge ye, i. e.
righteously, Ps. lili. 2; ID) KYNV im DREADFUL
THINGS, thou hast become wonderful, i. e. thou hast be-
come exceedingly wonderful, Ps. cxxxix. 14.
3d, It will immediately be seen, that these instances
may all be construed by one or other of the rules already
given. So also with pronouns : ja wn this (place), for
here; 3D, ND, and NNT like ie for thus; m9,
or m9? for what, why ? awa om that which, i.e. mle
or time, as the context shall require; or IWS absolutely,
for where, when? or since, because, &c.
Ath, Negative particles should be considered as af-
fectiny the action, &c. of a verb either expressed or un-
derstood, and not the existence implied by a noun;*
* Such expressions as, there is no man, no place, nothing, &c. would be con-
sidered as monstrous by an Oriental, whom it would be extremely difficult to
persuade, that we were not affirming both the existence and non-existence of the
same thing at the same time. They would say, there is not a man, &c., which
is certainly more natural and intelligible. See p. 300, note.
The Arabs make their adverbs by an indefinite attributive, put absolutely,
either in immediate, or mediate, apposition with the word intended to be a
which will be either the subject or the object of the verb, or both: e. g.
7 oes FS Grrr g oO A CU 9 Gre
US dy os” As Zaid came to me, riding ; Lay 1g dione lady, }y Cand
Of 4A F¢7F
4 \ ve I struck Zaid violently, and [ met Omar, both riding. In these cases,
366 LECTURE XVIII. [ ART. 251. 4.
e. g. WN? DY a people, not strong, Prov. xxx. 25;
wy 49°85* nor so (or, according to Schroederus, 77ght)
have they done, Jex. xlyiii. 30; DAW N? OPM statutes
(which are) NoT Goon, i. e. not easy, Ezek. xx.25. So
JITN WI Empriness (want of culture, in which there
is) not a way, Ps. cvii. 40; TIN 85 nor giving hght,
Amos vy. 20; 5 Du-x? (there is) Not a name to him, i. e.
he is nameless ; BARR (who is) NoT an eminent man,
DIN"N? (who is) Nor @ mean man, Is. xxxi. 8; “ION
YU-N79 Twill say to (her who is) Not my people, Hos.
the adverbs are put in what is termed the accusative case, where the connection
seems to be mediate, i. e. in which some intervening word is to be understood.
In the following, they are in the nominative, and, there the connection is mani-
ol SA Agee Re —-
festly wnmediate. I, Kole 9 oN use Said came to me, and his servant
(was) riding. The reason given for the first of these examples by the author of
the Hidayat oon Nahve (p. ©!) is, that a verb is understood: his words are,
ID? os Sur So
xii) sine gy Led ay) Mdm ged nil cine Udo QW Le bey
g g -
ym l, . ‘The examples in which the signification of a verb was the governing
principle, as in, “ this Zaid (is) standing,” tequire a verb to be understood :
thus, ‘‘ I intend, I point out.”—His meaning is this: ‘as to this Zaid, I men-
ion him as standing.” And hence he means to shew, why the accusative case
is used in such places. Mr. de Sacy gives a different account of this con-
gH =
struction, see vol. ii. Art. 630; where he considers LSI, as intended to point
wv
~
out a sort of logical objective case to the verb { >. For my own part, I
would prefer considering this termination as the fragment of some word for-
merly used as a postposition, and therefore, as equivaleni to the preposition
+ , see note, p. 304, and to be translated thus: Zaid came to me in (the
situation of) a person riding.
* JID establish, &c. Hence J12; and Art. 79. ]R establishing, right, just,
&e,
ART. 251. 5. | ON THE SYNTAX. 367
WAS goat 879 DMDWM those who rejoice in (that
which is) Nor @ matter, i. e. in a non-reality, Amos
vi. 13, &c. In all cases, however, 8? may be construed
as a noun put in the definite state of construction with
the following word, intimating the want, defect, or the
like, of the thing mentioned.
Sth, In the particle }}€ this is still more apparent; for,
in that case, it takes the vowels necessary for the state of
construction* (Art. 151. 6.): e. g, Wwid PS want,
LACK, of a@ saviour, Deut. xxii. 27; oy TS man? to
Flannah (was) A want of children, 1 Sam. i. 2; DN
LOW a want of me hearing, i.e. I hear not, Jer. xiv. 12;
DIS UW the BEING, EXISTING, 9f a man, i.e. there isa
man, Eccl. 1. 21; D'S WY) THE EXISTENCE of just men,
i. e, there are just men, Eccl. viii. 14; P82 J2W7ON if
HIS EXISTENCE (be) in the land, i. e. if he be, &c., 1 Sam.
xxi, 25.
6th, When any of these particles follow the word to
be qualified, they will, of course, be absolute: e. g.
85 DT TAY. for now ye have become (of) NoTHING,
Job vi. 21; PS OVD water (is) NoT; WY NIBDA provision,
BEING, 1. e. there is provision, Jud. xix. 19.
7th, Similar to 85 and (Ss is the construction and
force of DDS} expimng; hence, defect, non-existence,
&e.: e. g. OTIIN DAN nor a God, or, no God, Isa.
xlv. 14; TW °DDaN1 IN L am, and ExcEPTING ME, still
(is none), Zeph. ui. 15.
8th, The following are examples of similar construc-
tion with the particles: Tit returning, reiteration, yet,
* See Eichhorn’s edition of Simonis sub voce. On the etymology of these
particles, see Art. 179.
+ See also Art. 179. 2. 3.
Su-
t 42 returning, &e. ; TY and Art. 93. ‘TH.
368 LECTURE XVIII. [ ART. 251. 9.
still, &e.; | see, behold; ON defect, want, nothing, &e.
> marking, observing, inferring, whether, that, &c. ;
\2, or 9, cutting off, separating, from, non-existence, &c. ;
2 and ‘na growing old, decaying, lack, non-exist-
ence; 0714 cutting off, defect, want, not existing, not yet,
&c. with or without other particles, &c.: PMD TW THY
CONTINUING a retainer or holder, 1. e. thou still retainest,
Job ii. 9; DD WA in (being) vet day, Jer. xv. 9;
TVA im my sti being, Ps. cxlvi.2; "TWD from, or,
since MY STILL existing, 1. e. since my birth, Gen.
xlviii. 15; TEP 12. DITA Abraham, us conTINUING
a stander, i. e. he still stood, Gen. xviii. 22; MWY wan
BEHOLD HIM, @ doer, 1. e. he does, Jer. xvill. 3; PRO
iD rrom (there) Not BEING (any) like thee, Jer. x. 7;
alata. WP Mpay thou art filled (with) ignominy,
WANTING (being destitute of) glory, reputation, Hab.
u. 16.
9th, To this kind of construction may be referred all those passages
which are generally translated by a word in the comparative degree
with than following it: e.g. Prov. viii. 10, FOD“ON) ION ATP
W232 YD AYN accept my castigations, and not, 1. e. rather than,
silver: and knowledge, Not, 1. e. rather than, choice gold: i. e. put
silver and gold out of the question, when these things are proposed,
as unworthy of being compared with them. The negative par-
ticle occurring here in the first member of the parallelism, is sufficient
to determine in what sense that in the second is to be taken. Of this
sort of expression is, ‘“ If any man come to me, and hate not his
father and mother,” &c. Luke xiv. 26, John xu. 25, &c. where this
hatred, or rather disregard, is not spoken of as being absolute, but
relative.
10th, So with other negative particles, 7277 “0S pry onset
OTONT ‘2 you have not sent me hither, sur God, Gen. xlv. 8, i. e. it
ws Not you, but rather God, &c. See Exod. xvi. 8, 1 Sam. vii. 7, Jer.
vi. 22. 23, Hos. 1. 9, vi. 6, Ps. li. 18, Eccl. iv. 9, and Matt. xxiii. 28,
Luke x. 20, xiv. 12. 14, 1 Pet. iii. 6. See Storr, p. 251, &c.
Examples of 73, &c.: M7 “AW until the vEcay,
ART. 251. 11. ] ON THE SYNTAX. 369
CESSATION, Of the moon, i.e. as long as it shall endure,
Psakxcxa 2s Oyo ‘nba-w until THE DEFECT of the
heavens, i.e. as long as they shall last, Job xiv. 12°:
73 -pawn an Jrom tne not leaving to him any
thing, Deut. xxviii. 55; Dwombad for the wack of
returning, i. e. the not returning, Ezek. xiii. 22; ‘A930
n2>° from the uack of power, Num. xiv. 16; 1925
INOTN for the aBsENcE of your sinning, i. e. that you
should not sin, Exod. xx. 20; DAP PS an is at
from the WANTING, or, is not there A DEFICIENCY, of
graves? Exod. xiv. 11; Si) s5o-p1ya in its NOT YET
coming, Zeph. ii. 2. ;
In these two last, as well as in 72D PNP Jer. x. 7, cited above,
Schroederus thinks that some emphasis is apparent in the multiplication
of the negative particles. I must confess, Ido not think so. In many
cases, and perhaps in some of those given above, these particles may
stand as prepositions or conjunctions, that is, with reference to the
words with which they are to be construed: for, in no other point of
view can they differ, all of them being nouns, or fragments of nouns,
added for the purpose of qualifying some other word, as already
mentioned.
11th, The following are examples of prepositions in
immediate connection with the word to be qualified,
restricted, &c. : DID? bw Daw DM] or Ham (were)
the dwellers there of former (times), 1 Chron. iv. 40 ;
M21 DY NPD ue the sound of many waters, Ezek.
1. 24; 1? MDY-YARD WD] my soul (is) like a parched
land (with respect) To thee, Ps. cxlui. 6.
In these, and all similar cases, it will be of no consequence whether
we consider the particles as being in apposition, or in the definite
state of construction, there being no mark of case in the Hebrew.
The latter is perhaps the most conformable with analogy; because,
in some of the particles we have the form proper for that state,
as in 7278 to the grave, Job v. 26; saw by over the nail,
Gen. xlix. 22; particularly when they have the plural form, e. g.
TW TITS afier Moses, Exod. xxxiii. 8; and in the Arabic always,
BB
370 LECTURE XVIII. (ART. 251. 12.
as, dere) | Xt i, €, THE UPPER (part) of the mosque, for over the
mosque. See Art. 179. 3.
12th, Examples of mediate construction, 1. e. when
one or more other particles intervene : eer, 0? WD?
JIN NGAS ADI rok THE PURPOSE oF melting (the)
heart ... have I appointed the chastisement of the sword,
Ezek. xxi. 20; DPN W 8a he came ur To them, i.e.
even to them, 2 Kings 1 ix. 20; *\ID wake for each, "x-
CLUDING tnfants, i. e. with respect to the men, excluding
the children, or, beside the children, Exod. xii. 37;
min? yn from without, (with respect) to the wall,
Jer. xxi. 4.
13th, The intervening particles most in use are, ” and , which
seem to be added for the purpose of marking the word to which the
preceding one has some relation, and to point out the nature of that
relation, e. g. sw MI beneath (with reference) to my head, i. e.
under my head, Cant. ii. 6 ; yd WT outwards (with reference)
ro the city, 2 Chron. xxxiii, 15; M222 MD2ON to (that which is)
FROM within (with respect) to the veil, Lev. xvi. 15; OO TOS
mata Dinwia ap yy? Dain’? MPV? she way of life, or, religious
instruction (is) For the elevating oF the understanding (person), ror the
purpose of receding from the grave beneath, Prov. xv. 24; rrata'? mown
app biza) thou hast refrained (with reference) to bringing down (degrading)
ON ACCOUNT OF our sins, Ezra ix. 13.
Of this kind are the combinations TR? TY 2 Chron. xvi. 14;
mya? TY Ib. xvii. 12; SEIS PS? TY Ib. xxxvi. 16, &c.
So, DD WE NON YIS2 Wa? Wap DvowA TW
Spayy fala rol which (is) i in the heavens Jrom above, and
which (is) in the earth from beneath, and which (is) in
the waters from beneath (with respect) to the earth,
Exod. xx. 4.
The phrases here used, From above, and from beneath, must necessa-
rily be taken relatively: in the first instance, above, with respect to
the earth ; in the second, by ? beneath, with respect to the heavens; and,
in the third, beneath, or low, with reference to the earth, which is ex-
_—r— ea
ART. 251. 14.1] ON THE SYNTAX. 371
pressed by 4: i.e. Thou shalt make no image of the heavenly bodies
which are above, nor of the creatures, &c. which are on the earth
beneath ; nor of those which are in the waters, which are still lower
than the earth: not, which are “ in the waters under the earth,”
&c. Hence will be seen the necessity of carefully observing, to
what words these particles have an immediate reference; and not
to take them absolutely, as is often the case in our own, and other,
languages.
14th, When the preposition 1.2 between, is not repeated, and is used
for the purpose of opposing one noun to another, it has this pecu-
liarity, that it requires the insertion of ”) before the latter : e. g. Pa
py? DY between waters (as opposed) ro waters, Gen. i. 6; PTPB
PT? between cause (as opposed) To cause, i. e. between cause and cause,
Deut. xvi. 8. But, if this word is repeated, its influence is immediate :
e.g. TWIT PII TINT PD serween the light, and serwzen the
darkness, Gen. i. 4. Whence it will appear, that in the one case is
made equivalent to that of }*2 in the other, as to the whole sense
given.
15th, From what has been said on the primitive and derived sig-
nifications of words (Art. 154.), it will be easy to conceive how cases
might occur, in which it will be exceedingly difficult to ascertain the
precise force of these particles ; and consequently, the relation between
words which they are intended to point out and define. Generally,
however, either the primitive, or one or other of the derived, senses of
the particle, considered in conjunction. with the context, will afford
us sufficient light.
16th, To attempt, however, to translate every such word, by a
corresponding one in English, especially when several of them are
compounded together, will be to evince a greater attention to the letter,
than to the spirit, of the Sacred Writers; and, will better merit the
appellation of xaxofnaos, which was formerly given to Aquila by a very
learned Father of the Church, than that of a faithful Translator. It is
very desirable, nevertheless, to ascertain their force as nearly as we
can, and to express that in the most intelligible way our language may
admit of: this, however, will always depend upon the extent of our
reading, and the accuracy of our judgment.
17th, The following instances, taken from Glassius,
are intended to shew, how these particles influence certain
BB2 )
372 LECTURE XVIII. CART. 251. 18.
modes of expression; *)N-98 2D D9) they proceed
FROM strength to strength, 1. e. they become stronger
and stronger, Ps. Ixxxiv. 8; 1838" Ay -ON Wi 2 for
they go out rrom evil to evil, i.e. they become worse
and worse, Jer. ix. 2.
For similar expressions in the Greek Testament, see Rom. i. 17,
vi. 19, 2 Cor. un: 18) Phil. i, 7, &c.
18th, Of the particles which signify motion towards,
or rest in, a place, the following are examples. The
first —, is, more properly a postposition like the Latin
versus: e.g. TUSID DDNIT Uw INI and two of the
angels came To Sodom, Gen. xix. 1; “98 NAN IY TW
May USN until I come in unto my Lord rowarps
Seir, Gen. xxxiil. 14.
See Gen. x.19, xii. 5, xlvi. 1. 4, Deut. ii. 13, 1 Kings xvii. 45,
xix. 15, Jer. xxix. 15, Jon. i. 8. In the following passages ? is also
* Soin the Arabic Heb | JI doml ; rom part to part, i. e. proceedin
2 : Ope P P 8
on. Tale of Sindbad, Ed. Langlés, p. !+, &c. So also XHeW ayTi xderros,
grace for grace, i. e. an increase or excess of grace, far surpassing that of the
Law of Moses, John i. 16.
+ In this respect the postposition rAm, the prepositions OM, by , TY, and
5 , are found to have the same, or very nearly the same, force. From the con-
struction and sense in which this particle is found, there is good reason for
g
supposing, that itis the same with | which is said to mark the Arabic accusa-
tive: and, it is probably derived from the same root. No one I think can
FCS! Pe ONE
read MSS amp ower cast it to the earth, Exod. iv. 3, and Lo,] 89>]
&c. Surat of Joseph, without being struck with the identity of the expression
in each case, especially when we are told, that the nasal of the Arabic is dis-
regarded in common conversation. In this case too, we have no intervening
particle, which is perhaps supplied by the final one; yet, in other cases, we find
each of these verbs construed also with 2, %, Os : by , 12, as may be seen in
Castell.
ART. 251. 20. | ON THE SYNTAX. 373
Mave voy &e. as for me, (I am) to be ga-
thered to my people; bury me:—t0 my fathers, vo the
cave .... IN the cave, &c., Gen. xlix. 29, 30.
But here, the particle °$ seems to refer in every case to the verb
FON), and = in v. 30, to 373) : and, if so, these particles retain their
usual and proper signification. So 1 Kings viii. 50; nann- Os yaw)
“OS DOWA MAN) mT pipands Soba) Twi yay s Jay) FAY
myawin-by naw bine and pea thou to the aici of thy
servant and of thy people Israel, who shall pray towarns this place:
and give car thou to the place of thy dwvelling,—rtowarvs heaven.
The last two words here must, I think, be referred to the preceding
abaM ; and, if so, the construction will be regular and the significa-
tion of the particle ON constant. Constructions of this sort are frequent
in Hebrew and Arabic. See Ps. 1. 15, lvi. 9, &c.; Sheikh Ahmed’s
preface to the [khnan Ossafa, p. 4.
In those passages, in which 2 takes the signification of ON I can see
no anomaly : for, if this particle be derived from SJ2 to enter into (see
Art, 182.), it retains its primitive signification in such passages as Lev.
xvi, 22; N2TB2 &e. Phil. Sacr. p. 454.
Again, in the use of ON for concerning, Job xl. 8, Ezek. xxi. 33,
Ps. i. 7, Ixix. 27, I can see no greater irregularity, than what occurs
in other words; for, although 8 is occasionally, and perhaps pri-
marily, used in the sense of motion towards a place; yet, as its signifi-
cation may also be applied to the operations of the mind, it may then
mean, that the subject of any discourse is directed towards, or is con-
cerning, any person or thing.
And, again, if we carefully consider the primitive and derived senses
which this particle, and op may have, we shall then see no difficulty in
occasionally finding them used the one for the cther. See Lev. xiv. 50,
1 Sam. iv. 21, 2 Sam. ii. 9, xxi. 1, Is. xxxii. 6, Ezek. i. 9, &c.
20th, After what has been said on the variety of significations which
words will necessarily sustain (Art. 1 54), and on the principles by which
the construction of these particles a¥é regulated, it cannot be necessary
to pursue this subject further here. I would only offer one remark,
which is this; Let the Learner carefully consider, to what word or
thing the particle is to be referred, whether to the person speaking,
the person or thing spoken of, or, whether it is not merely intended to
supply some shade of meaning to some other particle or particles in the
same context. He may also consult the Grammatices Sacree Appendix
by Glassius, Ed. Dathe, p. 556, &c., and should always have at hand
the Concordantiee particularum, by Noldius, Ed. Jenz, 1734.
374 LECTURE XIX. [ART. 252.
LECTURE XIX.
ON THE NATURE AND USE OF THE CONJUNCTIONS.
252. Words standing in the situation of conjunctions
in the Hebrew, are subject to the laws of apposition
and definite construction, just as other words are. In
many instances, indeed, they are the same words which,
at other times, are used as pronouns, adverbs, or preposi-
tions; the situation alone in which they are found, giving
them the character of conjunctions. A few indeed, such
as 1, Oa, &c.* are used only as conjunctions. |
Examples in which the Relative Pronoun WR ts used as @
Conjunction.t
yptaza) NUITIWS DNw NT anp Saul saw THAT (1p
quop) he (was) intelligent, 1 Sam. xviii. 15; Mwy Ws
IWIiIITNN TT (because) tHat David did what (was)
right, &e., i.e. €0 quod fecit, &c., 1 Kings xv. 5; 2W™
ma yasn- oy “TAY and the ayes returns to the ath
AR: WHAT if was, aa peiby
2d, Of adverbs, prepositions, &c. simple or com-
pound: "99-DS Pavpe UNLESS he have taken, Amos iii. 4;
MA apy a consequence THAT thou hast despised me,
_ * The first of these seems to be derived from 1) a hook, connector, &c. and
consequently, to signify, an addition, besides, and, &c. The second is probably
Gv
from the word @> multiplying, becoming abundant, or the like, and equivalent
to our moreover, much more, &c, See Storr, p. 337.
+ But in many cases “WS stands in the place of a subordinate nominative
ubsolute. See Art. 229.13.
ARMR2525 35 ] ON THE SYNTAX. 375
1. e. because that, &c. 2 Sam. xii. 10; POW Ws APY
pa DMI A CONSEQUENCE OF THAT WHICH (ejus quod)
Abraham hath heard my voice, Gen. xxvi. 5.
So BS TY until, Ruth ii, 21; WW TY until that which, Jonah iv. 5;
“WS oy upon that which, whereupon, Deut. xxix. 24; ‘2 Oy Id.,
Jud. iii, 12; "WS “27 >y upon the affair which, because; NWS FIA
Deut. xxi. 14; 92 FD beneath that which, because, Prov. i. 29;
“WH wD? for the purpose of which, because, &c. Ezek. xx. 26. To
these a great number of others may be added.
3d, The following passages are apparently elliptical, but really not
so, when the nature of the particles are considered : my Ty year
jawem35 they have strengthened the hands of the evil doers, on account
of their not having returned, &c., 1. e. because they have not returned
from their evil mays, Jer. xxii. 14.
The word Fol deficiency, &c. is very nearly equivalent to 8 not,
the particle ” is added as before (Art. 251.): and the verb 12W is
manifestly in the preterite tense. ‘The sense seems to be, that it is be-
cause none have returned from their evil ways, that the hands of
sinners have been so much strengthened ; and noi, that none may return,
which is the sense usually taken. So Isa. xiv. 6, 7T72Y2 OVAY M3!
72D °AYD MDD who strikes the people in wrath, a stroke (that) hath nov
departed. Here 2 and Pape are evidently in the definite state of
construction, to which 7M is added as a verb; and, as it is contrary
to the genius of every Oriental language to negative a noun, the force
of this negative combination must necessarily fall upon the verb: thus,
a stroke without having passed away,” 1. e. continual. So we say in
English, i-finite, never-ending, and the like, when we wish to express an
indefinite continuity of any thing. In like manner: Deut. viii. 20, 2A2¥
PVAWN Ni) BECAUSE (that) you will Nor hear ; or, of your not hearing ;
taking 8 as a noun signifying deficiency, lack, want, or the like, which
it really is. See also Gen. xxi. 16, xxvil. 25, xxxvil. 11, Num.
xi. 20, 1 Kings xxu. 42, Ps. cxix. 136. And more particularly with
Infinitives or verbal nouns, Num. xiv. 16, Judg. vi. 18, Is. xlviii. 4;
Ix. 15, 2 Chron. xxvii. 6.
4th, It is not meant to be affirmed, however, that this sort of con-
struction is always adhered to. The truth is, it is very much left to
the writer, either to express himself thus, or to employ a greater
number of words: and what is: most remarkable, we sometimes find
both methods adopted in the same context: e.g. MV2T) AWATWE TY
376 LECTURE XIX. [ART. 252. 5.
MDW) FD APIS DW TDs IPOS &c. until ruaz (timein) waren the
heat of thy brother shall turn away: UNTIL THE TURNING AWAY of thy
brother’s anger AND (until) HE HAVE FoRGOTTEN, &c. Gen. xxvii. 44—5;
maw 8> ppm OWN oY) Mim otinwnsy opye-by ..., mw ow by
ON Account oF three .... ON account of their despising the law of
Jehovah, anv (on the account that) they have not kept his statutes,
Amos ii. 4.—See also 1 Sam. iv. 19, 1 Kings xviii. 18, Is. x. 2,
xxx. 12, xxxvii. 29, Jer. vii. 18. So the word 22 not yet, is found
twice in Zeph. ii, 2. with 8b, xb DO b2.
5th, It is the opinion of Schroederus (R. 105.), that 7B lest, and
DS if, surely, &c. imply an ellipsis of some other word or words:
as, DIA}D CI will take care) lest thou take anmay, &c. Gen. xxxi. 31.
I can see no necessity for this. The real meaning of the word 72
seems to be, seeing, observing, or the like, from theroot 1735; and
if so, the passage may be rendered thus: J feared, for I said, sneine
tHou (mightest) TAKE Away, &c. So in the other passage cited, viz.
2 Kings ii. 16, mim mA Nwa"7B SEEING (that) the Spirit of Jehovah
(might) HAVE TAKEN HIM Up. So also with respect to the particle ON:
2 Sam. xi. 11, MT TDWITNS MWY SOS FWI VT) NT (as) thy life
and the life of thy soul (is, so) surELY may I do this thing ? And again,
Gen. xxiv. 37, 38, T2922 MWS MAND TS? ody cova
2 vasa oy Novos ¢ TSIND awh oDdN We IT, &e. and
my Lord swore me, saying, Take not a nife for my son from the
daughters of the Canaanite, in whose land I dwell: surnty not. Go thou
to-my father’s house, &c. And at v. 41, sian fe Falels}= aM TNS
smose 2 ANT 72 357) xo os) Valal\sianels then shalt thou be free
from my curse (i. e.), when thou shalt come to my kindred, and (upon
the condition that,—putting the matter on this issue) they mill surELY
not give to thee, then shalt thou be free from my curse.
6th, If I am not greatly mistaken, there is no real ellipsis in any
one of the passages in which this particle is found. This, however,
must depend very much on the signification which we attach to it, and
on the nature of the construction in which it is found; both of which
we will now endeavour to explain.
7th, If we derive this particle from J firm, steady, permanent, and
hence, sure, surely, true, trust-northy, faithful, and the like ; and, suppos-
ing it to be of the primitive form ]PH (see Art. 159.), which will make
the elision of the 7 necessary (Art. 82.), then we shall haye 58 mean-
ART. 252. 8._] ON THE SYNTAX. 377
ing, surely, truly, certainly, &c. which appears to me to be its real
force in every instance.
8th, We have seen (Art. 246, note), that, in hypothetical sentences,
things are generally stated as facts, not as opinions. If then we pro-
pose the certainty of one fact, with some strong asseveration in one
member of a sentence, and compare another with it, as being equally
certain of occurrence in another, we shall do nothing more than what
is always done in oaths and the like in Hebrew, when this word is
employed in one of the members. In many cases such constructions
may imply a negation, and hence this particle has been often so
interpreted.* There is a passage, viz. Ruth iii. 12, which seems to
confirm the etymology just given: ‘228 DSA ON OD BIAS DD TAY)
and now that (itis) true: for truuy, surety, J am a Goel, or near
kinsman. This word has indeed been rejected by the Masorets
in this place; but perhaps without any good reason for doing so. In
this place, and perhaps in several others, the words &8 and 5278 may
be substituted the one for the other, and the sense will remain per-
fectly the same: e.g. Job xix. 5, pon ETS Saw DISTANT
ro)
“IAW and even (let it be) TRUS, suRE, (that) [have erred, with myself
* ‘This particle is very nearly allied in signification and usage to the Arabic
G aE
w! or wo! , which will occasionally involve a negation, and perhaps always an
S
us
asseveration: but more nearly in derivation to el » which is thought to be
ad
derived from a word, signifying root, origin, &c. In like manner (a> or
,
we
cas? surely, in or by the truth, is used in the Arabic in swearing. See Gol.
Lex. sub. voce. According to Mr. de Sacy, however, this particle is negative
when the verb preceding it implies negation. Gram. Arab. vol. ii. Art. 667.
In the examples following, however, in which he has treated it as a pleonasm,
he seems to me entirely to have mistaken its force, especially as he himself has
See OLA
cited the Arabians in Art. 671. giving it the title of SS » or corroboration.
In every instance given by him, certuinly, surely, most certainly, or the like,
will supply the sense of the passage. See Art. 651—2. 668: i.e. putting the
case either positively, or negatively, some consequence will, or will not, cer-
tainly come to pass, which is a kind of swearing.
5378 LECTURE XIX. TART. 252. 9.
lodges my error. So Is. iv. 4, 5, MM SID)... &e.... TS YOM ON
truLY the Lord shall wash...then shall he create, &c. And in Job
xix. 5, 6, we have both these particles occurring together, either for
the purpose of strengthening the asseveration, or for qualifying both
the prodosis and apodosis found in the context: e.g. "2D DIAS"OS
SAY ADS D FSayy seq by arppiny AAA &e. (as)
SURELY (aS) yé TRULY, OF CONSTANTLY, magnify yourselves, or speak
great things against me, and chastise upon me my reproach ; (so surely)
know ye now, that God hath bent me (down), &c.
9th, The following is an example which must be understood as in-
volving a negation: 2218 SIDS “ON 9D MTD INSATDN MPD YI &e,
(as) the life of Pharaoh (exists), (so) TRuLY shall ye go forth hence, but
ESPECIALLY, TRULY, REALLY, upon the coming in of your brother, Gen.
xlii. 15. That is, as certainly as the one thing exists, the other being
made to appear equally so, no less certain shall your liberation be: but
not before this condition is complied with. On this principle, I think,
every instance in which this particle occurs can be resolved. That it
is redundant, or that it has been omitted by the ellipsis, as affirmed by
Noldius, p. 69, &c. I deny : because, I think, every passage adduced
by him can be accounted for, without having recourse to those suppo-
sitions.
10th, From what has been said on the use and signi-
fications of some of these words, it will be easy to con-
ceive, how they may be used either in their simple or
compound state, for the purpose of connecting together
such parts of a discourse, as the speaker or writer may
wish should be considered in connection with one an-
other: e. g. PUR NN) OVIWT NN 812 he created the
heavens AND the earth, Gen.1. 1. So, in the next verse:
1921 WIN AAW YIN anp (as to) the earth, it was
emptiness AND a vacuity, &c. in which these particles are
said to be Copulatwe; in others they are said to be
Disjunctive (better, Distinctive), Conditional, Causal,
or Conclusive, according to the signification of the pas-
sage in which they are found. The following are a few
examples of each case.
ART. 252, 11. | ON THE SYNTAX. 379
Examples of Copulative Conjunctions.
ning?) “jDR2 MDW AiO wt is a good, tuat
one becomingly eat and drink, &c. Eccl. v. 17;
DIY MaYOY (NOW Nw and he was ruddy wirn
(being) beautiful of eyes, 1 Sam. xvi. 12; 777? WF
JAI Wi) &e. anv he gave it to David, EVEN his
garments AND EVEN To his sword, &c. Ib. xviii. 4.
See also Gen. vil. 23. In many cases there is an apparent excess
in the use of the copulative conjunctions, which has been termed by
the Grammarians qodvovvberos, see Gen. xxv. 34, xlii. 8, Jos. vii. 11,
2 Kings it. 14, Ps. evi. 37, &c. and in the New Testament, John x.
27, 28, 1 Cor. xii. 1, 2, 3, &c. perhaps to excite attention only.
11th, In other instances they are omitted, for the purpose of
exhibiting the order of events, &c. the more closely or more ra-
pidly in succession, as in the Latin, “ Veni, vidi, vici,” &c. See
Exod. xv. 9, Judg. v. 27, 1 Sam. xv. 6, &c. This has been termed
aouvOeroy.
By the former of these distribution is sometimes intimated: as,
IY) TS) both Aiya and Ana, Gen. xxxvi. 24; DID] AIM both chariot
and horse, Ps. \xxvi. 7, &c. See Art. 229. 17. 18.
12th, Examples of Disjunctive (i. e. Distinctive or Distributive) Con-
junctions ; npin 8 * 7S pn 12) and he shall give thee a sign or
a wonder, Deut. xiii. 2; WON S227 IN prrner the prophet on @
priest, Jer. xxill. 33.
This particle, however, is often to be construed as being conjunctive,
adversative, or, conditional. See Noldius sub voce, and Glass. Phil.
Sacr. p. 524, &c., where similar usages are collected from the
New ‘Testament. It is also occasionally omitted by the ellipsis.
* Noldius derives this particle from FTIN velle, i.e. (GFTYS Art. 80. IS and
Art. 93. 8) just as the Latin vel from velle. So in Persian we have Sly
Gv Uy
used in the same signification from opm ly> to desire, wish, &c.
380 LECTURE XIX. [ART. 252. 13.
See 1 Sam. xx. 12, 2 Kings ix. 32, Is. xvii. 6, Ib. xxxvii. 14, Jer.
xi. 19, &c. See Noldius, p. 4.
Examples of Conditional Conjunctions.
13th, MBOM AST .... BYTE Own wh Dan snourp there be fifty
righteous .... milt thou also destroy, &c., Gen. XVI. 24; 2 Yn-ON
sm2bm) ‘2Y ix (or TRULY) thou go mith me, then I nill surely go, Jud.
iv. 8.
14th, To these may be added “WS Lev. iv. 22; “Ws FS 1 Kings
vill. 24, &c. &c. Still it is not to be inferred, that these particles are
always thus to be understood. See Judg. ix. 2, Job vi. 5, 6. 12, vii. 12,
&e. See also Glass. Phil. Sacr. p. 519, &c.—Under this head may
also be arranged the particles OS and SO-DN of asseveration and
swearing, &c. See No. 5, &c. above.
Examples of Causal Conjunctions.
253. These are, for the most part, 13, DON %3, roy E
7, WWE W9, NN, Ww OOM, APY, WwW APY, 127,
WR , 2D WW, for, whereupon, therefore, because, under
(the consideration that), &c.; NiAN N50D &e. that I may
not come, &e., 1 Sam. xxix. 8; TIN 1D" therefore I
hope, Lam. iii. 21; Fw wo? because of thy name,
1 Kings vin. 41, &Xc.
It would be endless, however, to give examples of every case, we
must, therefore, refer the Reader to Noldius, and Glass. p. 533, &c.,
as before.
254. Of the Conclusive conjunctions it will not be
necessary to say any thing. ‘Those which are used as
Causals in one place, may be considered as Conclusive in
another; the position and the context being the only
means by which the peculiar signification and bearing of
these words can be ascertained.
Of the Interjections.
255. These are words, either insignificant in them-
eee
ART, 255. 2. | ON THE SYNTAX. 381
selves: as, 17 17 of oh! iM OF ANA ahah! 8 alas!
MIN alas! or, significant: as, 81* up! 7, m2?, 13?
go to! MAM give! noon profane! And, according to
Schroederus, WS Blessings! Ps. i. 1, 1 Kings x. 8,
Prov. xxix. 18, &c., which are usually pronounced in a
manner expressive of extreaty, aversion, pleasure, pain,
excitation, &c., according to the wish of the Speaker.
Examples: W714 W998) they shall say, O41! Ou! Amos
v. 16; 847 O my brother! Jer. xxii. 18; 11W53 TIS
Awan, our desire! Ps. xxv. 25; DWDI) IN atas, for
them! Is. 11.9; pin MII ALas, for the day! Joeli. 15;
mip T2 co to, do at), 2 Sam. vi. 3; 72 9 Give
(up), GRANT (or the like), leté us descend, Gen. xi. 7;
S83 VD proceed ye, MARK, OBSERVE! Num. xvi. 26;
Pealel mon NavU" ON of at be (so with) thee, ATTEND,
(as) one prospering my journey, Gen. xxiv. 42 ; movom
NON NO anommnan.e! rorpip it! thou shalt not die,
1 Sam. xx.2; MIN 9 mon ABOMINABLE to me! from
(or, as forbidden by) Jehovah, Ib. xxvi. 11.
See also 1 Kings xxi. 3, 2 Sam. xxii. 17, 1 Chron. xi. 19. Glas-
sius, Schroederus, &c. however, supply awn amputabitur, by the
ellipsis in this place; see p. 550. Phil. Sacr. and Schroed. Gram.
Rule 106. Synt.
2. There are a few others, viz. NIN or M38, the same
perhaps with 83; and ‘24 atiend, ‘aes, or the like, "8 woe,
alas; 20 felix! O happy! or the like. Examples:
* Imperat. a 81) surrevit, Schred, R.106. So in Golius, in the third conj.
but in the first, which I would rather take, “‘ Intendit, proposuit sibi ... custo-
divit, servavit, &c.” The meaning will then be, look! observe! preserve !
Hence the phrase os )),: may God preserve thee! Ib.
+ “ Vox dolentis et supplicantis,” says Noldius, which he derives from *1]2
tT?
y¥
as 1 is from 7IV) ... “ notans consolationem, recreationem,”’ as o> with
-
382 LECTURE XIX. [ART. 255. 2.
NIIP MID NBN NI Tw pi Nas O Tehovah !
save Now; O Jehovah! give Now prosperity, Ps.
exvill. 25; NI77D1 AI 7x O Jehovah! remember
now, 2 Kings xx. 3; 127) 77 8 ‘3 ATTEND, my
Lord, we truly came down, &c., Gen. xiii. 20; TION
WwW DIY YU8 woE zo thee, O land, whose king is a
boy, Eccl. x. 16; 4) Ann pRrowary ODS DAI
MD DIN many say of my soul, there 1s no salvation
Jor himin God, Praise! Ps. 1. 3; 2307) SIP mim-ON
2 nop Iw7P MND to Jehovah do I cry, and he answers me
from his holy hill. Praise! Ib. v. 5; FOI WY Ww
2D wpon thy people (is) thy blessing. Praise! + Ib.
v. 9.
PUM v Ge
the Syrians, and a] Aly “ recreet et consoletur te Deus,”’ among the Arabs.
Concord. part. p. 175.
* Those who wish to see the various opinions entertained on the origin and
meaning of this word may consult Noldius, Concord. Part. Anotationes et
Vindicie, num. 1877. For my own part, I believe it to be descended from
the root Lhe he blessed, &c., and used something like the word amen, or
the dorology among ourselves.
+ If the Psalms were originally sung or chanted in the Temple by two
parties in a sort of dialogue, in which the one responded to the other, and both
joined occasionally in a kind of chorus, as has been well supposed and main-
tained by Lowth and others, no word could, perhaps, be more proper than this
for such occasional chorus: and hence perhaps the Aialaaue of the Seventy,
and the pary &e. for ever, of the Chaldee. See Nold. num. 1877., as
above.
ART. 256. ON THE SYNTAX. 383
LECTURE XX.
ON THE COMPOSITION OF SENTENCES, &c., AS POINTED OUT BY
THE INFLUENCE OF THE ACCENTS.
256. After what has been said on the composition of
imcomplex and simple propositions (Art. 226.), in addition
to what has been stated and exemplified on the concord-
ance and government of words, it cannot be necessary to
exemplify our rules by adducing and accounting for com-
plex and compound propositions, as they occur in this
language. We shall, therefore, content ourselves by
shewing, in what way this has been done by the authors
of the accents.
On the Distinctive Powers of the Tonic Accents.
257. It has already been remarked (Art. 69.), that
these accents are supposed to have the power of dividing
sentences into their several members, just as it is the
case with our comma, semicolon, colon, and_ period.
Nothing, I think, can be more likely, than that the
Masorets, or, whoever they were who affixed the vowel
points to the Hebrew text, would apply some system to
it, whereby the mutual dependence of its different parts
upon one another would also be pointed out. It has
been shewn, that these marks (Artt. 122—132.) also
serve to mark the accented syllable in any word, as also
that, which sustains a secondary kind of emphasis.
2d, But, at the same time, as these marks differ considerably from
one another in shape and name, they may also have been invented for
the purpose of pointing out the grammatical relations of words, or,
384 LECTURE XX. [ART. 258. 3.
of sentences one to another, which I believe to be the case. The Jews,
it is true, have attached certain musical notes to each of these marks,
which may be seen in the Bibliotheca Rabbinica of Bartollocci (vol. iv.
p. 427, &c.); or in the second volume of the Hebrew Grammar by
Guarin (page 329, &c.):* but this is not to be wondered at. ‘Lhere
has always existed a predilection for a sort of chanting in divine
worship.—The Mahomedans chant their Koran, and we ourselves
still continue to chant several parts of our ritual in the cathedrals
and collegiate churches.
3d, If then we can suppose, that these accents were intended to
divide the text of Scripture according to its grammatical construction,
we shall very readily see how they would, when set to music, always
produce a sort of harmony. Those, for example, which mark the
greater pauses, would naturally suggest that a sort of cadence should
be made by the Reader; and, the consequence has been, these accents
have so been adapted to music as to produce such cadence. This,
however, has been objected to by some; because, it has been said, the
music so produced is not good. Perhaps so: still this need not
surprise us, because it is very probable, that the accents were not
originally intended for musical notes. Other difficulties, however,
occur when we consider them as marking out the different members
of a discourse like our comma, semicolon, colon, and period: for
here, we cannot always say, why one form is preferred to another, and
particularly when we find a double portion of them, as is the case in
the decalogue. There is, nevertheless, so much probability, that they
were originally intended to point out the connection of the different
members of a period, one with another, and so much apparent uniformity
in their general application in this respect, that we can for the most part
ascertain, how these ancient Commentators understood the Sacred text.
4th, It is not our intention to detain the Learner long on this sub-
ject: we shall merely lay down the general principles as given by some
of the best Writers, with a few examples by way of. illustration,
referring to these authors for further particulars.
5th, Nor should we have ventured on a subject sufficiently un-
popular, and one which Schroederus has entirely omitted, had it not
* Where we also have them in score, so that we can convert any part of the
Hebrew Bible into a Quartett whenever we please !
——
ART. 257. 6. | ON THE ACCENTS. 385
frequently happened, that the Learner, in consulting some of the best
Commentators, is met by statements relating to the accents which he
must be unable to appreciate, without some previous knowledge as to
the principles on which these statements may have been made. Be-
sides, if these marks point out the relation subsisting between the
several members of a period, they will also point out the parallelism :
a subject of no small importance to the Scholar and Critic: and, if
we may believe the statements of the best writers on the subject, they
actually do point out the parallelism; which may serve to shew us,
that this is not quite so modern a discovery as some have been willing
to believe.* Let it be remembered, however, that it is not intended
here to affirm, that these Accents are of divine authority; but only to
recommend them, as affording a kind of commentary of considerable
antiquity and value, and one with which every Scholar ought to be
acquainted.
6th, In considering the nature and application of the
accents, we have nothing to do with the grammatical or
purely formal government of words (Art. 228. 5.). The
logical import of passages is all we can be concerned
with; and this may be considered in two points of view.
The first is, that which respects the construction of
phrases, as, of nouns in immediate or mediate apposition
or construction, or, of verbs with their apparent nomi-
natives, and the like: in all which the connection 1s
considered and represented, as being the closest pos-
sible. The second is, the combination of such phrases,
or sentences, in the construction of periods; and in this the
connection will be considered and represented, as more
or less close or dependent, according to the intention of
the Writer.
7th, For the first of these cases, accents have been
* See also the Preface to Munster’s Bible, ed. 1534, p. 15, line 36. “ Est
denique et hoc peculiare, &c.
cc
386 LECTURE XX. [ART. 257. 8.
adopted, which have been termed Servants or Ministers,
and which are very rarely found in any other situation:
for the second, two systems of accentuation are found to
prevail in the Hebrew Bible: one peculiar to the Books
which are generally termed Prosaic; the other to those
which are said to be Poetical. The poetical Books are,
Job AYN, Proverbs WD, and the Psalms Dyn ;
termed by the Rabbins nox, which is a technical word,
formed out of the initials of the names above mentioned.
All the rest of the Books are said to be Prosaic.
8th, We shall first lay down a few rules for the pro-
saic, and afterwards, for the poetical, books.
258. The following table exhibiting the relative powers,
with the order of consecution, of the several accents,
is taken from a Hebrew Grammar of considerable merit,
which appeared for the third time, at Vienna, in 1810,
by one Jehuda Leb Ben Zeb. This is adapted to the
prosaic Books of the Bible only, and is sufficiently correct
and extensive for our present purpose. Should the
Student wish to pursue this subject to a greater length,
he may consult the elaborate work of Ouseel, presently
to be noticed, the Biblia Accentuata of Daschelius,* or
the “ Doctrina Accentuationis Hebree” by Daniel Wei-
mar,f which last is certainly the best work I have seen
on this subject; I have, therefore, generally followed it.
See the Table of Accents (Art. 61.).
* Lipsiz, 1729. + Lipsie, 1709.
ART. 258. 2. | ON THE ACCENTS. 387
A Table pointing out the Rank, Order, and Powers, of the
different Accents.
DISTINCTIVE. | CONJUNCTIVE. eee EEE
lle ea Small. Greater. Greatest.
Emperor| ¢P)2D} NPI} NMAV! YP Api} Wp Apr
MINK mi id. id. id.
220] AND) NPY as} wp Apr
me Papi id. NOW id. id.
a xmay} PI) an id. we
way om 3.3.8 3A) 4.5.
Npaj any, A.A Plc, Deis
. y : 1d. rd. id.
Dukes ROWS yao fy i f
vate 82177 id. id. id.
diasNhic - Sp pn WD] id.
Counts We md, mn WD) D7.
dRerdn id. id! id. cd
2d, The reader will find considerable difference be-
tween this table, and that given by Ouseel* in his elabo-
rate work on the Hebrew accents. Ouseel’s table 1s
much larger, and contains several instances of the power
and consecution of the accents not to be found here.
Shalshéleth, inbwow for example, with Péstk, is placed
among the subdistinctives, which does not occur at all in
our table. Yerdch also is among the conjunctives, of
which we have not a vestige here. Zaképh gadol, *\p%
* “ Tabula accentuationis,” prefixed to his ‘“ Introductio in accentuationem
Hebreorum prosaicam.” Lugd. Batav. 1715.
G C2
388 LECTURE XX. CART. 258. 3.
bs, and Segolta byaD or snip, are also found among
the greatest distinctives in consecution, to which several
more, found in other places, may be added.
3d, I have not translated the terms employed by the
Hebrew Grammarian, but have used those which ap-
peared to me the most suitable.
4th, It will be perceived, that many of the words are abbreviated :
¢
as 8, for NOTIN | which is the same with Géresh (Art. 63.), the mark for
which is placed above the 8. In every other case, the form of the
“2
accent meant is placed over an initial letter of its name: as, 4) Telisha
Qr . °
Gedéla, (1 Telisha Ketanna, and so of others. In one instance we
have P|PF, i.e. Zakeph gadol and Zakeph katon. The syllable id. is
to shew that those above are to be repeated.
5th, It will not be necessary to explain the different names given
to.the several classes of accents in the tables above, as, Emperors,
Kings, &c.; every one will see, that a greater or less dependence
observed in the relation of phrases or sentences one to another, is
intended to be pointed out by these titles.
6th, It should also be observed, that, in the above table, the accents
greatest in rank, or, in other words, which point out those phrases, &c.
which have the least dependence upon others, are placed uppermost :
and, that those which accompany the closing word of any sentence, or
member of a sentence, are placed at the left side. S2dluk DID, for
example, ranks highest, and is placed in the left hand column. Its
office, therefore, is to close a period.
7th, In the next place, as these leading accents are situated at the
close of a sentence, or of a member of a sentence, and are placed in
the left-hand column of the table, we must look towards the right-
hand for those which should either immediately, or more remotely,
precede them. In this point of view, therefore, Merca 8275, will be
found to attend on, or to precede, Stlluk, as its servant.
8th, The second accent (proceeding downwards) in the left-hand
column, is Athnakh T1208. This accent, therefore, is the next inferior
to Silluk ; and is usually found to close a larger member of a sentence.
To the right of Athnakh we find Minakh 113, in the capacity of a
minister or servant. Athndkh, therefore, is to be considered, as usually
accompanied by Munakh,
9th, In the same manner, proceeding downwards, and again to the
ART. 258. 10..] ON THE ACCENTS. 389
right, we shall find the several accents with their attendants, which are
supposed to mark the members of a sentence, each having a less
dependence on one another than the preceding.
10th, We have now explained the use of the two first columns con-
taining the distinctive, and their several accompanying accents. Let
us now proceed to the other three, containing the small, greater, and
greatest, distinctive accents.
11th, If we can suppose a period to consist of several sentences, or
members of sentences, we can also suppose that each of these will
have a greater or less dependence on one another, with respect to
signification. The Author, from whom our table is taken, is of
opinion (and with him all other writers on this subject agree), that
phrases, considerably removed from the end of a verse or period, have
less dependence on those which immediately follow them, than others
have on those nearer its conclusion. Hence he has supposed, that
the first of these, considered in the capacity of distinctive, will have
a greater dependence on those which immediately follow them, than
others will, which are farther removed from the end of the period, &c.
Hence, these have been termed small, the next greater, and the next,
or last, the greatest, distinctives. Now, most of these, considered as.
distinctives, will be found in the left hand column, their servants or
attendants will be always found there also, in the next, or right-hand.
column, as already explained.
12th, Hence it should seem, that, for the most part, every second
accent, counting from the end of a period or sentence, and proceeding
backwards towards its beginning, will be a distinctive one: and that,
immediately to its right, will be found its attendant or servant. And,
the truth is, this is found to be the case. In the above table,
therefore, we shall have the order of the accents for a very great
variety of cases. That they are not all found to occur, must be cer-
tain, from the consideration, that there are several accents in use
not to be found in this table at all. But, as our limits will not allow us
to enter fully into this subject, we have deemed our table sufficient for
the present. Let us now proceed to our rules and illustrations.
259. Words in apposition or construction, either zmme-
diate or mediate, will be connected by a conjunctive
accent: as, DIN Mim the Lord God, Gen. iii. 1;
DIIAN TAY Abraham's servant, Gen. xxiv. 33; NAS
ANTI one of a thousand, Job ix. 3. So pala eh) TN
the God of him who ts near, &c. Jer. xxi. 23; IY
390 LECTURE XX. LART. 259. 2.
naw) servant and maiden, Gen. xxxii. 6; J7VI2D 773,
mm way, (and) im way, 1. e. in the common roads, Deut.
i. 27 .... JIM AW) @ sword (nay) a sword .... Ezek.
xxi. 14; TNO IND exceedingly, exceedingly, Numb.
xiv. 7; OPIN WA with a mighty hand, Exod. ui. 19.
2d, The same is the case when the construction is
distinctive (Art. 237.); as, DYDD ‘Pi clean (of) hands,
Ps. xxiv. 4; ci hg pure (of ) heart, tb.*
3d, The same holds good when one of the words so
connected occupies the place of an adverb, or specifica-
tive (p. 801. note): DNND IMD sudden fear, Prov.
i. 24; MDD Dinw the grave beneath, Ib. xv. 24.
4th, The numerals are similarly connected with the thing numbered,
as are also particles with the words with which they are to be con-
strued. To which also may be added verbs, when repeated for the
purpose of giving greater emphasis, or when succeeding one another,
in order to vary the sense; or, as found with, or without, the connecting
particles.
5th, The verb is generally connected with its apparent nominative
(Art. 229.), by means of a conjunctive accent: as, DON N72 God
created, Gen. 1. 1; DIAN TAN) and Abram said, Ib. xv. 2.
6th, The word complementary of the signification of a verb
(Art. 240, &c.), or its objective case, is frequently connected with it
in the same way: as, mam or aby they made war, Gen. xiv. 2.
7th, Also when a particle intervenes: as, D/DY qin nalking mith
them, Gen. xviil. 16. There are several exceptions, however, to this
rule.
8th, When more than than two words, immediately following each
other, stand in the same apparent relation to one another, those, which
are more immediately connected together in signification, will have a con-
junctive accent, the others disjunctive ones, according to the relation
in which they are found with the others: as, PUTTS 2) amt
gold and silver, and brass, Exod. xxv. 3. So, opm TIPS) wr
a breast-plate, an ephod, and a robe, Ib. xxvill. 4.
* Makkaph is to be considered as a conjunctive accent here and elsewhere.
The distinctive accent here is a compound (see p. 28.), not found in our table.
ART. 261. 5. | ON THE ACCENTS. 395
Sth, The distinctives are here given according to
their order of precedence: the conjunctives are con-
sidered as having no such order, as before. The dis-
tinctives on which these usually attend, may be found in
the tables of Ouseel and others.
6th, It will be seen from the forms and titles above
given, that several of these accents are mere combinations
of two of those already given (See Art. 62.).
7th, The accents accompanying Soph-pasiik and Péstk
are always found on the tone-syllable.
8th, Of Merca with Mahpak >, Merca is always
under the tone-syllable ; Mahpak is placed on the pre-
ceding syllable, if there be any; if not, it remains on the
same syllable. If, however, the preceding word be con-
nected by Makkaph, or end in a furtive Pathakh, Mah-
pak may then be on its last syllable.
9th, The same holds good with respect to = Merca
with Zarkd, and = Mahpak with Zarka.
10th, In the occurrence of ~— Réviah with Géresh,
Réviah is always on the tone-syllable, and Géresh carried
as nearly to the beginning of the word as possible. But
when no other syllable remains, they are placed together,
iu his name; and 1173 lee ye.
262. It will easily be conceived, that if the dis-
junctives here, as before, have been invested with various
powers for the purpose of dividing and subdividing any
given part of the Biblical context into its several mem-
bers, and thereby to facilitate the discovery of its mean-
ing, the order of consecution of these disjunctives
may be exceedingly numerous, just as the different
modes of construction would require. With the view of
familiarizing the Student with the different powers of
these accents, therefore, tables have been formed, first
giving the order of consecution found among these dis-
396 LECTURE XX. TART. 262. 2.
junctives; and, lastly, of these with their several at-
tendants. When speaking of the prose accents, we laid
down such a table, rather with the view of com-
plying with custom than any thing else. At present we
shall content ourselves with a few examples only, and leave
it to the industry of the Student to construct such tables
for himself, should he think it necessary: believing it to be
quite sufficient to make him acquainted with the principles,
which it is trusted the following examples, in addition to
what has been said, will be sufficient to do.
2d, The following is an abstract of the analysis given
by Ouseel of the first verse of the first Psalm.*
NP NOT FID OYE Mya F277 NPWS CANT
Pave 8D ow? avian Tay
3d, This is to be divided, in the first place, into the two larger divi-
sions indicated by the greater distinctive accents, which are — Suilluk,
and =~ Merca with Mahpak (Art. 261. 3.). We shall have, therefore,
for the first great division :
myn Mzyva 5 ier 85 | Ts BNTT IWS The blessings of the man
who hath not walked in the counsel of the nicked.
4th, In the next place, the division to be taken, according to the
importance of the accents, will be, first, WNT Ws the blessings of
the man. Or, considering these two words as constituting a nomina-
tive absolute, (as to) the blessings of ihe man, which is universally ac-
companied by a larger distinctive accent (Art. 259. 15.). In the next
place, the two words, viz. ws WS will, on account of their close
connection, be connected by a conjunctive accent; and here we have
— Munakh for that purpose (Art. 261. 4.).
5th, The next portion we must take will be B ita 8 ITS who
hath not walked. Here we have first 1WWS with Mahpdk and Pésik,
which is the least disjunctive in our table. And, according to our con-
secution in prose (Art. 259. 14.), when the two last’of the consecutive
* Accentuatio Metrica, c. xvii. § 18—~19, &e.
ART. 262. 6. | ON THE ACCENTS. 397
words are more immediately connected with one another, than either is
with the preceding, the former will have a smaller disjunctive accent.
6th, In the next place, yon nb must be construed together (Art.
259. 3.), they are, therefore, connected by a conjunctive accent.
7th, The next two words are, my KYEZY2 in the counsel of the
nicked, which, from their logical character, must be construed toge-
ther. ‘They are therefore connected by the conjunctive accent Vérakh.
This concludes the first division, or parallel of our sentence.
8th, Let us now Peres to the second.
ee jose
of sinners hath VEL ty ae m ihe RABE Pa sinners hath not re-
sided.
9th, The first larger division of this part of the verse will end at
YY, where we have the next larger distinctive accent. This may
again be subdivided into two smaller ones, the former of which will
end at bite having the distinctive accent — T' shi anterior.
“sntae in construction; and this is teen fe ne apa: accent
— Munakh.
11th, The next phrase, TY 8 is connected in the same way, and
for the same reason.
12th, Our next subdivision will be med awn. Here we have
Révich with Géresh for a distinctive, and Merca for its preceding
conjunctive accent.
13th, In the last place, * 2D Sy will be connected by the con-
junctive accent = Mundkh; and Sillik with Soph-pasik will close the
period.
14th, We do not think it will be necessary to pursue this sub-
ject any further: enough has been said to point out the use of the
accents, and this is all we proposed to do. With regard to the formule
usually given, shewing the consecution of the accents, it may be re-
marked, that, generally speaking, they are sufficient to point out the
way in which this subject is taught; but, when we come to particu-
lars, are very inadequate. Even in the few examples we have given,
our tables fail: and, the truth seems to be, that, as the forms of compo-
sition may be tans so may those of the consecution of the
accents.
FINIS.
Macintosh, Printer,
20, Great New Street, London.
PUBLISHED BY
JAMES DUNCAN,
37, PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON.
4
BIBLIA HEBRAICA, Editio longé Accuratissima. Ab
Evrerarpo Van pER Hooent, V.D.M. In one Large Vol.
ei So Cee) BOB?) price 1/.5s. boards; on fine vellum paper,
It has been the particular object of the Publisher to offer to
the Public a neat and correct copy of the Hebrew Scriptures
at a moderate price; and to ensure every attainable degree of
accuracy, every page has been (independent of the care pre-
viously bestowed upon it) revised four times after the stereotype
plates were cast, by persons familiar with the Hebrew language.
The errors which have been discovered in the edition of Van
der Hooght have in this been carefully corrected; and the
Publisher is determined to avail himself of that security which
stereotype printing alone affords, to guard against their recur-
rence in future.
AN EASY METHOD of ACQUIRING the READING
of HEBREW with the VOWEL-POINTS, according to the
Ancient Practice. Price ls. 6d. on a sheet of drawing paper,
hot-pressed.
This Table includes Three Lessons: containing—l. The
different Alphabets in use among the Jews: 2. The Vowel-
points, and the Rules respecting them: 3. The Letters and
Points, with the Pronunciation: and will be found of great
utility, not only to Parents who superintend the education of
their own children, but also to the Tutor and Young Student,
to whom it opens at one view a concise but comprehensive and
systematic introduction to the Hebrew Language. And even
the man of letters, unacquainted with the Hebrew character
and its readings, will not fail duly to appreciate it as a very
useful Table cf Reference.
TABLES in the SYRIAC and ARABIC LANGUAGES, on
the same plan as the above, price Is. 6d. each.
ELEMENTS OF HEBREW GRAMMAR: to which is
prefixed, a Dissertation on the two modes of Reading, with or
without Points. By CHartes Witrson, D. D., late Professor
of Church History in the University of St. Andrew’s. Fifth
Edition, in One Volume 8vo. Price 10s. 6d.
A GENERAL INTRODUCTION to the STUDY of the
HEBREW SCRIPTURES. With a Critical History of the
Greek and Latin Versions of the Samaritan Pentateuch, and of
the Chaldee Paraphrases. By the Rev. G. Hamitron, Rector
of Killermogh. In one Vol. 8vo., price 7s. 6d. boards.
x”
Published hy James Duncan, 37, Paternoster Row.
A HEBREW, LATIN, and ENGLISH DICTIONARY,
containing all the Hebrew and Chaldee Words used in the Old
Testament, including the Proper Names, arranged under one
Alphabet, the Derivatives referred to their respective Roots,
and the Signification in Latin and English, according to the
best Authorities ; with copious Vocabularies, Latin and Hebrew,
and English and Hebrew. By the Rev. J.S.C.F. Frey, Author
of “ A Hebrew Grammar, &c. &c. In Two Large Vols. 8vo.,
containing nearly 1500 pages, originally published at 4/. 16s.,
now reduced to 1/. 10s.; and fine royal paper, published at,
7d. 4s., reduced to 2/. 2s. ee
J.D. having purchased the whole remaining Copies of this
work, is enabled to make the above reduction.
Second Edition, in One Volume 8vo., price 9s. boards.
THE CLASSICAL STUDENT'S MANUAL; containing
an Index to every Page, Section, and Note, in Matthiew’s Greek
Grammar—Hermann’s Annotations to Vigerus on Idioms—
Bos on Ellipses—Hoogeveen onthe Greek Particles—and Kuster
on the Middle Verb: in which Thucydides, Herodotus, Pindar,
AAschylus, Sophocles, and the four plays of Euripides edited
by Professor Porson, are illustrated and explained. Second
Edition: to which is now added the First Twelve Books of the
Iliad of Homer. By the Rev. W. Cottyer SmiruERs.
Intended for Students in the Universities, and the Higher
Classes in Schools.
In One large Volume, 8vo., Third Edition (Nine Hundred
Pages), price 24s. boards.
A GREEK and ENGLISH LEXICON;; originally a Scrip-
ture Lexicon: and now adapted to the Greek Classics, with a
Greek Grammar prefixed. By Grevittxe Ewine, Minister of
the Gospel, Glasgow.
The first two editions of this Work were adapted to the study
of the Greek Scriptures alone. It is now greatly enlarged.
The Grammar includes all that is necessary for the general
study of the Greek Language; and the Lexicon is sufficiently
copious for the reading of the Classical Authors as well as the
Greek Scriptures.
The GRAMMAR may be had separate, price 7s. boards.
‘H KAINH AIA@HKH, Novum Testamentum Manuale.
Glasgue, ex Prelo Academico. 32mo., price 8s. boards.
“This edition contains the Greek Text only: it follows the
text of Aitton, except in a few instances, in which the re-
ceived readings are supported by the best authorities, and con-
sequently are most to be preferred. It is beautifully printed on
the finest blue-tinted writing paper; it was read six TIMEs,
with the utmost care, in passing through the press, and will be
found unusually accurate. No contractions are used. In point
of size, it is the smallest edition of the Greek Testament ever
printed in this country.” —Hornr’s Introduction to the Critical
Study and Knowledge of the Holy Scriptures, vol, ii. p. 138,
4th edition.
agp
PJ4564 .L48
A — of the Hebrew language,
eton Theological Seminary—Speer Library
hI “ IU
1 1012 lees 3377
aA" =e. ve |